#*kun voice* Li YoNgQiN

[moonbaesic]

Chittaphon Leechaiyapornkul

that's it that's the post

#*kun voice* Li YoNgQiN

[jungwooisms]

hwarang | kun

ACT III - THE END

pairing: qian kun x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, wong yukhei (lucas),  xiao dejun (xiaojun), wong kunhang (hendery), huang renjun, na jaemin, lee donghyuck (haechan), osaki shotaro,  warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, injuries, alcohol, major character death, minor character death, war, historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 43.2k it is important to read the prologue & act i & act ii first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

June 7, 665 – Seonggwa Inn, Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla By the time that the Hwarang finish following King Munmu of Silla to Ungjin, they find themselves holed up in Seonggwa Inn, a relatively spacious lodging, as their king speaks of a treaty between his kingdom and the Tang. With each day, the Hwarang hope that the potential of invading Goguryeo due to their aiding and abetting with the now quelled Baekje forces becomes a reality.

Silla hadn’t lost the conflict with Baekje, without the aid of the Tang the story would be entirely different though. Yet, with their aid, it had begun to expose several rifts in both the Crown and the Hwarang in favor for or against the additional help.

 The recent attack on Taeil’s life, as well as Yongqin’s illness, has confined both of them to staying with Doctor Namekawa Yasuo to treat them. So, while they don’t remain at the newest Hwarang headquarters, they still reside within Ungjin. Although present in spirit, some of the men have begun to notice their rather large absences…

“He’s probably just run off to not have to deal with this shit,” one of the warriors guffaws at the thought of Taeil not returning. A few others around him return the sentiment.

“He’d never do that,” a serious voice responds, you turn to see Jeno looking angrily at the group, “All of you are complaining instead of focusing on the work we have ahead of us.”

Normally such insubordination from a lower wang-do was met with harsh consequences, yet things had changed since coming to Ungjin.

“You all have too much to talk about, go sharpen your swords or train,” Yukhei adds to Jeno’s proclamation.

With grumbled acceptance, several of the Hwarang run off.

“I can see where they’re coming from… They’re tired, I suppose,” Jaehyun huffs out, shaking his head as he watches the other scurry away. “We’ve been sitting here without orders for weeks.”

“True, but I mean… What else are we going to do while Munmu’s off kissing up to the Tang?” Yukhei frowns, moving his head from side to side to crack his joints.

“Don’t give me that bullshit,” Jaehyun retorts, “These men were ready to die for him not too long ago, I’m pretty sure they just want to run out the loyalists and Goguryeo soldiers just like we do.”

“So…” Jeno murmurs, “What’s going to happen now?

“Taeil’s stuck in bed. Even if we wanted to run after the traitors, we’re not going to be able to touch them if we leave too late,” Yukhei sighs, his shoulders slumping. “Future’s looking pretty dark if we’re looking north… Maybe we oughta head to Jinro-dong again…”

“Jinro-dong?” Jaehyun’s brow furrows at the mention of the nightlife district, “Really? In a time like this?”

“Of course you idiot,” Yukhei scoffs, “Times like this are when we need to party hard! Gotta lift our spirits somehow!”

“Huh,” Sungchan, who’d been standing in the courtyard along you all quietly, asks, “Does anyone know where Yuta is? I haven’t seen him around lately…”

“He’s off helping Namekawa,” Jaehyun explains, “We still have a lot of injured men after the last fight.”

You frown, not saying anything. Memories of the peaceful times back in Seorabeol are like a candle flickering in the wind, one breath away from turning it all into smoke. Sometimes you have to ask yourself if they really had happened at all.

June 18, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla When you hear footsteps walking up the entranceway of the inn, you think it’s just another Hwarang returning from town until…

“Hello,” a soft voice greets, “It’s been a while.”

“Oh,” Your eyes widen upon looking up from your work and finding Kim Jungwoo standing before you. “Jungwoo… What brings you here?”

“I've come to discuss a few important matters with Kun, would you mind taking me to him?” He asks as his shoe slowly taps at the gravelly rocks underfoot.

Sometime after you lead him to the Commander’s quarters, murmurs of conversation suddenly become exclamation.

“Are you sure?!” Kun says angrily as you peer into the room.

“Yes,” Jungwoo nods solemnly, eyes trained on the floor, “Supposedly, an urgent matter has arisen, meaning he cannot meet with us.”

“… No.” Kun frowns as he shakes his head, “We need to talk to him. I don’t care how. If we don’t, we’re stuck here. I’ll go.” And with that, he storms towards you, toward the exit. He doesn’t acknowledge you as he goes, only looking as pensive as ever as he leaves the compound.

“Did something happen?” You ask Jungwoo, who’s gaze had risen to watch the Hwarang leave.  

“Kun had planned to meet with a member of the king’s council today, but I’d been informed that the man hadn’t planned on showing up, so I came to notify him.” Jungwoo explains quickly.

The Commander has been attempting to gather council support to try and speed up the process of invasion, however their unwillingness to try and sway the king’s favor has led to them not entertaining Kun’s initiative means.

“Do you think they’re just waiting until Tang makes a call?” You question timidly.

“Whatever the case, the King has instructed me to not make any rash decisions,” Jungwoo hums, “Honestly, in times like these, I am a little envious of Kun as he can do as he pleases… Anyway, I will be leaving now. Please send my regards to everyone.”

“Oh, of course!” You say as you begin to walk with him towards the entrance. “I’m sorry that I couldn’t offer you more courtesy while you were here.”

Shortly after Jungwoo leaves the inn, a familiar figure approaches you to ask a question.

“Is the Commander inside?” Shotaro says as you stop outside the front door.

“Ah,” you shake your head, “You’ve just missed him, he’s stepped out for the time being… Did you have business with him?”

Shotaro’s eyebrows raise in surprise, “Wow, ever since we’ve gotten here, he’s been working non-stop.

“I know… I seriously wonder how he finds the time to sleep, if at all.” As far as you know, Kun should be suffering in agonizing pain during the daytime due to his condition as a Fury. However, seeing him work as tirelessly as he does, one would have no clue of his affliction at all.

“Are you okay, Shotaro? You look a bit more gaunt than usual…”

“Ah… Well… Ever since Minhyung passed away, I’ve had a lot more work to do.” Shotaro smiles sadly, “But he left it to me, and I’ll be damned if I dishonor his memory by messing it up. And seeing how far the Commander’s pushing himself for us, it wouldn’t feel right if I just sat around here all day, you know?”

“I see…” You know exactly how he feels, yet he’s actually in a position to contribute. Unlike Shotaro, there is nothing you can do for Kun, even though you yearn to be involved and do whatever you can to help.

“Well,” Shotaro nods briefly, “I’ve got plenty more to do, so I’ll be on my way.”

“Of course, please be careful.”

“By the way,” he’d begun walking before stopping himself, “There’s been a lot of killers on the street recently, looking to test their swords on a living body. Don’t travel alone, okay?”

Later that night, you’re waiting in the empty common room for the captains to return, sitting idly as your fingers tap atop the table you’re seated at when Na Jaemin comes strolling into the room.

“Evening!” He greets cheerily, moving to come over and sit beside you.

“Hey Jaemin,” you say politely, peering around him to see if anyone else has followed in behind him. “Where’s everyone else?”

“Yukhei and Jaehyun took the men to Jinro-dong, and, if you can believe it, they left me behind to house-sit.” He sighs out, resting his head on his chin, “I’m not their maid, you know. They can’t keep giving me this kind of bitch work… Well, I guess it’s nice that they’re acting like usual. To me, I mean. Like nothing ever changed.” His laugh sounds small in the empty hall.

“That reminds me, do you know where Taeyong is?” You tilt your head inquisitively as you ask. “Did he go out somewhere?”

“Yeah,” Jaemin sits up, nodding his head, “He went out on patrol.”

“Patrol?” You furrow your brow, “But we’re not in Seorabeol any more… No one’s asked us to keep peace in Ungjin…”

His face grows solemn, as if he’s quietly searching for words. “… He’s been acting weird lately. Like, today, soon as the sun went down, he said he was going on patrol. I asked if he wanted me to go with him but he said he’d be just fine on his own.”

“I’ve heard that there’s been a lot of killings at night recently, maybe he’s going out to try to learn about who or what’s causing it?” Taeyong may not have the same authority here that they had in Seorabeol, but they do still work for the Crown. Perhaps Taeyong’s just trying to protect Ungjin, regardless if he was asked to or not.

“…Well, if that’s the deal, then good.” Jaemin doesn’t sound fully convinced.

Just then, the door opens once more and Kun comes inside quietly.

“Good evening, Commander,” you greet him with a small smile.

“You’re still up?” His face is pale, but his tone is sharp. As you watch him, you can see that it looks as if he’s struggling to stand. He shakes slightly as he moves, and you get the feeling that if he were to let his concentration slip, he’d just simply collapse on the floor in front of you.

“Is there anything I can do to help?” You already know his answer, but you can’t help but to ask.

“No,” he shakes his head, “Just stay put, and stop thinking about that.”

Even though everyone else is working themselves thin, barely sleeping or eating, all you can do is sit around, useless.

“Hey… Don’t give me that look,” he says, noting your expression.

“I’m sorry!” You say quickly, only realizing after you’d spoken that you’ve only made things worse. And apologizing makes you sound all the more miserable.

Kun nearly chuckles, “You don’t need to worry about us. Just… go make some tea, alright? Your tea isn’t that bad, I guess.”

“Okay!” You rise to your feet, “I’ll be right back.” Your feet carry you to the kitchen, a slight smile curving along your lips.

You return to the common room some minutes later, a tray with three cups atop it, along with the hot teapot steaming into the night.

“I couldn’t find any yakgwa to go with it… but I was able to sneak a few of Taeil’s old snacks…” You say as you set the tray atop the table.

“It’s alright,” Kun sighs, now sitting down at the table. “I have to get back to work as soon as I drink this anyway.”

“Are you sure you’re going to be alright?” Jaemin frowns worriedly, “You’re a Fury now. You should be sleeping during the day and working at night.”

Kun doesn’t answer, just chooses to sip at his tea for a long drawn-out moment. “When we were leaving Daegaya, Taeil said something to me. He said that if he were the King, even if he only had two hundred men, he would continue to push forward for the legacy of our Kingdom, and if he failed? Gut himself like an honorable warrior.” He huffs out a short laugh, “Now he’s stuck in bed, shot in the shoulder. He’d die for any one of us, and we all know it. Sure, I feel like shit, but that doesn’t mean I get to rest.”

The prospect of handing over a fully-functioning Hwarang back to his friend brings a gleam to his eyes. If the rest of the men are worried because their leader has been wounded by a coward's arrow… Kun is buoyed by the fact that Taeil is still alive, and that he has the courage to do what other leaders will not. He finishes his tea quickly, returning to his room with only perfunctory thanks.

Yesterday, his light had stayed on late into the night. Today, you’re sure, will likely be no different.

“I’ve got an anxious feeling about what’s ahead…” Jaemin says after Kun’s left, “He’s a Fury, but it doesn’t look as if he’s started to feel the bloodlust yet.”

“Bloodlust?”

“When you become a Fury… Something happens to you and, well, sometimes you really, really want to drink blood. Like, you need to,” he explains slowly, “It hurts, and not like how it hurts when Jeong shoves a practice sword into your gut. You want to die, just because that’ll make the pain stop.”

Your mouth hangs open. Kun already looks terrible, if unbearable pain is suddenly added to his already long list of burdens… “Is there any way to do anything about it?”

“Well, if you drink some blood, then it goes away almost immediately, but… only for a while.” Jaemin sighs out, “And the longer you go, the more painful it gets. At first you only need a little blood to feel better, but after a while you need more. And pretty soon you’ll need a whole lot before you feel better again.”

You sit there at a loss for words. Furies truly do seem like the monsters from legends.

“What about you, Jaemin? Are you…?”

“Come on,” he closes his eyes, unable to look at you, “You can’t ask me that.” After this, he makes some manner of excuse and shoots up. He departs from the common room quietly, leaving you alone with your thoughts of the commander. Is he really okay?

Lost in thoughts, you stumble upon something—your father had done research on the Furies. Perhaps he’d left something useful behind at your home… or the one that used to be yours. It’s already too late to visit… And finding an escort will be troublesome enough…

June 25, 665 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla The following day, you leave a neatly written note behind at the inn for anyone who may be curious as to where you’re headed. It had only taken you a week, maybe less, to return to your home on the main roads… And it should take about that time to return.

It seems as if no one’s visited the home in several years, everything covered in a thick layer of dust. You hum to yourself, perusing the shelves and drawers for anything denoting your father’s research on the Furies. Hands brushing off a few books, you scan their contents only for them to reveal some barely legible scribbles that would take you forever to decipher.

‘No…’ You shake your head, this is the least you can do for the Hwarang.

After searching through several more books, you sit on the floor, sighing heavily as your eyes fall to the unkempt floor. Have you been foolish enough to think that this would work? That waltzing in, finding these secret documents and solving the Hwarang’s plague would be easy?

You frown, needing to rid these thoughts. So, you continue to flip through all the books and papers you can lay your hands on. As you skim through a large sheaf of papers a small stak falls onto the floor, dust flying upwards as it lands. It appears to be… some kind of formula?

“Huh?” You murmur, moving to place down the stack in your hands, reaching for the papers at your feet. Studying it, you realize what you’ve found. It details a mismade concoction your father had made after working with the Hwarang that could stop Furies’ bloodlust for a time. Maybe you’ve found something useful after all?

July 1st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla You arrive in Ungjin just as the sun settles beyond the western horizon, and as you enter the Hwarang’s compound, you’re met with Jaemin and Taeyong. Their backs turned to you, you call out to them to make sure they can hear you.

“You’re back?” His brow raises inquisitively, as if he’d not known if you were coming back. “It’s dangerous out there, you know. You shouldn’t be out at night all by yourself.”

“I meant to come back earlier… The roads were… I lost track of time, is all,” You say quickly, trying to change the subject. “Anyway! I have something for you!”

You reach into your bag, procuring the medicine you were able to make from your father’s old supplies.

“What’s this?” Taeyong questions as he looks over the powdery substance.

“It’s medicine to suppress bloodlust! I went back home and found instructions on how to make it,” you nod enthusiastically, “It should make the pain go away, at least for a little while.

His gaze looks from the medicine to you, biting his lip coyly before looking into your eyes, “Thank you, but no. Your gesture is certainly appreciated, but it isn’t needed.”

“Huh?” You say, unable to stop the exclamation from leaving you, “Wait, but… without it…”

“You are not one of us, so to you the bloodlust may seem odd, or wrong.” He gingerly hands the powder back to you, “However, the more one tries to suppress it, the greater the pain becomes. This medicine would be a minor reprieve… nothing more.” Before you can say anything else, he nods to you, “Excuse me. I must leave for patrol. Good night.”

You wonder what he’s to do about his bloodlust without the medicine as you watch him walk briskly into the night. To not only acknowledge but accept this insatiable craving as a part of one’s life seems… beyond you. It’s now that you remember Seulgi’s warning of the Hwarang’s Furies murdering people on the streets to test their strength… Had they been feeding off of innocent lives?

“I’ll take that,” Jaemin says, looking down at the medicine.

“Oh!” You nod, handing it to him, “Of course.” He stuffs it into his pocket before staring at where Taeyong had just disappeared. “I’m going on patrol with him. If he… does anything weird, I’ll stop him. So don’t worry, alright?”

“Alright,” you nod quickly, “I’m counting on you, Jaemin… Is the Commander inside?”

“Yeah,” the Hwarang nods, “he came back earlier this evening, but he locked himself in his room. Not a peep from him since.”

“Oh…” You hum, “I’m going to check on him then.”

Jaemin and you say your quick goodbyes, and you make your way inside of the inn towards Kun’s room. You hope the wave of anxiety you feel is a needless one, but you have a very bad feeling as you call out to him from behind the door of his room.

A knock, “Are you in there? I have something for you…”

Nothing. “You’re about to turn away, assuming that he’s asleep when—

Kun cries out in pain, sounding as if he’s struggling for air.

“Commander—I’m coming in!” You blurt out, opening the door and running inside quickly.

Kun lays bent over his desk at the back of the room, sweat pouring down his face as his teeth squeak horribly as he grits them. His hair lay a stark white, his eyes, when he opens them to look at you, are a harsh crimson.

“Are you okay?!” You say as you rush to his side.

“You idiot.” He groans, “Just shut up.”

“But—”

“This’ll pass… any time now… Don’t get all worked up over nothing! Leave it.” He wraps his arms around his shoulders and squeezes until his knuckles turn white as he glances up at you. His breath comes out in pants as he shivers violently.

It’s Kun’s personality to refuse any show of pain, or any emotion at all—or at least to show as little as possible. For him to be like this…The pain must be unimaginable. Is this the bloodlust that Jaemin spoke of?

You pause, knowing that he needs blood but that’s… A frown as you think of the medicine, but again, Taeyong had said it was a temporary solution. Should you give him your blood, then?

There isn’t any time to think of this any longer. It’s not the best plan, perhaps, but you cannot bear to see him in pain any longer. Besides, this is one way that you can help.

Kun shakes fiercely as you gaze upon him in horror. Saying nothing, you draw the blade at your waist.

“What the hell are you—?!” Kun’s eyes go wide as you slide your finger along the edge of the blade, a bead of thick blood forming over the cut.

“Please drink my blood,” you offer your hand to him, “It’ll make you feel better, right?”

“I can’t do that!” He refutes, his clothes drenched in sweat as he shakes like a leaf in the wind. If he had the strength you’re sure he’d try to knock your hand away.

“Don’t worry about me,” you insist, unable to watch him suffer any longer, “Please…”

Though he’s trying to resist, his eyes are locked on your finger, to the blood dripping to the floor. He balls his fist tightly, but he cannot resist.

“You’re an idiot,” he murmurs, reaching out for your hand, “A girl shouldn’t hurt herself for a man’s sake…” Then, he brings your fingers to his lips, you wince slightly as you feel the soft caress of his tongue on your cut. Then, the gentle pressure of his teeth and lips as he sucks, drawing a few more drops out and into his mouth.

“I’ll be fine,” you promise, “I’m a Demon. I heal quickly.”

“Doesn’t matter,” he frowns, “Demon or not, you’re still a girl.” By now, his breathing has already begun to calm itself; through his hand on your wrist, you can feel him stop shaking as well. A few moments later, his grasp on your wrist loosens and he slips his hand away.

The cut on your finger has already healed. The split in the flesh heals before your very eyes as you stand there quietly, Kun wincing.

“I’m sorry for being so forward…” You apologize, returning your hand to your side.

Kun takes a quiet breath and shakes his head, a sense of calm seems to emerge from him, “This isn’t the time to be pretending that I’m fine. I know that. If I want to make sure that Taeil succeeds, then I don’t have a choice. I have to become a monster.”

Absently, you move your fingers to the wrist he’d taken when he drank your blood. A peculiar feeling lingers on the surface of your skin, almost as if you can still feel his warmth there.

September 10th, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla Even after the events of that fateful night, Kun had pushed himself just as hard as he had before; he still continues to visit the council members whenever he can find the time. Eventually, that work does pay off, and he’s found himself in several meetings with the King’s closest men.

Between his demanding schedule and Fury-related difficulties, you know he must be miserable, but you know that he’s determined to give Taeil his fight. This alone seems to drive him forward.

It’s a cool evening when the doors of the compound open and Moon Taeil walks confidently into the Hwarang’s main hall.

“I apologize for worrying you all,” he smiles, scratching the back of his head.

“Welcome back!” Both Sungchan and Jeno say excitedly, “We’re happy you’re back with us.”

“You flatter me,” Taeil laughs, “But in all seriousness… Thank you. I am truly grateful that I am able to join you all again.” His eyes scan the room of men, nodding as he does, “I’m sure you’re all wondering what’s next. First, we’ll head to Hanseong. We’ve been ordered to take the city.”

Prior to this, you’d heard that Taeil has almost been promoted to a position outside of the Hwarang, while Kun has basically taken over Taeil's old role as Chief.

It’s a momentous honor to have been bestowed, although you can see that some of the men are hesitant to find cause for celebration.

“Hey, Moon,” Yukhei says from his seated position, “Who came up with the idea of us sieging Hanseong?”

“Kim Yong, why?” Taeil looks at him quizzically, “Is that a problem?”

“This guy is rumored to be a pacifist,” Yukhei pushes, “Why does he want us to go to war?”

“Besides,” Jaehyun adds, “I’ve heard that the King is perfectly willing to just go along with whatever the Tang forces want. You don’t think Kim feels the same way?”

Taeil crosses his arms before he speaks, “Wong, Jeong, these are direct orders from the King’s council. It’s true that the King is following the influence of the Tang, but to be fair, he owes them a great amount of debt. However, if we can take Hanseong, then perhaps he’ll see that he won’t need to rely on their aid as much as we drive out Goguryeo. This isn’t just a matter of winning and losing; the men in charge are saying that we are a force skilled and dedicated enough to capture Hanseong.” His voice sharp, domineering, “Isn’t our duty as warriors, then, to give all we can to this fight? Don’t you agree, Yukhei?”

“You’re going to gloss over it like that?” Yukhei scoffs, “I’m a captain of the Hwarang, but I’m not your retainer.”

Looking upset, Taeil moves to speak before Jaehyun interjects, “Yuta… what’s your take on all of this?”

“I will do whatever is commanded of me.” He says simply.

All eyes turn to Kun, who’s been observing the amicable commotion before him quietly, “We should round up more men if we’re to go to war. If we do well in Hanseong, I’m sure the Crown will send us even more men. As far as Kim goes… Doesn’t matter how much he hates war, I’m sure he knows that you cannot avoid it.” His head shakes as he sighs out, “I mean, if he refuses Tang influence at this point, what’s the point of staking out Goguryeo? What’s the point in seeking out revenge?”

“I guess you have a point,” when Kun had put it that way, it seems like Yukhei has nothing more to oppose.

“Shall we head out for the mountains near Hanseong and prepare for night raids?” Taeyong asks.

“The Fury Corps aren’t going this time,” Kun states, “You’re staying here.” 

“Why?” Taeyong frowns.

“If the King does send us reinforcements, I can’t afford to let them see you.” Kun adamantly shakes his head, “There’s going to be significantly more men in Hanseong, you’ll get spotted. Then what’ll be the point of having a secret division?”

“But—!” Taeyong begins to retort until Jaemin stops him.

“The war’s only just begun… We shouldn’t be in a rush.”

You see Kun and Jaemin exchange a quick look. They must have realized how Taeyong would react and spoke of this beforehand. To you, at least, there seems to be a silent agreement.

“Alright then, everyone return to your rooms. We have some time before we leave so make sure you get your affairs in order,” Taeil stands as he addresses the room.

And that’s that. The captains soon leave for their stations, seeking to brief their men and prepare for battle. Only Kun remains behind, mumbling something to himself as he sifts through the massive stacks of paper and maps before him.

“Are you sure it’ll be okay?” You ask timidly as you approach him.

“Hm?” He glances up to you, “What will be okay?”

“This war… It’s not going to just be one battle, is it?” You frown, “Wouldn’t it have been better to take the Fury Corps along?”

“Oh.” He sighs, “That.” The map in hand set down, he glances at it before looking back to you, “Remember what that Sooyoung girl, or whatever her name was, warned us about the Furies killing people?”

“Yes…”

“Well. I think it might’ve been Taeyong.” He says shortly as your mouth flies open.

“What?!”

“The Fury Corps is our ace in the hole,” he continues, ignoring your short outburst, “but I can’t have them murdering people in the streets to satisfy their bloodlust. During the fight in Seorabeol they used silver arrowheads on the Furies, which made them essentially useless. Until we can figure out how to counteract the silver problem, I need to have Taeyong stay here. Jaemin will… keep an eye on him. We also may need them to collect arms for a counterattack.”

A counterattack… Does that mean Kun is planning for a possible loss in Hanseong?

“This next fight is going to be a big one. We probably shouldn’t take you, but… If I leave you here, Donghyuck might decide to try and steal you away again. So, I’m taking you with us, but you need to watch yourself and stay out of trouble.”

With the nervous knot slowly forming in your stomach, you nod, “Okay…”

October 31st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla Today, the Hwarang leave for Hanseong. And as you enter the common room, you take note of the different outfits the men have donned.

“You’re up early,” Yukhei muses, beckoning you over.

“Your clothes…” Your brow furrows at him, “Are you really Yukhei?! What are you wearing?”

“The Commander ordered us to dress in Tang clothing when going into battle from now on,” Yuta explains as you look over his new uniform as well.

You look at the Commander, dressed predominately in black, his new outfit giving him an elegant look. It suits him well, he looks almost as handsome as an actor. You can’t help but stand there and admire him for a moment.

“Something wrong?” Kun asks as he notes your prolonged gaze, “…Do you think I’m wearing it wrong?”

“Hm? Oh. No. No, definitely not.”

He laughs, “You’re strange.”

“Hm,” you shake your head and your eyes fall on Taeil, “Why aren’t you wearing Tang clothes?”

“They’re just so… heavy.” Taeil explains, “I can’t stand how the shoes are made either. I wouldn’t feel like a real warrior dressed like that. I suppose I’m being childish, but that’s my right.”

“You’re fine,” Kun smiles, “It’s not like you’ll be out on the front lines. You just have to act dignified in front of the men. Your presence alone is enough to inspire everyone.”

“You’re going to make me blush,” Taeil sounds flustered before speaking to the men, “Well, let’s go then! To Hanseong!”

November 11th, 665 – The Road North, Kingdom of Silla/Goguryeo And so, the Hwarang are headed north. During the journey, Taeil splits from the main group to visit his hometown somewhere east of the border. And after several days of his absence, the men begin to worry.

“Where is he?” Yukhei notes as the men stop along a rocky path, his eyes looking up the walkway and behind to where they’d come.

“It seems as if the Chief hasn’t caught up with us yet…” Jeno trails off, a frown of worry present on his lips.

“Still? How long is he going to sit around that inn getting drunk?” Yukhei says impatiently.

“Well, he probably hasn’t been home in a while,” Jaehyun snorts, “Probably wants to show off how successful he’s been. Not to mention he probably wants to visit his wife and daughter. He hasn’t seen them in a long time.”

“Show off, huh?” Yukhei shakes his head, “We’re marching to war. You really think this is the time for that shit?”

“He’s gone to see if the rumors of people wanting to join us were true, if they are, he needs to assess their abilities,” Kun interjects. “What better way to get to know new soldiers than by sharing a drink with them?”

“You have a point… but…”

Kun’s eyes narrow and Yukhei looks unsatisfied as the commander mutters to himself, “If we had gotten enough men before we left, then Taeil wouldn’t be out there right now.” His words cut the air like a knife.

The Hwarang had made a name for themselves in Seorabeol, but their notoriety can only carry them so far. You no longer have the luxury of interviewing potential recruits and taking the best ones; now, you need to offer incentives of alcohol and money to attract them. You know Kun would have rather cut off his own arm than stoop this low, but he has no choice.

From down the path, you can see Yuta rearing towards the group atop his horse, stopping shortly before you and leaping off, “Commander, I have something to report—The enemy has called reinforcements to Hanseong.”

“What? How did they know we were coming…” Kun frowns, “We’ve got to relay this to Taeil as soon as possible.”

November 14th, 665 – Outside of Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo It’s some time before the Chief receives the message and returns to the main group of Hwarang. Long enough for the news of the enemy threat to spread and causation for some to panic. Nearly fifteen hundred of the men you’d left Ungjin with desert, reducing your forces to a mere two thousand. Jaehyun and Yukhei seem only more cautious at this, both advising retreat. But Taeil decides that the Hwarang will form up for battle and fight until the bitter end.

Now that the Crown had given him direct orders, he said that there cannot be any hesitance.

“I’ll call in reinforcements from Ungjin,” Kun frowns, “One thing for sure is… We cannot afford to lose this. Make that damn clear to the reinforcements, we can’t afford to have any more deserters.”

“Of course,” Yuta nods, turning and jogging off to join the rest of the men.

After giving his directions to the last of his men, Kun looks to you.

“Go back to Ungjin with someone. This place will turn into a battlefield soon enough, and you should be somewhere safe.” The tone in his voice shows no room for you to question his call.

“I’ll stay here…” You eventually conclude, “I can’t run away to somewhere safe while everyone else is off fighting. I’ll stay here to watch over the Chief until you get back.”

Kun grimaces, “How? You can’t swing a sword to save your life, and I don’t think you’ve got the guts to kill a man. You’re not a soldier.” You’d expected him to say as much, but you’re not going to back down easily.

“It’s true that I’m not very good with a sword, but… I can still be his shield. Any small wounds I sustain will heal quickly enough.”

“Why are you doing this? No one’s asked you to,” Kun stares at you, seeing that your resolve isn’t shaken.

“I know I may be out of line when I say this, but I know that we can’t lose him. Not now.” You insist, “I’m sick and tired of always being protected, I want to help!” You’ve been with them long enough now to see how much Taeil means to Kun and the rest of the Hwarang. If you go back to Ungjin and Taeil dies… Just thinking of it makes a cold chill crawl up your spine.

Kun chews his lip thoughtfully for a moment, and his hard, piercing gaze never seems to drift away from your face. Refusing to break his concentration for a long moment, he sighs.

“If you’re really that serious about this, then I’ve got an order for you,” he crosses his arms, “As a member of the Hwarang.”

“What…?” Your eyebrows shoot up.

“You’re going to guard Taeil personally. Stay by his side and give him anything he asks for.” After awaiting your baffled response he continues, “…And?”

“Yes! Sir!” Without thinking, you straighten up and nod vigorously.

“I will protect him even if it means my li—” Before you can finish, Kum cuts you off with a sharp expression.

“There’s one condition. You can’t die.” That isn’t the sort of thing you’d expect him to say. ‘Be careful’, maybe, but not ‘You can’t die’. “And don’t do anything stupid, like being his shield, or whatever bullshit you were saying. I am not ordering you to die.” He gives you one last pointed look before turning to gaze bitterly at the walls of Hanseong in the distance.

“If our enemy this time turns out to be a bunch of amateurs who’re just hoping to kiss some ass with their king, we might have a chance,” he muses. “If it’s not… That’ll be a different story. I’ll try and get back as fast as I can, but if something happens before I do, I’m counting on you and Yuta to make sure Taeil gets away clean.” Kun then looks back to you, “And none of this shield shit. You escape with him. Die, and I’ll make sure you regret it. Understood?”

You feel a cold sweat on your  back as his words sink their way into your skin. You’d seen others fight for their lives in battle many times, but this is the first that you’d actually be joining. Will you really be able to protect Taeil? Will it even be possible to evade your enemies, let Taeil escape and survive?

Perhaps Kun notices your sudden fear as he lets out a short, bitter laugh, “Hey. Take out your sword.”

“Huh?” You ask, stunned for a moment by the strangeness of his request before complying and unsheathing your blade from its scabbard.

Kun then moves to swiftly remove his from his hip, taking his steel and tapping it against your own. The clear tone they make draws goosebumps from your arms.

“The third rule of O Gye is to trust your friends and treat them sincerely…”

“O- Oh…” You furrow your brow. The O Gye is the set of principles that the Hwarang have followed since their inception, why is he…

“You’re a Hwarang now… Well,” he chuckles, “I suppose you’d be a Wonhwa, wouldn’t you? Regardless, this is proof.”

“Proof of what?” You ask as he smiles gently at you.

“That I’ll come back, that you can trust that I will return and that I can trust that you’ll survive too.” He lowers his blade, slipping it back into its sheath, “So you believe me, and you wait. And don’t die.” His words are confident, and listening to him, you feel as if they somehow have bolstered your spirit tenfold.

As someone who prides himself on being a Hwarang, you know these words, the O Gye, mean a great deal to him. You have to follow through, you can’t break this newly formed promise with him.

“I understand,” you nod, “I will protect the Chief and I will survive.”

November 27th, 665 – Outside of Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo Slowly, the Hwarang find themselves driven into a stalemate. Taeil had done his best to try and tell the men they were to slowly siege the city, to draw them out and have them surrender on their own terms to protect the area around Hanseong from becoming bloodied with battle. Unfortunately, one of the new recruits had cried out that he was a Hwarang and slain a Goguryeo soldier.

That was the spark that set the pile ablaze. The bulk of the opponent’s forces turned out to be men who’d come from the hardened battle lines of Goguyeo’s northern fronts, meaning they’d been in near constant battle with the Tang for years. It quickly becomes stalemated as the days progress. Taeil has no choice now but to retreat until forces from Ungjin arrive.

“We have to go!” You cry out as Taeil emerges from his tent, “If we don’t, you’ll be killed if Goguryeo breaks through our lines!”

“My men are still fighting out there!” He states firmly, “I cannot run away and leave them, I will not leave them behind!”

“Even if we lose this battle now, we have reinforcements coming later, and as long as you’re safe, there’s still hope for the Hwarang—” You insist as you walk with him, “We can regroup and fight back later!” You reach for his hand, pulling him as hard as you can toward the path away from the city.

Taeil looks across the battlefield at his men, hopelessly entrenched in lines that will never break or push through. The smell of death from both allied and enemy corpses stings your noses. Looking at him, you can see tears well up in the corners of his eyes. He lowers his gaze, murmuring something as Yuta returns from the front lines.

Yuta’s steely expression is colored by streaks of mud and grit from the battlefield, “Are you prepared to leave?” He notes the bags around your and Taeil’s backs, “Good. Let’s go.”

“Let’s go quickly…” You say, urging Taeil forward.

“Right…” He sighs out and begins to walk once more.

Running into the nearby forest, you escape into it under the cover of the quickly encroaching night.

“We’ll be in Silla territory soo,” you say as you look at Taeil, “Hang in there.”

“Right…” He sighs once more.

Perhaps it’s because you’ve never seen him lose before, but this is the first time you’ve seen Taeil so… drained.

“I’m sorry for being so, um, forward…” He eventually says, “I let so many of my men die…”

“You can’t beat yourself up over that now.” You say, trying to rid him of the thought, “Like the Commander said, we just don’t have what it takes to beat them right now.” Your words don’t seem to reach him as he continues to stare numbly beyond you.

“Perhaps if someone else were Chief… they might still be alive…”

“Taeil…” You let his name slip from your lips, forgetting the last time you’d referred to him by his name, not his family’s.

“Who’s there?”  Before you’re able to console him any more, you hear a voice coming from the brush that sounds unfamiliar to you. Peeking out, you catch the sight of a Goguryeo soldier and freeze immediately. “I know you heard me.”

Yuta, who’d been staring intently out to where the soldier stands, murmurs, “I’ll buy you some time. Take the Chief and escape.”

Nodding quickly, you and Taeil tiptoe away through the brush, trying your best not to make any noise. Just as soon as you’re able to get Taeil moving at a decent pace, a shadow leaps out before you, barring your way forward.

“I had a feeling you might be here…” The figure of Xiao Dejun murmurs before you. Instinctively, you step backwards, unease writhing in your stomach as you wonder if Lee Donghyuck is nearby.

“Wasn’t he with the Goguryeo army in Seorabeol?” Taeil asks as you slowly nod your head. “Then we can no longer escape… I need to take responsibility for the men I’ve lost. Will you go on without me?”

“What…?” You look at him puzzled, “I can’t do that!”

Dejun had remained silent for the short exchange, but now he speaks up, “Yes, I do work with their forces. But I have been given no orders regarding the Hwarang.” His eyes shift to you, “My only business here is with her.”

“Me?” Your brow furrows as he crosses his arms.

“Donghyuck is… vexed by you, and that commander of yours. He disregards the kingdom’s wishes and does as he pleases, not as he is ordered. Yeon Gaesomun is troubled, to say the least. And for now, we don’t wish to cut our ties with Goguryeo quite yet.” The light in his eyes promises violence, and his body tightens as his hand rests on the hilt of his sword, ready to make good on whatever promise he’d made. With a swift flourish, he relinquishes his blade from its sheath and narrows his eyes at you, “And for that, you must die here.”

With shaky hands, you reach for your blade, already knowing you’re no match for the Demon.

“He’s after me,” you look frantically to Taeil, “Only me. You need to escape!”

“But—!” Taeil says, panic riddling his expression.

“I’ll be fine,” you try to reassure him with a small smile. “The Hwarang need you now more than ever, you can’t abandon them.”

His mouth hangs slack for a moment, speechless. Then he shuts his jaw and draws his sword,“No matter the reason, an honorable warrior cannot run away and leave a woman to fight alone.” Despite your protest, he gets into a fighting stance, slowly closing the distance between Dejun and himself. His face calm and serene, you don’t see any hesitation in his eyes, “My recklessness has seen many of my men to their death, I don’t want it to lead another away.”

You’d seen this same expression on Jisung’s face just before he’d died on Donghyuck’s blade. Taeil’s mind has already been made.

“I am Moon Taeil, Chief of the Hwarang!” With his sword held high, he charges Dejun.

The intense force of their clash sends a shockwave rippling through the air. The clangor of metal rings out and the two part.

“You challenge me knowing that you cannot win, for the sake of someone who cannot defend themselves…” Dejun almost lets a smile creep onto the corner of his lips, “Your actions are worthy of respect.”

Taeil swings at his last word, Dejun sliding away as if he’s made of water. His hand outstretches and grabs the metal of Taeil’s blade, pushing the hilt of it into the Chief’s stomach.

As Taeil groans out, falling towards the ground, Dejun flips him around so that he slams directly onto his back.

“I’ve knocked most of the air out of him. He won’t be able to move for quite some time,” Dejun glances at Taeil writhing on the ground and then looks at you. “You’re next. Do not blame me for what I have to do.”

Raising his blade, he charges at you, kicking you in the stomach as you have no time to dodge his attack. Feeling like your whole body is about to shatter, you endure the pain just a bit more and struggle to your feet.

“You just saw the difference in our power… Are you sure you still want to put up a fight?” He asks, looking at the blade locked tightly in your grip. Noticing that you’re not budging, he nods, “Very well. I’ll humor you, then.”

Giving a huff, you readjust your grip on your sword and rush at Dejun. However, he evades your attack with no effort. You murmur to yourself how you need to change your movements, and begin to swing rapidly at him. Yet, once again, his elegant technique moves him out of the path of your blade. No matter how many times you charge and slash at him, there’s no way you’ll even scathe him. It’s not until his leg moves and kicks your arm with the force of a falling boulder that you move again.

The pain is so immediately overwhelming, you drop your blade to the forest floor, crying out in pain as you fall to the ground. Your knees skim across the dirt, digging into the earth and scraping your skin. Your brain screams at you to move, to fight, but the roar of your surely broken arm drowns it out almost entirely.

“This fight is done,” Dejun says quietly, “Don’t worry, I’ll make it quick.”

Your eyes close as you hear him approach, and a myriad of thoughts runs through you. An apology to Kun, first and foremost, he’d told you to survive and now you’re doing everything but. A tear carves its way down the side of your cheek as you wait for the blow to hit you.

“Giving up so soon?” A voice says calmly, “The Hwarang don’t stop fighting until they’re dead. The only thing on your mind right now should be how you’re going to out-think this idiot.”

That voice…

Your head raises and eyes shoot open just in time to see Kun leap through the air and land a strike with his sword on Dejun’s arm.

“You!” Dejun says as he recoils.

“I thought I’d only be fighting soldiers out here… Guess I’ll be taking care of a Demon, too,” Kun huffs, his white hair glimmering in the moonlight.

“Have you learned nothing since your fight with Donghyuck?” Dejun huffs, “A Fury is a mere echo of a true Demon. No matter how powerful you may think yourself, you cannot defeat us.”

Kun lets out a short laugh, “Never know until you try…”

“Only bloodshed will satisfy you… Very well.” Dejun raises his sword, “I’ll be your opponent.” Giving him a short nod, Dejun once again falls easily into a ready stance.

Kun’s blade flickers through the air, a little more than a glint of silver in the moonlight. Dejun blocks it with his own sword, dodging away from the attack. With his brow furrowed, Kun braces himself for the pushback that Dejun does, using the momentum against the commander to shove him back.

Kun’s face twists as his feet slide back into the dirt. Be it his Fury-born strength or his adrenaline- he surges forward after a split second, charging toward Dejun. His blade leaps forward, burying itself into the Demon’s chest. Blood flies from the gash, splashing across Kun’s face.

A startled noise falls from his mouth and he jerks back, pulling his sword from the wound. No sooner had it been out does the wound begin to close.

“Right…” Kun shakes his head, “You heal quickly, don’t you? It’s straight through the heart or not at all, huh?” His sword shines with the sheen of fresh blood, “I’ve got you figured out, though. I know how you move. You’re tough, but you’re not impossible.”

Drenched in blood, Kun looks more monster than human, his eyes wide and hungry. There’s something terrifying and inhuman about his expression as he whips his sword through the air.

Dejun leaps back, Kun’s sword almost catching his hand as he does so. Jabs and parries, feints and counter-feints… The battle flows between them like a living thing; it changes, moving too fast for any mortal eye to track. Neither of the two men show any sign of tiring as they dodge and attack in ways that would be unthinkable for any human.

Even in the maelstrom of death and violence, you can see Kun smiling.

The smell of blood hangs heavy in the air, and his grin speaks of a Fury’s lust for death.

“I never imagined a Fury could match me in battle…” Dejun murmurs as the two part, “You are unexpected. This power, though, what will you do with it?”

“What?” Kun says, confused. “Protect those I care for. What other reason could there be for wanting power?”

“Those you care for… Would you count Silla among that number?”

“No… This is bigger than the Kingdom. They can’t compare.”

Dejun closes his eyes and stays silent for  a moment. What’s gotten into him? Why had he stopped fighting?

This would be a perfect time to strike, right?

Just as you think to pick up your blade and move toward him, you feel a hand on your shoulder, “Stay back.” Yuta, who you hadn’t heard return, stops you despite your protest. “That Demon no longer thirsts for blood. This battle is over.”

“Demons are not meant to involve themselves in the world of humans,” Dejun states as he opens his eyes to stare at Kun, who’d lowered his sword. “Now that you’ve become a Fury, you belong in the shadows as well.”

“Yeah.” Kun says shortly, “I’m not interested in my name being written in the annals.”

“If you understand that, I shall leave the rest to you.” Dejun shakes his head, “Donghyuck is proud, even for a Demon. If you have indeed humiliated him, I doubt he will ever forgive you. It is unlikely that you will defeat him… However, if there is something you wish to protect, then please… use the powers you’ve been granted to do so.”

In his own stoic way, Kun looks as confused as you feel. Can Dejun be trusted?

“There is one more thing I must tell you…” Dejun warns, “The power of the Furies is not magic, or a gift from the gods. Great strength, lightning speed, and mortal wounds that close themselves… This power was already within you, but had you stayed human you would have spent it in decades, not minutes. You are only borrowing these things.”

Your fingernails dig into your palms at the realization. By ‘borrowing’, does he mean that when Kun taps into the speed and strength of a Fury, he’s picking away at his future—his life?

“So you’re saying that every time I use that stuff, my life gets a little shorter?” Kun asks and Dejun nods. The commander lets out a short laugh, “Makes sense. Seemed too good to be true. Guess it’s only natural that I’d have to trade something for this kind of power.”

“Then I will be on my way…”

“Hold on. I want to ask you something.” Kun stops him before he can run off, “You sure you want to let us get away? If you don’t kill me now, I’m pretty sure I’ll end up killing your friend.”

“If you defeat him, then that was all he amounted to.” Dejun states plainly, “We Demons are not sentimental.” Then, with a last polite nod, he disappears into the night,

With his enemy gone, Kun slumps and takes a long, deep breath.

“Are you alright?” Your voice comes out quietly as you look at him.

“Fine. Where’s Taeil?”

“Over there,” Yuta gestures as Kun runs off toward the Chief.

“Are you okay?” Kun asks as Taeil looks at him wide-eyed, “Are you hurt?”

“Kun… you…” With Kun standing before him, his white hair and red eyes bright in the moonlight, he looks as if he’s seen a ghost. A Fury.

“Oh…” Kun begins but looks away, almost guiltily.

Staring at him a moment before speaking again, Taeil notes in a soft, stunned voice, “Are you… a Fury?”

“Uh, yeah.” Kun admits, “I didn’t have a choice, alright? It was for the Hwarang,”

For a moment, he sounds composed, but as you look closer you can see that he’s desperately avoiding Taeil’s gaze. Not being able to bear looking him in the eye.

Everyone is silent for a moment before the first raindrop hits you, taking you by surprise.

“…It’s starting to rain…” Kun sighs, “We need to get back to Ungjin and reorganize. We need to discuss our next move.”

“Right,” you nod, reaching out to tug at Taeil’s sleeve, “Come on, we need to hurry.” Taeil simply stands there, almost as if he’s forgotten how to walk. “Is something wrong?” It begins to rain harder yet he doesn’t budge.

Rain runs down his cheeks to his chin, or are they tears?

“What…” He murmurs, “What have I been doing…? Today I sent men—men who trusted me—into battle. They died. And I’ve made you,” his gaze flickers to Kun, “a man I’ve known for years, into a Fury. A monster…”

“Taeil…” Kun’s brow furrows at him, “What is this? No one blames you. We were able to take the city because Wen Junhui’s forces showed up— No matter how good of a tactician you are, we couldn’t have taken Hanseong alone.” He shakes his head, “I made bad calls too, and it got Jisung and Minhyung killed. We cannot change the past. What we can do is turn this around and keep fighting with our all. Besides, I don’t regret becoming a Fury.”

He laughs shortly, “Hell, I’m stronger and faster than I ever was, and I can use that to help you out. Nothing could make me happier.”

Rain pours onto their faces. Surely it’s in your imagination, but for a moment, it almost looks as if Kun is crying. Taeil stares at him for a long moment, then finally draws himself together.

“I’m sorry,” Taeil shakes his head with a small smile, “I was being foolish. Forget what I said.” Something in his voice tells you that even he doesn’t quite believe that.

 December 2nd, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla The Hwarang had returned to Ungjin. Rejoining with your friends and the rest of the men who had stayed behind feels bittersweet. Your mind often turns to Taeil, who expectedly remains disconsolate after his first defeat on the battlefield. 

Even after the attempts to rouse him, he spends most of his time in his quarters, moping. The man who had come in only hours after the Hwarang had given up their position in Hanseong, Wen Junhui, would be arriving in Ungjin any day now. His victory over the Goguryeo forces had been a swift undertaking, something of a thorn in the Chief’s side. 

You think of this future meeting as someone brushes past you just as you’re about to begin lighting the lanterns outside of the headquarters. 

“Oh– Yuta? Are you off to work?”

The man gives you a curt nod, “When you have a moment, could you make some tea and bring it to Kun?” Without waiting for a response, he gives you a small smile and scurries off. 

Yuta had never been a talkative man in your presence, or anyone’s, really. Yet he’d lately taken on a taciturn demeanor. Is he still upset by the events from Hanseong…? Or maybe… 

The day after the large posse had returned to Ungjin, you awoke the next morning to Yukhei and JAehyun loitering around the main hall, their gear and belongings tucked away into haphazardly made bags. 

‘We’ve made up our minds’ you recall Yukhei saying, a dimness in his voice that you would have never attributed to him prior to that meeting. ‘Our path isn’t Taeil’s. I don’t think we can follow him anymore.’ 

It was a blurry goodbye after that, and you suspect that you’re not fully over their departure, either. Of course, you’ve only known them for a few years, not the lifetime it seems that they’ve had with the other men. 

Along with their departure, Yongqin had been moved to Sabi, a southern town known for its medicinal practices. Finding his room empty left you feeling bereft as well. 

One by one, the group that you’d come to find as a second family is slowly falling apart. 

As you light the last lantern you sigh to yourself and decide to go make tea, as requested by Yuta. 

The tray remains sturdy in your grasp, even if you can hear the ceramic clinking against itself as you approach the Commander’s door, “Good evening, I’ve brought you tea…” As you speak, you open the door, stopping almost immediately as the gazes of Kun, Jaemin and Taeyong fall onto you. 

Their conversation must’ve been important judging by the hardset lines carved into their expressions. 

“I’m sorry!” You say quickly, “I hadn’t realized that you were in the middle of a meeting.” Feet trailing backwards, you’re almost out of the room when Kun speaks up.

“You can stay.” 

His words halt your movement and Taeyong piques your interest as he looks back to Kun, glaring, “You cannot possibly be serious about this! Why would you halt the augmentation of the Fury Corps?!” 

“I am serious,” Kun’s attention turns from you and once back to his comrade. “I will not have any more men being turned into Furies. Make do with what you have.” 

“I apologize but I cannot support your decision. The Hwarang’s power is at an all time low, even if Silla is standing against Goguryeo and winning– I think that expanding the Fury Corps to keep this fight pushing forward is our only option.” Taeyong’s voice is a strained composure as he grits his teeth and continues, “Jaemin told me that Yukhei and Jaehyun have left. That is a serious blow to us, Kun.”

“You saw what happened in Hanseong– Even if we recruit more, they’ll run off on us. Wasting our effort on pitiful men like that is foolish. Would it not be better to focus on those who have abided by our code? Who understands what it means to be a Hwarang?” 

Jaemin looks to the floor, his shoe gently tapping the boards underneath. He’s been silent since you arrived, but you can clearly see that he isn’t agreeing with Taeyong fully. 

“You make several good points, Taeyong.” Kun frowns, his arms crossing, “If we want increased strength, the best way to attain that is through the Fury Corps.”

“Then why–!” Taeyong begins.

“There’s a problem with the Furies. A big one. We only just found out about it and our source is,” Kun glances at you briefly, “reliable.” With your eyes widening at what’s to come, you can only look at Jaemin's and Taeyong’s faces as he divulges what Dejun had told you. 

“The power of a Fury comes from your… potential. The more you use it, the shorter your life becomes.”

Taeyong’s gaze, usually cool and calculating, goes awry as he processes. From his standing position he falls to his knees, hitting the wood with a thud. A surge of realization of his powerlessness registers within him. 

“Yeah,” Kun’s voice falls into a somber lull, “We shouldn’t be using the Furies unless we really have to.”

After several long moments of silence, Taeyong raises his head to speak, “Then that is yet another reason why the research must continue.” He pushes himself from the floor, brushing off his knees and looking at Kun, “It is a flaw, yes, and a serious one. But with more research… We may find a way to circumvent, or even counteract, it entirely. As a Fury, you should understand.”

“This is not a request, Taeyong. This is an order.” Kun’s arms uncross and seems ready to impose his status over the other, “As your Commander, I am telling you that research on Furies will stop. There will be no more.”

Taeyong says nothing, he just glares at Kun until seconds once again turn into minutes. 

“Let’s go, Taeyong…” Jaemin tries to urge him. When Taeyong turns to him, you can see lines in his face, perhaps proof that his life is already steadily leaving him. 

You step aside to let them leave, and as they open the door, the figure of Taeil is seen passing by in the hall. 

“Oh, Chief,” Jaemin stops, “Were you coming in?”

“No…Uh… No, I’m just out for a walk,” Taeil chuckles, “Just passing by. Don’t mind me.” A few more pleasantries were exchanged and then the sound of three sets of footsteps trail away down the hall. 

You’re reminded of Kun’s presence when he sighs behind you, you spin on your heels and note that he’s looking forlornly out of the small window in his room. 

“I’m sure the tea’s cold by now,” you look at the tray in your hands, “Let me get you a fresh pot.”

“No,” he stops you, gaze broken from the window and now linked to you, “I’m thirsty, cold tea’s perfect.” His hand gingerly reaches out to the tray as you approach and swiftly grabs one of the cups atop it. Kun brings his lips to the porcelain and he sighs, a distant look twinkles in his eyes.  

“He’s right, you know.” Kun says as he sets his empty cup down. “Taeyong’s right. Jaehyun and Yukhei leaving…  It hurt us bad.” His voice shakes almost imperceptibly, his lips curling into a bitter smile, “I had a feeling this might happen someday. It’s our fault for falling short of what they wanted. But damn, we sure have lost a lot of people. Things are undeniably different now.”

You can’t even begin to imagine what’s going through his head. He’s been working from dusk to dawn, has he even had time to grieve anyone properly? Even with the strength that his newfound Fury powers had given him, you can see the horrible toll it’s taken on his body. 

“Kun…” you say softly, “you have to stop.”

“What?” His voice is much rougher than you though, giving you momentary pause.

“I’m only telling you to do what you told Taeyong to do a few moments ago. Don’t use your Fury abilities unless it’s an emergency.” 

“Why should I listen to you?” His expression questioning. 

“Well… You turned into a Fury to save me from Donghyuck, you wouldn’t have had to unl–” 

“This again?” He sighs, “Look, I said I chose to do it. I wasn’t forced.”

A pang reverberates around your ribcage, “When you say things like that, it only makes it worse. If you’re in pain, just say so. Don’t you wish you’d never become a Fury?”  

For a moment, the room is quiet, and then Kun begins to laugh. “I just can’t win with you, can I? You really are from the countryside.” Another chortle before he continues, “I can’t remember if I’ve told you this before– Anyway, I am the adopted son of a sixth rank noble, I hardly knew my birth parents. I was raised with the noble’s son and daughter, Hoseok and Joohyun. You kind of sound like Joohyun. Yongqin’s sister Cheng sounds the same way too. When you go off, it’s like I’m being scolded by my family. Makes me feel like I have to listen to you.”

You’d never heard him speak of his childhood like this before. It’s surreal in a way. 

“If what Dejun told us is true, then as long as I don’t use my Fury powers, I’ll be alright, right?” His lightheartedness flees slightly as he huffs out a puff of air, “If it gets bad I’ll let you know. Stop worrying about me.” 

He’ll likely keep most of his pain to himself– that’s just who he is, but if he really means what he’d said…

“I understand,” you say with a nod, another thought beginning to bubble to the surface. “So… What will happen to the Hwarang now?”  

“Well, we need to get Taeil to snap out of it, but after that, we’re heading north.”

“North? You mean back to…” 

“Yeah, back to Hanseong.” Kun cedes with a sigh, “The Tang forces may have saved our asses up there but it doesn’t mean that they don’t want every man they can take fighting alongside them. Some of Namekawa’s men are stationed there too, hoping to round up some men and head to Bakjak. We’ll try to pincer Pyongyang and take those–” Suddenly, Kun’s body contorts and hunches, his hand grasping at his now heaving chest. His eyes wide in pain, sweat begins to pour from his head and he mutters out through clenched teeth, “Fuck, fuck–!” 

“Kun?” Your mouth lays agape as the hair on his head turns an alabaster white. It’s bloodlust, you’re sure of it. “You need blood…” The sentence isn’t a question, and you react almost instinctively, recalling what you’d done for him before. 

With unsteady hands you reach for the blade at your hip, laying its cool edge on the palm of your hand before his hand grasps around your wrist. Trying to pull away, you're met with a fervent shaking of his head. 

“I’ll do it,” he murmurs, straightening himself to the best of his ability. Kun moves around you, standing behind you as he loosens your collar as the night air hits your neck followed by his fingertips. Seconds later you feel the kiss of a cold blade against your neck before feeling it slide against your skin. You try your best not to wince but the air makes the cut sting. 

The cold is eventually replaced by the warmth of his face as his lips fall onto the cut. Heat raids your body, never before had you been this close to a man before. Nerves make your body twist to try and look at him until Kun’s hands grab your shoulders.

“Don’t look,” his voice low, husky. And you nod, not particularly sure that you want to see him in his Fury state. Those few words– a last, strained defense of his wounded pride– tear at your heart, and a knot gets stuck in your throat. For his sake you try and calm your nerves, although you can still feel your heart racing.

“I’m sorry… I can’t afford to lose it right now.” You’re unsure if he’s saying that to calm himself or calm you. 

“Of course…” Your voice leaves you quietly, “You don’t need to hold back, I want to help in whatever way I can.” 

In the days you watched both Minhyung and Jisung die, you’d find yourself inundated with near tortuous regret. There had been nothing in your power you could do for them. Ever since those fateful days it has been your resolve to help the Hwarang after they’d aided and sheltered you for so long. 

Kun’s grip tightens on your shoulder, and a wave of emotions washes over you– guilt, disappointment, anger, regret– and you soon realize that they are not your own. They’re his. 

Eventually he lets go and steps away from you.

“I’m sorry for doing that…” His hair back to its darkened state, he can’t seem to meet your gaze. 

“It’s nothing,” you insist, adjusting the collar of your outfit that he’d shifted aside, “See? The cut’s already closed up.” Seeing his still-stolid demeanor, you continue, “I’ll be staying here for a while longer so please, if you need anything, just let me know.” 

“So I can just drink your blood whenever?” 

You nod, “You can.”

Kun cracks an eye open and gives you a small chuckle as he shakes his head, “Shouldn’t say things like that. Someone’s gonna use you up and throw you away.” 

You know he’s joking, but there’s a part of you that feels if it were he that used you up then it wouldn’t be that bad. 

April 7th, 666 - Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla Sometime after the incident between Kun and you, you begin to move northward, back to Hanseong. Nearly a month after its liberation from the Goguryeo forces, the Hwarang settled on a private estate just outside of the city’s walls. Taeil had been reluctant to return to the battlefields, but after several conversations with Kun, he’d become convinced otherwise. 

Until the preparations to siege Pyongyang were in place, you would be set up in Hanseong to train. Yuta had gone to a town some ways south to train in Tang weaponry with one of Wen Junhui’s assistants, Hao Chujun. Taeyong and Jaemin had left with the Fury Corps along the naval route to Bakjak as they were not permitted to travel to Hanseong. 

“Do you know where the Chief is?” A voice calls out to you, and you turn to see Jeong Sungchan standing there, his eyes wide. 

“I think he’s reading in his room,” you have to think of when you last saw him. Weight shifting from foot to foot you try not to look concerned, “Is something the matter?” 

“It’s nothing in particular, but…” There’s a peculiar expression on his face you can’t quite grasp. “I can’t shake this worrying feeling like he’s lost the will for us to fight again since the last time we were here…” 

“Hmm…” You purse your lips, “I don’t think that’s the case. I can’t say that he’s completely lost his will to fight.”

Sungchan is hesitant to respond as he stays quiet, eventually speaking again, “You’re probably right, huh? I mean, Commander Qian is still giving his all for him. I’m sure he’ll return to his old self soon enough.” With that, Sungchan quickly scurries off, racing back into the depths of the manor. 

As you watch him, you can’t help but let his words sting you a little. Taeil certainly had lost some of that ambitious fire he’d always had in his eyes as of late. If he wasn’t holed up reading in his room, he’d spend time in solitude out in the garden. Yet, you hold on hope that his confidence had deflated only a little after the battle in Hanseong. 

Prompted by the meeting with Sungchan, you decide to pay the Chief a visit a few hours later. 

“I’ve brought you some tea,” You say quietly as you slide open the door. Taeil sits behind his desk, nose buried in a bound novel, and he greets you with a smile. “What are you reading?” 

“Oh, this is Jemangmaega,” he lowers the book, closing it but saving his place with a scrap piece of parchment. A collection of poems but more critical than that if one reads further into the text. I practically know them by heart now, but with each time I reread them I find I learn something new.”

“When I was younger I wanted to be just like Kim Yushin– he fought for others, more so than just himself,” his grin lasts for a moment before fading, “But I suppose dreaming about being a great commander doesn’t just make you one… I wish I realized that a bit sooner.”

“What are you talking about?” You tilt your head, “You’ve only just begun.” 

“... How’s Kun?” He asks, not seeming to have heard your prior statement. 

“I think he’s in his room writing something.” You state, “Probably writing orders for Yuta, he’s off with Hao Chujun in Kyeju, you know.” 

“Ah…” Taeil sighs, “I keep giving Kun so much to do.”

“I don’t think he’s pushing himself too hard,” you say quickly, “And nothing makes him happier than being able to help you. That’s just the kind of guy he is.” 

Taeil chuckles at that, “You’ve turned out to be quite a page to him, haven’t you? I think you know him quite well by now.” 

“You think so?” You feel your cheeks warm at his certainty. “That’s right… I was supposed to be his page, wasn’t I?”

“To be truthful, I never thought that you’d be with us for this long…” Before you knew it, the two of you had begun to reminisce about your time in Seorabeol. Back then, you never could have guessed where fate would take you. There have been constant challenges, but you thought that’d you’d eventually return to your lives in the capital. 

“I know things will work out. The Commander will get us through this.” 

Taeil responds with a melancholy laugh, “Don’t you think you’re asking quite a bit of him?”

“... What do you mean?”

Before Taeil has any time to answer, the door opens with a snap, Shotaro and Kun briskly walking inside, their faces tense and drawn. 

“We have to go. Now.” Kun says sharply, “The place’s surrounded.” 

“There’s two, maybe three hundred of them out there. We came in through the back so they wouldn’t see us,” Shotaro says solemnly.

“If it were only twenty or thirty then we could take them… But we don’t have time to call Yuta and his men. Guess we’ll have to come up with something here. You two take Taeil and go on ahead,” Kun says quickly. 

“What?!” You speak up, “Not even you can take on that many people. And it’s still daytime…” 

“A majority of the soldiers out there are archers,” Shotaro says as both you and he move toward the door in an effort to block it should Kun try and get out. 

Taeil, having been in quiet contemplation since their arrival, speaks out, “You needn't do that, Kun. I’ll go and have them take me to their headquarters.” 

“What the hell?!” Kun shouts out incredulously, “You might as well just paint a target on your chest!” 

“I won’t introduce myself as Moon Taeil of the Hwarang, of course,” Taeil sighs as he rises to his feet, “I’ll tell them that we’re soldiers here to just secure the location. At any rate, it should buy you enough time to get away.” 

While you and Shotaro lay shocked into silence, Kun doesn’t relent, “Listen to yourself! You really think they’ll let you waltz in and fuck with them like that?! You know how they work! There’s no way in hell that those bastards don’t hate our guts! They won’t believe that shit about us being soldiers for a second!”

“Well, even if I do get captured, I have the status of a Lord. They can’t just kill me.” 

“You have got to be kidding me.” Kun’s face is a near vibrant red at the moment, “You think they’ll give a shit about a title you have from the Kingdom they’re against?! You go out there, you’re signing your death warrant. You really think I’ll just let you do that?!” 

No matter what the Commander yells at him, Taeil’s expression doesn’t change. 

“I’ve made my decision. Nothing you say can convince me otherwise.” 

Kuns fists begin to shake by his sides. In all your time with the Hwarang, you’ve never seen either of them act like this before. 

“No! No! What the hell are the Hwarang going to do without their Chief?!” Kun shouts, “You’re coming with me even if I have to knock you out and drag you along! You have a responsibility to the Hwarang! You don’t get to die and run away from that!” He’s screaming at Taeil, his white knuckled fists now gripping the front of the other man’s robes and his eyes red with held-back tears.

Yet his fury and pleas break across Taeil’s impassable calm like wind against a mountain. 

“This is a direct order!” Taeil says sternly as Kun’s hands drop from his robes, “You will go to Kyeju to meet with the rest of our men. The two of you will accompany him as well.” Kun stumbles back a step or two at the force of Taeil’s voice. 

“You’re going to tell me what to do…? What the hell is this?!” Kun asks near incredulously. 

“Aren’t your Chief’s orders absolute?” Taeil asks with a tilt of his head, “You’ve ordered men to kill themselves, or to become Furies from disobeying that rule. Are you somehow an exception? Is that the sort of warrior you want to be?” 

Kun says nothing. 

As long as he’d been commander, Kun strove to lead by example. He lived by the O Gye and demanded that others do likewise to groom the Hwarang into true warriors. There’s no doubt Taeil had counted on that fact. He meant to do it to keep Kun alive.

Taeil looks to you and Shotaro, stepping a few paces in your direction, “I want you to leave with Kun. If you take too long, they’ll attack and my surrender will mean nothing.” He gives you two a small shove to get you moving, Shotaro turns to look at Kun.

“Commander… Let’s go.” 

He only stands, chewing his lip, until Taeil lays his hands on his friend’s shoulders, giving him a warm smile. 

“Hey, Kun… Let it go. Let me go.” Taeil says softly, “You’ve run yourself ragged trying to earn me the status and fame that I wanted. You even turned yourself into a Fury… It kills me to see you do all of these things for me… I’m not worth it.”

Kun doesn’t meet his friend’s gaze, he instead blinks rapidly, trying to hold back tears, and stares desperately at the floor. Then he swallows the lump in his throat, his voice tight and strained when he speaks, “I– If I do this, then what have I been fighting for all these years? I became a warrior, served our Kingdom… I won numerous battles and killed men… All because I thought you’d be there at the end with all of us…” 

“I’m sorry,” Taeil’s voice reflects the softness of the other’s, “I brought you here, I did this to you. Thinking back on it, it was all sort of a dream. We weren’t real warriors yet but we strapped on our swords and went to work.” His voice is warm, but that seems to make it even more difficult for Kun to let go.

The room is still before the commander speaks, “Osaki… Send a message to our remaining men. We need to secure an escape route.” His gaze then falls to you, “Stay here. Once we’re ready, I’ll come get you.” 

“Okay,” you nod quickly. And with that, Shotaro and Kun leave, and Taeil and you are alone once more. 

“Take this with you,” Taeil says as he begins to reach for something in his robes. After a moment, he hands you a small cloth bag, it clinks as it rests in your palm. 

“What is it?”

“Money. To help you escape. I wasn’t able to do anything for you. This is a token of my appreciation, for all you’ve done for us. Please, take it.” His warmth still lingers on the fabric of the bag, you feel a lump rise in your throat. “You still have time. I’ll tell Kun. Once you get away, go somewhere safe and look for Doctor Namekawa… Just forget you had anything to do with us. Marry someone you love and live a peaceful life. Find happiness.” 

While you appreciate his kind gestures you cannot find it within yourself to follow his guidance, “No, I won’t run. I want to go with Kun. I’m… I’m his page…” Your teeth catch your lip, afraid that if you say any more you may cry. Instead, you look up to Taeil and do your best to smile. 

His eyes are warm as he looks to you, “Our Commander’s been blessed with some great friends. I’ll be counting on you, then. Take care of him for me.” 

Eventually, Kun and Shotaro return. They gather you and the rest of the men in an outer courtyard on the premises, including Jeno and Sungchan. 

“What?!” Jeno shouts, “We’re going to leave Chief behind? Is that true Commander?!” 

“Chief’s orders,” Kun says sternly, “You’re all going to escape this place and I’ll be right behind you.” 

“If he just surrenders, then his cover will be blown immediately!” Jeno insists, “At least here, I could remain by his si–” 

“I said, ‘Chief’s orders’! Or do you have shit in your ears?!” Kun snaps, “Don’t you dare put Taeil’s efforts in vain with your stupid suggestions!”

Jeno looks as if he wants to respond, but instead he looks down as he tightens his fists and shakes. 

Just then, Sungchan says, “I’m going to stay. I understand they’re the Chief’s orders. However, as a warrior of the Hwarang, I cannot abandon the Chief.” 

“Jeong Sungchan!” Shotaro raises his voice, only to be interjected. 

 “Sungchan you bastard…” Kun frowns, “You really want this steel in your gut right now?”

“No! It’s not like that,” Sungchan’s eyes burn with intense vigor as he glares back at Kun. “I understand you, more than anyone else, want to remain here. But the Chief entrusted the Hwarang to you, which is why you can’t… So that’s why I want to protect him in your stead, Commander!” 

Kun curls his lip, staring at him for a long moment before unsheathing his blade at his hip. 

“Commander!” As the exclamation leaves Shotaro’s mouth, Kun points the tip of the sword toward Sungchan’s throat.

“You said you’ll protect the Chief, right?”

Sweat trickles down Sungchan’s reddened cheeks, “...Yes, I will.” 

“Then you’d better keep your goddamn word. No matter what, your eyes don’t leave Moon, got it?” 

Sungchan’s eyes grow wide, trembling for a moment but soon after brim with a fiery determination, “Yes, sir! I, Jeong Sungchan, promise to protect the Chief's life, no matter the cost!” 

It seems as if he’s convinced Kun, as the latter returns his blade to its sheath. “Let’s go.” His words are curt as he nods quikly before leaving the residence behind. 

In a short while, Taeil and Sungchan will hand their terms of surrender to the Goguryeo army. You find yourself looking back over your shoulder many times as you run. Soon, Taeil will surrender to his enemies. Perhaps, you think time and time again, if you turn around now, you can rescue him, 

Shotaro seems to feel the same way, but Kun never once turns back. 

April 7th, 666 – The Road South, Kingdom of Silla You run and run through the forest to Kyeju. It doesn’t matter how quickly you get there– it’s not soon enough to bring back an army to save Taeil. 

“Are you alright?” Shotaro asks as he falls in step by your side, “We can rest if you’re tired.” 

“I’m alright,” you shake your head, “I can keep going.” 

Kun, with his back to you, says nothing, but you can feel each pained step he takes away from his friend. 

The sun begins to dip towards the western horizon and night starts to fall when your party is stopped by a group of Goguryeo soldiers. 

“You there! Stop!” One of them commands, his hand already hovering over the hilt of his sword, “Where are you headed?” 

Kun only frowns and makes his way to walk past the soldier. 

“He said to stop!” Another soldier yells out, “Goddamn it, are you more of those Silla guys?”

“Hold,” the first man pauses, “I’ve seen him before. You’re that bastard from the Hwarang, aren’t you?”

“You mean those guys that offed Suh?” The soldiers around them begin to scramble for their weapons.

Unfortunately, they aren’t fast enough for Kun. His hair snaps white and he shoots forward, toward the soldiers, sword in hand. His strikes are so fast and elegant that the eye barely even has time to perceive what happened before the two men fall dead. 

“Wrong day to fuck with me, boys.” 

A volley of soldiers rush forward, as well as a few arrows loosened in his direction. One of the arrows pierces his shoulder and Kun cries out, swiftly pulling it from the wound. It immediately begins to close as he smirks at them, “That’s how it feels getting shot, huh? Not as bad as I thought.” His gaze sharpens on those left before him, “This is nothing! This doesn’t even come close to what Taeil’s going through!” 

Kun launches himself at the nearest of the soldiers, his sword already in motion and his face twisted by grief and anger. Even without Fury powers, Kun and Shotaro could have made easy work of this small troop of men… But rage and frustration boiling over since you’d left Taeil had erupted in a torrent of violence. 

“You can’t use your powers–!” You call out to Kun, trying to stop his relentless assault. 

“Shut up!” He snarls at you, “Stay out of this!” 

He knows what he’s doing, but he’s far past caring. Kun leaps from tree to tree, his sword flashing like lightning. Every time it moves, a life ends. Rage, anguish and an unrestrained thirst for blood radiates from him like heat from a blaze from a fire. Blood soaks his face and hands. Still, he cuts and cuts, never satisfied. 

You see Shotaro and Jeno sweating as they stand silently, watching Kun fight as a Fury. They’re mesmerized and you can hardly blame them. Every swing of his sword spills a man to the dirt. He looks like a monster. At last, the only man left alive is Kun himself. 

Silence falls over the forest once more, save for the birds that have restarted their chatter, 

“Shotaro… Jeno… Go see if there’s any more of them.” Desperate to distance themselves from the bloodshed, the two depart quickly after Kun’s orders. “You. Go with them.” 

Normally you would do as he’d asked and followed after them but now… 

“What?” Kun turns to you, noticing your hesitation, “I gave you an order.” His words cut like a knife but you don’t move. 

“I’m sorry, but I can’t do that.”

“I am your commanding officer. I am giving you an order.” He sounds angry, as he oft does, but just behind that there's a deep, miserable sadness. If he doesn’t stay angry, you feel, he’d probably be crying.

“I promise I won’t get in your way, but please, just let me stay here with you.” There’s nothing you can do for him, but you cannot bear to leave him alone. 

He turns his back to you– to everything, his face hidden. You have no idea what expression he’s wearing.

You search yourself for something to say, something to ease him, but you find nothing within yourself to better him. And, after a few moments, he speaks.

“What the hell did I do… all of this for?” 

How can this be the fate dealt by the god for two men so honest and determined? It just doesn’t seem fair…

“Was it just so I could give Taeil to those bastards? I busted my ass to give my friend to the enemy?” His voice trembles with every word, the weight of it all still resting heavily on him, “I was going to make him important. Help him carry himself to his family’s standards. I wanted to see him fight in the kind of battles they wrote about. Like a true warrior… I wanted to see just how far the owner of a school in the sticks could go.” 

You’re not even sure if he knows that you’re still here. If he does, it seems as if he no longer cares.  

“I thought we were shooting for the same dream. Long as it was for him, I felt like I could do anything. So what the hell am I doing here, alive, while he’s… he’s god knows where?! After all that self-righteous preaching, what did I do?! I turned around and left him to the wolves! He… I’m just like the king. Soon as things get dangerous, I turn tail and leave better men to deal with the mess! God damn it! Why am I alive?!”

It tears you apart to hear him lament his inner machinations aloud. You find yourself stepping forward, wrapping your arms around him, pressing your face against his uniform. 

“Taeil said… I mean, after you’d left, I told him that you’d figure it out,” you say softly,  “and he said that I was asking too much of you.” Tears run hot down your cheeks, “It’s not your fault, you can’t blame yourself… He didn’t want you to die. That’s why you’re still alive. Just… Please don’t blame yourself.”

 Kun listens, saying nothing. Or perhaps he didn’t even hear you. Why do words feel so powerless when you need them the most? What good are they if you cannot comfort someone at their lowest? 

“He did this to save me… but what the hell am I supposed to do without Moon Taeil of the Hwarang? The dream of helping him is what brought me here in the first place.” Kun’s shoulders shake, “Now that dream has left me… I don’t have anything left. I’m nothing.” He gives a short bark of humorless laughter, “Seriously Moon… Stop giving me all the shitty jobs.”  His voice chokes on a sob and falls silent. 

April 10, 666 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla The days that followed were somber, and eventually your group returned to Ungjin before regrouping with Yuta in Kyeju. When you arrived in the city, Jeno mentioned he was going to visit a friend of his, and left. However, you think Jeno’s just trying to be considerate and give Kun some space.

Arriving back at the compound, you’re shocked to see none other than Li Yongqin waiting for you.

“Evening,” he says as you walk inside, “Who would’ve thought you guys would ever come to visit me?”

“Nevermind that you should be in Sabi– why are you up this late? Just look at you,” Kun frowns, crossing his arms.

“I’m a bit tired of sleeping alone, you know?” Yongqin muses, “At this rate, I’ll never get a chance to shine again… Seems to me it’s time to join you guys.” 

“The hell you won’t! What makes you think you can hold a sword with that body?” Kuns words cut through the air.

“Come on, cut me some slack.” Yongqin snorts, “I’ve been feeling great lately. So…” As he begins his next statement, he turns to cough into his fist. The fit doesn’t relent until he crouches on the floor, coughing painfully with strained breaths. 

“Are you alright, Yongqin?” You ask, rubbing his back as he tries to catch his breath. Under your palm, you can feel the bones of his back. At first glance, he may look to be improving but he’s lost a lot of weight and it’s almost painful to look at. 

“See?” Kun turns to look down at him, “What’d I tell you? Why don’t you admit you’re sick for once, and take it easy?”

Yongqin bites his lips out of frustration, grimacing at the thought of admitting his weakness, he sighs deeply and rises to his feet, “So, how’s Moon doing? Too busy to visit me again?” 

You flinch at the mention of Taeil, which causes your body to jolt unexpectedly. Kun, however, is unfazed by the question. 

“He’s a little preoccupied at the moment.” 

“How’s his shoulder doing? Isn’t it tough for him to be up and about?”

“That was a while ago. He’s fine.” Kun says, “He may not be able to wield his sword but, well, with his promotion, it’s not like he’s charging from the front lines anyway.” 

“Spare me,” Yongqin waves his hand, “You’re bragging about his promotion like it’s you out there and not him. But… that’s good to hear. Taeil’s okay then.” The Hwarang seems to have eased down. It looks as if Taeil’s well-being is the only thing keeping Yongqin invested in his own health. 

“Look,” Kun states, “I promise I’ll bring him next time. Just sit tight, okay?”

“Sure, I’ll wait. But I’m not holding my breath. You’ve always been a bad liar, Kun.”

“Who the hell are you calling a liar? I’ve never lied to you about Taeil.” The tone of their conversation sounds like their usual banter, but you can understand why Jeno may have been inclined to step out. You begin to gather that there’s much for them to reminisce on, so you take the chance to sneak outside. 

Cool nighttime air whispers against your cheeks as you gaze to the stars hanging above. It seems like tonight would be the final farewell between Kun and Yongqin, you need to let them have this moment to themselves. Being an outside observer to the intimacy of their conversation tells you this, at least. 

In the midst of your contemplation, you think you see Jeno speaking to someone in the distance. You know he said he’d been planning to meet a friend in Ungjin but you don’t recognize the figure. 

“Are you sure about that? You’re the Commander’s acquaintance, aren’t you?” You hear Jeno speak to him as you slowly approach. “You’re already here so why don’t you stop by?” 

“I think I’ll pass on that.” The person says coolly.

“Why?” Jeno questions further, “This may be the last time we step foot in Ungjin.”

“Wasn’t Taeil just arrested by Goguryeo soldiers in Hanseong?” The person murmurs, “I don’t know what I’d say to Kun in a time like this, knowing what everyone’s been through and all.”

Jeno’s head suddenly hangs, as the words from the conversation penetrate and resound around his head, “You don’t need to mince words. Just, you know, tell them how you feel… talk about what you’ve been up to, or what you’ve seen. Isn’t that good enough?” 

“Jeno…”  For a brief moment, the stranger looks unsettled by the suggestion. However, he takes a deep breath and continues, “But I was never one of the Hwarang. I just happened to be around when the newer group was established.”

“Then why did you paint them as Furies?” Jeno frowns, “If they didn’t matter to you anymore, then you wouldn’t go through the trouble of drawing that? It’s not like it’d make you any money.”

“Well…” The other stops.

“So, are you absolutely sure there’s nothing you’d want to say to the Commander, Colonel or Jaemin? You’re positive?” Jeno lists off the names of the Hwarang, only making you question the stranger yourself. Is he a friend of theirs? Perhaps Jeno had met with him to bring him to your side?

Whatever the case, the stranger’s countenance gives the impression that he’s reluctant to be involved at all. 

As you’re thinking of this person, a voice speaks up behind you, “You should go and talk to Yongqin while you can.” 

Kun. You hadn’t heard the door open, much less his footsteps approach.

“S- Sure,” you say quickly, spinning on your heels and walking into the house from the darkness. 

After making smalltalk for a while, Kun rejoins you and begins to say his farewell to him, “We’ll see you later, Li. Don’t trouble Namekawa too much.”

“I never do,” Yongqin shakes his head, “The man just worries too much.”

“Forever the smartass,” Kun rolls his eyes jokingly, “Whatever the case, we’ll be on our way soon.”

“Leaving already?” Yongqin asks, eyebrows raised. 

“Goodnight, Yongqin. Please take care of yourself.” You say with a small smile and begin to turn to leave.

“Hey,” Yongqin calls out to you, “Can I have a word?” He beckons you over with a gentle gesture so you walk to him. 

“Is something the matter?” 

“I know he won’t admit it, but Kun looks like shit. Are things at the front going bad?” 

If you speak too carelessly you can give away information– information that can easily hurt Yongqin, so you fall silent. 

“Here’s the thing: I don’t like that man at all, and quite frankly, I can’t give a rat’s ass what happens to him. But… I want you to be by his side. If he goes down, then the Hwarang go down with him.”

“I understand…” you murmur out before Kun butts in.

“Are we done here? Time to get going.” 

He doesn’t ask a thing about your conversation as he begins walking briskly ahead of you on the darkened streets. Watching him make that promise of bringing Taeil the next time he’d see Yongqin… it seems as though that burden of promise, and the potential of it being left unfulfilled, weighs heavily on him.

Suddenly, he stops in his tracks.

“You should go on ahead and go home.”

“Huh?” You pause yourself, “What do you mean? What do you plan on doing?”

“I’m going to speak to the Goguryeo forces in Hanseong,” he turns to face you, “And I’m going to personally ask them to release Taeil.”

“You’re going now?!” You sputter, “I thought you said they can’t be reasoned with?”

“If we can’t get results, then I can’t say we’ve done everything we could.”

“It’s not safe for you to go there! They could capture you at any moment!” Frantic energy runs in your voice, “If they take you like they did Taeil…” 

Yesterday this idea would have been preposterous to Kun, what happened to mak him change his mind?

“So you’re telling me to my face that this decision is a mistake?” 

“No… No I’m not saying that.”

“Then what is it?” He snaps, “If you have something to say, just say it.” 

“Stay strong.” You raise your voice, nearly shocking yourself,  “You of all people know what needs to be done.”

“I decide on what I do. It’s not your place to say.” 

“I understand, but what will you do if you’re arrested by the Goguryeo army?”

“So what if I am?” He frowns, crossing his arms, “Sitting here and talking about ‘what-ifs’ isn’t any better than taking action.  

“So you’re going to let Minhyung and Jisung’s sacrifices go in vain?!”

“What do you know?!” He explodes, and you have to stop yourself from taking a step back.

“E- Even I can understand a little!” You refuse to let your convictions amount to nothing. With a heavy heart you continue, “I was there when they gave their lives for… I saw it with my own eyes. Both of them loved the Hwarang. And they trusted their commander! If either of them saw what I am now, it would crush them.” 

“Crush them, huh?” At last, he seems to let go of a bit of the tension in his shoulders. They relax slightly as he looks off into the distance. “Do you believe it to be the survivor’s duty to carry on the will of the deceased?”

“I think so.”At least that’s what it feels as if you’re doing now. The reason you can’t back down, even if Kun feels compelled to yell at you, is because you know Jisung and Minhyung would have done the same. 

“Damn, guess this means all I have to look forward to in life is shouldering more burdens until I die.”

“Kun…”

He shakes his head and gives you a short, melancholic smile, “Sorry for yelling at you. You were right. You did know. There’s no point in me being irrational when our situation is already grim, huh? It wouldn;t look too great if there’s nowhere for the Chief to go when he gets out eventually.”

With that last statement, you see that he’s finally regained his composure, and you respond in kind by calming down, “I know I told you to stay strong, but please, don’t push yourself too hard. I noticed you’ve been running around during both day and night time.”

“Where do you have all this time to show concern for every person you meet?” Kun sighs out, “Once we leave here, if you so much as collapse on the way out, I’m leaving your ass behind. Brace yourself.” 

“Okay!”

You’re happy to have gotten through to him, even if it was just a courteous gesture. He begins walking again and you run right behind him, doing your best to keep up with the swiftness of his pace.  

At the entrance of the city, you regroup with Jeno and Shotaro, the two greeting you quickly. 

“Commander, I need to speak with you urgently,” Jeno says, looking frigid as he approaches Kun. “Please let me petition for the clemency of both the Chief and Sungchan! Surely the Goguryeo forces understand what killing Moon would detail. If we work hard, I’m sure we can find people to cooperate with us. So please–”

 Kun stares at Jeno, who’s bowed over in a sign of respect, and seems to take his suggestion into consideration. 

“...You beat me to it. I was going to say the same thing.”

“Commander! Then–”

“Osaki, I have a favor to ask you. Take her and head to Kyeju first.”

“What?!” You gasp out.

“We’re going to continue our fight for Taeil’s freedom. Your presence here is only a burden for us right now.” Earlier he’d given you the same instruction, albeit with a far more aggressive tone. But this time you can tell thoughtful consideration went into it. 

You’re worried, of course. But there isn’t anything more you can argue. 

“This is an order from your commander. We’ll meet up again soon so get out of here and stay sharp.” 

It felt strange to part from them, as if some piece of yourself is now missing– but you don’t have much time to harp on it as you meet up with other troops in Kyeju. 

You’re worried about what’s to become of Taeil, but perhaps because the situation seems grim, no one has brought it up.

May 1st, 666 – Outside of Kyeju, Kingdom of Silla Kun soon rejoined Shotaro and you as you resided in Kyeju, only after he’d settled his affairs for Taeil’s freedom in Ungjin first. Yuta had taken the main body of Hwarang soldiers to Koksan and then onto Bakjak to keep an eye on the Fury Corps. You have just left the small town with Wen Junhui’s men to hop onto the route to follow after him. 

After a while, you manage to meet up with some allied soldiers, but many of them look at you with a strange mixture of curiosity and fear. It’s unpleasant, to say the least.

“Those are the Hwarang, right? The murderers?”

“Yeah, noble dogs that  kill men for no reason– even their comrades! Best not to look at them for too long. You never know what might set them off.”

It isn’t difficult to hear the gossip that floats through the ranks. 

“They sound like a bunch of old wives spinning those stories!” Shotaro scoffs, turning to look at Kun, “Want me to keep them quiet for you?”

“No.” Kun shakes his head, sounding more irritated than usual, “They want to talk, let them talk.” 

“Are you alright?” You ask as you walk along, “You don’t look too well.”

“I’m fine.” He says but he clearly seems otherwise. His skin is a pale color, almost blue, and he looks exhausted. Marching during the day is hardly a pleasant walk for a Fury. 

Taeil is clearly at the forefront of his mind. And although you hate to admit it, he has a good reason to be on edge. 

“Excuse me, could you let me pass? Ah– apologies, oops…” Someone moves towards you from the back of the column of men, pushing his way through the rest of the marching soldiers. 

“Hello,” a man, no older than Kun, steps forward and offers a bow, “Are you Qian Kun? I’ve heard a great deal about you and the Hwarang.” 

“Who the hell are you?” Kun asks, puzzled.

“Pardon my rudeness, I’m still not fully functional with the language– my name is Wen Junhui, one of the commanders of the Tang forces. I’m sure I’ll be talking with the Hwarang a great deal in the future. It’s nice to meet you.” 

It’s strange, for the man who claimed to command the infantry of men, he looks more like the son of a wealthy merchant than a soldier. 

Kun snorts under his breath and turns away, leaving Junhui to look on for a moment longer. 

“Do you have business with Kun?” Shotaro asks.

“Ah, yes. I was hoping to hear stories about the Seorabeol attacks from the Commander of the Hwarang himself.”

“Sure you wouldn’t rather hear some ridiculous rumor from a drunk soldier?” Kun bites, “Seems like everybody here loves to gossip.”

“I apologize for them. We’ve been far from home for a while and they’ve only grown more undisciplined as time progressed.” Junhui shakes his head to continue his original plan, “At any rate, I came here to give you an overview of how our forces are being deployed. We have five thousand soldiers in the advance guard, main body and rear guard. As the highest ranking officer–” 

“Wen Junhui… The Wen Junhui who took back Hanseong a few months back?”

“That’s me,” he smiles.

“And you lost it.” 

“Yes, well… I suppose I did. It was a misstep of my forces and I take full responsibility for it. But I assure you that we will be taking it back, and keeping it this time.”

Kun looks as if he’s just swallowed something rotten. He’d only just lost his Chief and it seems as if this newcomer’s trying to force himself into Taeil’s place. No one, no matter the skill, can replace his friend. Still, Junhui seems to have been expecting to be rebuffed, and continues, showing no sign of being put off by Kun's behavior. 

“The advance guard is made up mostly of men from the Silla army. The rear guard, however, is composed of men from Tang. I’m thinking of promoting you to Deputy Commander in order to lead the advance guard. What do you say?” 

“Why?”

“I have experience leading my men. And am I wrong to think that the advance guard would take more kindly to a fellow countryman than an outsider?” Junhui speaks plainly, “Besides, there isn’t anyone on our side or theirs who hasn’t heard the name Qian Kun. I can’t think of anyone better suited.” His copious praise does nothing to thaw Kun, they just stare at each other for a few awkward moments. 

It’s painfully clear that the two of them don’t see eye to eye, and it cannot be a worse first impression. 

“Well,” Junhui claps his hands together, “I suppose I better be on my way. We’ll talk later, and go over some more in-depth plans.” Their conversation ends as one-sided as it had begun, and the Tang general disappears into the swarm of marching soldiers. 

Later that night, your group camps a short distance away from the rest of the force. Kun, sitting by the fire’s edge, beckons you and Shotaro over, “We need to talk.” The main bulk of the Hwarang forces are with Yuta heading even more northward, meaning that the only people in the camp were you, Shotaro, Kun and three dozen more Hwarang. “Remember what Junhui told us earlier?”

“About taking command of the advance guard?” Shotaro inquires, “What of it?”

“I’ve been thinking about what I want you guys to do. You can’t be in the advance guard, so I’ll have to send you off to fight with the main body or the rear guard.”

“So this means you’re going to take his offer?” Shotaro shifts as he speaks.

“Yes. You were in Seorabeol. You’d be a good commander for men who’ve never seen a real battle.”

“But…” A frown carves itself on the younger’s lips. Kun’s reasoning makes sense, but it doesn’t mean he has to like it.  It feels as if Shotaro had grown attached to the idea of fighting in the same unit as Kun. Perhaps the commander is insensitive for either ignoring this sentiment, or not acknowledging it at all. 

Shotaro sighs, resigning himself into a period of deep thought, looking up to Kun’s gaze, “Understood. Whatever you order me to do, I’ll do it. But first, I want you to tell me something. This doesn’t mean you’re planning to disband the Hwarang, does it? If I fight in this, it’ll be as a member of the Hwarang.”

It seems the two of you feel the same way. Kun’s hope may be flickering but yours isn’t.

“Fine. Whatever.” Kun seems disengaged.

“I should also point out that I think commanding soldiers is a little more than she can handle.” Shotaro adds, glancing over to you, “She doesn’t belong on the front line. She’s a page, not a soldier.” He rises to his feet, dusting the dirt from his knees, “Anyways, I’ll go and tell the others what you’ve decided.”

Kun and you are left alone with the crackling fire as Shotaro jogs back to the main encampment. He sighs and his shoulders drop. Suddenly he looks very, very tired.

“Why did you try to order us away?” The question leaves you before you can think it through.

He doesn’t answer, only tilts his head to look at the flecks of starlight dappling through the trees above. As the melancholy silence speaks, you nearly regret asking the question before he laments, “If I knew Taeil was coming back, then I could go out there ready to give my life to win. Just like Minhyung said– Taeil and I were the Hwarang. With him gone, there’s no way in hell I can carry all this on my own.”   

When he normally speaks to you, he is oft cruel and rude, you’ve never heard him sound so defeated before. 

“Yukhei was right, wasn’t he? Remember what he said when we decided to attack Hanseong? He said there was no way in hell Kim Yong would fund us without some sort of hidden agenda.” Kun huffs, “He was right. So was Jaehyun… You know who was the first to petition for a settlement between Goguryeo and our forces? Kim Yong.”

“...What?”

“He wanted to showcase our defeat as costly and an expenditure of life and resources. Make it abysmally clear that the war is funded on blood, and to keep his own money in his coiffers.” He laughs despondently and kicks at a rock by his foot, “Damn it, how couldn’t I see that coming? If I thought about it, that would’ve never slipped past me. I was desperate for Taeil to be off fighting big important battles, winning all sorts of glory…  But I let it all blind me, we were played and Taeil lost his spirit…” 

The Hwarang had put their lives on the line for the Kingdom. How could the King just let them be pawned around? 

“Noble or commoner– we all busted our asses to get where we are. Aren’t warriors meant to be the masters of the battlefield? What the hell have we been fighting for this entire time? Is anything I believed in still true? We believed that we were fighting for something, so no matter the shit we had to crawl through, we did it.  Turns out it was just a trench that just circles itself. What are we supposed to do now? What the hell am I supposed to believe in?”

Every word of his punctures you with pain. But the kingdom had betrayed them, their trust. The war had changed and it feels as if the Hwarang had been tossed aside. All that the Hwarang had done is fade away, what could Kun do to fix it? 

“You lost what you believed in,” you say quietly, “They think as long as you’re there to lead, they’ll be fine and refuse to show fear in front of you. They want you to see the kind of men they are, which means they’ll fight to the death if you tell them to.” If anything, you want to soothe his wounded soul a bit. “But if someone were to ask why I’m here… I’d say it’s because I believe in you.”

Perhaps that’s the wrong thing to say, all you’ve done is give him something more to worry about. 

Kun looks at you, but for once the light in his eyes is soft, “You’re right. If you lose sight of something the only person who can find it again is you. Besides, we’ve got a big fight coming up. Guess I should be thinking about how we’re going to win that, not whining about my problems.” With a small smile, he turns back to the stars.

You fall silent again, cicadas fluttering and chirping through the night being the only cacophony of sounds around you.  

“Are you really going to stick around?” He asks. You know he wants to go alone, but you can’t go with Shotaro, you both know that.

“Yes, I am.” Perhaps you don’t know how you can help him just yet, but you can hardly leave him alone. 

“Fine. Just stay out of my way.” 

“I know.” You sit there in the silence of night, you’re just about to return to your tent when he groans out in pain. Almost immediately you know what’s happening, your fears confirmed when his hair begins to turn white at the roots. Quickly you scramble to your feet, urging him to his and leading him to the shadow of a large tree where the nearby soldiers won’t be able to see him.  

“Damn it,” he curses through clenched teeth, “Why now?!”

With shaking hands you reach for your collar, and as he grasps your intent he grimaces. Kun takes a hold of your shoulders and roughly pulls you toward him, seconds later you feel a dull sting on the back of your neck and then the hot trickle of blood. 

His warm breath comes in pants across your bare skin, but after a time his ragged gasps for deliverance begin to steady. And slowly, his grip loosens. Then, without a word, he pulls away from you. 

“How long do you plan to keep letting me do this?” He mutters, as you turn to him, worry in his eyes.

“Forever,” you say simply, “As long as you need me, I’ll be here.” 

“You’re a stupid woman,” he sighs, “And I’m a man who’s lost sight of what makes him human. How can you just let me cut you open like that and drink your blood? What the hell are you thinking?”

“It’s alright, Kun. I really don’t mind.”

There’s nothing for him to say to that.

The next day, along the route to Hanseong, the news breaks.

“So, Goguryeo forces are pulling out of Hanseong?” Wen Junhui frowns, “That’s… unexpected.” He and Kun stop to talk over the news and their next move. 

“Unexpected? They’re cocky bastards that think we won’t try to retake the city.” Kun scoffs, “It’s the most opportune moment to take it back.” 

“I’m not against going into battle,” Junhui states, “We are leading an army, after all. But the main body and the rear guard are still on their way. All I’m asking is that you wait until they catch up with us. Attempting to lay siege to the city with the men we have is folly beyond folly. We should–”

Kun sighs, “This isn’t a theoretical scenario from one of your war manuals.”

“Sun Tzu isn’t just a war manual. The highest form of generalship is balking enemy plans; the next best in preventing enemy junctions,” Junhui argues, standing his ground, “After that, it’s attacking armies in the field, and the worst of all is besieging walled cities. Therefore, we should only lay siege as a last resort. Attacking head-on is foolish. If you’re determined to be foolish, the best you can do is make sure your army is in the best condition possible and–”

“Though we have heard of stupid haste in war, cleverness has never been seen associated with long delays! No kingdom benefits from prolonged warfare!” Kun offers his rebuttal, “Remember that one? He’s saying that it might get messy, but it’s better to end your battles quickly. Taking your sweet time just comes back to bite you in the ass.”

“Qian… Don’t do that.” Wen Junhui’s brow furrows, “I’m not asking you to wait long. They should be here in just a few days.”

“And we’re just meant to sit here twiddling our thumbs until the Goguryeo army shows up?” Kun frowns, “If they catch us unaware then we’re screwed, no two ways about it.” He must sense that he caught a nerve in the other as he pushes ahead, “You want to miss this opportunity, fine. I’ll just take the advance guard and capture Hanseong myself.”

“That’s suicide!” Junhui shouts as Kun snorts derisively. He clearly has no intention of taking his opinion. 

“I guess we’ll see. I’ll take Hanseong by tomorrow.” His lips pull back from his teeth in a feral grin, and he looks off in the distance toward Hanseong.

He isn’t being belligerent. He’s being reckless. With Kun like this, can you really win?

April 13th 666 - Hanseong, Kingdom of Goguryeo Hanseong is in turmoil. Your forces neared three thousand, while Hanseong’s barely had a thousand. And although the Silla forces easily outnumber your opponents, the guards are able to use their fortifications to great effect, fighting you to a standstill. Arrows fly, swords clash, and men scream in pain.

“We can’t keep this up,” Kun sighs out with crossed arms, “This is as good a time as any to attack the enemy lines.”   

“Attack?” You look toward him in disbelief, as a nearby soldier cries out, “Their fortifications–” 

“Can fall.” Kun says flatly, “An arrow or two won’t kill you.” The men around him are stunned into silence, never having imagined they would receive orders like this. Their commander, however, just stares back coldly. “What the hell did you come here to do? You’re here to fight a war. If you’re prepared to fight, you should be prepared to die. Am I wrong? So, when I give the word, you’re going to charge that line!”

The men before him pale, and many tremble. Eventually, one of them snaps, “I can’t do it! I don’t want to die here.”

No sooner had he turned to run, does Kun’s sword flash in the daylight, striking the soldier dead. The men watching swallow thickly. For a few moments they stay utterly silent. Commotion breaks out shortly afterward. 

“What is this?!”

“Is he crazy?!”

Kun lets his cold eyes slide slowly across their ranks, and slowly the mumbling ceases, “Anyone else want to run? If you’re too scared to fight, go ahead. Be my guest. But anyone who runs will die by my hand. So either I kill you… Or you take your chance out there. Up to you.” With one final scowl, he turns back to the battlefield, taking off across it.

He runs through the throng of bodies and hail of arrows, falling upon the men defending the main gate like a vengeful god. His sword drips with fresh blood, you stay in the shadows of the treeline waiting for him to return.  

Shotaro runs to the commander, grime and blood smeared across his face, “With another push we should be able to take the gate!”

“Great!” Kun shouts, “I believe in you Osaki!” 

As Kun effortlessly slices through the enemy, the mood among his men begins to change. A ripple goes through them, a surge of newfound energy to fight. You can’t hear him from the distance, but he shouts something over his shoulder and his soldiers fight with intense vigor. 

And soon after the sun passes its zenith, the city gates open, the news of it spreading like wildfire. 

The Silla forces sweep into the city soon after, finding relative ease when liberating the streets. Kun glances at you with a grin as Shotaro runs up to him.

“Commander! The men we sent to the town head’s home ran into trouble!”

“What?” Kun almost sounds confused, “We haven’t seen any real resistance so far.”

Shotaro shakes his head, “I’m unaware of the details. Should I go see…?”

“No. I’ll go.” Kun stops him, “I’m leaving you in charge here.”

“What would you like me to do?” You ask.

“Come with me,” he says simply, “Don’t want you wandering around. Might get hit by a stray arrow or something.  

And thus it was decided. You quickly follow after Kun, and even upon approaching the building, you can tell something is wrong. Inside, your men are dead on the floor, their bodies laid out like the spokes of a wheel, and at its hub… Lee Donghyuck.

“What are you doing here?” Kun asks, more nonchalant than you’d have thought. “Decided you’d take a vacation? You do know there’s a war out there, right? Or maybe you’re just hiding out here, hoping you won’t get hurt.”

“We were acting under orders from the King.” Xiao Dejun, whom you hadn’t seen upon your arrival, speaks out, “We are here to deliver a secret message. We did not expect to be drawn into battle and we certainly did not expect to encounter you here.”

“Huh,” Kun scoffs, “Gaesomun yells jamp and you leap. You sure are dedicated.” 

“Well, I didn’t think I’d see you again so soon, Qian…” Donghyuck leers with a snide grin.

“And I didn’t think you were so anxious to get your ass beat again. Don’t worry though, I’m happy to oblige.”

Donghyuck grinds his teeth and draws his sword at his hip, “Killing you will erase the humiliation I suffered at your hands. You and your dogs have been a thorn in my side since Wonweol. Today, I will have my revenge.”

“... Sounds as if you’ve got this covered,” Dejun sighs, stepping back once more, “He’s all yours.” 

Kun just as easily draws his sword, “Guess the face wasn’t enough, maybe if I take an arm you’ll get the message.” He soars across the room at Donghyuck, their blades rattling against one another as Donghyuck block’s the commander’s strike. Then, the demon pushes back and Kun is thrown across the hall. 

“You’re not getting away,” Donghyuck says coolly, his hair turning stark white, just as Kun’s had done at the beginning of the battle. In the blink of an eye, he leaps after his opponent, whipping his sword in a quick slash. Kun brings up his blade at the last second before the strike could wound him. 

“You’re slow,” Donghyuck taunts, “Your movements lack finesse. Don’t tell me that killing humans has tired you out? Last time you said you were a Demon…” Their blades locked together, Kun’s begins to shake under the pressure of the other’s force. 

Donghyuck’s right, though, Even with his Fury abilities, Kun is slower than before, too unfocused. 

“Ah, I see,” the Demon’s eyes flicker to the open door for a moment, “The sun’s still out. You don’t like it much, do you?” He chuckles, “Don’t worry, I won’t go easy on you just because you’re weak. After all, a warrior always gives all he can, no matter the situation. That is your code, isn’t it?” 

“Damn you!” Kun jumps backwards, but not fast enough to escape Donghyuck’s blade. It arcs down across the Hwarang’s chest, blood erupting from the gash and splattering to the floor. Kun drops to his knees, skidding across the hard wooden panels panting heavily as blood blooms across his robes and pools on the floor below him. 

Agonizing seconds pass as both you and he wait for the blood to stop, yet it continues to fall through his fingers clenched to the robes hanging from the wound. “What the hell is this?!” Kun asks through clenched teeth as he stares daggers at Donghyuck standing before him. 

Donghyuck laughs, almost as if Kun had told him a joke, “What’s the matter? Not healing like you should? This,” his wrist flicks upward to show off his blade, which almost looks to be faintly glowing, “is Hwangun’s Blade. It’s been passed down through my family for generations, but… no one had ever thought to test it on a Demon. This is an excellent chance to see what it can do. And you know what? I can use it to put down a fake Demon.”

He smirks, giving the impression that he’s figured this victory is a foregone conclusion. 

“You must be pretty desperate if you’re willing to grab your family’s magic sword. Really need something like that to take on a fake Demon?” Kun gives his own taunting laugh, but Donghyuck’s grin doesn’t falter. 

“You humiliated me for the first time in my life. Nothing is too much if it will send you to hell.” With another flick of his wrist, Donghyuck sends droplets of gore spraying down onto the floor, “Your abilities can’t heal any wounds from this blade. You became a Fury to defeat me, but now that sacrifice means nothing.” 

“So, tell me if I’ve got this right. All I have to do is avoid getting cut by that thing? Hell, before I became a Fury, all I did was dodge swords. This’ll be easy.”

“Does your impudence know no bounds?” The Demon scoffs, “Fine. I’ll put your short lived defiance to the test.” His blade shimmers a blue-white and seems to shiver with his murderous intent. The air is thick, feeling like a struggle to just breathe. 

Donghyuck slashes downwards toward Kun, who’s able to dodge out of the way in time, bringing up his own sword to strike back. But when it arcs upward, instead of hitting flesh, Kun’s sword cuts through air. In tandem with the strikes, Donghyuck moves too fast for the bare eye to see, Kun’s margin for error becoming slimmer and slimmer. With another dodge, the Demon slams his riposte into the Hwarang’s shoulder. Kun’s robe is torn away, displaying a fresh wound. 

“Good… You’re overthinking on how you might kill me,” Donghyuck smirks, “But I want to see more. I want to see your face when you realize that you can’t kill me and that I will win!”

Blood pours from him, but Kun brings up his sword to catch Hwangun. Teeth clenched, you know that he’s lost far too much blood to carry on for much longer. Donghyuck kicks Kun back and as he does, the commander’s hair returns to its natural hue.   

“What the hell?!” Kun cries out, still in a defensive stance.

“Reached your limit, I see,” the Demon chortles, inching closer, “Even a false Demon is better than this pathetic existence! You might as well be an insect.” His laugh echoes through the hall, gloating over the near unconscious Kun, “I want to hear you cry! Scream! Beg me for your life! You and your filth have stood in my way for too long. I’ll kill you and the Hwarang!”

Kun’s head twitches, “Kill…the Hwarang? You?” It’s almost as if he’s keeping himself upright with sheer force of will at this point. “After we left Taeil and the Hwarang fell to me, I felt like there was no way I could do all that by myself. I was just about ready to give it up.” Suddenly, the hair on his head shifts back to its demonic white, “...But now, when you say you want to erase everything we did… I’ll be goddamned if I let you destroy the Hwarang!” 

Ichor continues to fall from him and you know that if he’s to continue like this he’ll most certainly die.

“Kun, no!” You cry out, “If you don’t stop you’re going to die!”

His eyes flick to you and you can already see the resolution in his gaze, then he gives you a grin before looking back to Donghyuck, “You really think I care about how much of my future I’ve gotta burn to get this bastard? I can’t let him kill me here. I can’t let this bastard and his damn sword get the best of me now!” 

Relaxed now, Donghyuck speaks once more, “You’re practically dead already. What do you intend to do? This charade is pathetic.” Almost lazily, he swings his sword again. 

Kun cries out in pain, not having the strength to lift his sword entirely to block the blow. Then Donghyuck’s sword slams into his right shoulder. Kun’s clothes are soaked in blood, his skin the color of parchment. 

“I hoped you might be entertaining, but I suppose it’s time for me to say goodbye now. Shame you don’t have enough energy to talk. I miss that dry wit,” Donghyuck sighs, “What’s the matter? Can’t hold your sword anymore? Where’s that warrior spirit?”

Even though he struggles to draw breath, Kun musters what little strength he has left to reach for his sword. The point of the blade tips and weaves in the air as blood pours from his body, but he stands. Donghyuck lifts his sword slick with the commander’s blood, and smiles. 

“At last! I can kill you with my own hands and erase the humiliation you gave me!” 

Before he can land another blow, the building shakes as an ear splitting crash barrels through somewhere on the estate. Smoke rapidly fills the room, making it hard to see.

“What is this?!” Donghyuck spits, distractedly turning from Kun to find the root of the interruption. 

“Fire! Fire!” Cries scream out from deep in the building, and you can ascertain that one of the trebuchets aligning the fortified walls had been turned against the city for some reason or another in a last act of defense. 

The fire from the lit fodder spreads quickly, roaring around the room and licking at the sides of the hall. Black smoke pours into the room, irritating your eyes and throat. Even as the room plunges into a near unbearable heat, the two men don’t lower their swords. 

It’s only when the ceiling begins to give way does Donghyuck remark, “Damn it, this place is falling apart.” Not wanting to endanger himself, he shoves his sword back into its scabbard angrily, glaring across the smoldering wreckage at Kun. “I’ll let you go this time. We’ll finish this duel another day. And you will die.”

He disappears shortly thereafter and you run to Kun, “Are you alright?!” 

Waxen skin and face writhing in pain, he doesn’t respond as he drops to the floor. And as he does, the near forgotten Dejun walks toward you from his corner, unbothered by the flames around him. 

“The Demon clans no longer intend to involve themselves in your governmental squabbles.”

“Why?” Kun asks, sweat beading on his forehead. 

“We owed favors to Goguryeo. We feel those have now been repaid.” Dejun shrugs, “Besides, even you must know that they will soon fall, regardless of the efforts of my kin.” 

You spot a bitter smile creeping along Kun’s lips, “... Yeah.” 

“And I suppose you intend to watch that ship sink?” Dejun asks, “Silla never gave your Hwarang the recognition it so desired, and pawned you off when they had nothing to lose. Why do you still fight?” The truth of his words drive a knife into Kun’s heart, and you see his face fall. 

“We’re knights of the Crown, we fight for them no matter what, right?” Kun says with ragged breaths, “What I’m fighting for now isn’t Hanseong or Pyongyang, or any of those bastards that call themselves ministers. What I– no– What we’re fighting for is the bond in our hearts. The bond that we joined the Hwarang with.”

His hand clenches to his chest and he lets out a small ‘fuck’ before continuing, “It’s not easy, not by a long shot, but… I’d feel like a real asshole if I died before Taeil came back.” 

Dejun closed his eyes while Kun spoke, he now stands silent, “If Donghyuck chooses to involve himself with either of you again, he will have betrayed the moral code that binds all of our kind. He will no longer have the support of the clans. He will be on his own.” He looks to the building around him, “I imagine this will be of little concern to him, but I ask you to hear his mind when he next tries you, he is not doing so at the behest of the Demon clans. He is, I fear, your problem now.”

Then, he turns and disappears. As you look to where he once stood, you hear Kun thud to the floor, collapsing from relief or exhaustion, you cannot tell. But, he’s fallen unconscious, and if you cannot escape soon, you’ll burn to death. 

“Hello?! Are you here?!” A figure bursts into the hall, shrouded in smoke but with a voice you recognize.

Shotaro had come to the rescue in your most dire hour. He quickly helps you lift Kun so you can shoulder the weight of his body together as you leave the estate.  

Hanseong, the town Kun had fought tooth and nail to overtake, only remained in Silla custody for a few days. As an army of Goguryeo soldiers came within the following week to recapture the city, leaving your commander’s mission for naught. After the battle, Wen Junhui’s army, along with the remaining Hwarang, set off to Koksan. Kun had somehow miraculously survived, but by no means has he recovered. For days he drifts in and out of consciousness, settling in at a small residence in Kyeju for him to recover. 

April 20th, 666 - Kyeju, Kingdom of Silla Since you’d arrived in Kyeju, you’d buisied yourself with taking care of Kun. As a Fury, most normal means of healing and medicine have little to no effect on him. So, most of your nursing consists of fervently hoping that his natural strength and tenacity would bring him through. Fortunately, your prayers begin to pay off and in time his wounds begin to heal. 

Although those made by Donghyuck’s blade did not do so easily, or quickly. You find yourself thinking of the battle of Hanseong. After watching Kun, many of the reluctant soldiers came around to clash swords with the enemy. They had told him it was an honor to fight alongside the Hwarang, for they were true warriors. 

You replay that fated battle several times over the course of your day, you’re just about to do it again as you open the door to Kun’s room, set to change his bandages. Yet, you don’t have the chance, as when you peer in, you see him sitting at his desk. He’s healed enough to move and speak without pain, but he’s still meant to be confined to his bed. 

“You shouldn’t be up,” you say quickly, walking inside and shutting the door behind you, “When I said you were healthy enough to get up, I didn’t mean you were healthy enough to work!”

“It’ll be only a minute,” he murmurs, looking over a few papers before him, “I’m going back to bed as soon as I finish this.”

“You nearly died! You need rest!” You rush to him, setting the bandages down on the tabletop. 

“Died?” He laughs once, dryly, “Me? Hah. That was nothing. Barely a scratch.” 

“Barely a– Do you know how long I’ve been taking care of you?!”

“Fine, fine,” he relents with a sigh. “Just a bit more reading, it’s all I ask.”

You sigh too, reaching for his blanket he’d strewn aside when he awoke. Moving to stand behind him, you drape it over his shoulders, “At least let me put this on you. You’re going to catch a chill.”  

“Hm, I’m sure even if I said I don’t want it, you wouldn’t listen to me.” 

“I’m glad you see how this works,” you say with a smile, “Now, as soon as that’s done, it’s straight back to bed.” 

At last he turns to look at you, his face quirked in a small, bitter smile, “Alright, fine. Sorry for the trouble.”

“Huh?” You stare back at him intently.

“Guess I should be thanking you and Shotaro, huh? Well… I appreciate what you did. Thanks.” His thanks are rarely unaccompanied by cynicism, sarcasm or outright derision but this is different. Noticing your baffled expression he speaks again. “Something wrong? Did I say something funny?”

“Oh! No no no,” you quickly assure him, “It’s not that.” It’s more you’ve never seen him act so nice. 

After that, you leave him to his work, checking back an hour later to make sure that he’s asleep and not working himself to the bone. Once doing so, you return to your quarters for another few, quiet hours, before a visitor arrives in the night.

“I thought I’d come and pay him a visit…” You hear the voice of Wen Junhui speak out as you approach the common area, you also note Shotaro standing next to him.

“He’s resting at the moment–” You begin, but stop when you hear movement behind you. 

“Sir–!” Shotaro says, rushing to Kun’s side, “I’m glad to see you standing! For a while, I really wasn’t sure what was going to happen.” His eyes begin to tear up and he blinks rapidly to clear them. 

“C’mon, don’t give me that,” Kun gives a short laugh, “You really think I’d die so easily?”

“I’m sorry sir, you’re right,” he rubs his hand across his face awkwardly, trying to brush away the tears that refuse to stop forming. 

“Kun,” Junhui says solemnly, “I’m going to be honest with you. You fought like a Demon back in Hanseong, I’ll give you that. Morale is through the roof. The whole army won’t stop talking about you. But your actions were dangerous and idiotic,” the once calm demeanor of the general turns angered. “You are a commanding officer, not a soldier! You don’t belong on the front line!” 

“General Wen, he’s only just recovered… Don’t you think you’re being a bit too harsh–” Shotaro tries to quell the other’s discontent. 

“No! I’m going to give my piece, I won’t let him slide out of this one!” Junhui shouts, “Listen to me, Qian Kun. Combining our men isn’t just about new clothes and new titles, we have to change about how we think about war. We have to learn new tactics. The commander charging at the front of the army does not show that we are improving our strategy!”

Flustered at this point, Junhui struggles hard to keep his composure, “If the soldiers are the hands and feet, then their commanding officer is the head. Without a head, the body is a useless mess! This war will be lost if we succumb to our own pride!”

Kun’s eyes go wide. The words similarly mirror one of the last things that Minhyung had said to him. Keeping his head on so that the body can move forward… 

“Minhyung’s ghost back to haunt me,” Kun sighs out with a weighted smile, a faraway look in his eyes. 

“Is something funny?” Junhui frowns, “This is serious! Don’t you understand how worried I was about you? Hell, how worried the whole army was about you?!”

For a few moments, Kun simply stares at him. 

“Say what you want!” Junhui stands his ground, albeit a bit taken aback at the commander’s attitude, “It won’t change my mind!”

“You’re right, Wen. Sorry for worrying you.” He follows his surprisingly genuine apology with a similarly surprising bow.  

Junhui has clearly prepared himself for a variety of reactions from Kun, but this had been none of them. For several moments he stands there, too flabbergasted to speak. 

“My apologies to you too, Shotaro. I hear you helped carry me all the way here.”

“Oh no!” Shotaro shakes his head, “No, it was nothing. Anything for you, sir.” 

June 19th, 666 – Koksan, Kingdom of Silla Summer blooms from the remnants of spring in full fury. Rumors and news about the intense fighting floats in and out of the town, and you grow uneasy thinking about the loss of lives on each side. In the subsequent weeks following Wen Junhui’s visit, he’s once again able to take Hanseong and keep a steady hand over keeping it in Silla's grasp. And although he hasn’t completely healed, Kun has decided to leave Kyeju as soon as he is well enough to march with Junhui who’s now stationed in Koksan. 

The way there seems longer than you'd ever thought possible. At last, you’d caught up with the main body of the Hwarang. 

Yuta’s at the door to greet you the moment you arrive at the estate. 

“Commander,” Yuta says with a small smile, “I’m grateful to see you alive.”

“Glad to see you’re alright too, I hear you’ve been doing well.”  

Although Yuta looks relieved to be reunited with Kun, he frowns and rubs his hand to his forehead. Perhaps fatigue from the battles occurring is beginning to get to him. 

Kun looks past him to the people standing behind him, “Jeno, Sungchan, nice to see you’re still around. Was starting to get worried about you two.” Despite their commander’s voiced appreciations, both wear glum expressions. 

It’s Sungchan who begins to shake before breaking down into tears, his voice quivering violently, “You entrusted me with Chief’s safety, b-but– I wasn’t strong enough! I couldn’t protect him!”

Although hearing his words, you cannot get yourself to grasp their meaning. For him to be this distraught can only mean one thing. 

“We have been told that at the end of last month that Taeil was… beheaded in Pyongyang.” Yuta steps in after Sungchan fails to compose himself, being ushered aside and consoled by Jeno. 

‘Beheaded.’ You swallow at the word. Taeil had been killed like a common criminal, and you know it would have been pure humiliation for him. 

“Hm, didn’t even let him kill himself,” it almost seems as if Kun had expected this. His voice is controlled and unsurprised, but within his eyes you can see a bottomless, yawning despair. 

“It’s my fault he died!” Sungchan exclaims, “Please commander, I deserve to die as well!”

“I as well!” Jeno adds, “I begged you to let me fight for his freedom, but I– I wasn’t successful! I’m a failure!”  

“You idiots! Look around you,” Kun frowns, “There’s no goodman way we have a single Hwarang left to spare! If you’re so prepared for death, then don’t give me your cheap words. Prove yourselves on the battlefield!”

The two fall silent after a quick, “Yes sir.”

Later that night, both Taeyong and Jaemin come to visit Kun.

As members of the Fury Corp, they had been resting when you’d arrived earlier in the day. 

“Your arrival has the men in something of an uproar,” Taeyong muses, “It woke me somewhat earlier than usual.” 

“I heard you got hurt pretty bad, Commander. Didn’t think we’d see you again so soon,” Jaemin says, almost scanning for wounds on the elder.

“Well, I couldn’t just sit on my ass once I heard there were battles happening all over the place,” Kun says, sounding calm and relaxed. You know that isn’t how he’s feeling on the inside though. If you have been feeling depressed since learning of Taeil’s passing, you cannot begin to comprehend how he must be feeling. 

“We should be on our way then, our work begins at night, after all,” Taeyong notes and begins to head for the door. Jaemin nods and heads after him before Kun speaks up. 

“Jaemin, do you think you can tell Yuta to come by?”

“Huh?” Jaemin looks back, “Uh, sure… I’ll go and get him now.” Before he leaves he says one more thing to Kun, “I know you only just got here. But you should really rest tonight.”   

With both of them gone, the room falls into an awkward silence. Kun hasn’t told you to leave, but it seems unlikely that he’ll start talking to you either. Just as you’re about to break the quiet, Yuta opens the door and steps inside.

“I heard you had business with me. Can I help you?”

Without even waiting for him to settle in, Kun says, “From now on, I’ll be commanding from the front line.”

A strangled gulp treks down your throat as he says this out of almost nowhere. If he were to fight on the front line, the violence would be intense and he still hadn’t fully healed. 

“Do you intend to die in battle?” Yuta asks simply.

“No,” Kun shakes his head, “I won’t go out that easily. You’ve been out there. Only right for me to take that burden off you, right?” 

His presence would raise morale among the men but if he died, the Hwarang dies with him. 

“You raise an excellent point, sir. If you mean to take my place, however,” the air grows thick as Yuta’s hand falls to his sword, “I must ask you to defeat me first. If you cannot best me, then only death awaits you on the front lines.”  

“Getting a little full of yourself without me, huh?” Kun’s lips turn upward into a grin as his sword slides from its scabbard. 

“You shouldn’t be doing this!” You cry out as Yuta’s blade is also released, the blade glinting in the glow of the lanterns.

“Stay out of this!” Kun says and locks eyes with Yuta. Seconds linger as they remain unmoving, just then they leap towards one another, swords struggling against one another. After a bit, Kun is thrown backwards to sprawl across the floorboards. 

“What?!” He looks surprised. Even only partially healed, he still has far greater strength than a human, and he isn’t the type to go easy on a friend. 

“This war is not so easy that you might rush to the front line without your full strength,” Yuta says and as you look back at him your eyes grow wide.

“Yuta…” With his now reddened eyes and white hair, there’s no doubt that he’s a Fury. “You drank the pimul?”

“Don’t worry about me, I made my own decision.” The simple fact that he’s decided this path says more about the battles he’s been fighting than words ever can. Yuta looks to Kun, who’s rising to his feet, “I understand why you wish to fight, that is why I cannot allow you to.” He straightens himself and sheaths his sword, his hair returning to normal. “Perhaps you might be able to forget your pain in the midst of battle, but I cannot afford to let you do that. You cannot be permitted to turn a blind eye to our problems.”

Kun slowly puts his sword away, “Because I’m the Chief now?”

“Because you’re the only one who can unify the Hwarang.” After hearing that, Kun sighs, only allowing Yuta to continue. “Leave the front line to us. You, Kun, should remain here and plan our strategies.” 

“Fine. The front line’s yours until my wounds heal.” 

An honest, “Thank you” leaves Yuta, and then he turns to you. “I’m leaving him in your care. Don’t let him out of your sight until he’s healthy again.”  

You nod and give him what you hope to be a reassuring smile. He inclines his head to you, turns to Kun to give a short bow, then leaves. As soon as the door closes, Kun’s face darkens and his brows draw together. 

“Damn it… He’s gotten to the point where he doesn’t trust me and thinks I need you as a babysitter.”

“He’s just worried about you, that’s all,” you try to justify Yuta’s actions. 

Kun gives a bitter laugh, then stops suddenly. He gulps out a noise and clutches his stomach in pain, his body and hands shaking as his hair and eyes begin to change color.  With the bloodlust taking hold, he begins to groan out in pain. 

“This way,” you quickly take his arm and lead him to a room off of the main hall. In the open, anyone is privy to catch him. 

As he settles in the room, you set out towards him, and he has a look in his eyes as if he already knows what your next move is. You tug at your collar, loosening it like you’d done before. He leans toward you and you feel a sharp prick on your neck, you stay as still as you can as he bites down onto you. His hot breath panting along your neck, drinking slowly as he begins to calm. 

Eventually, he pulls back. There’s pain on his face but not from the bloodlust. 

“This can’t go on forever…” His face turns upward into a half sour smile, “You. Me. This war. Everything…”

“Kun?” His eyes are distant and he doesn’t seem to hear you. You can’t describe it but something feels strange, wrong, even. 

September 6th, 666 – Koksan, Kingdom of Silla By the time Kun’s injuries heal, it’s early autumn. Battles still rage along the fronts, and Silla inches nearer and nearer towards its goal. Kun hasn’t received any orders of late, but you feel that that’s about to change when you hear Shotaro storming down the hallway.

You’re settled in the main room with Kun, Taeyong, Jaemin, Jeno and Sungchan when the doors burst open, Shotaro shouting, “I have news from Wen Junhui! He says were to launch an offensive against Pyongyang.”

“Pyongyang? That’s the capital….” Jeno says seriously, glancing towards Kun.

In other words, this may be the push to finally close in on Goguryeo. 

“What now then?” Sungchan looks to Kun as well.

“We’ll need to get there as soon as possible. No doubt Junhui has some elaborate plan to route out their forces.” You haven’t seen Kun this excited in a while, and the others in the room pick up on his energy.  

“Our ships have already been sent to Ongjin, they will be able to converge on Pyongyang once the situation up north has settled.” 

“Then I should go to Ongjin first,” Taeyong says, “We should establish a stronghold for when the main body of men arrives.” 

“Isn’t it a bit dangerous to have our representative be someone from the Fury Corps?” You postulate to the group.

“My father’s family is from Ongjin, you know.” Taeyong says quietly, “I have a few connections there. I feel I am most suited to lead the advance guard. There’s… Something else that’s been bothering me as well.”

“Bothering you?” You question but all he does in response is nod and smile. 

“Taeyong… you’re supposed to be dead, aren’t you?” Jaemin interrupts, “Seems like that might be an issue.”

“A minor detail,” he waves it off, “easily dealt with.”

“In that case, he’s probably the best choice,” Shotaro murmurs. 

“No,” Kun disagrees, “The Fury Corps isn’t cut out for that. You still can’t stand up during the day.” 

“It’s difficult, certainly, but not impossible.” Taeyong argues, “I don’t see any reason to just follow behind the rest of the army, and I’d be glad to push myself for this.”

You don’t doubt his ability to do that, but you do question the validity of his motives. 

“There’s… a bit more to his message,” Shotaro says after Kun and Taeyong have been staring at each other for a moment. “Junhui will be leading his men to Tagok Pass in hopes of stalling the Goguryeo reinforcements. I believe he means to buy time so that our allies can sack the city without interference. But…”

“The pass is on the front line right now,” Jaemin drums his fingers along the hilt of his sword. “I understand what he’s trying to do, but I don’t think it’s going to be as easy as he thinks it’ll be.” 

“That’s a good point,” Jeno sighs, “The enemy’s getting desperate, and we don’t know what else they’ve got up their sleeves.”

“If we want Junhui to come back alive, we need to send some reinforcements to go along with him,” Kun ascertains. 

“I disagree.” Taeyong frowns. “If we are to win in Pyongyang, we must arrive there at full strength.” 

“Are you saying we should abandon Junhui then?” Yuta asks.

“Well, if both of our forces are wiped out by Goguryeo, there is hardly any point at all.” 

The men all shoot glances at one another, formulating their own thoughts and responses before Yuta speaks once more, “I will remain with Wen. Without their aid in previous battles none of us would be here. I will go to Tagok Pass. Kun, please take the rest of the men to Ongjin.” 

“Yuta, you–” Kun’s eyes grow wide.

“Then I’ll go and prepare to depart.” Before giving Kun a chance to respond, Taeyong stands quickly and leaves the room.

Jaemin doesn’t seem particularly happy about the way things have gone either, and after a moment of furious thought, he stands as well, “I guess I’ll go with him. Don’t really want to let him out of my sight, you know.”

 “Yeah,” Kun nods, “That’s probably smart.” 

“Be careful, Jaemin,” you say as he walks past you. He gives you a small smile and a wink, then dashes out the door after Taeyong. 

“Osaki,” Kun looks at the man still at the door, “I need you to go and tell Junhui what we’ve decided.” 

“Understood,” Shotaro says quickly, “I’ll be off as soon as I can.” 

Once he leaves, Yuta turns to Kun. Whether or not he was waiting for the room to be cleared, you’re unsure. 

“Please survive. No matter what happens.”

“What’s the matter?” His brow furrows as he looks to the other, “That came from nowhere.” 

“In the Hwarang, you and Taeil upheld the path of a true warrior.” Even when slanted by their own kingdom, they had never compromised what they stand for. “Our standard of truth is a banner for everyone who fights. We lead the way.”

Yuta and Kun look at one another silently, before Yuta continues. “As the man who made the Hwarang into what it has become, it must be your duty to carry that standard. Every Hwarang before you and after is relying on that.”

“You make it sound so easy.” Kun replies with his thin lipped grin. “I’ll promise you this though, I’ll stick around until the Hwarang’s dead, or I am.”

“Thank you, Chief.” Yuta smiles, eventually turning to you, “I leave Kun in your care.”

The words are few but hold great emotion behind them, “We’ll be fine. I’m sure of it… After all, I don’t think he could die even if someone killed him. I’ve seen him on the verge of death many times, but he always pulls through. So,” your jaw locks and you look directly into Yuta’s eyes, “Please don’t die, Yuta.”

The battle at Tagok Pass is sure to be an intense one. Many lives, you’re sure, are going to be lost.  

“I won’t die even if I get killed?” Kun’s eyebrow piques, “That’s quite a statement. If you’ve got time to worry about me, maybe you oughta be worrying about yourself too, Yuta.” He’d said it as a joke but there’s no mistaking his underlying sincerity. 

“I won’t die easily either. After all, I will be fighting in the name of the Hwarang.” Yuta says calmly and then addresses you, “Thank you for your kind gesture.” 

And so, you accompany Kun to Ongjin. He’s still gravely concerned about Yuta, thus he’d ordered Shotaro to remain alongside him at Tagok Pass. LEaving them both turns out to be much more difficult than you’d imagined. All you can do is pray that they survive, and that you will meet again someday.  

 December 1st, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla As winter takes hold, the cold wind blows down on the main body of the Hwarang as they arrive in Ongjin. The trip had been impeded by several small snowstorms, but now upon your arrival a new problem is encountered: Taeyong and the Fury Corps were nowhere to be found. Jaemin, too, had been unheard from.  

From the townspeople in Ongjin, you hear disturbing rumors that murder has been on the rise in recent weeks. 

Upon reaching the regional minister’s house, you’re met with a man who splits a grin as soon as he sees Kun. “Long time no see, Qian. How are you?”

“I’m glad to see you’re doing well, Xu.”

Later on, you learn that this man is Xu Minghao, the Tang navy’s second-in-command. When the Yamoto forces had fired upon Sabi some years earlier, Minghao had been in command of the Tang ships that aided the Silla forces on land. While Kun hadn’t been at the battle, he was able to speak with and befriend the man when he visited Seorabeol some weeks later. 

“Have you already heard about Taeil?” Minghao frowns,as Kun nods. “I apologize for having been unable to help. Your kingdom has truly lost a great man.”  

“He would’ve been happy to hear you say that,” Kun says with a bitter smile, “But he wouldn’t want us to stand around crying about him. He’d want us to get to work. Can you give me a rundown of what we’re working with?”

“Unfortunately I don’t have the greatest news,” Minghao says, “While we’ve secured the city, there is something… wrong occurring. I have requested a meeting with the newly implemented officials but I haven’t received any form of response. To top it off, there’s a suspicious group of men running around Ongjin. Well, there are rumors, at least.”

“Suspicious how?”

“Well murders have increased, and a few rumors report the assailiants running back to the minister’s home.” 

Suspicious men running around, possibly murdering civilians… Taeyong and the Fury Corps unreachable… It isn’t hard to put two and two together. 

Kun and you lock eyes, no doubt thinking the same thing. 

“If this continues we may become sidetracked here from our main goal,” Minghao states, “Perhaps if we could arrest these murders and restore peace in this area…”

“Minghao, think you could leave the murders to me?” The other man opens his mouth to protest, but something in Kun’s gaze makes him change his mind and he nods. 

“Alright, I’ll leave this one to you. No more questions from me.” 

Once Minghao returns to his men, you turn to Kun, “Do you think it’s Taeyong…?”

“Can’t say,” Kun sighs out breathily, “You heard the same things I did. No way to know for sure but if it is… I’ll have to kill him.”

“Kun…”

“He got pretty freaked out when he heard about where a Fury's power comes from. Might be he’s pretty depressed right now. Maybe crazy.” He shakes his head and looks to the minister’s house, “Strange things are afoot in Ongjin. We can’t be careless.” 

December 2nd, 666 - Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla The next day, Kun begins his investigation. Despite your attempts to convince him that he still needs rest, not the stress of a murder investigation, he presses on. And so, that is how you find yourself lounging around the rooms the Hwarang are occupying while Kun goes off on rounds with the rest of the men.

You’re engrossed in reading over some medical papers Namekawa had left you with when you receive an unexpected visitor. 

“Where were you this whole time?!” The papers drop from your grasp as Na Jaemin steps into the room, “We couldn’t contact you, we were all so worried…”

“Do you know where Kun is?” He doesn’t answer your question, but rather jumps straight to the chase. 

“He’s off doing rounds at the minister’s estate…” 

“Ah,” Jaemin looks a bit crestfallen, “Can you give him a message for me? I can tell you everything since we got here. Just make sure you pass it on to him.”

You gulp, waiting for him to open up. “The minister isn’t being cooperative. Chances are they're being pressured by the enemy somehow. At least that's what Taeyong thinks. So, we looked around a little more and while we were doing that we found out that Heo is actually here.”

“What?!” You cry out at the unexpected revelation. Your father had been forced to do research on the Furies by the revivalists before the war broke out, or at least that's what you thought. 

“Yeah… and… he seems to be leading a unit of Furies for the Goguryeo forces.” Jaemin frowns, “Well we figured we could just let that slide so we started watching their Furies, you know, where they go and stuff and well… I saw Taeyong meeting with Heo.”

Jaemin explains that Taeyong told him they'd be more likely to get spotted if they moved together and went off on his own. This is pretty peculiar on its own but sometime after they split up Jaemin witnessed Taeyong meeting with your father. 

“I don’t know anymore… I don’t know what Taeyong is thinking.”

“It doesn’t mean that Taeyong is connected with Goguryeo, does it?” Your brow furrows. 

“If that were the case then there wouldn't be a need for him to lie to me though, right?” Jaemin says frustratedly, “Doesn't act like he's got any plans to contact the rest of the Hwarang. I just didn't know what to do…” 

You’re not sure what else to say and just before you open your mouth you hear a commotion happening at the entrance of the building. The door to your room is kicked open and several strange men suddenly leap inside. 

“Who the hell are they–?! Shit!” Jaemin shouts as they unsheathe their swords and lunge after him. He dodges the attack easily drawing his own sword as he moves. He strikes out at one of the men before he has a chance to recover. The man laughs and the spot where Jaemin had struck him is beginning to heal immediately. Suddenly, the man's eyes begin to grow a deep crimson you understand what you're up against.

“Furies…!” 

“Get behind me!” Jaemin reaches out and grabs your wrist, pulling you backwards.

“Now, there’s no need for that,” a new voice says from the entrance. You feel your eyelids footer incredulously after hearing a man's voice.  It's familiar… nostalgically so. 

“Father?!” You’re frozen in place as Jaemin continues to fight the Furies. 

“What the hell!? Who are these guys! It's broad daylight! How are they moving swiftly?!”Although he's Clearly they're superior regards to swordsmanship, he's outnumbered and the daylight had weakened him. He's slow and his strikes are unsure. 

Your father maintains his cool composure, and he mutters under his breath as he observes the events, “Aren't they wonderful? Furies no longer restrained by the cycles of day and night.”

“You…” You stare at him, mouth agape, “You did this?”

“Of course, my child. I am unsure if the news has reached you yet but I was captured by the Goguryeo Army, and in this captivity I continued to research the pimul.”

“Father– you need to stop them!” You look to your friend fighting, “At this rate he’ll–” 

Heo Jinsang’s eyes widen as if he’s only just remembered and he looks over to Jaemin with a smile. “Ah, yes. I don’t know how to thank you. Without you, it would have taken much longer to find my daughter.”

“You followed me?!” Jaemin spits through grit teeth. 

Ignoring him, your father looks back to you and speaks with a soft voice, “I’ve come to get you. At last, we’ll be able to restore our clan.” 

“Clan…? You mean the Heo family?”

“With these superior Furies, restoring the glory of our clan will be child’s play.” Heo laughs, “Once the kingdoms bear witness to the potential of these breakthroughs, they cannot ignore us! We can even wipe out the Demon clans who rejected our plea for help, avenging our kin!”

“You’re planning on using Furies to restore the Heo lineage to power?” 

“Yes, I am. Everything I have done was for you.” His voice evokes the same tone he had used to speak to you when you were a child. You shake your head to combat it and his eyes narrow. With a few swift footfalls, he closes in, “You’ve been with the Hwarang for too long. They’ve corrupted you.”

No… It isn’t you who’s changed, it’s your father. 

“Goddamn it! Get off me you bastards!” Despite being out of breath, Jaemin manages to swipe at the Furies with his sword, giving himself space. However, no matter the amount of wounds he’s able to inflict on them, they heal immediately.  

“Father…” 

“If we just sit down and talk this through, I’m sure you’d understand.” Your father’s face lies in a stony demeanor. 

“I–!” Before you can say anything else, he drives his fist into your stomach. Stars leap before your eyes, the world grows dark and you slip into unconsciousness.  

When you awake, you’re in an unfamiliar room. 

“Where…” Your hands gripping your head as you sit up, “Where am I?”

“You’re at the minister’s estate.” A voice says before you and you widen your eyes.

“Taeyong?!” You cry out before noticing the figure next to him. Beside him stands your father. 

“What’s going on here?” You say as you scramble to your feet. “Why are you two together?!”

“I met with Heo secretly here in Ongjin, and we’ve agreed to work together in order to do Fury research.” Taeyong explains, resting his arm on the hilt of his sword. 

“Then… You’re working with Goguryeo? You’ve betrayed Silla… Betrayed the Hwarang…”

“Is that what you think?” Taeyong raises an eyebrow, “Interesting…” Explaining himself had never been one of Taeyong’s strong points.

“How are you feeling, my child?” Heo asks sympathetically, “I apologize for the rough treatment. I hope you aren’t too hurt.” His tone is intimate and caring, you feel yourself wavering towards the father you used to know. 

“I suggest you make no attempts to escape…” Taeyong says calmly but with more intimidation than you’d seen from him before, “We could make that difficult. In any event, it was reckless of you to bring her here, Heo.” He glances at you before continuing, “Kun is no fool. Her disappearance will surely mean that he will be onto our plans. I expect him at any moment.” 

“You told me that if I wanted to know where my daughter was, I just had to follow Na to the Hwarang.”

“Yes. I did.” Taeyong’s lips curve into a frown, “But I never suggested to kidnap her. Alas, what’s done is done. No point arguing about it. We need to be thinking about what this could mean, and plan for it.”

 “I’m sure the Furies I left to deal with Na will return to the estate soon, you needn’t worry about the future.” Heo shrugs.

“What did you do to Jaemin?” Your voice nearly breaks.

“I doubt he survived. After all, I did bring quite a few of them.” 

Your whole body shakes. You want wholeheartedly to not believe it, but the Furies that your father had brought were unlike any you’d ever seen before. Jaemin had already looked pale and weak even before he’d started fighting…

“You just have to assume I’m dead?” A voice says from the open doorway, “C’mon, that hurts my feelings…” He’s leaning against the frame and someone brushes past him, glaring at Taeyong and your father.

“You alright?” Kun asks as he looks at you. 

“I am!” You nod vigorously and he lets out a snort of laughter. 

“How did you find us?!” Heo asks incredulously, “I’ve made so many improvements on my Furies. How could you have destroyed them all?”

“Improvements? If you say so, but if you want to take out the Hwarang, you’ll need about ten times what you sent.” Kun smirks.

“I figured you’d be here soon,” Taeyong murmurs, “You didn’t bring any of the men, though… Well, I suspected you wouldn’t. Still, doesn’t it seem rather reckless for the two of you to charge headfirst into unknown enemy territory?” 

“Explain.” Kun’s eyes narrow at Taeyong, “Why didn’t you contact us?”

“There’s nothing for you in Ongjin.” Taeyong says simply.

“I was given orders by Yeon Gaesomun to come here. They told me to take my Furies and kill the traitors who reside here. However, I found such a plan unagreeable when so many test subjects reside here…” Heo sighs out.  

“We found common ground in our distaste for Goguryeo,” Taeyong explains, “and thusly decided to seize Ongjin for ourselves.”

“So you’re not fighting with our enemy…?” You struggle to piece together everything.

“I’m on your side, child. I have no intention of taking part in mankind’s disputes.” Your father says as he crosses his arms, “Let us bring retribution to the humans who destroyed our clan and the Demons who betrayed us. It is in our destiny to forge a new Demon kingdom with our own hands– no, we will be the only Demon clan!”

You recall Sooyoung explaining how the Heo village had been destroyed by humans. Even then, you can’t get yourself to agree with your father.

Just then, the sound of footsteps loudly resound out from the hallway. Furies pour into the room as Taeyong smiles, “Ah, they seem to have noticed our intruders.”

“Hey–!” Kun’s eyes widen as he notices their faces, “They’re the Hwarang’s–!”

“Not only does this castle hold the remnants of Goguryeo’s Fury army, but also of the Hwarang’s Fury Corps.” Taeyong crosses his arms, “All of the Furies that exist in both Kingdoms are gathered here.” 

Red eyes surround Jaemin, Kun and you. No humanity resides in their gazes. 

“Please give us your help,” Your father calls out to you, “We need you to lead us. You must command the Furies and restore the Heo clan.” 

But you don’t care about restoring the clan. You don’t want to create more Furies so that blood can drive them mad. You don’t want to see more suffering. 

“Father… you’re wrong.” Heo’s eyes go wide when you speak. “Building a kingdom on the corpses of others isn’t right! I can’t agree to it!”

Human or Demon, every life is precious. Just because your home village was destroyed doesn’t mean you can oppress humans. 

“I believe Heo was saying that he’d be willing to assist the Hwarang.” Taeyong interjects, looking at Kun. “What do you think, Qian? Would you like to lead this army of Furies against Goguryeo?” 

“You know the answer.” With Kun having been against Furies from the very beginning, you doubt he’s changed his mind about them.

“So I suppose that ends our negotiation.” Taeyong sighs, slowly drawing his sword from its scabbard. “Very well…”

You stiffen, yet Kun doesn’t move towards his own blade. He remains still, cooly contemplating Taeyong. Almost as if someone’s dumping white ink on it, Taeyong’s hair slowly changes to white and he raises his sword.

Instead of swiping at Kun though, he cuts down a Fury standing nearby him. 

“All a Fury exists for is battle, and now we’ve taken that away from them…” Taeyong shakes his head with a sigh, “The least I can do for them is let them die here, in battle.”

The room falls silent. Then it explodes in noise– the enraged cries of the Furies and the rattle of swords being drawn. 

“Jaemin–” Kun says quickly.

“I know!” The younger shouts and drops into a fighting stance, slipping his hand around the hilt of his sword. A grin splits on his lips as his hair turns white, “Taeyong, this is way too badass for an old guy like you! Why didn’t you tell us?!”

“Well,” Taeyong chuckles, “as they say, to fool your enemies, you must first fool your friends.” Their swords whistle and spark through the air, Fury after Fury falling before them. “Besides, doesn’t the hero’s right-hand man make the best villain?”

Kun responds with a bark of wry laughter and draws his own sword in a flash of silver light as his hair turns white as well. The men get into their stances and face the Furies as Furies themselves.

“The hell are you talking about?” Kun says with a grin, “Still means the hero gets stuck cleaning up the damn mess.” 

As their three swords spin and hiss through the air, blood gushes and spatters, painting the walls of the estate a deep red. Wave after wave conquered, they drown their foes in a sea of blood. You notice that your mouth has gone dry, your hands beginning to shake. In the corner, you spot your father sitting down.

“Everything you told me was a lie?” Heo asks Taeyong. “You said you wanted to do more research on the Furies in the kingdom of Demons… Why?”

“I saw the end.” Taeyong answers, “I was trying to discover a way for Furies to live past their… limits. Our short lifespans made me impatient. To continue my research I even dirtied my hands.” Every suspicious thing he had done had been in the service of a single goal: saving his fellow Furies. “We have no future as Furies. You know this as well as I do, Heo.”

“No matter how resistant you make them to sunlight, they will push themselves too hard, and their lifespans will shrink and the bloodlust will drive them mad.” Taeyong confirms the truth you’d all suspected: there is no way to save the Furies. “We are a mistake: a failed experiment. Furies are not something that should exist in this world. Let’s end this.”

Taeyong’s true intentions leave you surprised, as does his admission that the Furies are a failure. Is he right? Can they not be saved? Has all hope been lost? You let your mind drift for a moment, and then you see a shadow move in the corner of your eye– A Fury only feet from you, his eyes red and mad with bloodlust. You reach for your sword but it’s too late.

Before your hand even touches the hilt, you see the Fury’s blade sweeping toward you. Blood splashes down onto the floor before you, but it isn’t yours. A figure standing before you had taken the blow in your stead.

“Father?!” 

The Fury pulls back for another swing but then it freezes, gurgles oddly and slides neatly in half, a blade glistening in the center.

“Turn your back on us in a fight, will you?” Kun spits as he looks down to the halved Fury, “Idiot.” He shifts his eyes up to your father’s wound, and you see his face twitch. Immediately, he moves closer and turns his back to the two of you, sword held at the ready.

“Are you… alright? Are you hurt anywhere?” Your father asks as he turns to look at you. There’s blood splattered all over his chest. The wound, now that you can see it, is undoubtedly a fatal one. 

“Yes, yes. I’m fine. I’m not hurt at all,” you say quickly. His hand reaches out and grasps your shoulder, he falls to his knees and you follow after him. Quickly you lay him on his back, clutching at his hand. 

“Our research was a… failure. I knew there was no future for the Furies…” He murmurs out as tears begin to well in your eyes, “But I couldn’t give it up… I wanted to bring back your clan, your family.” Ever since you were young he’d always tried to do what was best for you. “It seems my fate is to die with the Furies… I have committed terrible sins. This is for the best, please, don’t cry.” 

You nod your head knowing that if you’re to open your mouth the tears would never stop. He gives you one last smile, sighs a calm breath and is gone.

After what seems like an eternity, you look up. The battle is over. The Furies that came to fruition by the Hwarang and your father lie dead, scattered around the room. 

“Kind of a waste, isn’t it?” Taeyong says as he looks at the bodies, “That many Furies could have been awfully useful… The Hwarang could have used these men.”

“You don’t win battles by thinking you’ll lose them.” Kun says.

“Well, you don’t win by thinking you’ll win either,” Jaemin snorts with laughter, then coughs to cover it up.

It’s true, the Hwarang had lost a lot of Furies but their unity had grown stronger.

“Ack–!” A sudden burst of pain wipes the grin from Jaemin’s face. Taeyong, too, has doubled over in agony. Their hair which had returned to normal goes back to stark white. 

“Looks like we’ve reached our limit,” Taeyong says through grit teeth.

Dejun’s words suddenly flash to you. The Fury’s power isn’t a gift from the gods. You’re only borrowing life that you would spend decades on. 

Jaemin sees your eyes go wide and gives you an awkward sort of laugh, “We were some of the first Furies.” They’d been in more battles as Furies than anyone else, and all of the strength and healing they’d enjoyed ate away at their futures until there was nothing left. 

“Did you know…?” The question leaves Kun as a whisper. 

Taeyong smiles and then gives a slow nod, “What warrior doesn’t know his own body?” His legs suddenly shake violently and he falls to the floor, Jaemin soon following. 

Kun drops to his knees and takes both of their hands in his own.

“Kun… Do you remember?” Taeyong remineces weakly, “Back when we were at Moon Hall, we would spend all night talking.”

“Yeah,” Kun nods, “We would say that Taeil would never be content with being just the heir of a small school. We promised to do what we could for him…”

“Who would’ve thought he would leave this world before us?” Taeyong frowns and his voice grows quiet, “I know we haven’t always seen eye to eye, but without you, we couldn’t have built up the Hwarang.”

“Same goes for you too…” Kun says with a small smile, “You were the one that always calmed me down whenever I’d start a fight with Yixing.” He’s doing his best to act tough so that Jaemin and Taeyong won’t worry. 

“Looks like we’re taking the lead this time… Don’t be in too much of a hurry to catch up though, alright?” Jaemin adds in a bright and kind tone, “I mean, you barely had any time to rest since you joined the Hwarang.”

Kun just nods.

“I’m having a hard time buying that ‘yes’. You’re a little too short-tempered to keep a promise like that…”

“Shut it, you little brat. You really think I’m gonna take that crap from you?”

Jaemin’s face relaxes as Kun snarls back at him. Even in this moment, Jamein’s tender and kind for the benefit of his Chief. 

“You must go south.” Taeyong suddenly says. “Heo said he used water from Tamna when he was refining the pimul.”

Your eyes widen– perhaps there still is hope. Maybe, just maybe, there’s a chance something south can repair the curse of the Fury to these men. Taeyong’s last words are the fait muster of hope for the fate of the Furies. 

“Kun… Don’t… don’t lose sight of what matters, alright? Being reckless doesn’t work out so well.” Jaemin’s voice has grown rough and raspy. Kun’s knuckles whiten as they tighten around his comerade’s hands. But with a sound like sand pouring over a stone, their hands crumble into ash. In moments, they are no more. 

“Kun…” You call out but he doesn’t answer. He only stares, silent, at the twin piles of ash that sit where his friends were only moments before. There aren’t any tears in his eyes, but even so he’s somehow crying. 

You’re not sure how long you sit there before he stands up. The room that includes only you two is devastatingly quiet.

“Let’s go.” He says quietly, his voice curt and clipped. Yet, when he turns to you, his eyes suddenly go wide. “Hey, no crying.”

You nod, trying to stop, but it’s no good. The tears don’t pause, regardless of how much you wipe them away. In one day– an hour– you’ve been forced to say goodbye to Jaemin, to Taeyong… and the father you haven’t seen in over a year.

December 17th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla The events of the magistrate’s house resonate with you for a while, and after some time has passed you find yourself alone again, standing in front of the estate. Wisps of snowflakes fall around you, wind hitting your cheeks and chapping your lips.

“They sure took their sweet-ass time,” Kun quips as he exits the front gates of the building. His worn expression indicates a worried tiredness. 

“Hello,” you greet him, “How was the meeting?”

“How? Hmph.” He shakes his head, “Those idiots north of Pyongyang don’t like any of the plans we’ve proposed, even with Junhui and I poking around as often as we are. Apparently with the incident here and continuing at Tagok, Munmu doesn’t trust us yet to act. That’s the bullshit they relayed! Can you believe that?”

Kun paces the front gate, arms crossed and breath puffing in the air, “They act all high and mighty on their capital in the north, but pussy out when it’s time for the final push. It’s pathetic, Munmu hasn’t done shit and is relying on the Tang for everything.” He frowns, “Whatever. Let’s head back to the inn, the sun’s really beating down today.”

“Okay…” A cloud of frustration seems to follow you as you return to the inn, most notably in Kun. “We’ll be there soon enough, hang in there.” His skin looks pale and watching him in silent agony makes your heart ache.

“Don’t worry about me,” he sighs, “How about you? Are you holding up alright?”

“I’m… fine. I mean, I’m pretty resilient.”

“How can you say that?” He lets out a dry laugh, “You stay up all night just to tend to me…”

“I’m tough.” You smile back, “When you finally fall asleep, it gives me the peace of mind so that I can rest easily too.” 

Kun’s lips curl and he doesn’t seem satisfied with your answer. Instead, he just stares at you. He turns his head gradually to the hues of red and orange covering the winter sky in the distance. You follow his lead and look towards the horizon. 

“Huh…?” Your vision suddenly blurs. 

“Hey, what’s the matter?” Kun’s right next to you, but yet his voice sounds so distant. 

Before you know it, your body collapses to the ground. 

“Hey!” Kun shouts out, “You alright?! Hang in there!”

When you regain consciousness, you discover yourself tucked snugly in bed. 

“About time you woke up,” Kun says as you look around the room. “Do you know where you are right now?”

“Ah! Kun…” Once you  realize that it’s him, you snap out of your daze. “I’m sorry, I–” 

“You idiot!” He shouts, causing you to jump. “If you weren’t feeling well, you shouldn’t have gone outside. You should’ve rested!”

“I’m sorry…” It feels as if a stone has dropped into the pit of your stomach as he scolds you, and you can only look down at your hands. 

“Uhm, well… I guess I shouldn’t be too hard on you,” Kun sighs. “You’ve barely had any chance to rest, especially after what happened with your father’s passing… I can’t really be surprised that you would push yourself to act like everything’s normal.”

But he’s lost people too, and if you’re suppressing how you’ve been feeling you can’t imagine the turmoil happening within him,

“Until further notice, you don’t have to join me when I meet with members of the war council. You’re going to stay here to rest.”

“What?” You shake your head, “No, I’m fine. Today was just a lot to handle. So, please… I’ll be careful. I won’t let this become a problem again in the future.”

“Why? Because Taeil, Minhyung and Jisung asked you to watch after me or something?” His head tilts, “None of the men who died for us would have wanted you to look after me at the expense of your own health.”

He does have a point. But that isn’t the only reason you’re still here.

“I… I want to be by your side, Kun.”

“Yeah?” His brow furrows, “Why’s that?”

“What do you mean ‘why’?” I, um…” You can’t continue. Of course, you know the true answer but to admit that is a bit too much. There’s no way you can tell him your feelings. Suddenly, the hairs on the back of your neck stand on end.

“Well, fine. Whatever,” he waves it off, flashing his usual sense of detachment, muttering to himself,  “If you don’t want to tell me, I don’t care.” Caught up in his own thoughts, he mutters something shortly, “You were close with Namekawa, right?”

“I wasn’t close with him… My father was, though.” You admit, “However, he did watch after me frequently.” 

“I see. He’s a good man, but I just can’t seem to put my full trust in him.” 

“Okay…?” You can’t quite grasp the point Kun is trying to make. 

“If anything happens while we’re out here, I want you to find him and stay with him.” Kun states, “Even if Goguryeo catches you, they won’t touch you as long as you’re with him.”

“What? Why would they–”

“Look. When you’re at war, you can’t just prepare for victory. Gotta consider your defeat as well.” Kun crosses his arms, “I’m sure Doctor Namekawa will show up here any day, so when that happens…” He falls silent. After a while, he shakes his head tenderly, “Nothing. Forget it. I’m just rambling.”

In the empty space of your conversation, you try to sift through what Kun’s trying to say. All you can do is pray that this brief, peaceful reprieve will prolong itself for a bit longer. 

December 21th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla In the following days Minghao and Kun make another trip to the war council stationed in the minister’s home. Although they hope their audience with the officials will be fruitful, it turns out to be less than eventful. 

“Yeah,” Minghao sighs, “It’s no use. The water’s going to be frozen over soon enough, I get that. But waiting until it thaws in the spring…” 

“It’s idiotic,” Kun agrees. “Guess we should kick back and relax until then, huh?”

“Even if you’re joking it’s not funny.” Minghao frowns, “We’re only giving them more time to reinforce Pyongyang.”

“Sure,” Kun says, “But it’s not like they’ve got anyone else to come in and save them. They’ll be holed up in the city, waiting for a reprieve. If they’re smart they’d have surrendered by now.”

“Knowing Gaesomun, it’s not like he’ll have a shortage of ideas of how to turn this around. For fuck’s sake he killed their last king to wrest power from him. I suppose we’ll refrain from making any rash decisions until we reunite with Li.”

December 26th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla You find Kun in his apartments when you approach him, “I hear our forces are gathering in the north of the city… Are we leaving?”

“The Hwarang serves two things:” he sighs, “the King and the Kingdom. That hasn’t changed.”

“The Hwarang shows the way, right?” You point out.

“It’s funny, isn’t it? All this time, we had those lords and ministers looking down and judging our actions. Now look at us.” You can almost recall Taeil’s grin as Kun smiles. 

“Well, that’s one more reason not to die, then.” 

It’s a burden on him, undoubtedly, but Kun has seen many of his friends lay down their lives for the Hwarang and what it represents. Knowing what it had meant to them, he can’t allow himself to die.

“As long as the men believe in what we stand for, I can’t let the Hwarang die.” The doubt you’d seen in him weeks before is gone. He’s accepted his place at the head of the Hwarang. “I have to protect them.”

He looks over to you, his gaze warm, it makes you feel better than you have in a while. Just being next to him is enough to make you feel like everything is right in the world. 

December 30th, 666 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla A few more days pass and the men you’d left to go to Tagok Pass finally reach Onjin. Unfortunately, bad news comes with their victory over the pass.

“Yuta has fallen in battle,” Shotaro reports, his head bowed, “His last words were ‘Leave the rest to Kun’...” 

Ever since this war started, you’re unsure of how many times you’ve seen this expression on a warrior’s face. You bite your lip until it almost bleeds.

Kun puts his hands on Shotaro’s shoulders, giving him some words of encouragement, “I’m sorry I put you through that, Osaki. I’m just glad you made it back alive.”

Shotaro’s eyes grow wide and he looks overcome with emotion, “Th–Thank you sir!”

Jaemin and Taeyong lost their lives in Ongjin, and Yuta at Tagok… This means that Kun is the only Fury left among the Hwarang.

“It’s been hard already, but I’m pretty sure things are going to get worse,” Kun crosses his arms, “You’ve all fought enough, so…” 

Shotaro sets his jaw and looks back at Kun, “I’ve given my life to the Hwarang, it just hasn’t been lost yet. We’ll follow you to the end of the world and back, sir.”

“Me too!” Jeno says firmly, “I’ll follow you all the way!”

“Let me accompany you, no matter where it takes us!” Sungchan adds.

“You guys…”  Kun’s almost at a loss for words.

“We want to fight as the Hwarang, not as foot soldiers of Silla. We want to fight for the justice we believe in.” Shotaro smiles at him reassuringly. 

You’re sure that if Taeil were alive, he’d be crying. The Hwarang united in body and mind. A great happiness wells within you and suddenly you can’t hold it in any longer. Tears spill forth from your eyes.

“... Idiots.” Kun’s face twists into a sneer, but there isn’t any hiding the warmth in his eyes as he looks out over the men. They know the coming battle will not be an easy one, but there is no doubt in their mind: their place is with Kun and the Hwarang. 

January 7th, 667 – Ongjin, Kingdom of Silla Ultimately, it is decided that Minghao’s fleet will head to Cholsan while Li’s army will march to Yangdeok. In the cold of winter, you leave Ongjin and head into the surrounding forest. 

You’re only a few minutes walk in when Kun stops you, “I can’t take you this time. You stay here.”

“What?” You stop in your tracks, “But why? Where is this coming from?”

“There’s going to be a lot of fighting. You should get away from that. No reason for you to stick with us anymore, right? I know Taeil, Jisung and Minhyung asked you to take care of me. But I’m sure you’ve fulfilled your promise in full. If you were to die in the mess of this war, then I’ll be the one that gets scolded by them in the afterlife.” His voice quiets, “I think it’s time you are released from us.”

“No!” Now that your father’s passed, there isn’t anything to justify staying with the Hwarang but… Your heart yearns to be with Kun.  

“Donghyuck’ll probably be coming after me soon, but I can take him. You don’t need to worry about that.” 

“That’s not it!” Once again you find yourself almost yelling. “I don’t want to stay just because I think I need to be protected from him!”

He sighs, looking as if he’s dealing with a fussy toddler. “Come on, don’t be like that… I can’t make you happy.” 

Your eyes go wide, your voice shaking when you speak, “... I don’t need to be happy. All I want to do is fight alongside the Hwarang. I want to follow the same path you do.” There was never an ulterior motive for staying alongside him. “Please, I’ll do whatever you tell me to.”

“Well, I’m touched that you feel that way, but I want you to be happy. Without being with us.” He isn’t saying this to just make you feel better. You feel the sincerity behind his words. And you’re happy to know he cares, but it pains you just as much. 

“These are orders from the Hwarang’s Chief.” He looks you in the eye, his voice flat and cold. “You would impede the function of the Hwarang, and therefore will not accompany us to Pyongyang.

The air is sucked from your lungs and your heart skips a beat. You feel the blood drain from your face and your hands begin to tremble. 

“You’re a woman, and you deserve to have your own life. I can’t let us tie you down anymore.” 

Hearing that, all of the power in your body leaves you, and you fall to your knees in the snow underfoot, “Kun… Please wait…” You want so badly to scream this at him, but your voice no longer feels like your own.

“Take care. That is all.” The minute he turns his back on you, you know it isn’t good. It’s clear that he really intends to leave you behind and you can’t even lift a finger to stop him. 

He’s getting further and further away, his footsteps crunching in the snow. It was him who you’d been running after since the battle in Seorabeol… A man that, up to now, was working on chipping the distance between you, bit by bit. 

“I don’t want this!” You scream out, forcing your voice to be heard. But Kun walks as if he doesn’t hear you. “Qian Kun!” Even calling out his name doesn't make him stop. And eventually, you can’t see his back anymore.  

Minutes pass and you remain in a defeated stupor on the ground. It feels as if something inside of you has crumbled. You’ve been chasing after Kun this whole time… but he’s someone who only moves forward. His whole life was lived by keeping his pain sealed away, but never once did he leave you behind. He would always give you the chance to cling onto him.

Now you understand that there aren’t any more chances to gather yourself, or run after him, or any other childish endeavor to bring you closer. He has deemed no further use of you and severed the ties that burden his duty. 

“Ah… Excuse me…” A quiet voice speaks up behind you, and you turn to see who it is. “I’m sorry but I heard everything,” Wen Junhui inches toward you,  “I apologize for eavesdropping, but there didn’t seem to be a good moment for me to admit I was here.” He coughs awkwardly and hands you a small piece of cloth to wipe your face. 

He waits for you to calm down before he begins to speak again, “You want to stay with him, I take it? Then… Will you wait for us? We’re settling down in Yangdeok before our attack on Pyongyang… So, can you wait until then?”

“What do you mean…?” 

“Once we’ve settled in, I can send for you. I mean, I can hardly leave you crying here alone!”

“General Wen…” Your mouth hangs open.

“Oh, you don’t need to thank me. Once you get to Yangdeok, I’ll assign you to Qian. It won’t be easy work, but at least you’ll be with him.”

February 14, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla You get your summons right after Yangdeok falls to Junhui’s forces. Yangdeok, to the Silla and Tang armies, has been seen as Goguryeo’s last city to topple before moving forth to Pyongyang to its west. 

“It’s good to see you again!” Junhui calls out to you, waving his arms in the air to summon you closer. 

“Thank you so much for arranging all of this,” You say as you gather your bags together and walk over to him, “And congratulations on your victory here.”

“My victory is a bit of an exaggeration,” he says, “Qian put in a lot of work too. As soon as we finished deciding on the new council, I sent for you.”

“The new council?” 

“Yeah,” he nods enthusiastically, “With the effort going to close in soon, we decided to pull our forces together and combine the northern armies and southern armies to collapse on Pyongyang. Xu Minghao is our general now, he knows enough about the Silla and Tang armies to combine us together.”

You learn that Junhui has been elected the Army Minister, and Kun has been named the Assistant Army Minister. 

“You had to wait a while, I understand.” Junhui frowns apologetically, “Was it too long?”

“It could have been shorter,” You say halfway joking and halfway serious. 

Still, the fact that they’re this close to pushing inward says something to the end of this war. Despite the losses you’ve accrued, this is a glimmer of hope. 

“Ever since we got to Yangdeok, Kun’s been… different.” Junhui notes your confused expression and continues, “He’s nicer to the men, which is good, but he spends too much time locked away in his room. Says he spends most of his time in deep thought and won’t let anyone come by.” He sighs, shaking his head, probably wondering what to do with the man before reaching into his pack and removing a piece of parchment. “I think he needs you,” a smile graces his lips and he hands the paper to you.

“Me?” You question, taking it from him.

“This document officially appoints you to your position. You can get the details after you give it to Kun.” 

It takes a while, but you muster up the courage to go into the main hall of where the leaders of the army are staying. Yet, Kun isn’t among them, he’s in his room, alone. After inquiring about where his room is, you find yourself standing before it.

You take in a deep breath and rap your hand against the door several times. After a few silent seconds, a tired voice drifts out, “I’m not attending… This isn’t the time for a party.”

Without saying anything you push open the door. Kun turns toward the door, preparing a half-hearted tirade for whoever had decided to intrude on his solitude. When he sees you, the words freeze in his throat.

“Reporting as ordered, sir.” You say, standing straight, “I have been assigned to serve as Assistant Army Minister Qian Kun’s page… by Army Minister Wen Junhui.”  

His mouth works soundlessly for a moment, finally closing with a snap. He stares at you incredulously for several more seconds before frowning, “It’s a mistake. I haven’t been told about this.”

You pull out the letter that Junhui had given you and hand it to him, “I received these orders from him earlier.”

Kun’s hand snatches the letter and he scans the page rapidly, his frown deepening with each line. When he finishes he shoots you a sharp look and thrusts the letter back into your empty hands, “No. Take it back. I don’t approve of these orders.”  

“I understand…” You sigh out, looking at the paper now in your grasp before tearing it into pieces. 

“What are you doing?” His eyes widen in shock.

“I don’t care if you won’t approve these orders,” you let the pieces fall to the ground, “I shouldn’t have relied on them in the first place.” You hadn’t taken the letter because you wanted to be in Yangdeok, you accepted Junhui’s help and came here because you want to be with Kun. That’s all that matters. “I came here because I wanted to. I want you to let me stay. Here. With you.” 

It’s his choice.

“Not fair for me to be the only guy with the luxury of a girl for a page. Especially when I’m sending men off to die.”

“Is… Is that why you left me?”

Kun falls silent and shifts uncomfortably. 

“Stop this!” You find yourself yelling, and Kun looks equally surprised. “You always do this! You decide you can’t do something, then you make up all the excuses you need to justify it! You say you’re doing it for my feelings without even knowing my feelings!”

When he’d left you behind, he said that he couldn’t make you happy– that you should go on and live your life. But he is what makes you happy, and you want to live your life with him. Now he’s trying to push you away again so that he can bear this burden alone. You can’t let him do that.

“You take on so much and you won’t let anyone help!” Tears sting at the corners of your eyes as you try and make him see the errors of his ways. 

He crosses his arms, “That’s my job. If I can handle it, then it’s my responsibility to!”

“What about the people who have to watch you do this?!” You’d watched him torture himself this way for far too long… Every hardship, every burden, is his and his alone to suffer with. And you haven’t been the only one to witness this. “I can’t let you do this to yourself! I want to be here for you! I want to help you! What else am I supposed to do?!”

With a sigh he falls silent, “I give up.”

You blink, furrowing your brow as you have no idea what he’s referring to. 

“Can’t fight a country girl… Better to just listen to them, I guess.” His voice is gentle as he looks up with a wry smile. You then find his arms wrapped around you. As unexpected as it is, you let yourself sink into his embrace. He holds you tightly, almost as if now that he finally has you, he doesn’t want to ever let you go.

“Ever since you left…” He murmurs before pausing, and you can sense him trying to organize his feelings. “I’ve figured some things out,” he squeezes you a bit tighter, “you… supported me. Guess that’s the best way to put it.” As he speaks, he sounds slightly bewildered, as if he can’t believe what he’s saying. “When you’re not here… It’s hard for me to deal with it. All of it. Life, I guess.” With each word, your heart swells warmly in your chest. Each word descends like the snowflakes outside, gently gathering in your heart. 

“You saved me,” he whispers and you feel the warmth of his body touching every part of yours. You’re sure there’s tear stains on his uniform from where you’ve been pressing your face into his robes. “... Do you think the Hwarang still stands for what it means to be a true warrior? Have I done what I was supposed to? Have I led us down the right path?”

You nod, “The soul of the Hwarang that our friends believed in is alive in you. In fact, I think it’s stronger now… We’ve been through a lot but it’s brought all of us together.” 

His lips curl into a smile, “Hearing you say that makes me happy. The men that the Hwarang have left are true warriors. No more need for the iron fist.”

Everyone in the Hwarang now has the unity of vision that brings the clarity of purpose, hopefully meaning Kun’s burden will lessen a little.

“Well,” you say, “from now on, please don’t try and hide your problems from me. I’m here to help you. You don’t have to do this alone anymore.” 

He’s silent now, but his arms stay wrapped around you. You feel his hands grasp at your robes as his voice is barely above a whisper, “Stay with me…”

February 15, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla The next morning, you’re greeted by familiar faces waiting for you in the main hall.

“Long time no see!” Jeno smiles, “We were eagerly awaiting your return for a while now.”

“Jeno, Sungchan…” You smile back at the two. 

“How was the dramatic reunion?” Sungchan pushes eagerly.

“What do you mean?” Your eyes widen, unable to answer him with a straight face as his face blushes with color. 

“Well, ever since Commander– er Chief– left your side, it looked like he just sank deeper and deeper into depression,” he says quickly, “It just made us realize how much he needs you by his side.”

“And now the two of you can be together as much as you want to be!” Jeno adds.

“Ah,” you feel heat rise to your cheeks, “Yes, well, I’m sure we can.”

“Oh?” You hear footsteps coming from down the hall, “I thought I heard a familiar voice. So, you’re in Yangdeok too…” 

“Jungwoo!” Your eyes widen at the familiar face, “You’re safe!”

“Indeed,” he smiles weakly, “Sadly, I was injured in combat against some of the Goguryeo forces.” 

“He was appointed as the Infantry Head of the Kyongjong Unit during the last meeting,” Sungchan says quickly. 

“Really? That’s fantastic news! Congratulations, Jungwoo.” 

“Thank you, but I don’t know how much I’ll be able to accomplish in this state, unfortunately.” You glance down to his bandaged left arm before looking back up to his face. “But for now, I am here, and all I can do is fight until the end beside Kun.”

“Jungwoo…” 

“If there’s ever anything you need from me, don’t hesitate to ask. I will always support you and Kun.”

“Of course,” you smile at him, “Thank you.”

February 25th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla As Kun’s page, you spend every day assisting him in his duties. Since your arrival in Yangdeok, he’s seemed much more at ease during the daylight hours. Your job sees you spending more time around him than you ever had before. He’s actually begun treating you quite nicely. 

You feel a little bad that you’re getting spoiled, but whenever you’re around him, your heart pounds.

On one afternoon, some days after you’ve settled in to Yangdeok, Junhui comse to visit Kun in his quarters.

“I’ve made tea,” you say as you set down the tray in front of the two sitting figures. 

“Thank you,” Junhui smiles, gingerly picking up one of the cups before him and looking over to Kun, “Your assistant here is quite something. Tell me, where did you find her?”

“Well,” Kun leans back in his seat, “I think some big shot wannabe had her sent over here without my permission. You know anything about that?”

“Oh, I was doing it for your sake, you know. Although, I’m a bit jealous now” he sighs, “A cute, dedicated, efficient page… What man could ask anything more?”

“No, I’m… um….” You say quickly, frantically busying yourself with your tea. 

Kun glances at you for a moment, then back at Junhui, his face calm and serene, “I agree… So long as she sticks with me, I don’t think I’ll ever need any other page.”

You nearly drop your tea at his statement. Junhui also looks surprised, but raises his cup to his lips to hide it. 

You look for words to say but you can only hear the blood rushing to your head and feel your heart pounding in your chest.

“I, ah, didn’t think I’d hear something like that from you, Qian…” Junhui muses, “I’d want a wife like her too.”

“Well she’s mine.” Kun says simply, “You’ll have to find one of your own because there’s no way I’m letting her go.”

Junhui laughs, “Now you’re just rubbing it in.” You feel your face growing hotter by the second.”Well, with Kun in this sort of mood, I suppose I shouldn’t stay too long, hm?” With one last grin to you, he turns to Kun. “So, back to business… Do you think they’ll be mobilizing?”

“Yeah,” Kun nods, “As soon as the snow melts.”

“Well, if you think so too, then we should prepare to mobilize.” Junhui sighs, “Minghao says it will be a few more weeks before his ships can set out from Ongjin.” 

“There’ll be a fight once they reach Pyongyang’s harbor, that’s for sure,” Kun nods, “There’s no way they’d let us take that easily.” 

“Of course,” Junhui agrees, “We’ll need to reconvene to see what troops we can send to aid the navy.”

“Huh,” Kun muses, “Gotta admit, before we came here, I never thought you and I would see eye to eye.”

“I know, right?” The other smiles, “I was taken aback by you the first time we met.”

“And I was with you.” 

Junhui laughs, “Well, I wasn’t born into a family of warriors…”

“Hey, me neither. My family were merchants from Tang before I was adopted.”

“Yet here we are, commanding respect as true warriors…” Junhui nearly marvels at the fact, “A man can only be judged by the path he walks, not the name he bears, nor the house from which he comes. We chose to fight for what we believe in. That path led us here. That’s all there is to it.”

Kun and Junhui are two very different people, but listening to his passion as he talks resonates with you as well. You were born into a family of Demons, but here you are. All your life, you thought you were human. Nothing more, nothing less. But the truth in this discovery gave you life beyond you thought you were, and they accepted you.

“Our ambition will never waver. We’ll fight to the end like we promised to.”

“Thank you for your time,” Junhui says, setting his cup down. He nods to you and Kun before standing and excusing himself from the room. 

“They’re already going to fight?” You ask as you begin to clear the teacups.

“Come here,” Kun says, reaching out and taking your hand in his. He stands, gently pulling you towards the door outside. The wind is frigid, without your thick coat on it cuts you straight to the bone. “See that plain down there?” From the higher vantage you have, you see the rolling hills pour down into a sunken valley that spans as far as the eye can see.

“We’ll go down the plain and attack Pyongyang from there. Minghao’s ships will come from the west and attack by sea. And if all is communicated correctly, the forces up north will converge on the city at the same time as us.”

“Then we’ve got to make sure we plan all of that out correctly, right?” You ask, “Sending troops in waves would only give them time to prepare for the next one.”

“Yeah,” Kun smiles, “If we can take Ajinham before they can fortify it well enough I’m hopeful we can end this before summer hits. The battle in Pyongyang will be my last. It will be the last place I draw my sword as a warrior.”

“Kun…” You’re desperate to talk about anything else. 

No sooner do you step back into the inviting warmth of his apartments does his expression suddenly shift. He lets out a grunt as you watch his Fury nature forcing itself to the fore. His hair shifts hue, his eyes turn red.

“Don’t worry,” he assures you weakly, “I’ve been doing pretty well since I got here. Looks like my body’s getting worse. Hope it’ll hold up until spring ends.” Does he mean that he’s ready to throw away his life so long as he lives to fight in one last battle?

“Please don’t say that,” you say, “Didn’t I tell you why I’m here?” Unfastening your collar, exposing the flesh of your neck, you step towards him, “Please don’t say you just want to live until spring. I need you to live longer than that. Much longer.”

“You’re a scary woman, you know that?” He smiles, although the pain twists it into a heart-wrenching grimace. His hands clasp your shoulders, and you feel his lips brush against your neck. “I haven’t tasted blood in a while,” Kun murmurs.

“You haven’t had any since you left?” His silence answers your question, “Why?”

You feel as if you know the answer, though. If he only cares about his body lasting until spring, then he likely hasn’t been taking care of it. 

“I suppose my blood must taste awfully good,” you chuckle, “Because, you know, I’m a Demon. In fact, it must be so good that you don’t want to drink anyone else’s blood.”

He lets out a snort of surprise, “Well maybe you’re right…”

March 2nd, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla You find Kun at his desk, his eyes fixed on a stack of documents, and you muster a troubled smile at him. This has been a familiar scene for whenever you find him, as it seems his work ethic is the same as it ever had been.

Even if you are worried that he’ll start to find you obnoxious, you place his teacup beside him as he writes furiously onto a piece of parchment.  

“The hell’s this?” He asks, not looking up from his work, “Don’t remember asking you for tea.” Kun scrunches his nose as he finally looks up to you as you flash him a bright grin. A sigh escapes him, “Don’t worry. I’m not tired. In fact, I’m starting to think I’m cut out for all this bureaucratic crap.”

“Well, it’s true that your duties here in your office are very important, but…” You hum, “It’s not like I can imagine a job or position that you wouldn’t be cut out for.”

“Of course you can. I hate public speaking, and even worse, I hate having to deal with emotional bullshit.” You suppose for him, a loathing profession never had gotten in the way of completing his duties. You’re certain that he has a knack for public speaking, let alone balancing the emotional stress that comes with managing a large group of soldiers. “So, it looks like I have to thank Minghao and Junhui for stomaching all of that shit so that I don’t have to.”

You chuckle at him, “Yes, but in return, you’re the one who’s in charge of managing all of the subordinates. Right?”

“Eh, win some, lose some. They’ve been calling me a Demon for so long, it’s kinda been throwing me off.” He shakes his head, “Hell, I don’t think you could pay me enough to bark at those idiots, or act like the Demon I used to.” His warm eyes glance toward you with an exceptional gleam, and it’s like he’s a completely different person from the man you met all those years ago in Seorabeol.

It’s true– Kun is no longer the Demon Commander and it seems like he’s discovered an inimitable truth: the practice of self-love is deeply fulfilling. 

“What’s the matter?” His gaze narrows, “Do I have something on my face?”

“I was wondering when people started calling you a Demon.”

“I guess it’ll come up sooner or later… Don’t get too excited, it's not that interesting…”

March 19th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla Before Minghao’s fleet is launched from Ongjin, a group is splintered off from the main army in Yangdeok and sent to the navy to aid in their future attack on Pyongyang. Jeong Sungchan had volunteered to go and you received word on the thirteenth that the fleet had left port to set the offensive in motion. 

On the night of the news’ arrival, Kun holds a meeting into the late, late hours of the night.

“Our meeting is over,” Shotaro says as he exits the meeting hall, looking to where you’ve been sitting patiently. 

“Thank you for telling me, Shotaro,” you smile up at him. “I’m planning on bringing Kun something to eat, would you like anything?”

“Oh no, I’m quite alright.” He says glancing back to the room, “Although I think it best for you to hold off on your plans for now. I don’t want to worry you but Kun’s been in quite the foul mood after tonight’s meeting.”

For Shotaro to be in such a dour mood must mean that whatever they'd discussed in there must have been truly serious.  

“It can’t be that bad, I’m used to being scolded…” You raise your head high and stand before his door. As you let yourself into his room, you see something that stops you dead in your tracks. Kun isn’t sitting in his usual spot. Instead, he’s sitting on the floor with an apprehensive expression. “I=I’m sorry. I, um, heard your meeting ended. If you’d like something to eat I can bring something up soon. What do you say?”

“Don’t want it. Not hungry.” He’s curt, and you can tell he’s irritable.

Although whatever was discussed in their meeting had been left in the meeting room, you can tell those heavy thoughts still swirl around his mind.

“Is there anything I can do for you?” You ask him.

“I don’t know how many times I’ve heard you say that,” he sighs, “I seriously have nothing to ask of you. Sorry for taking things out on you.” Now he turns his head upward to look at you with a sad smile, “When we first men, it drove me mad thinking that you and I couldn’t relate to anything at all. But now that you’re here, I can truly say that it makes me happy to have you here with me. I mean it.”

“Kun…?” 

“You’ve kept your eyes on me this whole time… Ever since we were in Seorabeol, in fact. If I think about it, you’re probably the person who’s seen me at my lowest.” He lets out a dry laugh, “It’s ironic, isn’t it? Thanks to you, I can remember. The weight of my burden… The reason every one of our friends sacrificed themselves. If it’s something as simple as rushing straight in, I can just handle that kind of stuff myself. But having you here with me as someone to talk me through doing something stupid make me think twice. You’re my rock.”

He moves to his feet, walking over to the window cracked open to let cool air into the room, “Putting my life on the line isn’t something I have to think about, but it’s all about knowing the timing. You’ve helped me to come to this conclusion.”

“Then if my life’s purpose is to be there for you, then nothing could make me happier.”

Another laugh, “I’ve only caused you trouble. It’s too much of a burden to put on the shoulders of a woman like you.”

“I won’t let this bring me down… I’m your rock after all.”

“I see…” He hums, leaving the windowsill and slowly begins walking toward you. “I’ve changed my mind. I could use something to eat. Preferably your cooking.”

“Oh? Is there something in particular you’d like?”

“Surprise me,” he smiles, “Just make sure it’s good. Cook like the fate of the Hwarang is in your hands.” It’s as if the realization of your connection hits you suddenly, and you can’t help but grin madly.

With the threat of war looming on the horizon, you can sense that Kun’s mind will struggle to find itself at ease in the coming days. You take solace in knowing that you can give him just one moment of reprieve before whatever’s to come.

March 15th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla Several days later, the town begins to welcome springtime. As you all had long anticipated, Minghao’s ships make port in Cholsan but stay docked until given the word to advance on their enemy. Being a key member of these discussions of when to push forward, Kun is often pulled away from the Hwarang’s compound and Yangdeok in general, to a secret meeting place where it is believed all high ranking members of the Silla and Tang debate. You, on the other hand, have been ordered to remain in Yangdeok, the only thing you can do is wait patiently for his safe return.

The day that the men stoll back through the door is a happy one; Kun, Jeno and Shotaro stepping inside from the warmer day. 

“I’m so glad to see you all safe…” You aren’t sure what catches hold of you, but as soon as you catch site of them, you feel your heart begin to swell and tears begin to prick at your eyes. 

“Such a crybaby,” Kun chuckles, “You know, pretty soon you’re going to dry up from all the tears you’re losing.” Despite his words, he stands next to you with a warm greeting.

“Have you heard from Sungchan?” You look at Jeno, “I know the ships arrived in Cholsan a few days ago…” 

 Suddenly, everyone’s expressions drop.

Jeno furiously bites his lip, “We received word that the troop of men he went with to Cholsan were ambushed somewhere along their route… There haven’t been any reports of survivors.” 

An altogether completely different emotion washes over you, the tears justifying themselves. This has been the first time since arriving in Yangdeok that you have to surrender yourselves to the news of another lost comrade, and your vision blurs for a moment.

“Sungchan had been dealing with the guilt of being unable to protect Taeil for quite some time… If I recall,” Shotaro closes his eyes, “it was his wish to greet the Chief with his head held proudly when he crossed over into the afterlife. Sungchan didn’t die a coward, so I believe that at the very least he accomplished that.”

Later that afternoon, as the sun begins to transition into red and orange hues, Kun summons you to his quarters. The light filters in on him as he sits at his desk, looking up at you as you enter.

“You’ve got time,” He says quietly, “Get as far away from here as you can. I can send you with a merchant’s caravan, I’ll get everything worked out. You don’t need to woot about a thing.”

You understand immediately what he’s trying to do. Kun knows the loss of war- does he not want you to get mixed into the crossfire?

“You can try and convince me all you want but I won’t budge… I want to stay. With you,” you say softly. Knowing everything he’s gone through, why would you leave him now? Besides, you’re sure if you hear of his passing in some far off, distant place, it would surely break you in two.

He lets out a breathy laugh that almost sounds more like a sigh of relief, “I figured you’d say that. You’re a real strange one.” You watch his eyes flick in miniscule directions as if he’s coming up with another plan.

“You’re worried about me, right?”

“Of course.” He says immediately.

“Well if you’re worried about me, then don’t let me out of your sight, okay? It’ll be your job to keep me safe.” You smile at him as his eyebrows raise in surprise. “And you can’t do that if you’re dead, can you? So, survive. To protect me.”

“Don’t worry too much about it,” he smiles at you, “I can’t let you die before I do.”

April 19th, 667 – Yangdeok, Kingdom of Silla By the first of the month, you get news that Goguryeo is expecting the assault on Pyongyang. They began reinforcing their walls and reports say that many of the cityfolk fled the city in a want to not get caught in the fighting. 

Xu Minghao reunites with his fleet in Cholsan, Junhi leads the men who have been assigned to navigate Kangdong Pass to reach Pyongyang, while Kun has been assigned to the men at Haegok Pass. You accompany Kun where you wait for the enemy’s resistance. 

Even though the snow has long since melted, the weather still gets quite cold at night. To rouse the men, Kun has brought several large jugs of yakju. 

“The battle’s going to start soon,” he says as he pours the men cups of liquor, “I’ll be counting on you guys. We can’t afford to rest, unfortunately, but I figured you could have something to warm you up. I’d like to give you guys as much as you want, but we don’t know when those bastards are gonna show up.”

After he’s emptied the supply, you and he walk together back to his tent. 

“Kun, are you alright?” You ask, rubbing at your nose so it doesn’t begin to run.

“What do you mean by that?” He turns to look at you, the empty jugs clinking together in his hands.

“You’re not drunk, are you?” You look at the aforementioned jugs.

“That’s it?” He laughs, “I had one cup, I can hold my liquor, promise.” The smile slips from his face and he looks off into the distance, “They’re almost like kids to me. Not much I can do for them personally on the battlefield, seems like a little yakju is the least I can give them.”

The two passes are the last line of Goguryeo defense before the city itself, this would be an important undertaking to take these points if the Silla-Tang plan is to go smoothly. 

“I’m sure they understand,” you nod, setting down the jug you’re holding beside his tent.

“You always say what I want to hear,” he says softly, setting down his next to yours. 

April 30th, 667 – Anjinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla With the warming weather, comes battle. Junhui and his men are routed at Kangdong, letting Kun’s forces push through with concerted effort towards the fortress at the mouth of Haegok Pass. Beyond these walls and field beyond is where the final battle will take place.

Everything has gone well, just as Kun had predicted all those weeks ago. Before the night ends, Kun requests your presence in his quarters.

“Are you going to be up for much longer?” He tilts his head as you approach, “You should sleep soon, there are long days ahead.”

“I know,” you have to try and stifle a yawn, “but… “ As the days press on toward the final assault on Pyongyang, days like this in relative closeness to Kun become more and more sparse. All you want is to cherish every moment with him while you still can, so you linger for a moment longer. Before you’re able to finish your thought, a visitor arrives.

“Chief, are you here?” The muffled voice of Jeno speaks out. 

“Yeah, I am,” Kun responds, “Come in.” As Jeno enters you look to him, Kun questioning, “What’s the matter?”

“There’s something that just couldn’t wait, something I need to give you, Kun.” Jeno says, his hands fumbling with a rolled up scroll in his hands. He holds it out to Kun, “Here…”

When Kun realizes what he’s looking at, his eyes grow wide and he stares intently at it. “Did… Did Kunhang draw this? Why are you giving it to me?”

“When we were in Ungjin some time ago I went to see him…” Jeno confesses, “And that’s what I told him, I told him to show all of you where he’s been… To show you the life he’s led and experienced. And so, not long ago, he sent me this drawing. As soon as I saw it I thought it best to give it to you.”

“I’ll take this,” Kun says after a moment, solemnly smiling at him, “Thank you, Jeno.”

Without another word, the younger one turns with a bow and leaves the room. Kun gives a curt smile, exhaling as he plops back into his chair. 

“What was that all about?” You ask, looking at Kun reviewing the drawing, “What is that?” The minute you see it, the vivid brushstrokes on the page evokes a small gasp and a feeling of magnificence from you. “A Fury…?”

Painted onto the scroll is the depiction of a Fury, complete with white hair and crimson eyes. Within those eyes, however, is none of the murderous rage you’ve come to expect in Furies. A peculiar kindness is imbued into them, “Who is this?”

“Well, this was the Chief of the Hwarang, but that hasn’t been in a long, long time.” Kun guffaws, “The bastard would get into skirmishes with merchants, nobles, and commoners. Then go partying in Noseo-dong when he was finished. His name was Zhang Yixing. When  he was still kicking around, I don;t think I ever got a good night’s rest. Always had to get into some bullshit.”

Everything he describes to you about Yixing seems incongruent to the kind-looking image of the man on the page.

“Actually, funny to think about it now, but I remember spending every day thinking of ways to fuck with him. Then, he told me something… ‘If you want any chance of pushing Taeil to to the top, you need to become the ‘Demon’ you were born to be.’” Kun hums, “And I took his word for it, then I took his life when it seemed being a Fury was too much for him.”

“Pushing Taeil to the top…” You can’t begin to imagine bearing the responsibility of killing the man who was supposed to be your leader, and you realize how dire those straits must’ve been.

“I have a feeling that night Yixing knew, somehow, that I was going to take his life.” Kun’s eyes are locked with your own for a minute of dull silence before falling back to gaze on the drawing. “Strangely enough, the same look he gave me as I killed him is the one drawn here.”

“Huh?” The man you see on the page looks so warm and gentle, and in no way did you interpret his expression as belonging to someone expecting to meet their demise. 

“You know, come to think of it, I could probably credit the bastard for giving me the kick in the ass needed to get my shit together.” Kun smirks, “If I let the Hwarang half-ass their way to power, who knows what kind of shit Yixing’ll have to say to me in the afterlife.”

When it comes to people who’ve made a considerable impression on Kun, Taeil is one of the first people to come to mind. Yet, it seems as if Kun holds a special place for Yixing as well, and you can hear the admiration. 

“I don’t know what the hell fate’s trying to tell me,” his arms cross, “but he visited me in my dream last night.” 

“What kind of dream was it?”

“Well, we weren’t speaking to one another,” Kun nods down to the painting, “But he seemed at peace, not too unlike how he looks on this… It was like his eyes were telling me to let go. Let go of the pain, the burden…”

May 8th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla As the men come in and out of the fortress, Kun is dead set on making sure everyone and all equipment is up to par for the days ahead. A certain group of incoming soldiers does catch him off guard– 

“Hello, Chief!” Shotaro greets with a smile.

“Everything’s going to plan,” Jeno smiles as he bounds up alongside him, “We’ll have the city in no time.”

“I’m glad to see you all safe…” You sigh out in relief.

“Of course they are,” Kun says, looking at the pair, “The battle’s not even started yet.”

“It’s nice of you to be concerned for us,” Jeno blushes sheepishly. 

“I’m glad you’re doing well too. How are things with you?” Shotaro asks.

“Great,” you shoot a glance at Kun, “He’s allowed me to stick around as usual. I’m not sure if I can live up to the bar you set, but I’m doing my best!”

“Nah,” Shotaro shakes his head, “Nobody can do what you do.”

“He’s right,” Jeno nods fervently, “The only person in the world that can defeat Kun is you.”

“Knock it off, guys,” Kun chuckles, “This is all going to go to her head and then I’ll be the one to deal with it.”

“Apologies, sir,” Shotaro says, “It can’t be helped.”

After some time, Kun fixes his gaze on Jeno, “Thanks for stopping by with the painting.”

“There’s no need to thank me, I’m confident that Kunhang is happy you have it.” 

“Hmph, maybe it’s time for me to stop being such a hardass all the time.” Kun nods, “Hey, I’m leaving the rest to you.”

The words don’t register for Jeno at first, and he blinks incredulously with a nervous chuckle, “...Um… What do you mean by that?” Kun smiles back kindly, staring back at Jeno with eyes that brim with warmth. After a second, Jeno perks up and his eyes widen, finally realizing what he means, “Understood. Please leave everything to me.”

Kun nods curtly, perhaps satisfied with the confidence in his reply, “Osaki, do me a favor. Can you call Junhui? I have some words for him.” 

A few minutes later, Shotaro returns with Wen Junhui at his side.

“Sorry for taking so long to get here… They put up a hell of a fight at Kangdong,” Junhui apologizes. 

“We split our forces, we got screwed a bit because of it but we brought it back in the end.” Kun nods slowly, “All that matters now is concentrating our men on the front gates of the city.”

“We’ll take it no matter the cost,” Shotaro nods firmly.

“As long as we fight under the Hwarang banner we’ll fight to the very last man!” Jeno says quickly.

“Don’t say shit like that– Did you already forget that Junhui’s in command going forward?” Kun frowns.

“I’ll raise the Hwarang’s standard for this battle. Then everything should be fine, right?” Junhui asks, “So long as it’s up, I don’t think I could falter. I’ve lost a few battles here and there, sure, but I’ve never given up on the spirit of a warrior.”

“Hah,” Kun smiles at him, “Now the Army Minister’s superstitious? You need to get your act together, Wen.” That’s when you realize that all four of them are smiling. “We should get going,” Kun looks to you, “the men aren’t going to move themselves.”

“Alright…” You say, looking back to the other men, “I’ll see you all again soon.”

As you’re walking away, Shotaro shouts out, “I’m entrusting you with Kun!”

Ever since the war had begun, you’re unsure of how many times people have said this to you. You turn to look over your shoulder at him, “I’ll do my best! I’m ready to lay down my life just like anyone in the Hwarang!”

“You don’t need to risk your life,” Shotaro shakes his head as you turn fully to look at him, Kun continuing on behind you,, “I want you to protect Kun’s heart. He’s a strong man, but he hides behind that strength and he suffers alone. He needs someone who can look past that, and be there to support him. I believe that someone is you.”

To stay by Kun’s side and support him is all that you want… “Can I really do that?” Soon you’ll be plunged into a violent and bloody battle. How much help can you be to him in the middle of a war?

“What are you talking about?!” Jeno saysm “No one else except for you can do it!” 

“Kun trusts you more than anyone else,” Shotaro smiles.

“Alright…” No one else can stand by him in the days to come. You nod firmly and wave to them one last time before rushing back to Kun’s side.

May 10th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla You’re sitting quietly in Kun’s study when he suddenly says, “We’re going to attack tomorrow.”

“Right…” You nod slowly. You’ve been on Pyongyang’s doorstep for weeks now, the battle is inevitable. When the sun rises the next day, the area will become a battlefield. 

“Are you sure–” 

“Yes, I’m going to stay with you.” However the battle ends, you intend to be there with him when it does.

“I need to stop letting you say it all the time…” His expression is solemn, but his lips are pressed tightly together and you can feel his hesitation. Kun’s eyes stare back into yours.

“Um…” The silence drags on and on.

“More than anything else, I want to keep you safe.” His voice is low, quiet, “I’m… I think I’m in love with you.” 

Your mouth hangs open, the question you had intended to ask now forgotten. You’ve loved Kun for some time by now, and in the past months you’ve begun to realize how much he cares for you as well. For a moment, you think you’re heart is going to stop.

He gives you a crooked smile, reaching out to close your mouth, his fingers lingering under your chin, “I thought I could just die as soon as I’d done what I had to do for the Hwarang.” 

The words linger in your ears and you can feel just how much has been weighing down his heart. It seems as if he’s trying to assuage your anxieties as he speaks in a soothing tone, “I mean, it’s not like I had a death wish or anything. I just… wouldn’t have anything to live for anymore.” His hand drops from your chin and into his lap, “So long as I led the Hwarang and made them into what they were meant to be, what did it matter if I lived or died? … But now I’ve got a reason to live.”

You feel your shoulders relax from a tension you didn’t realizing you’ve been holding. 

“Because you’re by my side… It gives me a reason to keep moving forward.”

“Me…?” As you struggle to comprehend your worth to him, you squeeze your fists together. 

Kun reaches out and embraces you, holding you tightly without saying a word, he opens his mouth as if he was going to say something, then closes it. There isn’t a need for words in this moment. At last, his stubborn heart opens, and through his lips pours out what it has long kept hidden. His touch is gentle as ripples on a lake but when you kiss, you feel within  him a passion that burns so hot it could put a forge to shame. 

And though that feeling fades as your lips part, the love that flows between you remains in your heart.

“Continue to stay by me,” he says softly, pressing his forehead against yours, “I won’t let you go even if you want to, so be prepared.”

“Of course, Kun,” you respond quietly, his hand raising to brush away the tears you didn’t realize were falling. 

May 11th, 667 – Ajinham Fortress, Kingdom of Silla Once the first and second wave of Junhui’s troops leaves, Kun decides to travel with the men stationed in the third group.

“You’re coming, right?” Kun asks you as he walks to you, the reigns of his horse in hand as it trots alongside him. 

“Yes!” You nod and he grins back at you. 

The two of you gallop through the valley, moving at an incredible pace.It seems to be going well until something impacts Kun’s body, the horse, surprised by the sudden jolt rears up and throws you to the ground. Rid of its frightening burden, the horse bolts.

You’re fortunate to have landed in a small area of brush, only a few small scratches littering your body. “Kun!” You cry out to him, crawling across the ground toward his body, your own bruised and aching. The soil around him is staining red, more blood than you’d seen over the course of your time in the Hwarang.

Terror grips you and you can hear blood hammering in your ears.

“Kun!” You call out to him again, shaking his body as you call his name again and again.

“Hm?” His brow furrows ever so slightly. A normal human would have died from this– but his Fury blood is keeping him alive, if only barely.

“Say something!”

His eyes open to thin slits, “Are you alright?” Near dead and undoubtedly in serious pain, and his first thought is about your safety. “We’re in trouble if they come back to finish the job. We need to get out of here and wait for this to heal.” He struggles to his feet and begins to walk, blood dripping down the length of his body.

“Stop!” You say and haul his arm around your shoulder, and he leans against it gratefully. Scanning over the vicinity, you cannot see any enemy soldiers. Perhaps they’d seen you fall from the horse and assumed you’d died. 

Nudging Kun, you push him to move into the brush away from the open air. In the forest you find a grove and settle down, “Kun, are you okay?” 

He rests under the trunk of a large tree, a steady flow of blood leaving him. One might guess him dead from his pale complexion, “I guess so…”

“We need to do what we can to stop the bleeding…” It takes a sheer force of will to stop your fingers from shaking as you carefully peel off his clothing. Revealing his chest, you see two arrow punctures, one near his heart and one on his stomach. “This is horrible…” You murmur, thanking whatever deity’s out there that the archer had missed his heart. 

You do what you can to staunch the bleeding, but without the proper tools you can only minimally patch him up, “As soon as you’re able to move again, we need to go back to the fortress.” With no response you call out to him again, “Kun…? Can you hear me?”

“Urg, yeah…” His breaths are heavy, “I don’t know if I can go back out there on my own yet.”

“Okay!” You say, knowing you need to keep him awake. “Shotaro and the others have everything under control. They’ll be waiting for you.”

“Damn r-right they will…” Sweat pours from his forehead, “They’re not Hwarang for nothing… We can;t waste too much time though, we– we have to come back and cover them while they take the gate.”

“You’re right… you’re… You’re going to make it,,” however the spots where he’d been shot don’t look like they’ll be closing any time soon. Had they used silver arrowheads? “Kun…?” His eyes close you begin to panic, “Kun!”

“Goddamn  it… S-stop making a scene. I can hear you, alright?” His voice is barely above a murmur– it’s practically a wispy breath. 

At once, a sense of clarity washes over you– he’s a Fury. “Kun. You need to drink my blood.” Without any doubts, you move your blade to your wrist. 

“Stop it!” The force of his command startles you, and the blade drops to the forest floor. In his condition, he shouldn’t be able to scream this loudly. 

“Why–?!”

“Spare me,” he says through grit teeth, “I’ll be okay. I’m not going to let this crap kill me… This isn’t the end, I told you that. You’re… you’re the reason I’m alive. I’m fine, I won’t die here.”

“I don’t believe you.” You frown, “I believe that you want to live and don’t plan on dying here. But you’re not ‘fine’!” He blinks incredulously, perhaps taken aback by the intensity of your glare. “So, I’m mot taking your word for it. You always put up a wall and pretend everything is ‘fine’ even when you’re bursting at the seams!”

You’re determined to get your way just this once. And maybe this time, you’ve gotten through to him.

“Some lady you are…” He chuckles weakly, “I’m starting to second guess why I fell for you. Ugh, this is why they say women from the countryside are trouble…”

“Look, I promise you can give me grief for this later, but for now, please…” Before you finish, Kun closes his eyes in silent resignation.

“Do as you wish…” He leans gently against the tree carefully. You pick up your blade, running it across the length of your wrist.You put your lips against the cut, sipping in a large gulp of blood without swallowing.  You then lean over, pressing your lips against his and let the blood flow into his mouth. 

Perhaps its his Fury instincts kicking in that allow him to accept the blood as readily as he does. You repeat the process of this blood transfer over and over again. You’re about to do it one more time when his hand reaches out to stop you. 

“That’s enough,” he says calmly, “I’ve stopped bleeding.” His cheeks, once pale and pallid, begin to show color once more. “You’ve gone and hurt yourself for me…”

“It’ll heal soon…” you say, hiding the cut with the sleeve of your robes. 

“What kind of absolute idiot would ever allow the woman he loves to hurt herself for his sake?” He sighs out, “Try putting yourself in my shoes for once.” After all of that trouble, the first thing he does is scold you… You can’t help but burst into laughter.

“What kind of absolute idiot would ever want to watch the man she loves suffer?”

“Oh, shut up…” He says as you continue to laugh.

After another handful of minutes he brushes himself off and rises to his feet.

“We’ve got to get going,” he says, pulling his robes back together. “Let’s head back to the fortress. Oh– and by the way, I’d prefer the next time we kissed to taste a little bit better than that did.” He chuckles as you help him start walking. His body isn’t great, but it’s enough to get you back.

Once you get back to the fortress, you’re met with a startling site. Perhaps you hadn’t noticed them bloom, or they’d come into their own while you were away, but the azalea bushes surrounding the fortress have sprung to life. 

Their petals dance in the sunlit breeze, fluttering like small butterflies. The area is empty, the men away fighting at Pyongyang…

“Kun, how are you feeling?”

He forces a small grin. As a Fury, he should be fully healed by now. Dejun’s words about the Fury’s borrowing their power from their future lifespan suddenly comes to mind. You slowly begin to panic, becoming paralyzed with dread over the implications of this realization. Is this the end for Kun?

He breaks the silence, interrupting your anxiety, “You don’t look half bad surrounded by flowers.”

“You really think so?” You muse, “I’ve alway thought they really suited you, though.” Each falled blossom is strikingly beautiful in defiance of the tragic end they’ll surely face. 

A strong gust of wind blows through the clearing. And then, out of nowhere, a figure emerges from the treeline.

“So, you were alive…” Lee Donghyuck’s eyes fall on Kun and his mouth curls up into a smile. 

“Why…?” Your voice breaks and the Demon only laughs.

“This man is an affront to my honor.” He says simply, “I’m here to put an end to all of this.”

The last you’d seen Donghyuck, he warned you that he’d return. You didn’t think that he would forsake his clan and travel all the way here just to fight Kun.

“I’m surprised to see you make it this far,” Donghyuck mutters. “Impressive, for a fake. I heard your pathetic friends got their asses kicked until it was just you standing. I’m not sure if being born into a warrior family… Or hell, even being born as a Demon, could help you survive the embarrassment of failing as often as you fools do.”

It’s strange… his tone is as derisive as usual, but his words are almost compliments. In some way, he recognizes what Kun’s been through.

“Didn’t think you’d come all the way to Pyongyang.” Kun crosses his arms, his voice still a bit raspy. “What were you gonna do if I ate it already? You would’ve wasted your time.”

Donghyuck’s face screws into a twisted grin and he draws his sword.  

“He’s hurt!” You cry, stepping between the two men. 

However, Kun puts his arm in front of you and moves you, “Step back. He’s thrown everything away to come fight me, right? It’s only polite of me to accept the invitation to fight a warrior of his quality.”

Donghyuck practically abandoned his clan. This, up until now, seems to be his entire lids, just for the sake of defending his honor.

Kun and he are two different men in almost every way, but perhaps they share a warrior’s pride.

“I’ll be fine,” Kun tells you as he reaches for his sword, “I won’t die. I already told you: I have a reason to live.”

If he fights Donghyuck, then surely by then his life’ll be up. Even if you can convince him to run, then everything he’s stood and lived for will be destroyed. But you can’t stop him.

“...I’ll watch, then. I believe in you.”

Kun’s smile is fleeting like the blossoms scattering at your feet.

“Furies are only imitations,” Donghyuck says, brandishing his sword, “The more you use those powers, the shorter your life gets. You’re nothing compared to a pure-blooded Demon. You are destined to wither and die. You’re no different than these,” his show skids across the ground, swirling the azalea petals around.

“A man’s gotta protect the people he cares about. It’s not so easy to be a warrior, didn’t you know?” His tone indicates that he’s speaking seriously, but a sardonic grin dances along his lips. Watching him now makes you see just how much he’s given, every drop of sweat, blood and tears in his life to protect the ones he loves.

“Perhaps the name of ‘Fury’ no longer suits you.” Donghyuck says, his gaze narrowing, “The life you strive to live is not that of a fake.” There’s no hint of contempt left in those red eyes of his, full of confidence. “You are a Demon.”

The man who takes so much in being a Demon calling a Fury, a ‘fake’, a Demon… For him that’s possibly the highest compliment he can ever give.

 “I take back all the crap I gave you for being a fake. If you’re really ready to take on the life of a Demon, that means you must have a Demon’s name. I name you… Dùjuān huā jīngshén.”

You think back to the first night you met Kun, his hair whipping around his face as snow falls around him like these monstrous azalea blooms do… It seems almost as if the name had been chosen long, long ago; so perfectly befitting of him.

“Thanks, I guess, but I’m not doing this so you’ll call me a Demon, you know.” Kun’s mouth quirks upward into a smile as he slides his sword from its sheath. With a sigh, his body shivers and suddenly his hair is white.

“Can’t play long, though. That a problem?”

“Not at all. I’ll kill you with the first blow.”

The air is tense between the two; not a soul can come between them. A wind blows up, casting scores of petals into the air. Between the two combatants, there’s a brief moment of stillness. If only for a second, their swords meet. The two trade blows that thunder through the field around you, slashing with their full body weight.

Donghyuck’s sword passes within a hair's breadth of Kun, but the Hwarang had found his mark.He buries his sword deep into the Demon’s heart.

“There’s still something I’ve got to protect,” Kun murmurs slowly, his voice full of confident authority,  “I can’t lose, not even to a Demon.”

Donghyuck gazes up at the clear blue sky, and you can almost see a faint grunt creep onto his face. 

His lips move, “If my end were to be met with the blade of a Demon like yourself… Then I have no regrets… I have lived my life with honor, and I die with the same.” Donghyuck’s eyes are free of hostility, if anything, he seems at peace. To die in a duel against a foe he respects… “You’ve defeated me. Now you must live out what you have left, Qian Kun.”

Those are his last words. 

Kun draws his sword from Donghyuck’s body as it falls, dropping the still bloody sword back into its scabbard, “... I will.” Then his body trembles for a moment, and he gasps before falling to his knees.

“Kun!” You shout and run to his side. As he lies on his back, you take his hands into yours, “Please hang in there!” Your desperate screams reverberate around you, but Kun can only manage an uncertain lip curl.

“Man, you always have to cry, don’t you?” Kun smiles up at you, his voice weak, “If you don’t get thicker  skin, there’s no way you’ll be able to handle being married to a warrior…” He winces with near every word and your heart clenches at the pain he must be in. 

“I only cry because of you… And besides, being married to a warrior doesn’t make you impervious to watching the person you love get hurt.” Teardrops stream down your cheeks, dripping down on his bruised face. He reaches his hand unsteadily upward to wipe your flowing tears, kindly running a finger across your cheek. 

“D- Don’t worry… You won’t ever have to cry on my behalf again. Just let me spend whatever time I have left with you beside me. I want to enjoy it…” Kun’s eyes quietly shut. You hold tightly onto his blood soaked body, hugging him closely as the blood seeps into your robes. Bright blossoms dance cooly around you as you look to the sky.

June 15th, 667 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla Kun never made it to the gates or siege of Pyongyang. He never saw the fall of Yeon Gaesomun or the Unification of Silla. You hear later that it was Wen Junhui who brokered for a sated peace between Tang and Silla, at least for the time being.

The Tang reclaimed Minghao and his ships as soon as they could, returning him to their capital to bestow honors and titles on him. Somehow, Shotaro made it through the battle, despite having been on the front line. When you asked what he intended to do, he laughed and said he’d probably open a swordsmanship school in Seorabeol. Jeno, on the other hand, was entrusted by Kun with the Hwarang, returned to Seorabeol to try and rebuild what men they have left. As for Jungwoo, before the battle of Pyongyang, took his own life with a concoction of opium. You suppose he would have seen his life as forfeit if he couldn’t continue being a warrior… 

From the stoop of your home, you watch the blooms of flowers lining the road before you, recalling everything that had occurred up north. 

How many men had given their lives for what they believed in…? Perhaps most of all, you remember the time spent with Kun. Every time you come across an abundance of them, they remind you of that dreamlike spring, so far removed from it, you’re left to wonder if you really had spent all that time with him.

“You really like those flowers, don’t you?” A voice murmurs out from beside you, a mass of warmth pressing against you as another body squeezes into the doorframe.

“Yeah.” Neither the Yuchae nor the sansuyu can compare. “I like them because they remind me of you.”

Kun looks at you in a serene contemplation for a moment, then lets his grin spread across his face into a smile, “Well, I like them too. They look good on you.” His voice, soft and quiet, throws your mind into chaos.

“Lately, I’ve been worried about the end…” He hums, noting your confusion, “I never get bored when I’m with you. Sometimes, I wish I could live forever.”

As a Fury, Kun has spent his future in exchange for power in the present. How much he’s spent, you don’t know. His life could end tomorrow. If he could live forever, then that fear of the unknown will disappear. 

“It’d probably be an easy way to go… to accept that I’m used up and wither away. But there’s no need for me to ask for an end. Since I want to live, I'll fight for survival. That suits me better.”

“I don’t want to be apart,” you say, your hand holding onto the sleeve of his robes. “I want to stay with you for as long as I can.”

He chuckles, “You cry so easily, I’d feel pretty bad if I left you behind.”

“Oh…” Tears had begun to run down your cheek without you noticing at first. You blink in surprise, but that hardly helps. You raise your hand to wipe them away but he grins and stops you.

“I’ll get them for you,” he says softly, gently drying them with his fingers. “It’s my job to help you.”

“Then it’s my job to support you too.”

“Of course, who else could fit that role aside from you?” He murmurs with a smile, “No matter what I do to drive you away, you won’t go. You even followed me to Pyongyang. I lost to you… and I don’t think I can ever win.”

You want to hold on to this moment of him, the memory, for as long as you can. 

#nct fluff #nct angst #nct smut #kun x reader #kun fluff #kun angst #kun smut #wayv fluff #wayv angst #wayv smut #it's here :)

[sichengjpeg]

wayv’s 96 line: OWO what’s this?? asterisk giggles asterisk

winwin:

#(ten voice) amazing diss #winwin #kun #nct ten #dong sicheng #qian kun #chittaphon leechaiyapornkul #ogpost #nct winwin #wayv ten #nct kun #li yongqin #wayv kun #wayv winwin #wayv #wayv-ehind #weishenv #nct vision #nct china #nct #neo culture technology #nct memes

[qiankunfics]

Fics Alert & Updates

New Fics

KunTen

1.   My gorgeous by Holmes_n_Moriarty

Summary: Kun is perfect until he's not. Rating: General Status: On-Going

2. Lil' Something by ugly_little_sandcastles

Summary: There's just something about Ten that burrows beneath his skin, prickling and sharp and hot, hot, hot. Rating: Explicit Status: One-Shot

3. Dandelions by eyesonflowers

Summary: After four years, Ten reunited with Kun. Rating: Mature Status: On-Going

 4. to fall in love in the wintertime by energyboyeric

Summary: To fall in love in the wintertime, Ten decides, is to fall in love with stillness. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

5. honey, shut your mouth by lowkeyamen

Summary: It's date night but Kun, wrecked from work, is on the brink of falling asleep. Ten knows just how to solve that. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot Fem!KunTenWin

6. The Home My Forefathers Built by jiaqins

Summary: Kun is a brilliant Parisian med student, he has two jobs which he is fond of and relatives whom he loves��even when they are as annoying as his cousin Yangyang. But too many challenges stand in his way and disturb the stability he cherishes so dearly. Rating: Teen Status: On-Going 

7. crazy over you by andnowforyaya

Summary: The photo of Kun's next mark was a flattering one. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot  Trigger: Death 

8. When the time is right by drawing_board

Summary: Nothing in the way he feels towards Ten significantly changes. But he realizes that somewhere in there was a latent desire for more. Rating: Mature  Status: On-Going 

9. the last three times we'll meet (see you again) by kloudoie

Summary: Ten sees the number he'll meet people behind their backs–except one.  Rating: General Status: One-Shot

10. better days around the corner with you by tullycat

Summary: On a Monday afternoon, the most beautiful man Kun has ever seen walks into the café. Rating: General Status: One-Shot

11.  Dreamscape by YHXLWTK

Summary: Ten sighed dramatically and took a step forward so he was standing beside Kun. “You’re my partner for tonight.” Rating: Mature Status: On-Going

12. No matter how goods you're at pretending, your eyes can't lied by Mywoojinie

Summary: NCT2020 promotions really makes relationship between Ten and Kun stumbles. Well. Johnny are there, of course Kun would be jealous. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

13. Unnatural by dojaefairy

Summary: The first time Ten cheats on his boyfriend, he tells himself it's a one-time mistake. It's unnatural of him to cheat on Johnny. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot Trigger: Cheating 

14. Mystery Boy by taetens

Summary: Kun has kept most of his life private, so when he opens up about his newest relationship with some hot shot fashion designer, no one believes him. Rating: Mature Status: On-Going

15.  The Good Side by starrykun

Summary: Kun and Ten work for the same company and were paired to work together to make a collab album. But will things work out between the two? Rating: Teen  Status: On-Going

16. slow dancing in the dark by camellia117

Summary: in which kun needs to learn how to slow dance, and he trusts ten to teach him. or maybe, a story where two lonely boys find love accidentally, by slow dancing in the dark. Rating: General  Status: Completed 

17.  sync up, fall harder by suheafoams

Summary:  kun agrees to help ten plan out a date for his friend. more falls into place than what he initially anticipated. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

18. Hearing Your Voice (Is All I Need) by peachy_beomie

Summary: But there’s only one person who calls him Yongqin. Rating: General Status: One-Shot

19. it’s almost like you’re in love with me (or something) by Markmeinyourheart

Summary: four times kun and ten were complicated and the one time they really weren't. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

20. cat got your tongue? by starrytae

Summary: kunten miraculous ladybug au Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

21. when he sleeps by bahasakalbu

Summary: Ten can't sleep, and Kun is in a deep slumber beside him. Ten minds wonders around their previous memories, while looking at Kun's sleeping form. Rating: Mature Status: One-Shot

22. Home-cooked Meal by autumn_sparrow

Summary: Kun makes dinner while Ten takes a nap. Rating: General Status: One-Shot

23. See You Soon, Baby by nekowafers

Summary: Kun is an office worker who lived a pretty boring until he met Ten, an annoyingly good-looking vampire who won't stop sneaking through his apartment window. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot

24. Not Like That by Meow12251

Summary:  “You know, Kun, you’re not really my type,” Ten says. Kun opens his mouth, face scrunching, unsure what to say. He wonders if he should take offense. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

25. Welcome Home by DestinyHope

Summary: Ten and Kun were living in their house, dreaming about adopting some kids and finally have a family of their own. They didn't expect to end up taking care of boys around their age in need of love and care. Rating: Teen Status: On-Going 

26. softly killing me by yeollama

Summary: Ten and Kun lived the ideal suburban dream, suffocating marriage and all. Of course, it wasn't without a few secrets. Rating: Mature Status: One-Shot

27. persona by latedreams

Summary: However, there were pieces that seemed to have been carved to fit together perfectly, edges effortlessly moulding to each other, creating a perfect harmony. Those were Ten's favourites. Rating: General Status: One-Shot

28. whispers of only the two of us by frinkles

Summary: Ten’s hair sits so well between Kun’s fingers. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot

29. Floating Encounters by stupefiscience

Summary: Kun, an exhiled assassin from one of mainland china’s biggest crime groups tries to find his redemption by taking down Ten. An unknown jack of all trades menacing the powerful dogs of the city. Things take a spicy turn, though. Rating: Mature Status: On-Going

30. give all my secrets away by yeollama

Summary: Finding out Kun and Ten had some weird secret life which involved violence, cars and constant lying was not what Yangyang planned to overhear, but oh well. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

31. hold onto my mask by moonjongup (nicrt)

Summary: They fell in love over time. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

32. your ethereal existence by moonwalker116 (mikararinna)

Summary: “Because if humans can imagine what aliens look like, who’s to say that they haven’t seen a ghost in real life and spreading tales about them?” Rating: General Status: One-Shot

33.  gold star of friendship by sunkissedhyuck

Summary: kun and ten didn't know what to expect at first when putting chenle into school for the first time, but it certainly wasn't anything close to this. Rating: General Status: One-Shot 

34. Penis Colada by pinkfire

Summary: “So, what brings you here?” Ten prompted.“My dick,” Kun blurted, and Ten, who was mid-sip, laughed a spray of tea back into his mug. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot

35. Second Chances by Vante_20

Summary: That night Kun left Ten hanging. Now he is second guessing himself. Things go down and he knows he won't be able to live with himself if give them a chance. Rating: General  Status: One-Shot

36. In A Blink of An Eye by haneyangie

Summary: A secret melody that only he knows. Rating: General Status: One-Shot

37.  Some Other Day by qianwtch (dxnutcare)

Summary:  Ten somehow felt more homesick than usual. He had been laying in bed doing nothing but trying to sleep his frustration away. Rating: General  Status: One-Shot

38. The Finish Line by Maiamia

Summary: Kun is a serious man. Always. It is a requirement for his job after all. But when he’s forced to rely on a shameless, way to handsome driver and his team of outlaws to complete the most important mission of his career, he might realize that keeping it professional is not as easy as it seemed. Rating: Teen Status: One-Shot

39. Are You A Magician? (Cause You Make My Breath Disappear) by peachy_beomie

Summary:  “Why would I embarrass myself more than I already have?” “Cause your future husband Ten Lee thinks you’re cute, idiot!” Rating: General Status: One-Shot 

40.  in the frozen land, on the night where everything sleeps by 10vesyou

Summary: It marked their one of many, their last strive to save their brother. Tracing the flakes of snow hovering in the air, they set their heart on finding the hidden secret of the world: The Tree of Language. Rating: Teen  Status: One-Shot 

41.  advil and antagonism by ouchsolo for zhosungs

Summary: Kun doesn't think his life could get anymore laughable, until the man he's sworn to hate forever is sitting drunk on his bed and he has no idea what to do with him. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot

JohnKun

42. The Day You Walked Away by senja

Summary: 9 years later, and the same fate was repeated, only this time, only one walked away. Rating: General Status: One-Shot

43. My Universe by senja

Summary:  Kun was trying his best to stay cool by drinking a cup of iced americano in a middle of a busy cafe and suddenly a (not really) unfamiliar man came up to him and asked a question he have never received before. Rating: General Status: One-Shot 

44. Work From Home by jhengchie

Summary: Inspired by the Song Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot 

45. not coming back by Kiyuan

Summary: Kun doesn’t like talking about his school days. He’d rather not relive the days he spent hopping between worlds, thinking about nothing else than his partner, his friend and the adventures. Rating: General Status: One-Shot 

46.  Trust Me by seungwanxndxnly

Summary: Qian Kun and the Case of the Big Bomb Rating: Teen Status: On-Going 

KunWin / WinKun

47.  i could be your escape by bambirouge

Summary: Kun’s voice drops to a downright sinful level. “What if I got you hard, right here, right now, in the middle of all these people?” Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot

KunCas / LuKun 

48.  Collar Me by softyjseo

Summary: Lucas and Kun were meant for each other, in all of the different ways they can imagine. Rating: Explicit  Status: One-Shot 

Twitter Fics - 

49.https://twitter.com/peachy_beomie/status/1384891177636405248?s=21

Summary: Ten rates his boyfriend’s reactions to his petnames. 

50. https://twitter.com/dojaefairy/status/1377708043807436805 

Summary: Ten decides to confess to Kun on April Fools Day so that he can pretend his confession was just a joke if Kun rejects him, and things get messy.

  Updates

KunTen

1. Wrong (Right) Ad by Alette 2. Has To Be Mine by rowx3yourships 3. catch him if you can by blazingsirius 4. No Biting by taetens 5. Coming Home by YeolsTruly 6. electric magnetic by miramiro 7. Escaping The Moon by Chi_Can 8 .Countdown from Nine by MailOrderBride 9. Pierced! by HaloHalo 10. You Make Staying Away So Hard by Kill3rWhal3D1ck 11. On Thin Ice by taetens 12. all's well that ends well. by chenaki 13. diamonds by rainingover

JohnKun 14.  Afterglow by owzy

#kun #qian kun #kunten #johnkun #kuncas #lukun #kunwin #winkun #tenkun #updates #new fics

[chaislatt]

WAYV AS HOGWARTS STUDENTS

QIAN KUN

ravenclaw , head boy, muggleborn

excels in every class he takes

when he first discovered he was magic, he flipped out

he had a matilda episode in his room one night

he was staring intently at his toy planes, wondering how it would be like to fly one someday

then suddenly it just?? levitated??

as an eight year old, he did the only thing he could do in such situations—scream bloody murder

first year : in his newly pressed robes and neatly gelled hair, sat at an empty compartment and started reading his textbooks

until the compartment door opened and a cat just walked over him

“oh sorry, leon doesn’t behave very well” says ten who he did not think would stick around but guess what? his cats liked him

being sorted into ravenclaw, he quickly became famous for being the smartest and wittiest most sensible? wizard of his year

he was especially great at charms got so surprised that there was an incantation to make things float, since all he has been doing is just think it (flitwick got a shock at his first year doing wandless magic)

as he grew older, almost everyone depended on him for help in everything

he couldn’t go a day walking in the corridors without someone asking to meet up at the library or thanking him because they aced their tests

but of course, this little ravenclaw had a limit

he didn’t mean to, but one day he just snapped at a poor gryffindor who kept bugging him to meet at the courtyard to practice spells (everyone finally left him alone, too scared to face the wrath of a wizard who knows all the spells for duelling)

OWLS year—the most memorable year for him, as he and ten spent nights in the library (and sometimes in the kitchen but if anyone asks only ten was in there) studying their bums off

that summer, ten just received a holler from him (surprise! he got all o’s)

naturally, he had been picked for prefect and head boy

the first years LOVED him

he taught them all the secrets to their tower and even handed them a parchment full of riddle answers, because let’s be real, even though you’re a ravenclaw doesn’t necessarily mean you want to use your head all the time

eats at the hufflepuff table because they have better breakfast items

adopted a whole assortment of kids with ten (winwin kinda just sticked around because yangyang was his buddy)

would be the boys’ go to— from pesky spells, ink blotts on their robes, th right grams for mandrake powder, they all depended on him for it

hendery was once asked why he wasn’t scared of him (knowing what happened before)

“he’s not dumb enough to duel someone because they’re bugging him. that’s why he’s in ravenclaw”

overall 9/10. minus one point because he still feels the need to get the last remark in everything.

LI YONGQIN

hufflepuff, pureblood

loves hanging out at the common room

doesn't really care much for grades, but does his best when studying

his housemates call him a sloth

moves so slow, especially in the mornings

likes taking walks along the corridors because it's fun to see other students rush and run to their classes while he walks a leisurely pace

always has his tie loosened

sometimes, he doesn't even tie it, he just wraps it around his collar and hope no one notices everyone does

has a talent for transfiguration

will turn anything into cat snacks

he once turned his homework in kibble and his excuse was "my cat ate it"

befriends all the cats in hogwarts

sometimes he lays down at the courtyard and they all just gather around him

one legendary moment (as lucas likes to call it) was when he was walking down the corrider and a train of cats just followed behind him in a single file

sweet wizard boy, befriends humans as well

he's so likeable, everyone just feels drawn to him

has this laidback energy that feels like a breath of fresh air when things get hectic in the castle

speaking of fresh air

he likes to stroll around outside, most of the time dragging yangyang and winwin out with him

"winwin could use the fresh air and your voice doesn't echo" - ten to yangyang

his sister is friends with yangyang's sister, so growing up he kind of babysat the three whenever their families would be together

he didn't imagine that it would continue during school, but poor winwin looked like he just wanted to get his head bitten off

despite having a lot of friends, he sticks with kun most of the time because he's not as chatty when he's focused (and kun is focused all the time so)

his favourite thing to do anywhere is lay down on his back and play with his wand, sending wisps of magic swirling around in the air, creating beautiful artwork

received pencils and a notebook from kun so he could just draw because "your magic might hit someone and i do not want to be involved with any of that"

doodles all the time

he likes to draw butterflies and magic them off of the paper and makes them follow his friends around

doesn't really say much when no one's talking to him, but will keep the conversation going casually

wanted to become a prefect so he could have his own bathroom

would patrol around at night with his cats (hendery jokes how he looks like filch and now he takes his filch impersonation seriously)

when catching students, he makes obvious remarks like "oh wow good to know that there aren't any gryffindors in this corridor! it would be an awful hassle to report them. good thing everyone's in their chambers!"

very lenient on students he doesn't know, but will threaten those he does and ask for something in return

accidentally gave yangyang the idea of becoming a prefect so he needn't have to worry at night

also accidentally gives yangyang dare ideas to give to hendery

he doesn't mean it! most of the time

overall 10/10. everything is cancelled out by the fact that he goes around the castle with atleast 2 cats following him around.

DONG SICHENG

slytherin, pureblood

mr frowns-a-lot, mr don’t-talk-to-me, mr i-want-to-go-back-to-my-dorm

the most stereotyped slytherin

first years believe that slytherins are scary because of him (but they immediately get debunked by hendery “you’re scared of a tall dude who gets tired from talking and likes to eat chocolate? yeah okay”)

but yes this not so little bean finds talking draining

it’s not that he doesn’t want to, but why would he have to talk about his day when as far as he knows, everyone just did the same thing he did??

you can barely get a sentence out of him

will reply with nods or shrugs and just point or look at things

only talks during class when the professors ask him questions

yangyang bugs him the most

when he got assigned to take care of this chatty, full of energy first year he almost cried

ended up just following him around and yanking the back of his robes to stop him from getting into trouble

because of this, yangyang’s friend are his friends

first got introduced to xiaojun, lucas, and hendery

ended up becoming a babysitter for four

when he met ten, he almost cried again, but now out of happiness  because he got yangyang to shut up

met kun last, and immediately took a liking to him for no reason at all

no one knows how, but suddenly mr-i-dont-want-to-do-anything started getting more mischievous and talkative

the whole hall got surprised when he laughed at lucas’ lame joke

this may be an exaggeration but the boy doesn’t even smile

after this incident, lucas just kept talking to him and he just kept replying, and pretty soon the four little troublemakers would joke around with him and he’d just sit back with kun and ten when he got too tired

this made him attractive

but unlike lucas who got confessed to everyday, there was no one who confessed to him

he didn’t really talk to anyone else and just minded his own business when he was alone, so everyone was too scared to confess to him

which is a huge relief to him because the not so little bean is actually very awkward

proven when hendery accepted yangyang’s dare of going right up in winwin’s face omygod when i tell you his whole face turned red

he avoided hendery for a week until he realized it was too hard since they have most of their classes together??

speaking of classes, it’s a miracle how he just passes everything since no one actually ever sees him studying or doing homework

it’s like everything he does is magic well

overall 7/10. doesn’t really try that much and will only voluntarily hang out with kun.

HUANG XUXI

hufflepuff, halfblood

was tiny, like a little bug

no one knows when he got so tall (summer of second year, he had to buy new robes for third year because they were already too short)

spends breakfast half awake, focusing on eating his meal and listening to yangyang complain about how hard his transfiguration classes yesterday were

he’s never around for dinner because he’s always at the pitch and no one has the energy to talk to yangyang in the mornings so he’s the poor guy

everyone loves him, no one can find a single thing to hate about him even if they tried

loves care for magical creatures with hagrid (he measures his height with the half-giant)

other classes? not so much

sure he tried a little bit, but why would he need to transfigure something into a pen when he could just look for one, and why would he need to concoct a drowsiness potion if he can just will himself to sleep

speaking of sleep, he does that a lot

he likes to wait for xiaojun during fourth period because they had arithmancy next, and he would lean against the corridor and sleep

learned how to sleep hunched over so it looked like he was focusing on class (begs whoever he’s sitting with to wake him up)

why does he do this?

“i’m saving up my energy for later”

he’s a quidditch beast

part of the quidditch team, originally tried out for seeker but they realized he couldn’t go fast enough without loosing his balance on his broom

he switched to being a beater, which the team found out he was very good at aha great power comes with great biceps

everyone falls in love with him when he’s on the pitch

he looks big and scary and ultra focused

and they realized after 3 games that he focuses so much because he aims the bludger to hit the player’s upper thigh only (this prevents player from taking a fall and just bruise, not break a bone)

once he accidentally sent his bludger flying too hard and knocked the chaser off, but he was faster than the seeker and caught them (followed the poor chaser for a week saying sorry and giving them semi burnt cookies he made with xiaojun)

gets confessed to every other day and just says “thanks”

but why don’t you ever reject them? 

why deny that i’m handsome?

that makes no sense

as with rejecting them! 

but truly is an angel

he even got winwin to actually converse with him

he makes everyone feel comfortable, talks to everyone and just hangs around when they don’t want to, offering company

overall 10/10. his cockiness about his looks just makes him endearing since everyone knows he can’t break someone’s heart.

XIAO DEJUN

ravenclaw, halfblood

kun’s reincarnation

but there’s one problem

he’s still immature

you would think he’s the prime example of a ravenclaw

practices his passions all the time

likes doing brain-productive things

reads about anything he finds interesting

goes in and out of their tower because he thinks solving the riddles is fun

but ho ho ho oh oh no

he’s a little devil

makes snarky comebacks under his breath that takes a little bit for you to understand

makes things harder on purpose just for fun and because he’ll be the only one able to do it

has a joke for EVERYTHING and never repeats them so i guess he can get away with that

he’s a little menace to the society but he can get away with it because it’s all just minor inconveniences

but we all know minor inconveniences are the most annoying things

likes to annoy kun the most because he understands and reacts immediately

doesn’t like to annoy the hufflepuffs because they just smile at him in confusion

despite that, he’s also a little sweetheart

remembers everything his friends say, so he’s always there to remind them

reminds kun about a test he has to retake, ten about his changing patrolling schedule, winwin’s meeting with a professor, lucas’ need to polish his broom after dinner, hendery’s homework, and yangyang about that incoming howler from his parents

when he realized he’s such a great asset, he became a bit nosy too

likes to meddle with all of his friends’ business

so if someone wants to find any of the six, he can tell you a vague description where they are

because of course he’s not gonna tell you lucas is by the lake practicing his swinging, he’s gonna tell you he’s brushing up on his quidditch skills so you’d go running to the pitch

this way he’s not technically doing anything wrong to both parties

one day, kun asks why he likes doing this

“it makes me feel like a king maker. feeding things into their tiny brains and knowing exactly what they’ll be doing”

“that’s not exactly what a king maker does”

“yeah but does it look like i want them to be more powerful than me?”

co-parents a dog with lucas

aka lucas asked him to take care of bella while he’s in practice but he forgot to take her back with him for 2 days so now bella thinks she lives in the ravenclaw tower too

does random errands for his friends as a way of apologizing (but really just as a leverage so he can cause more trouble)

his ultimate goal was to brainwash everyone so they couldn’t live without him and he succeeded????

now they’re the receiving end of all the sermons his professors give him (you wouldn’t expect it, but he causes quite a ruckus in class)

but still, at the end of the day, they choose to sit next to him at the ravenclaw table during dinner

overall 7/10. he’s annoying, but he’s good at everything he does and helps his friends out in different ways. which makes him more annoying because why? why not

HUANG GUANHENG

gryffindor, muggleborn

does not understand magic. like at all

the only reason he’s still managing is because he refuses to be beaten by xiaojun

he doesn’t know why he’s in gryffindor but anyone who’s ever met him can vouch for the sorting hat

he’s courageous in the way he faces learning magic (it won’t hurt me, i’m magic) he's brave to speak up to anyone and ask for help when he needs it, and most of all, he has the nerve to get right into winwin’s face

surprisingly good at harder spells than that of his year level, so he’s in a few higher level classes

the reason being he wants to save face when with upperclassmen so he actually focuses real hard and actually understands 

because when he’s with his friends, his mind goes wandering and he can’t focus his magic 

a very strange wizard indeed

imagine getting help from xiaojun to levitate a piece of parchment but can explain to ten how to brew an advanced potion

he’s very confident in his abilities

why would he be nervous to stay after curfew??

if filch catches you

then don’t i just have to avoid him??

but has realistic fears

will not go near a broom

yeah okay the broom can fly, but can he?? he can’t even levitate a piece of parchment, how can he levitate himself?

also very practical

lucas kept struggling since he kept spilling his ink pot so he handed him a pen

“dude i forgot these existed!” “who writes with feathers??”

the most laid back yet extra ordinary wizard ever

you can start a conversation with him and he can keep it going for hours on end

very friendly, will talk to anyone but the downside to this is that he talks to everyone like they’re his friends asdkjshjkd even mcgonagall

overall 7/10. uses magic to solve trivial muggle things and still makes bets with yangyang up to this day.

LIU YANGYANG

slytherin, pureblood

a force to be reckoned with

spend a day with him and your ears will bleed

why?? does?? he?? talk?? so?? much??

his friends always complain but everyone else in the castle can’t see why

in the eyes of a stranger, he’s actually cold and reserved, hard to approach

but if you actually knew him

oh boy you’d want to not

can talk for hours

he and hendery wanted to know just how long he could talk

so they timed it

talked for 9 hours straight, no one knows how they managed

good thing this talking is actually useful

he likes to recite during class, always has a lengthy explanation for his answers

people aren’t the only one he talks to

he talks to the ghosts and to the paintings, greeting them a lovely day or whatever

besides talking, he also has another passion–quidditch

he plays as chaser for his house, often times taking his time to freshen up, so he goes back at about midnight during thursdays

good thing ten patrols during thursdays

speaking of ten, he’s been a brother figure for him all his life

so when he was introduced to winwin, he got so excited because he had another brother

by the end of the night, fourth year winwin knew everything about first year yangyang

he loooves his buddy

tries to do everything with winwin but he doesn’t let him

despite being too much to handle, winwin actually likes him too (but don’t let yangyang know)

likes to do dumb dares with hendery

isn’t really into pranking and getting all up into other’s business, so they manage their mischief between the two of them

and the whole of hogwarts just enjoys and guesses which of the two would be the one running around the great hall in their pajamas

yangyang actually encourages his fellow slytherins to stop sticking among themselves

mostly because he’s tired of them bugging him to “go ask your gryffindor friend if there’s homework on-”

at the end of the day, all his slytherin friends have been adopted by ten, took a liking to kun, and watches lucas, xiaojun and hendery fool around for entertainment

that being said, he loves his friends

thankful that he has classes with at least one of them for all his classes

all his professors have learned to sit him next to them, otherwise he’ll just slack off and stare into oblivion

he’s actually more productive when he has someone to remind him to be

okay maybe sitting him next to hendery wouldn’t result to school productivity

overall 9/10. it would be an 8 but he actually does acknowledge he talks too much.

#chaislatt #wayv as #kun #kun x reader #wayv kun #wayv kun x reader #ten #ten x reader #wayv ten #wayv ten x reader #winwin #winwin x reader #wayv winwin #wayv winwin x reader #lucas #lucas x reader #wayv lucas #wayv lucas x reader #xiaojun #xiaojun x reader #wayv xiaojun #wayv xiaojun x reader #hendery #hendery x reader #wayv hendery #wayv hendery x reader #yangyang #yangyang x reader #wayv yangyang #wayv yangyang x reader

[markftmingi]

mutants of facility v

[this is just a little idea i had. not planning on writing it as of right now but doing these little profiles was fun.]

—

These documents are classified top secret. Do not steal, do not read, and do not share. Use is limited to those who are authorized to have the information in the performance of their duties. All data is reported by Scientist Jung. Badge #127021497.

LUCAS

name: wong yukhei

nickname(s): xuxi, lucas, angel

birthday: 01/25/1999

id #: 10100

abilities: can flight due to large, retractable wings on his back. appears to be some kind of bird hybrid but we aren’t sure. can hide his wings by morphing them into his back. ⚠️: after an attempted escape, we cut off his wings. cruel but necessary. the research lab is sure that he can grow them back. until then, keep your distance. he is very angry and very hurt.

WINWIN

name: dong sicheng

nickname(s): winwin, big guy

birthday: 10/28/1997

id #: 111

abilities: all abilities were not tested. known abilitie(s) are: size manipulation. he can grow his limbs and body to any size he pleases. we’ve formulated metal chains to null his powers. last known mutant with the same power destroyed the old facility. ⚠️: DO NOT REMOVE THE CHAINS.

KUN

name: qian kun

nickname(s): beast, tiger

birthday: 01/01/1996

id #: 1011

abilities: most abilities of all mutants. super acute senses: super sight, super smell, super hearing. superhuman stamina, super healing, and retractable claws. has the abilities of a werewolf. ⚠️: don’t feed raw meat. he goes into a frenzy.

HENDERY

name: wong kunhang

nickname(s): water boy, hendery

birthday: 09/28/1999

id #: 101100

abilities: ability to breathe under water, water manipulation. if further testing is done, we might be able to see if he can transform into water himself. ⚠️: once attempted to drown a security guard after hours. don’t enter the pool room.

XIAOJUN

name: xiao dejun

nickname(s): xiaojun, hot stuff

birthday: 08/08/1999

id #: 1000

abilities: high heat temperature. radiates steam off his body. when angry enough, his hands catch on fire but he doesn’t have much control over the flames. ⚠️: do NOT touch. you will suffer severe burns.

YANGYANG

name: liu yangyang

nickname(s): yang

birthday: 10/10/2000

id #: 10110

abilities: he’s new to the facility so we haven’t done much testing. appears to have telepathy. refers to the voices in his head as his friends. often laughs out loud at whatever he’s hearing and writes things he hears down on the cell walls. ⚠️: no warnings as of now. keep an eye on him though.

TEN

name: li yongqin

nickname(s): ten

birthday: 02/27/1996

id #: 1010

abilities: an ex-mutant, now worker of this facility. the only mutant that we have fully cured. used to have the ability to shape shift. ten could mimic people’s bodies and voices. he could shift into both people and animals. ⚠️: now that he has turned against the mutants, they all hate him. however, we can’t be too sure to trust him either...

#future au maybe #kpop au #nct au #nct sm au #nct social media au #wayv au #wayv social media au #wayv #nct #cpop #kpop #wayv scenarios #nct scenarios #wayv smut #nct smut #wayv lucas #wayv winwin #wayv kun #wayv ten #wayv yangyang #wayv hendery #wayv xiaojun #lucas #winwin #kun #yangyang #hendery #ten #xiaojun

[jungwooisms]

hwarang | l.donghyuck

ACT II

pairing: lee donghyuck x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, qian kun, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, dong sicheng (winwin), wong yukhei (lucas), xiao dejun (xiaojun), na jaemin, lee jeno, osaki shotaro, jeong sungchan warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, mentions of suicide, alcohol, possessiveness, minor character death, war, some historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 24.8k it is important to read the prologue and act i first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

ACT II – Ghosts of the Past

June 29th, 665 – The Northwestern Pass, Kingdom of Silla The wind whispers past your cheeks, its song whistling through the pines in the summer night air. Thick fog covers the mountain path, blanketing the rows of trees in front of you. The fresh scent of dew cupped on the leaves hits your nose immediately. The roads to Ungjin are still plagued with the remnants of the felled Baekje forces and pushing Silla men.

For Donghyuck this is both enemy and allied territory. In order to avoid being detected and engaging in unnecessary violence, you had no choice but to abandon your horse some weeks back and travel down a minor off-trail path. Your mind has been elsewhere, focusing on the hope that the Hwarang had arrived in Ungjin safely. Visions plague you, some in which several members hadn’t survived the onslaught at Seorabeol, and had been left to suffer alone on the battlefield as their life fades atop the cinders.

Instead of heading straight for Goguryeo territory, Donghyuck and you settled on arriving to Ungjin first to reunite you with the members of the Hwarang.

Your arms and legs are scraped by the scattering of branches sticking into the path, your eyes struggling to see through the opaque dark,

“Calm down for a moment,” Donghyuck sighs out loftily, “At this pace, you’re only going to overexert yourself well before we reach an inn.”

“I appreciate your concern,” you begin, swatting away a few gnats flying in your field of vision, “If we want to get to Ungjin as soon as possible, then we need to be quick about it.”

“Well, it isn’t going to happen simply because you will it,” his voice holds a calm resolve, “Tonight, we rest here.”

“But—!” You begin.

“Munmu has already foolishly aligned himself with the Tang.” His lips turn downwards into a frown, “It will be some time before they are prepared to stage another large-scale battle. Without a war to fight, Jinsang will have no master to give his bone, stifling his plans momentarily. So,” he looks to you, his eyes glinting in the moonlight, “quit your incessant rushing. Nothing you do now will be of any consequence later.”

He’s right. You hate to admit it but he’s right. Your feet are swollen, throbbing to the point that if you might take another step, you may topple over. You’d been aggressively jaunting through the rough, dimly-lit terrain for who knows how long.

 “As luck would have it, I believe there’s an abandoned home over there. Why don’t we look inside?” He says, not asking, really. His feet carry him forward to a black mass of a building that you had only just been able to make out the outline of until you near it.

Its dilapidated exterior doesn’t bolster much to its structural integrity, but you nonetheless follow Donghyuck’s lead.

The house itself is very modest in size. A fine film of dust coats nearly every inch of it, giving you the notion that it had been vacated some time ago.

“Is it really okay for us to stay in someone’s house?” You ask tentatively as you step across the floorboards.

“Hm,” he shrugs, noting the worn interior, “I would rather call this a hut than a house. It’s austere, isn’t it? But it’s obvious that no one lives here, so surely the former occupants won’t mind.”

Although the thought of intruding on someone’s home unsettles you, you do need somewhere to rest. You can’t run the risk of dying or being caught before finding the whereabouts of your father and brother.

Donghyuck finds a room with some dingy bedding arrangements, so at least you won’t be sleeping on the floor. His eyes dart around the room before he steps toward a sunken hearth, lowering himself to take a pinch of soot between his fingers.

Being alone with him in this derelict house is nerve-wracking. Without anything to contribute to the moment, you watch him examine the fireplace in silence.

His eyes thin as he hums to himself. After a moment, he reaches his hand into his pockets, taking pieces of flint from inside of it to try and ignite a flame.

“Donghyuck?” You call out, “If you’re trying to start a fire, I can do it.”

“Just be quiet and sit back,” he says, intent on his work, “This will warm us soon enough.”

“But isn’t building a fire more difficult than that?” Back when you’d lived with the Hwarang, or even with your father, it was rare that you’d need to build a fire from scratch. More often than not, you could rely on the hospitality of neighbors to provide materials when they were unavailable.

“Yes,” he nods, “it can be quite difficult. But only a human would shy away from difficulty. It’s only in their nature.” Donghyuck holds each piece of flint in his hands, clapping them together in a swift motion to produce sparks. Once more, he reaches into his pocket, pulling out a piece of parchment to use as kindling over the small, sunken fireplace, then continuing to clap the flint.

After a few more seconds, the sparks turn to embers over the parchment. He blows air into the flame, creating a fire where one hasn’t been seen for ages.

Although he’d been the one to suggest staying in this house, he doesn’t look tired in the slightest. Perhaps, you wonder, if he’d only suggested it for your sake….

“Sit closer to the fire,” he says quietly, “Even if it’s summer, it can get quite cold at night.”

You nod, moving over to sit by him near the flames. Your hands extend, hovering over the embers licking up into the air.

A shadow twists and flicks upon his face as he gazes quietly at the hearth. You realize now that there isn’t much you know about him, let alone the history of his people or where he comes from. To you, they’re simply Demons who are ideologically and politically opposed to the Hwarang. And that, as a Demon woman, you’re their target.

This is the extent of your knowledge, as his people have enshrouded themselves in secrecy for generations, so much so that even you hadn’t known you were a Demon. All you know is that Lee Donghyuck, Xiao Dejun and Dong Sicheng are all fierce, cunning warriors. Everything else is a complete enigma to you.

“…Donghyuck? Would you mind sharing some stories with me about our people? About the Demons?”

His eyebrows raise as he glances to you, “Where did this come from?”

“If what you, Sooyoung, my father and my brother all said is true… Then I, too, am part of the Demon clan, right?” You shift, “But I can’t help but feel so disconnected from it all. I have no idea where Demons came from, how long they’ve been around, or what they even are… That’s why I want to know more about myself, and about all of you, too.”

You’re staring into his face now, watching his scarlet eyes fixate on the fireplace scornfully.

For a moment, he’s silent, until he begrudgingly turns his face to your direction.

“I’m not a historian. I don’t know how the Demons came to be, nor when they decided to settle on this land. But one thing I know for sure is… The cycle of strife and bloodshed between Demons and humans is a tale as old as this world itself.” He lets out a huff of air, mulling over his next words, “We Demons will never lose to a human if it’s a one-on-one battle. But, what humans have, that we do not, is the gift of numbers. A tiger may be the toughest hunter in the forest but there is a limit to how much prey it can hunt. Human greed, however, has no limit,” an old log within the fireplace snaps, releasing a burst of light spiraling towards the hole in the ceiling, “Thus, Demons decided to exile themselves as a measure against their destructive forces.”

Your brow furrows as he speaks, waiting patiently for him to continue.

“Some Demons chose to resist the stain of inferiority encroaching upon our lands. Their resistance proved futile. In the end, the humans exterminated them without remorse.”

“If you were ever told the legends about ‘Demons’ in the past…” You recall the stories from your childhood.

“This is where their legend bears its origin. Some of them—those that survived, at least—are still alive, living in the shadows all across this country.”

How many Demon clans have gone into hiding…? How have they coped with their fate?

Listening to him speak of his people’s history so coldly raises so many questions.

“You mentioned something about how many of the Demon clans went into isolation to disappear for human society…” You begin, “What compelled you to align yourself with Baekje-Goguryeo and oppose Silla?” It’s peculiar that he’s violating his self-imposed exile when the rest of your kind is in hiding. Re-entering human society as a force of reckoning in the middle of a heavily politicized conflict rings out as especially strange to you.

He’s expressionless, thinning his eyes slightly in reaction to your question.

“There is nowhere left to hide for us. Nowhere left to run. Nowhere untainted by the curse of humanity.”

“…What?”

“The average human knows nothing of our existence. Unlike the leaders or cultural elites, who have been well-acquainted with out people for ages… Seven centuries ago, some lords of the Samhan approached our people, successfully currying favor with those willing to share their Demon powers with mankind… One such example was your clan.”

Your lips part in surprise, unable to form a coherent exclamation of surprise.

“During the Battle of Giryeong, it was your ancestors who aided the Mahan confederacy to push back the Han.”

The Battle of Giryeong was a momentous one, still spoken about today. Had the Samhan not pushed back Han forces, the three Kingdoms now would never have taken root…. To think that your ancestors had such a hand in influencing the battle’s outcome astounds you.

“The Lee and Xiao clans realized the threat posed by the Samhan and allied with the Han. Our current allegiance with Goguryeo stems from the fall of the Han, simply a continuation of our previous arrangement. Sicheng’s clan, on the other hand, appears to be serving the remaining Baekje loyalists and their former Yamato allies with intentions that are unknown to me.”

He hums, staring at the flames once more, “However, this shall be the last time our people involve ourselves with the paltry concerns of human conflict. Goguryeo is no longer dependent on our aid, either… Their newfound numbers of Furies will most certainly absolve us of our positions.”

Your mind goes to the thought of the Hwarang, and your gaze falls to the floor. The flame continues to crackle, punctuating the silence between the two of you.

“We start early tomorrow morning. Perhaps it would be better for you to rest now.” He states, fixing his posture.

In all honesty, you want to continue talking with him a bit longer, but you know of what’s to come tomorrow. There’s still so much of the mountainous range that you have left to trudge through, so you need every minute of rest that you can get.

“You’re right,” you nod, moving to your feet. It isn’t until you walk to the bedding do you see how moldy and musty it is. “Donghyuck… do you really expect me to sleep here?”

“Excuse me?” He asks, “How many other rooms do you see?”

As you listen carefully for any sound outside the house, you realize there’s nothing. Not a single bird or insect. Seemingly, the only life in the nearest mile is Donghyuck and you. That’s right; just the two of you, alone…

“What’s wrong?” Donghyuck’s voice pulls you from your thoughts, “Haven’t you crawled off to sleep yet?”

Although both of you are Demons, and in spite of how you’re dressed, the fact remains that the two of you are sleeping under the same room like it’s nothing. Not wanting to tip him off suspiciously about your behavior… Just in case, you discreetly pull the bedding from beside his bed towards the far corner next to the hearth. No matter how sly you try to be, he catches onto it immediately, smirking mockingly at you.

“I noticed how uncomfortable your eyes had been shifting, but now, it all makes sense.” He chuckles.

“Do you have a problem with that?” You question, “I am a woman, I have to be more safe than sorry.”

Donghyuck snickers lightly at you, his eyes thinning as they dart toward your direction. He speaks sharply, just above a whisper, “Do you think I’d make a move on you?”

“Of course not!” Your face is hot, and not because of the fire.

“I’m messing with you,” he shakes his head, “You think I’m some sort of ill-mannered creep, don’t you? Demons hold tradition and decorum to a high standard. I won’t lay a finger on you until our marriage is finalized.”

“Marr—I have no intention on marry—”

“Forget it,” he interrupts, “Just get some sleep. Tomorrow will be even more grueling. It would be in your best interest to rest.” Donghyuck spits his words out at you harshly, but you know his intentions are kind. Nevertheless, you slip tentatively into the damp, mildewy bedding.

Although, it hasn’t gone without saying that you’re still skeptical of him. But for now, you have to trust that he won’t lie or take advantage of you while you’re under his watch. More than that, it’s far more pertinent that you should worry about your father and Ahro’s whereabouts. The thought of your father’s new Furies overwhelming the Hwarang with their savage hunger is terrifying. You need to do whatever it takes to stop them.

Your eyes shut uneasily, falling asleep as the fire crackles hauntingly behind you.

June 30th, 665 – The Northwestern Pass, Kingdom of Silla As you awake, you feel as if you cannot move. Every inch of your body aches, and it feels as though you’d only just closed your eyes to go to sleep. Turning, you see Donghyuck sitting where he’d been the night prior, giving you the oddest sense of time dilation.

Sunlight refracts through the window, illuminating the dust flitting through the air. A sparrow chirps brightly outside… It truly is morning.

“Good morning…” You say tentatively as you pull yourself from bed.

“So, you are awake…” Donghyuck nods, “As soon as you’re ready, we’ll leave.”

Although it feels as if you haven’t slept at all, at the very least you’d been able to recuperate from the previous day, just in time for a physically-demanding trek.

“Donghyuck?” You ask as you begin to gather the few belongings you’d brought with you, “Did you stay up the whole night?”

“Well, not the whole night…” Or so he claims, but you have another idea. It was likely he observed the fire until sunrise, stoking it quietly in anticipation of morning.

“Thank you.”

“For what? I don’t recall doing anything to deserve your gratitude,” he says as he pushes himself from the floor. “Just hurry up and get ready, you want to find Jinsang as soon as possible, right?” Donghyuck sneers as he speaks, swiftly exiting the room as he finishes speaking.

Your initial impression of him had been a curt, egotistical man who intimidated and murdered his foes without remorse but… Perhaps there’s a bit more to them than you’d realized- maybe, deep down, he has a soft heart.

Ever since you’d been separated from the Hwarang, moments like these turned out to be far and few in-between. But you find your lips curling into a soft smile ever so slightly, and your chest feels a bit warm.

Donghyuck and you traverse the mountain path, walking through the dense rows of trees stretching as far as the eye can see, at long last, you reach a milestone, the Ungwon pass at Cheonhwangbong, the tallest peak on this range. It’s a positive sign that Ungjin isn’t too far away. Yet, just as you’re about to pass by a Silla security checkpoint stationed along the path by a nearby village, a voice calls out to you.

“Hey!”

Surprised, the two of you turn and greet a familiar face.

“Dejun!” You shout out, surprised and confused all the same, “What are you doing here?”

“I am en route to deliver a confidential letter on behalf of Goguryeo to a certain… other ally.” He says quickly, “What a coincidence to run into the two of you on my way there…”

“You would do best to ignore their orders,” Donghyuck says, “Consider the current balance of power. They no longer need us to serve as couriers to help their cause.”

“I had a feeling you’d have a snarky remark,” Dejun sighs, “Yet, I am here of my own volition. I figured there to be no need to cast Goguryeo aside just yet.”

“Suit yourself, fool,” Donghyuck murmurs.

“Well, the two of you have made excellent time to Ungjin but…” His brow furrows, “Just how do you plan on passing through the check over there?”

“Ah, well… Oh.” You begin. Donghyuck had taken the lead so decisively that you had never stopped to think there would be an issue. You glance at him worryingly, but he seems unfazed, answering Dejun with a deadpan delivery.

“I have a pass. It should work, no problem.” 

“I hate to be presumptive but, things have changed quite a bit since when we were given those passes.” Dejun responds, “Since those passes are valid under the condition Goguryeo hasn’t become an opposition to Silla. I am certain that, if you present your pass, they will stop you to verify your identities. And while she may be okay… You… Hm.”

“Enough of your riddles. Why don’t you just say whatever it is that you’re getting at?”

“I recommend that the two of you find another path,” Dejun says curtly, “Perhaps something more remote, to sneak into Ungjin.”

Donghyuck leers at Dejun irritably, visibly annoyed by his suggestion. “’Another path’? Are you seriously expecting the two of us to discover a more suitable path to enter Ungjin on this mountain?”

“Hey, I’m just trying to give you some advice. Wouldn’t want there to be any trouble for you.”

“In case you weren’t aware, Silla won their battle, I doubt there will be issues for those trying to ‘flee’ back home.”

Dejun’s arms cross, “You underestimate the humans. Just because they won, doesn’t mean they aren’t willing to make points about those who dare threaten their Kingdom. They aren’t pushovers and will not be so understanding to your reasoning.”

“Damn you,” Donghyuck’s voice lowers, “Where do you get the gall to speak to me so audaciously?!” He’s fuming, and his voice only becomes louder with each smug refutation from Dejun.

If they continue to bicker publicly, then the soldiers stationed nearby will surely notice. You need to find a way to calm him— “If the two of us have an issue entering the city, then it may arouse the suspicion of both my father and brother to our plans… Although the trip may take a bit longer, we should probably look for another route.”

Donghyuck’s lips purse momentarily, carefully thinking over what you’d said. “You make a good point. We wouldn’t want to raise either of their suspicions.” He straightens himself, “Vey well. If you feel up to the challenge, then finding another way won’t be too difficult. I don’t care how taxing the trail is, though. You’d better not whine at all, got it?”

“Yes,” you nod, “I understand.”

“Well,” Dejun speaks up, “I will be on my way. Do be careful.” Without another word, he spins on his heels and vanishes along the thick forest’s path behind you.

Taking a moment before setting off, you look to the sky above, watching a few birds circle overhead before turning to Donghyuck and nodding. The two of you walk away from the checkpoint, towards an uphill trail that is far from the well-trodden path.

“Already out of breath, are you?” He muses, “I told you this would be too much for you to handle.”

“No,” you vehemently shake your head, “I’m fine.” The steep inclines around the area are dotted with wide, thick boulders, which makes your grueling hike all the more laborious. The rocky grit underfoot isn’t much better when—

You feel yourself falling, traction lost underfoot as you nearly tumble off the side of a cliff into the valley when a hand grabs ahold of yours. It’s hard to shake off your horror upon seeing Donghyuck standing at the edge of the cliff as you hold onto his sleeve for dear life.

“Are you okay?” He asks simply, pulling you back up to steady yourself on the trail.

You’re silent for a moment, steeling your nerves from your near-death experience. The thought of him rescuing you once more stands at odds with your initial impression of him.

“Why aren’t you answering?” He looks you up and down, peering at you from every front facing angle, “Are you injured?”

“No… no, I’m fine.” You say hurriedly, “Thank you.”

“Hmm…” He says, turning on his heels, “Let’s go.” Donghyuck then begins to trudge through the woods, keeping your hand tightly clasped in his

“Uh, Donghyuck?” You query, trying your best to keep your steps in line with his, “What are you doing?”

“What do you mean?”

“Um, you’re still… Holding my hand…” As you say this, he forcibly yanks your hand as he marches forward.

“You’ve already proven a danger to yourself up here,” He notes casually, “Stick close to me, okay?”

“Okay,” you nod, slightly embarrassed at his statement, but you do as he says and weave your fingers into his. His grasp is surprisingly warm and comforting, despite his grip being firm, you almost forget that they belong to someone who can easily kill you at any given moment.

Suddenly, you remember the question that you’d wanted to ask him earlier and tug at him slightly, “Were you trying to pass through the checkpoint earlier for my sake?”

Initially, he has no response, instead just choosing to glare at you from the corner of his eye, “Female Demons are different than male Demons. Although your wounds regenerate, your stamina is only a bit higher than any normal human’s would be. It’s their resolve that’s their strength.” His hand raises to move a branch from his path before he speaks again, “The female Demons are often left behind in our villages to watch over the elderly and young while the males who ensure their survival.”

So… The natural instinct for male Demons is to guard the well-being and safety of their women. Donghyuck rarely minces his words, but his comment offers you a unique insight that explains so much of his behavior. In a way, it reminds you of the Hwarang’s imperative to keep you safe.

“This journey will be over soon enough,” he murmurs, “Be patient and keep holding my hand.”

Prior to this, you don’t think anyone could have convinced you that you’d be willingly crossing into Ungjin hand-in-hand with Donghyuck, yet, as soon as you get to the other side of the range, you’ll arrive. Are the stories true? Would your father be waiting in the underbelly of Ungjin, trying to orchestrate a war with his army of Furies? You anxiously await the future, worrying yourself about whether or not you can stop him in time.

August 1st, 665 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla By the end of your brutal hike though the unforgiving mountain ridge, you arrive in Ungjin safely, although it feels as if your feet are ready to fall off. It’s a stroke of good luck that neither your father or Ahro heard of your travels.

Your first order of business is reuniting with the Hwarang after weeks and weeks of separation. And so, you set off in search of their headquarters, but… The building is vacant, as all of the soldiers had seemingly embarked on a campaign for their next battle.

“The Hwarang are heading to Hanseong?” Donghyuck questions as you reunite with him at the inn you’re residing at.

“Yes,” you nod, “or at least that’s what Doctor Namekawa wrote me.” They had been tasked with guarding the territory around the city, so they mobilized their troops and marched north immediately after receiving their orders.

“How unbelievably foolish of them…” He sighs, “Their lives spared in Seorabeol, and now they’re just as eager to throw them away.”

“What?” You question, “They’re not being foolish.”

“Do tell me, then, how else should they be described?” He asks, leaning against a wooden support beam outside of the entrance, “They intend to stake out Goguryeo territory when Silla’s main army is still flushing out Goguryeo and Baekje soldiers in their own? They aren’t there to take the city, merely die as they wait for Munmu to send his men in.”

Your brow furrows, is Donghyuck actually showing concern over the well-being of the Hwarang?

“I’m in no position to judge whether or not they’re making a wise choice, but… I don’t think they’re the type of people to get hung up on the likelihoods of winning and losing.” In your experience, the Hwarang warriors are more interested in never having to compromise on their strict set of standards. It’s a lifestyle that lats beyond your scope of understanding since you aren’t actually a warrior, “All of them adhere to O Gye foremost, and this is an example. Of that, I am certain.”

He raises an eyebrow irritably to your suggestion. Just looking at him makes your stomach churn nervously, and contemplate how odd it feels to interact with someone so unapologetically cold.

“Adhere to O Gye, their principles, huh?” He taunts, “Open your eyes. They rely on instincts more than logic. What makes them any different to a wounded beast lashing out at those who maimed them?”

“Beasts?” He dismisses them to a degree that you can only describe as willful ignorance. You’d never met someone so incapable of empathy. It escapes you how he can mistake their sense of conviction as a desperate show of self-defense. However, as much as you want to argue, you chose not to say anything further.

Just as much as he’s been basing his remarks on assumptions, you realize you may as well be committing the same sin. In essence, there isn’t much of a point to arguing how other people decide to live their life.

“Forget about the Hwarang,” he sighs angrily, “I couldn’t care less at the moment. Have you been able to ascertain the whereabouts of Jinsang and Ahro?”

“Unfortunately, no,” you shake your head. You’d worded as hard as you could to get concrete details from Namekawa as well as some of your father’s old colleagues in the area yet they’d all come to dead ends.

“If they are as adamant as they claim about going through with this, then the potential war will be chaos.”

Feeding your father’s army of Furies will require a gratuitous amount of blood, which could cost the city—Silla and even Goguryeo— thousands of lives. You need to find a way to stop your father before there’s any chance of putting innocent citizens at risk.

As you embrace this resolve, Donghyuck speaks unexpectedly, “Whatever… I will see to it that both of them are removed, as well as their army of fakes. Why don’t you consider staying with the Namekawa man you spoke of earlier? Or, even stay at the Hwarang’s headquarters?”

“…What do you mean?” His question blindsides you and begs clarification. “I can deal with my father and brother myself—”

“My agreement with the Park Clan’s Princess was that I would escort you west. Nothing more, nothing less.” He states abruptly, “The deal never included a guarantee to dispose of your father or your brother with you.”

“But the entire reason we came to Ungjin was to stop them…”

“How delusional can you be if you think they will entertain any of your asinine opinions? If they’re even in this city, that is.” He says, raising a good point. Nothing you’d said upon encountering them last had gotten through to them, nor had your leads within Ungjin gotten you anywhere.

So, you ask him a question, “Do you honestly plan on killing them both?”

You may as well have been asking a ghost as your question hovers awkwardly without an answer. His silence is telling. Refusing to look you in the eye, he chooses instead to stare blankly at a passerby.

“It’s only a matter of time until they expand their army of fakes. Do not go near them. To them, you are nothing more than a bothersome fly. Got it?” He speaks in a hushed tone before, without another word, vanishing into the crowd of people bustling in Ungjin’s streets.

For all intents and purposes, your arrangement is over. This isn’t an issue, per say, but what are you to do at this point? To prevent the spread of Furies, Donghyuck has only one option. But you can’t let him do that, you need to stop him.

November 19th, 665 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla After gathering your bearings in Ungjin, you realize that your father isn’t there, nor is your brother. Your days remain listless until it occurs to you that your past may reveal some future questions. Your childhood home, which had been left unattended for however long, is the last place you can visit unannounced.

You find that the trek there is easier than that of the secret paths you’d had to take with Donghyuck. As a citizen of Silla, you had no issue on the roads or security checkpoints.

A part of you clings to the naïve hope that your father awaits your arrival as you open the door to the old clinic, but all that remains is a dusty workspace. The yard is long overgrown, cobwebs hang from the ceiling and thick dust coats every surface.

During the last conversation you had with your father, he seemed set on building momentum with his army, toppling Silla and increasing his notoriety, but… Is that really what he wants to do?

A wave of nostalgia hits you as you enter your old bedroom, which remains untouched since the last you saw it. You recall the memory of your father using it as a patient room long before it had been a suitable bedroom. He’d been kind to the poor and nobility alike in his treatment, not regarding how severe their illness was, either. He was remarkably kind, giving a personalized touch to each of his patients without expecting anything in return. A cherished, well-respected member of the community.

Surely, all of this has to be some sort of misunderstanding… His impetus for creating the pimul was for giving Silla a shot at rebuking Baekje forces. In hindsight, it had been a shallow pursuit, birthing what is, arguably, one of the most heinous creatures to live. You’re beginning to grow angry about it when—

The front door creaks as it slides open. You freeze out of panic, slowly turning your head over your shoulder to sneak a quick peek.

“Is someone in here?” The voice is unmistakable.

“Father?” You call out to him, your voice shaky as you catch a silhouette slink towards you.

“Ah,” he says softly, “You’ve returned home as well, huh? I’m happy to see you safe and sound, I was worried that you may have gotten swept up in the battle, or worse…” Tiny tears begin to form behind his eyes, it’s an expression with which you’ve been familiar with. You almost convince yourself that your last conversation had taken place in a nightmare rather than reality.

However, you know better than for it to be true.

“Where’s Ahro? Has he not joined you?”

“Indeed,” he nods. “I have ordered him to complete another assignment.”

You flick your eyes back and forth, trying to sense if any Furies are nearby, but you can’t. This may be your only opportunity to speak candidly with him, and perhaps even convince him…

“Father, tell me something… Do you really plan on creating more Furies as a way of manipulating Goguryeo’s army? That can’t really be what you want, is it…? You dedicated your life to becoming a doctor in order to save innocent people from dying!”

When you were a child, your memory of your father was of his incredible work ethic; how he’d pour himself into books. He invested himself in his patients. You remember peeking into his room one night as he flipped through his books with only a lantern as company. There’s no way that level of dedication could have faded so easily.

“Unlike you, my child,” he frowns, crossing his arms, “I am not a direct descendent of the Heo Clan. My family’s bloodline has been long since diluted, making me closer to human than Demon. As a child, my life neatly succumbed to a severe illness. This is what motivated me to put forth all of my energy into practicing medicine. It was a desperate wish to save those who suffered like me.”

“So—!” It’s just as you expected, he still possesses an innate desire to care for others.

Your joy, however, is short-lived as he continues, “Yet, the funny thing is that no matter how much the medicine evolves, humans are twice as efficient at creating tools of destruction and, in my experience, are more eager to test them on their fellow man than to help him. If this vicious cycle continues, then all that will remain are poor, lonely orphans like you and Ahro. I cannot, in good conscious, allow these imbeciles to run this country into the ground so petulantly.”

The mood in the room shifts. You look on in hoor as his body begins to radiate a blinding aura as if he’s being engulfed in flames. Two sharp horns begin to poke through the flesh on his forehead, akin to some kind of beast that you had only seen illustrated on various temple walls. His eyes slowly changed from a deep brown to gold, nearly paralyzing you with their bright, ominous glow.

“Father…?”

“Witness the Demons’ true form,” he says with a smile. “As Demons interbred with humans, our people distanced themselves from reaching their full potential, and I was resigned to suffering the same fate. Thanks to my serum… my Demon blood has been reawakened from its dormancy after years of suppression.”

“You drank the pimul,” you breathe, eyes wide in horror. It’s a nightmare scenario, and suddenly whatever delusions you’d had about expecting to compromise with your father are abandoned.

Not only had he been creating Furies, he’d become one of them.

How recently he’d drank the serum is a mystery, but it’s clear that the man who raised you is gone and the one in his stead is a monster.

“Between Ahro and myself, who has also discovered the means to unlock his true Demonic potential, and an army of Furies unhindered by sunlight… No one can oppose us. With this serum at our disposal, mankind will cower and learn how futile waging a war against our people would be.”

You shake with disbelief, tears streaming down your cheeks as the realization of his crimes sink in. Your time with the Hwarang granted you lessons upon which you otherwise had no perspective. When working in such a close capacity with people from different walks of life, one understands that getting your way is challenging—compromise is key. For the Hwarang, having the Furies made this particularly difficult… For your father, however, without anyone to challenge him, there was no one to inform him of what an egregious sin he had and is committing against humanity.

“Please, father, snap out of this.” You plead, “Do you truly believe that you will be able to easily curry favor with Goguryeo and eventually usurp power in the process?”

Even the Hwarang, as strong proponents of Silla, had been at the mercy of the bureaucracy, which had only served to frustrate and disenfranchise them. It’s hard to believe that your father and Ahro will be capable of avoiding the same issue.

“If you think that Goguryeo is sitting in any position to exploit and dispense us…” He shakes his head with a smirk, “Then you are mistaken. It is they who should be afraid of us annihilating every last one of them. In fact, we certainly have the means to do so.”

His eyes beam with an electrifying, almost unrecognizable madness, “Come with us. As a pure-blooded Demon, by rearing a child with the Furies, we can guarantee your offspring will be even stronger. If that were to happen, our clan, will give birth to a new generation of Demons.”

He wears a malicious smirk as he extends his hand towards you. You look for an escape route, only then to be stopped as your father moves with heightened agility, grabbing your arm before you can even begin running.

“Let go!” You cry out, trying to swat him away.

“Illuminate me,” a voice says with calmed anger from the doorway, “How do you expect to rally your people and form a new clan if you are nothing more than a bitter, senile idiot?”

A glimpse of yellow in the corner of you eye has your head whipping to gaze in the direction of the voice, “Donghyuck!” You shout, his name almost getting caught in your throat as you look towards the entrance, “What are you doing here?!”

You almost feel the need to pinch yourself to believe that it’s actually him, but he makes no secret out of his irritation when he glares at you from the corner of his eye.

“Could ask you the same question.” He tempers, “I thought I told you to stay in Ungjin, and yet here you are. Care to tell me what you think you’re doing?”

When an answer doesn’t come from you, Donghyuck dismisses you, shifting his angered gaze towards your father.

“Not only have you committed the ultimate crime in producing more fakes, but now you’ve stooped low enough to become one of them?” His hand lingers over the hilt of his sword, “It appears as though you’re practically begging for me to kill you.” With that, he unsheathes his blade, something about the sword intriguing you as it stays in the sunlight. Rather than reflecting the sun, as a blade normally does, it produces its own shimmering gleam, giving it an ethereal, blessed quality.

“Drink all the serum you wish, Jinsang,” he sneers, “but never in your wildest dreams will you be capable of measuring up to what a true warrior can be.”

Your father lets out a grunt of frustration; partly out of embarrassment of Donghyuck’s mockery, but mostly in the knowledge that he is no warrior. After a moment he grabs hold of your arm and shoves you towards where Donghyuck is standing. You brace yourself, thinking he’d move to avoid you and charge at your father.

Instead, Donghyuck catches you flying toward him, wrapping his arms securely around you as you land, “Huh?” You crack open an eye, surprised to have not hit the ground face-first.

Taking this ample opportunity, your father bolts towards the house’s back door.

“Wait!” Donghyuck shouts, letting go of you to chase after him. You chase after him, only finding yourself standing in the back alley. “He got away, huh? Should’ve guessed that rat would slip from my fingers.”

Heo Jinsang had disappeared, successfully evading Donghyuck’s brief pursuit. As the latter darts his stern eyes towards you, you find yourself staring intently at the ground.

“Thank you for saving me earlier…” you murmur as he raises the corner of his mouth flippantly.

“Your thanks are unnecessary,” he states, “Instead, I demand that you answer my earlier question. I told you not to go near them nor to pursue them. Why have you disobeyed that?”

“Because I am a member of the Heo clan,” you state, looking up at him, “If my father and brother are plotting to commit these heinous crimes, then I can’t let the burden fall on you to take care of everything, Donghyuck.”

“Were you not listening to what I told you before?” He frowns, “Female Demons pale in comparison to what the male counterparts can do in battle. Your presence benefits me none whatsoever.”

“I get that, but…” You frown, “If you were in my shoes, would you listen to yourself? Could you honestly live with passing your burden to someone else?”

The question seemingly catches him off-guard. Donghyuck looks at you inquisitively, and together you stay silent as the wind rustles some leaves atop the cold ground.

After a long pause, he speaks, “Understood… Perhaps I’m being forward, but I see in you the virtues befitting the leader of the Heo Family. All I ask, however, is that you refrain from acting so recklessly. Do not allow these rash thoughts to cloud your judgement, or else your leadership will suffer.”

You nod slowly at his words, taking them in.

“Anyone who even thinks of taking you under my watch will be punished without mercy,” it almost sounds like a promise. “Come with me, I’m sure you’ll feel better watching me peel the flesh from their bones with the swing of my sword.” Donghyuck then turns on his heels, heading back into town.

The thought of him promising to murder your father and brother still unsettles you but you suppose it is far better than being left in the dark as to where your father is or what he had been hoping to achieve. You run after Donghyuck, leaving your house behind.

By the time you find an inn to stay in, the sun has set, dipping into the orange horizon. Donghyuck had led you there, to the inn decorated with modest lighting and accessories, when lo and behold you find Xiao Dejun waiting inside for you.

“You made it back safely—What is she doing here?” He asks, surprised by your presence.

“Are you acting coy?” Donghyuck questions, “Do I have to spell it out for you, or are you going to quit playing the fool?” He shakes his head, “Enough of that, what have you uncovered?”

“There’s quite a bit to report,” Dejun says, settling himself down at a nearby table, “I hope you have the time to listen to it all.” With the way he glances at you, you’re unsure if you should listen in, but just as you’re about to leave, Donghyuck stops you.

“She has inherited Heo blood. She has the right to listen to this.” Donghyuck says as he sits across from Dejun, “It is up to her, that is, if she has the stomach for it.” In typical fashion, he’s speaking of you in a dismissive tone, but you now take it to mean that he’s respectfully acknowledging your agency in the decision to stay.

No matter what Dejun has to say, if it regards your family, you have an obligation to sojourn. So, you too take a seat at the table, “I am ready for whatever it is you have to say. Please allow me to remain here.”

Dejun nods, taking a deep breath before he begins, “In regards to Hak Ahro, he appears to be in Hanseong with warriors from Goguryeo. To make matters worse, he has a band of Jinsang’s enhanced Furies as well.”

Hanseong… If you recall correctly, then that’s where the Hwarang had been told to go. If Ahro is leading a band of Furies alongside Goguryeo forces there…

“It looks like the Hwarang is going to have their hands ties with those Furies, aren’t they?” Donghyuck asks, nearly putting your thoughts into words.

“Exactly.”

Your hands clench at your side, worry pervading through you. The Hwarang had suffered many casualties in the Baekje raid on Seorabeol and on top of that, Yongqin wouldn’t be able to join them either in is condition. Doctor Namekawa had said as much when he wrote you last.

“Negotiations between Tang and Silla are still ongoing in Ungjin,” Dejun nods slowly, “If their talks begin to grow more… intense against Goguryeo…”

“Then we’ll have a full-on war on our plate,” Donghyuck exhales out, “The perfect opportunity for Jinsang and Ahro to unleash their sick beasts onto the field.”

“I assume they will organize their Furies and march them to Hanseong as soon as possible. But then again, there aren’t too many areas there in which they could hide their army.”

“Interesting,” Donghyuck muses as he runs his index finger atop the wooden table, “For now, keep a watchful eye on their movements.”

As you listen to their conversation, an urgent feeling of panic rages within you, and you realize that you’re suddenly drenched in cold sweat. If Donghyuck’s prediction comes true, then the innocent people in both Goguryeo and Silla will be helpless against the tide of Furies, eager for the taste of blood. Everything is coming together and it horrifies you to imagine sacrificing entire towns for the purpose of feeding their insatiable hunger. It’s a violation of the world’s sacred order, and you’re running out of time.

“What of Sicheng?” Donghyuck questions, “Has he decided what to do with the remainder of the Baekje families?”

“He’s been a ghost, even on the battlefield,” Dejun explains, standing from the table and making his way to the exit, “Perhaps he’s grown tired of playing a part in this sick game.” He then leaves you with that, bowing lightly as he departs the room.

Donghyuck stays quiet for a moment before turning to you, “I am stepping out. Get some rest.”

“Okay,” you nod as he stands, “Please be careful.”

“Unless an emergency arises, do not leave this building.” He warns, “Otherwise, we may have a repeat incident of earlier today.” Donghyuck lingers a moment more, gazing into your eyes to assure himself, then quickly flies out of the door.

Once nestled in bed, you close your eyes and drift off to sleep. In your deep, dreary slumber, a dream comes to you. The setting is your childhood home, not the one in Toehwa-hyeon, but the one prior to that… Your arm is being pulled along by someone.

Through a muted, white haze, you watch smoke billow into the sky, tall flames surrounding you as you try to flee hastily.

“This way!” The shout of the boy pulling you cries out through the night.

The village burning before you evokes a strange sense of déjà vu. Beside you lay a small hill where you’d often pick flowers and the pen that housed your livestock. Those places, like the memories attached to them, are becoming reduced to ash and cinder, and in the distance, you can hear shrieks of terror.

What’s going on? Who could do such a thing? Where are your parents?

“The fire’s spread here too!” The boy shouts in anguish as flames block your path, encroaching on you slowly.

You hear a man call out to you and the boy from a way away, “Over here!” Although his identity is unclear, you understand him to be one of your relatives, “Quickly, hold onto me, the flames will catch up to us soon!”

You and the boy do as instruct, holding on tightly to his robes as he leads you into the forest at the outskirts of the village where the air is clearer.

“We’ve run far enough,” the relative speaks, “I don’t think the fire can reach us here. We should be safe.”

“Uncle,” the boy asks, “Why did this happen? Where’s dad? And mom?”

Suddenly, you recognize who the boy is. It’s Ahro.

“It was becoming too dangerous because of the fire,” your uncle grimaces, “We had no choice to leave them behind.”

And this man…

“Unforgivable,” he laments, “The humans have cruelly summoned calamity and misfortune to our people. Are they punishing us for refusing to help them aid Baekje? They destroy our homes for wanting peace?”

On that night, it isn’t your father, but a distant relative who saves you from being burned alive. He later assumes the title of ‘Father’ and raises you. Heo Jinsang.

You awake with a jolt, tears streaming down your face hysterically. For whatever reason, your mind needlessly exhumed a memory that you had unknowingly suppressed years ago. Now, it’s all coming back to you…

Humans had destroyed your home, killing dozens of your people, including your parents. In a selfish grab for power, they wiped the village from existence and attempted to absorb the land. Heo Jinsang made one thing abundantly clear… Continuing to allow humans to rule barbarically, and further their destructive tendencies, it would only produce more orphans like you and Ahro.

Although you’re opposed to the idea of using Furies, of all things, as a force to counteract mankind’s penchant for destruction… At the same time, there’s a method to their madness, and you can’t’ bear to think about how they coped with the memory of your people’s genocide.

A knock at your door snaps you from your stupor.

“Pardon me,” one of the inn’s attendants asks, “Are you awake?”

You rise to your feet, wiping away the tears on your face before you open the door, “Is something the matter?”

“I have a guest asking for you,” he says, “May I send him in?”

“Ah,” you say with bated breath, wondering who it could be, “In a moment, let me arrange my room first…”

After tidying up your quarters, the attendant opens the door and ushers in your surprise visitor.

“Oh?” they ask, sounding surprised, “Is it just you in here?”

“Sicheng!” You say, equally befuddled, “What are you doing here…?”

“Well, Dejun asked me to come so I came as quickly as I could…” He glances around the room, “But it looks like I’m a little late.”

“It would appear so.” You say, knowing that Dejun may not come back, “However, I believe Donghyuck will be returning momentarily.”

“That so?” He muses, “I suppose it wouldn’t hurt for me to stick around a while longer, then.” Sicheng studies the room meticulously and, eyeing a spot to sit, plops onto the floor quietly.

You watch nervously as he pulls his quiver from his back, inspecting the points of each arrow.

“Um…” you say, gaining his attention.

“Hm? What is it?”

“Is it true that Hanseong may be the center of the next battle soon?” You ask quickly, “I’m worried about something Donghyuck said.”

As you express your concerns, Sicheng suddenly freezes, his finger gently pressed to one of the arrow’s tips, “Well, I’d be lying if I told you there wasn’t a high chance of that happening.”

Images of your burning home are recalled to mind, if this were to happen, there wouldn’t be only two orphans left. And the friends you care for so dearly will be swept into another fray…

“Calm down,” Sicheng says, sensing your worry, “We were able to weasel the Hwarang away from Hanseong for the time being.”

“Huh?” You ask, not understanding.

“Oh?” His brow raises, “Did they not tell you? Silla has no intention of letting Hanseong fall under siege or be lit ablaze. They want that city for their own, the Hwarang are merely there to see to it that it stays intact until the Silla forces arrive in full… Not that Goguryeo will let that happen.”

Just as you’re beginning to put the pieces together, the door opens once more, “I thought I heard a familiar voice in here… Hello Sicheng.”

“Don’t look so surprised,” Sicheng says as he looks to Donghyuck, sliding the arrow back into his quiver, “You’re the reason I’m here. Let’s cut to the chase. I’m a busy man, you know?”

“There are some questions I need answering. It won’t take much of your time…” Donghyuck then goes on to recount what has happened since you last saw him in Sooyoung’s village. He mentions encountering your father, and describes in great detail Jinsang’s plot to gather blood in order to feed his army. The most crucial detail, however, is his proposition to use this army to manipulate Goguryeo into doing his bidding.

“Got it,” Sicheng nods his head solemnly.

“Well, what do you have to say?” Donghyuck questions as he sits across from him, “Do you expect them to fall prey to his little schemes?”

“As much as I want to give them the benefit of the doubt… They’re hurt,” Sicheng begins, “Their failed attack on Silla left them vulnerable and Yeon Gaesomun is crazy.”

“What do you mean ‘crazy’?” Donghyuck’s head tilts to the side.

“Other than killing his king? He is—was— undefeated in battle, and his pride is hurt. He’s bitter and will do anything he can to seek out victory. If I know him, then I don’t see him rejecting the offer to use Furies if it guarantees him victory.”

“What a circus,” Donghyuck huffs. The only thing he hates more than mankind is greed, and he makes no secret of his distain.

“Can you convince him not to use the Furies?” You plead to Sicheng. “Neither human or Demons have the means of handling them if they start outnumbering us. Even if Goguryeo wins, it’s only a matter of time until the Furies are turned on them.”

“I know,” he nods, “To be honest, the very notion of them requiring outside intervention of any kind offends me… Leave it to me.”

“Can we depend on you, Sicheng?” Donghyuck queries.

“Learn to trust your comrades, you bastard,” Sicheng frowns and then straightens himself. “That’s it then? That’s all you have to say? I suppose I’ll be on my way now.” He rises to his feet, slinging his quiver back across his back, smirking wryly as he moves towards the door. Without another word, he saunters out of the room.

A few days later you learn that the Tang-Silla talks have ended and forces are beginning to move out of Silla and into Goguryeo territory. Yet, this comes after a skirmish in Hanseong, leaving the Goguryeo forces there and the Hwarang locked into a bloody stalemate. You later learn that neither Jaehyun or Yukhei had been there. Yongqin, too, was absent as his condition worsened to the point that merely holding his sword is enough to exhaust him. Your curiosity drives you up the wall, and you want to learn more about their status, but Namekawa is away, his letters becoming fewer and far in between.

Around the time you heard news of the stalemate, rumors that Taeil had surrendered to the Hanseong forces to allow his fellow Hwarang to fall back race around Silla.

March 15th, 666 – Ungjin, Kingdom of Silla It’s a brisk, nearly springtime evening when Donghyuck quickly races into your room, urgency in his voice, “Listen carefully. Jinsang has emerged out of hiding.”

Dejun, trailing in behind him adds, “They are most likely heading to Fuyu.”

“Logic would dictate that…” Donghyuck nods, “It is the only locale near Pyongyang with a dense enough population to feed his massive army before Silla pushes even more into their Kingdom. Their foolish plan to thrust Silla into chaos hadn’t planned out as expected, and it seems as if Sicheng’s kept his word… Surely they are reaching the point of desperation.”

The Demon’s stare flickers to you, “Since this directly concerns you as a Heo, do you intend on accompanying us?” His gaze looks impertinent, almost as if he’s testing you.

Your mind is already set, “I am going.”

He squints at you in response, staring blankly at you for a brief moment before relenting, “Very well.” His curt response is all you need.

The last you and Donghyuck spoke about matters concerning Jinsang, he’d been dead set on prohibiting you form getting involved, yet now, as Silla pushes further into Goguryeo territory, you aren’t as worried at the fear of all-out war breaking out. If Furies can no longer be used as leverage, then maybe Jinsang can see the error in his ways once he realizes how little Goguryeo values his experiments. You wrestle with these thoughts as Donghyuck continues.

“I assume he’s matching half of his Furies to Fuyu as we speak,” He muses.

“Sicheng should already be there with a group of soldiers.” Dejun says.

“Then we will reconvene with him as soon as our business with Heo is concluded.”

Ungjin is blessed with a quiet calm as its residents sleep peacefully in the dead of night. The three of you wind carefully through the city, making your way to the northern gate to head towards Hanseong.

March 30th, 666 – Girin Residence, Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla “Have they already left?” Donghyuck’s question rings through the nighttime sky, “I don’t detect anyone nearby…”

During your travels north, Hanseong was readily captured by the Silla forces moving towards the capital of Goguryeo, allowing you easy access into the city. It had been difficult to track down the whereabouts of where Heo Jinsang had been holing up the Furies, but Dejun had gotten a lead towards this one particular residence on the outskirts of the city.

“Oh!” You say, your eye catching something moving atop the roof before hopping down to greet the three of you.

“It’s been a while,” Hak Ahro smiles, “I’ve been waiting patiently for you, sister.”

“Ahro—” you begin before he speaks over you.

“I’ve already spoken with Jinsang. He informed me that he had generously offered you the chance to join us, but…” His gaze flickers to Donghyuck, “He got in the way of that, or something. Don’t you think it rude to interrupt an emotional reunion between a father and daughter?

Donghyuck says nothing, keeping his guard raised as he glares at Ahro without humoring his sarcasm.

“So?” Ahro asks, “Why are all of you here? If you’ve brought these two as your bodyguards, it can’t mean anything good.

You know that speaking with your father had proved futile, but with their hope dwindling, maybe, maybe, you can get through to them.

“Donghyuck,” you whisper to him, “please give me one more chance.”

Without moving his head, he shifts his line of sight to stare at you begrudgingly, taking his time to decide, “As you wish…”

You feel a huge pang of relief, and after thanking him, you turn to face Ahro, “I want you and father to hear me out before this goes any further.”

Ahro gazes at you coldly, pursing his lips, “I see… I think I have an idea of what you’re going to say. Why don’t you all come inside? Jinsang’s been expecting you.”

The three of you follow him inside cautiously to a main room where Heo Jinsang stands.

“At last,” he smiles, “you’ve come.”

Although you’ve made yourself aware of all the horrible things he’d done over the past few years, every time that Heo Jinsang greets you with his jovial smile, it shatters you into a thousand pieces, “… Father.”

Even if you aren’t related by blood, he’d dedicated his life to raising you like a daughter. As the guilt trickles in, you have to snap yourself out of it, straightening your back as you speak to them.

“I dreamt of something. It wasn’t much, but it was a memory from my childhood…” You begin slowly, recollecting the memory, “I witnessed a vision of our village burning, and I recalled how the humans destroyed our way of life. Both of you were there to rescue me, and together we escaped the fire by fleeing into the forest.”

“I can only imagine,” your father winces, “how painful it must have been to remember such atrocities.”

You shake your head at him, “It’s not about me. I know the two of you have been mulling this trauma over for far longer than I have. After all that’s happened, I can’t blame either of you for holding onto your grudge against humanity for as long as you have.”

“Then…” Ahro’s voice perks up at his attempt to interject, you can swear you see his expression begin to soften.

“Keeping all of this in mind, however, I implore the two of you not to unleash your Fury army.” As you as you mention the last part, both Ahro and Jinsang freeze in shock. “We were able to avoid the terrors of war in Ungjin… Why do either of you seek to inflict pain on others? Haven’t they suffered enough? I’m sure neither of you want to impose the same nightmarish fate that we’ve had to endure, do you?”

A forlorn expression covers Jinsang’s face, Ahro, on the other hand, is less sympathetic to the point you’re trying to make.

“Don’t break your foot getting off of that high horse.” He frowns, “Must be nice living a privileged life, isn’t it? Do you know what I had to struggle with after our village burned down? About how I was treated with the Hak clan? Because I cannot bear children, they treated me like I was less than the shit they scraped from their boots. I was lucky they kept me alive…”

Bitterness erodes his voice, “They broke me again and again and again until I was nothing. A one point I…” He pauses, shaking his head, “Thanks to them, I realized humans and Demons are no different. Power corrupts all.”

Listening to him makes your heart sink. All that time you lived peacefully in Toehwa-hyeon… Just what had Ahro been subjected to? A life with no love or compassion, it explains so much.

“Then what is it that you want, Ahro?” You ask, “Do you want the Furies to rebuild the Heo clan? Is that what you really want?”

“Isn’t it obvious?” He spits out, “It’s my duty… I cannot let our parents down by letting our name hang in disgrace! I refuse to let those imbeciles destroy our legacy without putting up a fight! The Hak clan abused me, and the Demons in the south and north turned a blind eye to our suffering, letting our people scatter with the wind. How do you expect me to forgive them for spitting on us when we begged for their help?! Doesn’t that insult what it means to be a Demon?”

Each word he speaks breaks off another piece of your heart as his festering resentment comes to light. Maybe you had judged him incorrectly and the only thing that can soothe his soul is… if he exacted revenge on every person that had ever harmed or wronged him in the past. Perhaps, there is no other way…

Donghyuck steps in front of you all of a sudden, not even looking at you as he speaks, “Step back”

“Donghyuck…” Just as you had feared, their time of reckoning has come. “Donghyuck I—”

“I told you to step back,” he barks at you sternly, and you can’t help but move. His hand reaches for the hilt of his sword, drawing it in one swift motion. Donghyuck holds it comfortably in his palm as if it’s an extension of his own arm, and like a phantom, it glows, illuminating the room.

“Hwangun’s Demonslayer, hm?” Ahro muses as his eyes track the blade. “Since that weapon was forged to kill Demons, it must mean you’re really going for us, aren’t you?”

“Of course.” Donghyuck declares.

“Then,” Ahro smirks, “I suppose I’ll have to return the favor.” His hand slips into his pocket, procuring a crystalline vial.

“The dishonored bastard of a Demon clan has to forfeit his life in order to become a fake, is that it?” Donghyuck’s eyes watch the red liquid swirl around the glass, “Here, I thought you could stoop no lower.”

“It appears we disagree on what constitutes honor,” Ahro’s fingers toy with the opening, “No matter what happens, I cannot allow you to kill me here!”

“Ahro, no!” Taking a split second to decide, you sprint towards him to snatch away the serum.

As you near, he shouts out, “Don’t touch me!” And he shoves your attempt at saving him away, causing you to fall to the floor.

You’re too late, as he’s uncapped the vial and placing the vial to his lips, drinking the contents quickly. Ahro grips his chest, moaning in anguish. He lets the glass slip from his hand, it shattering on the floor as it lands. And then, just as Jinsang had done, his eyes begin to glow gold. His hair turns pale white and two horns emerge from his forehead.

Your brother has become a Fury.

“See?” He smirks, “Now it’s a fair fight, isn’t it, Lee Donghyuck?”

“You are lost, boy.” Donghyuck murmurs coolly. All of a sudden, an aura emanates from him as his own body morphs, his hair turning white, his eyes gold and the horns emerging from his own head. Both of them radiate spheres of energy, glowing white hot as they charge one another.

The thunderous clang of their blades echoes deafeningly around the room. Their agility is superhuman, making it difficult to track the paths of their swords as they rapidly trade a flurry of unrelenting attacks.

“You’re not quick enough for me!” Ahro laughs maniacally, “At this rate I will crush you in minutes!”

Sparks fly as their swords crack into one another, neither one willing to let up steam.

“Jinsang,” Dejun calls out, “You’re mine.”

“There’s no need to rush things,” Jinsang leers, “In fact, since we’re all together, perhaps you would be better off warming up with my beloved children.” He places two fingers to his mouth and whistles.

From behind you, you hear the ominous creak of doors opening. Within seconds, your worst fears are realized. You find yourself surrounded by a bevy of red eyes, Furies calling out for blood.

Dejun is the first to reach, unsheathing his sword, swinging fast slashes at the Furies funneling into the room. Yet… Not even Dejun’s skill with a blade can subdue the incoming Furies, they close in without flinching. 

“Bastards!” Dejun cries out, releasing another volley of strikes. He has the advantage of battle-worn experience and superior strength but these Furies are different. His attacks do little to stunt their fervor, and soon, dozens of Furies have you cornered.

“Dejun! Donghyuck!” You cry out, reaching for the blade at your hip to join them in the fight. Suddenly, you’re grabbed from behind.

“Let’s leave while we can,” Jinsang murmurs to you, “No matter what anyone else claims, you are a descendent of the Heo clan. Your parents would have wanted you to join us more than anything.”

“No!” You struggle under his grip, “Let me go!” It’s impossible to slip from his grasp.

“Demons from the west and Demons from the east… Two species that have never been acquainted will now come together as one,” he says, “It will create the strongest Demon ever to exist. This is your destiny.”

His words paralyze you with fear, and at first nothing he says registers. Is this what he had planned for you all along?

If all goes according to his plan, then the causalities wouldn’t be limited to the Kingdoms alone. This affliction can potentially spread around the world, devastating countless lives. You can’t bear to let your life amount to this, nor can you stand to let yourself be attached to such a crime against humanity…

Your eyes flick down to your waist, and you struggle in your father’s arms to grab your blade.

“What are you doing?!” Jinsang shouts, “Don’t do anything reckless!” He attempts to pry the blade from you, but finds it difficult as you jostle yourself in his arms.

“Let her go, Jinsang,” Donghyuck says as he saunters towards the two of you.

“What?” Jinsang exclaims, “How are you here so soon…? Don’t tell me Ahro lost to the likes of you.”

“Are you deaf, old man? I said, ‘Let her go’.”

Your father snickers, continuing to ignore the command. Donghyuck shifts his eyes at you momentarily, looking at you intently as he motions with his lips. It’s almost as if he’s expressing his desire to kill your father, whether or not you approve.

At this point, it seems inevitable. You had spilled your heart out, and still he refused to listen. At some point, you have to accept the truth. Your paths had diverged some time ago, and it’s unlikely that you would ever see eye to eye about the atrocities he threatens to commit. Unfortunately, it leaves you with no other choice.

You look Donghyuck in the eye and without another second to hesitate, nod firmly.

Judging by his wry smile, it seems as if Donghyuck’s understood anything.

“Death is a messy affair, and this is certainly no exception.” Donghyuck raises his sword, “Shut your eyes.”

You appreciate his sentiment, but shake your head, “I am a Demon of the Heo Family,” you say, “The least I can do is dignify him with the honor of watching his final moments.”

“You’ve got a stronger heart than I thought. Don’t blame me if this haunts you forever,” His attention then turns to your father, “Okay, Jinsang. Have you made peace with yourself? Luckily for you, I am merciful. I promise this won’t hurt; well, not too much.”

He raises his sword high above your father’s head, stopping within inches of his face. Panic suddenly set in for Jinsang, realizing there would be no escape from his execution until— His eyes begin to glow menacingly, focusing his Fury powers within himself, causing the ground underfoot to rumble.

Jinsang breaks away from you to rush at Donghyuck. But it’s no use. Their difference in power is palpable. Donghyuck effortlessly swings his sword at the oncoming Jinsang, and in an instant, a deep, wide gash appears on your father’s sunken chest.

A splash of crimson blood cascades in the air as your father cries out in agony. He falls, lifeless to the floor, limp and dead. Donghyuck flicks his sword downward, sending an arc of blood droplets flying, before sheathing his blade as if to make a conclusive statement.

You run to your father’s corpse when something peculiar occurs. After the color leaves his face, his flesh begins to smolder, similar to the burning logs of a fire, and slowly, he turns to ash before you. As he disintegrates, what remains of his body floats away with the breeze, leaving behind nothing in its wake.

At long last, Heo Jinsang is dead. The man for whom you had spent years searching for had, once again, exited your life without a word.

Although you had accepted the possibility of his death long ago, your body feels suddenly light, perhaps feeling his empty weight in your broken heart. You cannot understand how it had come to this.

Reflecting on those circumstances sends you into a defeated slump, and without saying a word, Donghyuck draws you into his embrace, your tears staining his robes.

“Donghyuck,” you murmur, unable to look up at him. Whatever he has to say on the matter is an enigma to you, but for now you take solace in the comfort of his arms. You don’t think you can stand even if you want to.

“What happened to Ahro? Did you…?” What do you want to say? ‘Kill him’? The words are unable to form.

“I injured him, but he escaped.” Donghyuck says quietly, “However since it was a wound inflicted by my blade, it will take some time to heal.” The tone of his voice gives you the impression that he’s trying to put you at ease, but you doubt Ahro would completely heal from an injury Donghyuck would’ve given him. Yet the fact that he’s attempting to show you kindness makes all the difference in this moment.

“Father was a wonderful man… He was…” Your heart feels so heavy that you barely notice the tears streaming from your eyes. “He cared so much for his patients I just—I don’t understand… I was proud to call him my father.” The bittersweet memory of your childhood come flooding back to you, which seems to only exacerbate your tears.

“I wonder what caused him to change so drastically?”

“If your village hadn’t been burned to the ground, then perhaps there would have been some hope of saving the man he used to be,” Donghyuck says lowly, “At the end of the day, humans are to blame.”

There’s a resentful undertone lurking in his hushed voice. Donghyuck is unashamedly proud to be a Demon. Eventually, this pride morphed into hatred a potent discontent for everyone he considers beneath him. You can only imagine how difficult it must have been to murder one of his own kin.

“I understand…” Although humans had been responsible for the death of your people, which led to them following this path of bitter revenge… Your family chose to let it consume them to the point of no return. However, it’s easier to conceptualize than it is to accept.

“I’m just so heartbroken,” you sob so hard that your eyes begin to burn. Donghyuck, sensing your pain, holds you just a bit tighter. “I know what you mean, though… Some humans are unmistakably evil, but others are okay…” Tears drip into your mouth as you speak, their saltiness stinging. “There are so many though who commit their lives to pursuits other than power.”

In your experience, the Hwarang had been a prime example of this, you want nothing more than to learn of their fate. You need to find them, wherever they are. Now that you’ve lost your father, there aren’t many other convictions worth seeing to their end.

After a few more moments, you pull away from Donghyuck and he turns to Dejun, “I believe the fighting will soon stop in Fuyu.”

“Even though they’re fighting Furies, I doubt Sicheng will have much trouble. Perhaps we should come to his aid,” Dejun suggests.

“Indeed,” Donghyuck nods before turning to face you. “Return to the inn.”

“What?” You shake your head, “I can’t just let you two handle this alone…”

“Don’t flatter yourself. What good do you expect to do? You look dreadful,” he says, furrowing his brow. “Hurry up and return to the inn. Get some rest… Got it?”

You’re concerned about the outcome of Fuyu, but you trust Donghyuck to take care of things, and you’re comforted by the fact that he’s looking out for you.

April 8th, 666 – Hanseong, Kingdom of Silla After days of waiting, Donghyuck finally returns, slinking into the inn with a reserved expression.

“Sicheng performed his duty and destroyed all of the Heo’s monsters,” Donghyuck reports, “If you sincerely wish to reunite with the Hwarang, then prepare your things at once.” He speaks curtly, leaving you with that as he exits your room.

You quickly rummage to gather your things, your thoughts lingering on your father as you find one of his old books tucked away in your bag. Although, your attention is turned to the door once again as Donghyuck steps inside, sporting a whole new wardrobe.

It takes you a moment to recognize him as he’s wearing Tang styled clothing. It clings to the dimensions of his body so nicely that you can’t help but feel your face warm at how… nice he looks. You look away to keep from staring at him.

“What’s with your face?” He asks, “Do you want a uniform like this?”

“O-oh, no, that’s not it.” You shake your head, shoving things into your bag. “They just look a little uncomfortable.”

“Not at all,” he muses, flexing out his arms, “To tell you the truth, they’re a bit easier to maneuver in than my typical clothes. Perhaps I will have a set made for you one day, look forward to it.”

“I couldn’t—” you say quickly.

“I’m trying to show you kindness, it’s a gift.” He sighs out, “Quit wallowing in your self-pity for once. Now, there are people waiting on us. Let’s go.”

“People…?” You ask, following him outside. “Oh, hello Sicheng… Are you the person waiting for us?”

Although you had clearly addressed him, he ignores you, making you think that you’re imagining his visage. After a moment, he stares at you intently.

“Did something happen?” You ask with a tilt of your head.

Yet again, he doesn’t respond, choosing instead to chew on his lips as he picks out his word carefully, “Do you remember the Hwarang captain Jaehyun?”

“Of course,” you nod, “He was one of the kindest people I met when I lived with the Hwarang.” Why is Sicheng mentioning Jaehyun now? As you consider the possibilities, it hits you. It feels as if one of Sicheng’s arrows has hit your chest, and you’re finding it difficult to breathe.

No… It can’t be.

“Jaehyun passed away. He lost his life battling the Furies in Fuyu…”

“What?!” You cry out. Even though you had braced yourself for the possibility, nothing can soften the blow of the truth. “Wh- Why would he…?”

Because Namekawa had mentioned something about how Jaehyun wasn’t traveling with the Hwarang anymore, you had assumed he would’ve gone elsewhere other than the front lines.

“While investigating the movement of Jinsang’s Furies, he and I crossed paths,” Sicheng explains, “After briefing him of our situation, he and I struck up something of an alliance… All of a sudden, he began repeating how much he’d wanted to battle beside me. Maybe it’s me. Maybe I’m just back luck, since everyone I fight alongside ends up dead soon after.”

Although you’re watching his lips move, you mind instinctively mutes everything else that falls from his moth. You try your best to focus on your image of Jaehyun. There’s nothing of worth you can contribute so you simply stand there, demoralized and numb.

Jaehyun… Although he seemed rough around the edges to others, you remember him more as a gentle, courageous soul. How could someone so beautiful die so young…?

“No time for tears,” Donghyuck says, “You still want to find them, don’t you?”

You nod silently, hoping that Jaehyun’s death is the epilogue to your harrowing journey… Although you’re unsure if that’s the case now.

May 19th, 666 – Fuyu, Kingdom of Goguryeo By the time you reach Fuyu, spring is in full bloom. You find the town has already succumbed to Silla as their forces begin to encircle Pyongyang. The town itself is still in disarray from the battle, its ravaged exterior telling you everything you need to know.

“I have bad news,” Donghyuck murmurs to you as you walk along the streets of the town, not noticing that he had joined you some time along your stroll.

“Donghyuck…” Your heart still reeling from Sicheng’s revelation of Jaehyun, you’re unsure of how much more you can take. “Please, go on.”

As soon as you answer, he tilts his head down and speaks quietly, “In retaliation for their capture of Fuyu, Taeil was tried and beheaded by the Goguryeo forces.”

A paragon of benevolence and leadership… Taeil had been denied an honorable death and it breaks your heart to hear that he’d been decapitated like some criminal. For a moment you remain silent, softly turning your thoughts over in your head as Donghyuck looks away.

“You can decide whether or not you believe it.”

“No,” you shake your head, “I believe you.”

When Namekawa had notified you of Taeil’s surrender, you considered this to be the worst-case scenario. You buried the thought somewhere, clinging to the hope that he could be rescued, or maybe they would show him mercy for his character. But hearing Donghyuck say it, having it become real through his curt, impersonal words, is a devastating blow at a time when you’re reaching your limit.

“What does that mean for the Hwarang now?” You question.

Taeil had proudly served as the Hwarang’s Chief, and without him, you wonder how they would adapt to his absence.

“I hear they’ve begun to march onto Geumji to continue fighting in their late Chief’s honor.” He says simply, “Where does that leave you?” His question seems less interrogative and more interested in your feelings, which you appreciate.

However, you figure he’s intuitive enough to know that your opinion on the matter is unchanged, and you answer him resolutely, “I’m going to Geumji too. I’m going to wherever the Hwarang men are.”

September 5th, 666 – The Road to Geumji, Kingdom of Goguryeo After a long and encompassing journey, Donghyuck and you set foot in a small town some days away from Pyongyang, gazing at the peripheral view of its vast landscape. Tension boils in the air around the upcoming battles, particularly in the small villages in the area, just like the one you’re in now.

It’s here that Xiao Dejun meets you, giving you valuable information.

“The Hwarang were fighting in Naemihol until mid-June,” He relays, “They held the area until Silla forces could successfully take over entire control… But they lost many men in the conflict.”

“Just as I thought…” Donghyuck murmurs, “Cannon fodder.”

After being dealt another crushing wave of causalities, Dejun mentions something that piques your interest. “They’re heading to Namhansanseong. To my knowledge, their plan is to fortify the fortress and hold it for as long as they can until Silla once again comes to their aid.”

“Namhansanseong… Then that’s where we need to go, isn’t it?” You say quickly.

“One would assume…” Donghyuck nods, “Is that what you want?”

Chasing the Hwarang is trying to catch smoke with your hands, they’re just out of reach every time. Would your reunion ever happen? Or would each of the succumb to a fate similar to Taeil’s or Jaehyun’s before this war ever ends?

Fear and anxiety prompts you to speak, “I want to go.”

“I’m unamused by your poor attempt at humor,” Donghyuck frowns, “If you’re being serious, then I’m even less amused.” Sensing your resolve, he speaks bitterly, “Are you stupid or have you been living under a rock while they run themselves into the ground? Namhansanseong will be attacked relentlessly before Silla even sets foot into the area, are you sure that your Hwarang will be there when we arrive?”

“I understand,” you mirror his frown, “but that’s the only lead we have about their whereabouts. I’ve missed them a handful of times now and I don’t know if I could stomach never seeing them again.” You stop yourself, biting your tongue from contemplating the worst.

Donghyuck’s expression, however, is as aloof as it’s always been, “Let’s suppose they are, in fact, at Namhansanseong. What the hell do you expect you’re going to do if you make it there? Waltz on in?”

“Well—” You start before Donghyuck stops you.

“You would be killed. You’re an idiot if you think otherwise.”

“I am not going to do anything once I get there!” You don’t need his sharp criticism; not do you expect to come and rescue the Hwarang. You just need him to understand how you feel. “I just… I want to see everyone while I still can.” trying to steady your breath, you continue, “I don’t know if I could bear the thought of never seeing them again before something happens to them like Taeil or Jaehyun…”

“What?” He says bluntly, “You’re willing to get yourself killed for the mere possibility of seeing them?”

“I’m not going to let them kill me…”

“Mind telling me what you know that I don’t?” Voice piquing, “In case you were unaware, Moon Taeil has been executed, and his head is currently on display at Dosal Castle. Then there’s Jeong Jaehyun, who was ripped to shreds in Fuyu. No one’s patting him on the back for dying like a wounded animal. I’ve told you all this before—they will be a footnote in history.”

He makes sense, if the fortress is going to come under siege it would be foolish for you to go. The Hwarang would die and be written off as some common foot soldiers, warping the truth and their meaning as a while…

“I’ll remember them,” you state, “It doesn’t matter if people mischaracterize the Hwarang from who they really were…. I will honor their memory, and you can make damn sure that I’ll never forget it.”

You can almost hear Donghyuck gnashing his teeth as he glares at you, “I knew women were whimsied by delusion, but you are sitting at the top of the pile. Very well. Do what makes you happy.”

An awkward tension lingers in the space of your conversation, making you unsure if Donghyuck’s upset or just frustrated at your unwillingness to cooperate. His eyes are like daggers, sinking into you.

“Let’s simmer down, you two,” Dejun steps in, looking to the other man, “What’s the point in arguing? And you, Donghyuck, you normally keep your cool around women.”

He scoffs, “Maybe I’d keep my ‘cool’ if she wasn’t being such an idiot. This discussion is pointless. I have other things that require my attention, I’m taking my leave.” Donghyuck’s biting tone leaves you feeling uncomfortable as he spins on his heels and walks away.

You contemplate calling his name to clear the air but Dejun stops you.

“You should go after him.” Noting your confused expression, he continues, “Donghyuck is a real grouch, but he’s not the type of man that would let something frustrate him enough to walk off like that… I understand that you’re racing against the clock to see your friends right now, but it’s not like you’re in any position to get to Namhansanseong by yourself. You know that, right?”

“Yes…”

“Besides, it’s like you said. We have no idea or guarantee that the Hwarang will be there. I’ll do what I can to investigate their whereabouts for the time being… For now, why don’t you speak to Donghyuck?”

“Thank you, Dejun,” you say quickly, beginning to walk after Donghyuck.

“No need,” he shakes his head with a small smile, “I’m simply doing my duty.”

By the time you find Donghyuck, the sun is beginning to set into a warm pool on the horizon.

“Donghyuck…” You timidly call out to him.

He turns his head to gaze at you, but pays you no mind after and continues to walk at the same pace.

“Where… Where are you going?”

“If you insist on joining me, then shut your mouth and keep up. You’ll understand when we arrive.”

You sprint up to try and further the conversation, but he seems unwilling to entertain such things. You peek as him confusedly, and you’re struck with the most peculiar feeling of déjà vu.

“Huh?” Time seems to shift for a moment, things moving slowly as you look to a row of trees looming over the forested path. Its neat arrangement reminds you of a welcoming ceremony. Nose tingling with the most familiar scents; a fragrant patch of flowers dotting a lush meadow, dew clinging onto their petals…

Your body is trying to tell you something, consuming you with a vague sense of yearning. It all feels so surreal, and you can’t place your finger on it. An ambient energy imbues you, a serene grace that puts your tired heart at ease.

“Here we are…” Before you have an opportunity to voice how strange you feel, Donghyuck stops walking.

“This place…” you can hardly form the words as you realize. Your eyes scanning the environment, hitting you with a blast of nostalgia that nearly topples you. Beside you lay a charred hut with fallen supports, your mind immediately pictures what it once had been. This had been a village, and in the middle of it lays a decayed well, encircled by overgrown weeds.

Remnants of old life remains scattered here, an old bucket lay broken, an old doll lay weathered in the grass near your feet. There’s no mistaking where you are.

“Is this the village where I was born?” You look to Donghyuck, who neglects to answer you and shuts his eyes softly.

“Hm…” Something catches his attention, his eyes shooting open and he darts up a small hill to see what it is. To your surprise, you see Hak Ahro.

He’s collapsed in a bed of flowers, your heart dropping as you near. On the side of his ribcage is gauze that had been completely soaked in blood. You’re under the impression that he’d attempted to treat his injury inflicted by Donghyuck yet… It doesn’t surprise you that he would flee here in anticipation of death’s embrace, left to suffer his last, bitter moments alone.

“He’s been long dead…” Donghyuck ascertains by the stiffness of the body.

You take comfort in that, in the fact that his expression seems rather peaceful. Part of you believes that, after the evening passes, he’ll wake up to greet the morning and you could talk about everything that happened.

A new memory begins to uncloud itself as you look on to your deceased brother’s body… It had been years ago, back when this village was populated and full of life. You’d asked Ahro to take to see flowers… To see these flowers, even though your parents hadn’t allowed it. He’d offered to take you in secret, claiming that he’d protect you from anything outside.

“I just remembered something important,” you say, feeling a hot, sticky tear begin to roll down your cheek.

“Important?” Donghyuck questions.

You nod softly, “I was… loved. There were many people who protected and cared for me; most of all, it was Jinsang and Ahro...”

“I see…” Donghyuck doesn’t press the matter further. The two of you listen to the gentle hum of the wind passing through the bones of the village, grazing against the burned wood and worn stone. “Your brother deserves to be buried, a grave befitting the head of the Heo Family.”

Together, you hike to the peak of the hill that overlooks the village, and it is there that you bury Ahro’s remains. Donghyuck keeps his eyes fixated on the grave for a few minutes after you had finished padding the dirt down. He sighs and reaches for the canteen on the side of his belt, pouring the contents gently atop the grave.

The gokaju reflects in the moonlight as it falls from the bottle, seeping deep into the soil. Donghyuck is expressionless, watching the alcohol drip out as the container empties. His eyes glow with melancholy, and you wonder if he’s regretful about how things had transpired between the two of them.

“If it weren’t for the humans, then I am certain that your brother would have made a fine leader.” His sentiment heavy, seeming as if the two of you are learning to navigate the nuances of your grief together.

‘If it weren’t for the humans…’ It’s a lofty question, one that you will likely ponder for the remainder of your life. Things could have manifested so differently for Ahro and your father… At the very least, they could have made an impact on their people, unburdened by the curse of vengeance that unfairly plagued the rest of their short lives.

Ahro originally mentioned something about wanting to use the Furies to build back the Heo Clan, but in the end, you believe it all to have been a mask to hide the trauma inflicted by the wicked humans. In essence, he had wanted to preserve the picture of this village and everything it stood for.

Maybe—just maybe—he’d wanted to reclaim some of those memories that were viciously stripped from him. He was a boy whose every step was met with misfortune, tragically so. He died as he lived—alone. It’s the only way you’re able to think of him without slumping into a dark depression.

You wish and hope that his last moments were painless, that he’d been able to reconcile his hatred as he laid in the meadow of the one place he cared for.

“Donghyuck…” you call out his name once more as you leave the hill slowly.

“What?”

“I know that my father and Ahro committed unforgivable crimes against humanity and our people… Do you think it would be okay for me to remember them as gentle, kind people…?” Jinsang’s serum had been catastrophic, responsible for countless deaths. For them to violate the natural order of Demonhood, and all that encompasses your sacred existence, is a mark of condemnation to Donghyuck and his kin.

“You are free to do as you please,” he says quietly. “The Demon’s Code has no bearing on matters of the heart. Regardless of the sins they have committed, they are still your family.”

His words bring a weight from your shoulders, “Can I ask you one more question? Demons far surpass humans in strength and ability, right? How can you explain what happened to my people? How were humans able to do,” you look to the barren village, “this?”

Donghyuck tilts his head, staring into your eyes inquisitively. Perhaps he’s testing you to see if you can handle the true; to be honest, you’re unsure if you are, but the question needs an answer.

“Goguryeo asked for aid in stopping the preliminary attacks on Baekje almost twenty years ago, they needed more help than my or Dejun’s families could afford to give them, so they went east… It was then they asked the Heo clan.” Donghyuck pauses for a moment, “Your people, however, were unenthused about the idea of participating in human affairs, particularly in regards to warfare, and supposedly declined to help…”

Because the expressed no interest, you’re sure that the King of Goguryeo saw that as an affront to his authority…

“That’s why my people were killed? That was their justification?” You cry out in defeat and Donghyuck turns to look at the remnants of the village. It’s futile. The past cannot be changed.

“Do you now feel their hatred?” He asks simply before uttering his words of advice, “Remain in the shadows, out of their affairs. This is where Demons belong. Of all the clans, yours is the one who put the dignity of its people first by refusing. The humans had no right to attack your people, and were blinded by their lust for power and control.”

You direct your gaze to the forest floor as he speaks once more, his voice barely above a whisper, “It was never my intention to reveal the history of the Heo Clan to you, but… I suppose, because we are here, it is unavoidable.”

As you look to him, he asks, “Do you not resent the humans for what they’ve done?”

You mull for a moment, “There’s a part of me that thinks about how I should hate them… But there’s something overriding that angry voice and instead I just feel… heartbroken. I’m just filled with sorrow for what could have been.”

“Sorrow?” He asks and you nod.

When you first learned of what compelled your father and Ahro to embark on this path of revenge, all you felt was sorrow. Grief has taken you entirely now. You’d been reminded of the family you used to know as well as the parents you will never know.

“My real father and mother… And everyone else… Do you know how they died?”

Donghyuck shakes his head, “I haven’t the faintest idea. My only knowledge is that none of them put up a fight, and were complicit in the humans’ rampage. It was an admirable effort, holding onto their convictions as Demons by refusing to fight the humans, even at the cost of their own lives.”

As you and Donghyuck walk through the village, you kneel down to rest your hand to lay upon one of the fallen pillars that had greeted you upon your arrival. Had you touched this pillar as a child? Now it lays as a lifeless and forgotten artifact.

“Is there no way for us to live in a world where everyone can coexist peacefully?”

Why is the pursuit of peace so entrenched in the deaths of innocent lives?

“The Hwarang exposed me to so many different walks of life… A range of motivations, ideologies and ambitions.” When two opposing parties are unwilling to compromise, then it usually leads to war, yet… “All anyone should be concerned about is helping out their fellow man. It just breaks my heart to see that people are so willing to inflict pain on others.”

“I can see how hurt you are…” Donghyuck takes this moment to console you, not refute, and nods quietly. There’s a kind twinkle in his eyes, which you notice to be uncharacteristically placid as you look at him. “Perhaps there will be a day when we will no longer need our swords to speak for us.”

Eventually, you fall quiet, naturally running out of things to say. After a moment, he mutters to himself, “Humans are hopeless. They are, without exception, drawn to conflict like a moth to a lantern. This is why Demons have forsaken them, my desire to aid in their war wanes with each day. And of course, so should yours.”

“Donghyuck…” You had no intention of being near this war, but there’s so much you need to do; namely, learn the fate of the Hwarang. Understandably, they are still deeply entrenched in the war and whatever outcome that awaits them.

“Don’t think that I’m unaware of your concern for the Hwarang men’s safety,” he says abruptly. “If you want to see them so badly, then it is pertinent for you to exercise patience. If you become restless and enter conflict too hastily, then you’ll die before you get a chance to reunite with them. Impatience is unbecoming and I believe your ancestors wouldn’t wish that upon you.”

“You’re right…” You murmur, coming to realize what he’s been saying. Donghyuck is often blunt, if not outright rude. But he’s speaking honestly, and you can tell he’s genuinely worried for your well-being. That, you know for sure. “Thank you for looking out for me.”

“Well, with your penchant for recklessness, it is a necessity.” He hums.

“Recklessness?!”

“How else could I describe it?” A grin grows on his lips. “You have no means of reaching Namhansanseong by yourself.” Although he’s chiding you once again, you find his delivery endearing, his words snaking their way into your heart.

“Dejun said the same thing that you did, Donghyuck.” You say slowly, “he said that we have no way of knowing whether or not the Hwarang men will still be there by the time we arrive, so I should wait. I suppose will have to until we know for sure…”

His eyes scan you, thinning with satisfaction, “Glad to see you’ve wisened up by taking my advice to heart. Obedience is a good look on you, you’re well on your way to becoming a good wife.”

“Way to miss the point!” You huff, cheeks warming as you speak again, “Besides, I’m not your wife.”

After scoffing at his suggestion, you tun to get one last glimpse of the scenery around you. All you want is to reunite with the Hwarang, but now you can’t bear the thought of letting the deaths of your paternal parents, Jinsang and Ahro be in vain by wasting your life so wantonly. You have to make absolutely sure to pick and choose your battles.

As you leave the village, you put the image of the charred ruins behind you, instead carrying the resolve to honor your people and their sacrifice.

December 15th, 666 – Geumji, Kingdom of Goguryeo After staying in the village on the route to Namhansanseong for a while, it’s found out that the Hwarang have made it to Namhansanseong in record time. Yet, the battle had been short lived, Goguryeo surrendered swiftly, wanting to save their men for the final affront from Silla on their own doorstep. You’re now unsure of the Hwarang’s whereabouts, only waiting anxiously as you and Donghyuck spot Dejun walking down the well-worn path towards you.

“I have discovered their location,” he says quietly. He takes a deep breath and speaks somberly, “Allegedly, Li Yongqin, has passed away from illness in Sabi. As for Nakamoto Yuta, he was last seen leading a battalion of men at Wangnam Pass, and has been missing in action. We can only assume the worst…”

Your stomach sinks like a stone into the ocean. Suddenly, your breaths are shallow and staggered, they were… gone. Two of the most talented warriors in the Hwarang are now nothing more than just a faint memory, fading against the tide of time.

“Wong Yukhei, who had been reported to have left the Hwarang, is also missing in action.” You bite your lip. Is he safe? Are any of them safe? “Lee Taeyong and Na Jaemin, both of whom led the Fury Corps under the Hwarang, were killed in combat in Cholsan fighting Goguryeo soldiers.”

“Taeyong and Jaemin too?!” You cry out.

“The Goguryeo army was likely briefed of their use of the Furies and their weaknesses by Jinsang…” Donghyuck sighs.

Their deaths are difficult to take in as you swirl already in a pit of despair. They’d willingly gave up their humanity to become Furies, and not even that could save them.

“What about the others?” You ask, looking to Dejun.

“Thankfully for you, Qian Kun lives and is en route to Pyongyang with his remaining men. They’re actually leaving from the port here later today…”

“Today?!” Your eyes shoot open, looking towards the hill that leads down to the docks brimming along the town’s waterfront.

“Did I hear correctly?” Donghyuck questions, “Even with his men gone? That little dog still has some bite, huh?” He’d always been first in line to scorn the Hwarang’s actions, but this is different. His tone leads you to believe the he’s impressed by Kun, which is a little strange.

“So, everyone’s still putting up a fight?” Life for the Hwarang following the Battle of Seorabeol is nothing but one continuous adjustment to loss and victory. Yet, they continue to push forward with their heads high.

“What reasons have they scraped together to justify continuing on?” Donghyuck murmurs, “As I recall, the Crown has never taken favorably to them. I cannot fathom any reason to risk their lives so needlessly. Yet, here they are…”

“I’m unsure too,” you nod. Yet, you do know one thing. You celebrate internally, knowing their spirits are unbroken in the light of loss.

“Speaking as an outsider,” Donghyuck adds, “All they’re doing is hopping from one burial ground to the next. Can you honestly tell me that this is the future they envisioned for themselves?”

“Yes…” Their steadfast dedication on the battlefield is a monument to the courage and principles of their fallen comrades.

“Do you plan on following them to Pyongyang as well?” Dejun questions.

“Yes,” you nod, “The Commander may be unaware of the news that some of the captains have passed away…”

With Yongqin having died in Sabi and Jaehyun in Fuyu, it’s unclear to you if word of their passing has reached him. It’s your duty to honor their memory by telling Kun yourself.

Your eyes shift to Donghyuck, “I want to travel to Pyongyang and meet up with whoever’s left.” Before you continue, you take a moment to calculate what you wish to say, “Would it be too much to ask if you’d join me?”

“Me?” His eyes widen in surprise, “Go along with you?”

“Yes,” you nod somberly, “Even if it will be a victory for Silla, I have a gut feeling that this is the end for the Hwarang.” No battlefields had been left untouched by the vicious torrents of the war, and Pyongyang stands as the decisive scene in your Kingdom’s most tumultuous chapter. “I, um, I guess that’s even more of a reason why I… I want to travel together, Donghyuck. I want you with me when I witness the end of the Hwarang.”

It’s surreal, if not strangely appropriate, of you to ask such a thing of him. Yet, because Donghyuck’s been involved in so many duels with them over the years, you want him to bear witness to what could possibly be the Hwarang’s final, intimate moments.

He listens intently, and when you finish speaking, his lips curl into a smug grin, “The ‘end’ for them, you say…? What an enticing offer.”

“Thank you,” you’re flushed with relief at his acceptance. It’s felt like ages since anyone has been able to coax a sincere smile from you.

“I suppose that means we’ll be off…” Donghyuck says, waving a short goodbye to Dejun. “It will be faster to sail there than to walk…”

“Thank you, Dejun, I hope to see you again soon,” you say, beginning to turn around before he stops you.

“Hold on, there’s someone here who wants to speak with you.”

Turning back around, you’re met with both the visages of Xiao Dejun and Dong Sicheng.

“It looks like you’ve made it in one piece,” Sicheng notes with a smile.

“Sicheng!” You call out, “What are you doing here?”

“I just came to bring you something,” he says, reaching for a sword on his waist. You have trouble looking at it properly until he holds the sheathed metal out to you, and you can finally read the inscription on the sheath.

“Is that… Jaehyun’s?” You ask, reaching out for the leather holster.

“It is,” he nods slowly, “I was unable to reach the Hwarang in time. If he had lived, I believe he’d still be here fighting by everyone’s side. He was tenacious.”

Grabbing hold of the memento, you securely strap the sheathe onto you, letting it rest next to your own blade. The added weight feels as if you’re carrying along his legacy with you.

“You’re an ally of Goguryeo, are you not?” Donghyuck asks Sicheng.

“Like hell I am,” he scoffs, “I only answer to Baekje. Human history is only written by the victors, and everyone else is cast into the dirt. So, far be it from me to let their history speak for me.”

“Smells like bullshit to me,” Donghyuck hums.

Sicheng grimaces playfully at the other, then turns to face you, “You still plan on following after those Hwarang of yours, right?”

“I hope to,” you nod.

“Tell them that Jeong was one of the bravest, most ferocious warriors I’ve ever met,” Sicheng says with a smile.

“Sicheng…” Praising humans isn’t exactly one of his habits, especially to the degree he’s described Jaehyun. Imagining what he must have witnessed with Jaehyun moves you almost as much as it must have moved him, a bittersweet warmth swells in your chest.

“Understood, I’ll pass on the word.”

Donghyuck sighs, “Don’t bother. Isn’t this just another worm you’ve let crawl into your insipid heart?”

“Well, look who’s talking. Who was it exactly that you came all the way here for?” Sicheng pokes, “I bet you’re just as curious in seeing what’s going to happen to the Hwarang.”

“Hardly. I am but a passenger of circumstance, which has taken me on the same path as them.” He shakes his head, “Enough wasting time, we have a ship to catch.”

“Okay,” you nod and turn to the other Demons. “Sicheng, Dejun, please take care of yourselves.”

As you bid the two of them farewell, Donghyuck and you see yourselves out to port. Once arriving, you find the harbor to be eerily quiet.

“Have they already left?” You wonder aloud, not seeing many people bustling around.

“It appears as though the boat has already left the harbor…” Donghyuck looks to the western ocean, “I believe we just missed them. They couldn’t have gotten far, so we may be able to see their boat. Do you want to try?”

“Of course. Let’s go.”

Donghyuck and you ascend a nearby beach bluff where you hope to get a clearer view. A cascade of maroon ripples across the vast sea in a reflection of the wide sunset, and in the distance, you watch the shadow of a boat on the horizon.

“Do you think that’s them?” You ask Donghyuck as you squint from the light on the water.

“I believe so.”

You had traveled two Kingdoms searching for them. Now, once again, you have just barely missed them, left in the dust. A sharp pang shoots up through your nose and suddenly you find yourself fighting back a wave of tears. Your teeth dig into your lower lip, hoping to not let this deluge of self-pity come to the surface.

“If you want to cry so badly, why don’t you?” Donghyuck asks.

“No…” You shake your head, the tears still welling up in your eyes. “Only because I can imagine how much pain they’re in right now… I have no right to shed tears when it’s not me who’s fighting out there.”

Donghyuck sighs out of frustration and closes his eyes, pausing as he shifts back and forth, “You know, just because you’re not good with a sword doesn’t mean you’re not fighting. Although your methods are quite different from the Hwarang’s, you’ve had your own demons to fight. Even I’ve noticed it.”

It feels warm to hear his gentle words acknowledging how much you’ve been through.

After seeing your father’s death, your lukewarm reunion with Ahro and visiting the village of your birth. Then your revelation of what had occurred to your friends. A tempest of grief gathered its winds in your heart, continuing to swirl with fervor as you try now not to collapse.

You can’t cry… If you do, then you’ll blur your sight of the ship that houses the remainder of your friends in the Hwarang.

“I’ll turn around if you’d like. Cry as much as you wish.” Donghyuck points his nose towards the ocean, which glows with hues of orange and gold under the glimmer of the late afternoon.

In this moment, the levee holding back your tears bursts. Your forehead presses against Donghyuck’s back, hands grabbing hold as well. Wailing as quietly as you can, you lament them once again slipping through your fingers. The ship begins to vanish beyond the horizon, sailing into the ocean’s furthest tendrils. Soon, it disappears from sight. You listen to the roar of the ocean for a moment before Donghyuck speaks,

“I promise you… I will take you to them.” His voice low, yet urging, “Just be patient… okay?”

Donghyuck, who previously seemed hell bent on abducting you at any cost from the Hwarang…. Now the shoe is on the other foot, and he’s promised to keep you safe on this last journey. Although, you’re unsure of when it’d actually happen.

February 11th, 667 – Geumji, Kingdom of Silla Your initial attempts to leave the harbor, to chase after the Hwarang, proved fruitless. Negotiating with ship captains to allow to random strangers, who for all intents and purposes where no more than stowaways, is aa difficult sell. And finding a captain to go northward in the winter months is a harder find.

Donghyuck had sensed that your search would require more time than originally thought, an so he rented out a nearby mansion in the city center for the time being.

Funnily enough, you’re becoming used to your cozy life in Geumji.

Word reaches you that the siege of Pyongyang is under way. And your want to reach the Hwarang grows by the day.

Sitting in your room, you find yourself becoming too distracted to continue sewing, heaving a small sigh to yourself in the comfort of the mansion. Almost two months have passed since you heard about the report of the massive invasion now taking place in Pyongyang. But, even as the threat of conflict looms in a nearby city, leads for a means to reach Pyongyang are elusive.

Your circumstance had become particularly dire when Goguryeo forces began to attack ships sailing in from the south. Thanks to increased tensions, locating a suitable ship for a civilian like yourself is near impossible.

It’s been so long since your separation from the Hwarang, which only worsens your anxiety about realistically being able to find them. Would you ever be able reunite with them?

It isn’t that Donghyuck’s promise of safely reaching them is wearing thin with you, but each day without progress is making you impatient.

Each day, Donghyuck and Dejun flit around every market and tavern, eavesdropping on conversations to gather intelligence and leads for transport to Pyongyang. For yourself, you’d been tasked with keeping the homestead tidy, taking time each day to prepare meals and mend clothes.

The sound of the door opening makes your ears perk up; you straighten yourself reflexively.

“…I’m back.” Donghyuck says as he saunters into the room, settling down at the table in the center of the main room.

“Welcome back,” you say, quickly moving onto your question, “Did you hear any leads about ships departing…?”

His silence is deafening; no such luck today. He seems especially aggrieved, given his slumped body language.

“Did something happen?” You ask tentatively. “I feel like you’re keeping something from me…”

Silence.

“Donghyuck?”

His mannerisms in his foulest moods are uncannily cat-like: dismissive to a spiteful degree. You know that sitting idly by only gives him time to let his attitude fester.

“Regardless,” you say with a smile, “Thank you for searching for our sake. I’m going to start dinner so please, make yourself comfortable. Or would you rather I wait a while and let you rest?”

“Neither.” He says shortly, “My throat is rather dry, I desire a cup of gokaju before dinner. Fetch me a bottle at once.”

“Sure,” you nod, complying with him, “Although I’m only going to grab you one as drinking too much isn’t good for your health.”

“Hmph. I bring death to those who threaten to waste my precious time and you worry about my health?” He asks, “Besides, gokaju is more of a medicine than a poison, and as you’ve noticed, I’m sick. Make it three bottles.”

“Hey,” you frown, “Don’t take your frustrations out on me. Also, it’s only a ‘medicine’ when you drink it in moderation—not when you’re piss drunk. Haven’t you heard the phrase, ‘The last drop makes the cup run over’?”

He glares at you repugnantly, no doubt incensed by your brevity in challenging him. Yet, after have spending nearly every moment of the last two years together, you’re beginning to peel back the layers, making his behaviors a bit easier to decode. Your intense stares go on for a few more moments, pressure bubbling to the surface like sulfur.

As tension reaches a breaking point, the two of you break the silence at the exact same time.

“Fine… Two will do.”

“Oh, very well… I’ll get two for you.”

You laugh at this, finding yourself more comfortable with his petulant veneer. It gives you the confidence to assert yourself more and more.

“How playfully cavalier of you,” he notes, “So far, neither a vessel nor the location of one has been ascertained. Doesn’t this bother you?”

“I can’t help my anxiousness over it but… To tell you the truth, I’m grateful of all that you and Dejun have done for me recently.” You’re not speaking of just their diligence in Geumji. Many times, you could have fallen prey to a bevy of dangers while outside of the Hwarang’s custody, but Donghyuck has repeatedly saved your life during your time together. “If I had to deal with all of this alone, then there’s no telling where I’d be at this point.”

You pause for a moment, “You know, I was intimidated by you at first. But now, I have to admit that I owe much to you. So, from the bottom of my heat… Thank you.” With every ounce of appreciation you can muster, you admit to him your sincere debt of gratitude.

“That’s more like it,” he smirks. “Humility is a more attractive color on you. From now on, feel free to humble yourself by complimenting me however much you deem fit.”

“Oh please,” you nearly groan, “I just did. Don’t make me regret it already…” Throwing a petty fit, you pout your lips as Donghyuck chuckles to himself.

Suddenly, his expression drops and he appears stern without missing a beat, “Earlier, you had a question. I have a response.”

“Oh?” Your heart seems keen on bursting from your chest, wondering if he had in fact located a ship.

“Actually, this would be a better discussion for after we’ve eaten. Prepare yourself in the meantime.”

Your meal is shared in silence, you have trouble finding room for your last piece of fish, so you stand to collect the dishes. After cleaning the plates and utensils, you stand in front of Donghyuck calmly, waiting for him to share any possible information about a ship.

“So, in regards to leaving for Goguryeo… Their army has graciously offered us permission to board their ship.”

“Really?!” You exclaim.

“Of course. In what world would lying about that benefit me?”

“Thank you!” you cry out, “At long last… I can finally reunite with the Hwarang.” Euphoric tears form behind your eyelids, and once more you thank Donghyuck.

As in usual custom, he bears no immediate reaction, his expression unchanged.

“Donghyuck?”

“I cannot guarantee that either of us will find them, however.” He closes his eyes momentarily, “In all honesty, the chances are slim to none.”

“What…?” Somehow, the message behind his words fails to register, and you fall silent. “Wh-Why not? We’re still going to take our chances and board that ship, aren’t we?”

A sneaking suspicion that things are about to change spurns the furious pounding of your heart. His words had been spoken eerily, worming their way into your heart like a haunting premonition.

“The Hwarang were some of the first men that breached the walls of Pyongyang, and while the city is almost in Silla’s favor… Well… Not many men survive the initial attacks. Their fate has spoken, we just aren’t privy to it yet.”

You hold your breath, predicting the worst. Years of blood, toil and sweat, spent in countless battlefields over the corpses of friends and foes… They can’t be gone yet… They can’t. By the time you set sail for Pyongyang, there might not be anyone alive to greet you.

Just as you’re on the brink of collapsing, Donghyuck reaches out his hand to steady you. “Stand. You committed yourself to witnessing their end firsthand. Or were those all hollow gestures?”

“I… wasn’t lying.” His words slap you across the face. Donghyuck has a habit of provoking your insecurities, as if he takes pleasure from seeing you panic. For some reason, this is different as he strikes a potent nerve.

“So, if you were being truthful, then it must be clear to you. Their sense of pride. The journey they’ve traveled, and how you are woven into their myth.” He says, grip tightening on you, “Your tenure together may have been brief, remember them as they were; remember how they honored their code. This duty is yours alone… Should you survive, then you will be the sole keeper of their memory.”

Now, unlike any moment prior, is the moment that you realize how fiercely Donghyuck’s crimson eyes burn, how they can spark inspiration within you to do anything.

“Okay…” All you can muster is a nod in response. It’s still too soon for you to accept grief, let alone wallow in a pool of sorrow, “But, we’re still able to board the ship, right?”

“Yes…”

“Okay, then let’s leave for Pyongyang. To see the Hwarang, whatever state they’re in.”

Upon hearing your response, Donghyuck’s mouth turns into a grin, and you swear you see a twinkle in his eye, “Very well, I shall take you there. Besides I vowed to do so. You can always count on a Demon to be true to their word…”

“Thank you.” You take a deep gulp of air, letting yourself process the weight of the undertaking you’d just accepted.

Thinking back on it, your father and brother… In fact, almost every warrior you’d ever met imparted something significant to you before passing on. Your heart is keenly aware that another memory, as Donghyuck had described, would be waiting for you in Pyongyang. It’s the end of a long, long war.

You’re sure that your journey with the Hwarang, too, will succumb at this war’s culmination, and nothing you say or do will ever fully prepare you.

February 27th, 667 – Nampo Bay The scents of rust and salt greet you as you board the small trading vessel, and you think of the strings Donghyuck and Dejun must have pulled to make this happen. Your initial impression of them had been heartless monsters set on destroying the Hwarang… But here you are, finding yourself thanking them repeatedly. No matter how many times you say it, it never captures how indebted you feel to their kindness.

“Shall we?” Donghyuck asks, holding out his hand to help you step onto the deck.

“Yes,” you say, taking his hand and jumping aboard, “Let’s go.”

A faint smile curls onto his lips as his hand leaves yours.

As day turns to night, you sit atop the ship’s deck, letting the cold air whip by your cheeks. Beyond this stretch of water are the remaining members of the Hwarang… You’d been so close to Pyongyang earlier last year; you find it funny now that you’ll be approaching it from the opposite side.

As you find yourself lost in thought, you’re startled by Donghyuck’s presence next to you.

“We should arrive no later than tomorrow,” he says coolly, “Have you given any more consideration to your aim in witnessing their final moments?”

Your gaze falls to the deck, you think that you’re ready for it, but the more you inch towards Pyongyang, the more hesitant you become. The reality is that the number of men who fought and sacrificed their lives is a mystery to you, and you’ve been oblivious to it for some time. For all you know, them men whom you so desperately pine to see could be long gone, their bodies ravaged in unspeakable ways.

Taeil, Taeyong, Yongqin, Yuta, Jaemin, Jaehyun… Over the past two years, news of their deaths had traveled to you while tending to your own business with Donghyuck. You fooled yourself into thinking that, somehow, not bearing firsthand witness to their deaths means there’s a chance that they’re still alive but…

“I need to see it for myself.” You state firmly, looking out over the water, “I want to see their frit, their conviction, and I want to be there for them… when it all comes to a close. Since we keep their memory, we must witness every second of it for the sake of its truth.

Donghyuck keeps his gaze fixed on the northern star, which softly flickers above the ocean. It takes him a moment to speak, “I hate the cold. Let’s return inside.”

You follow shortly after him, hearing the waves crash against the side of the ship as you go below deck.

February 28h, 667 – Nampo Bay Just as Donghyuck had predicted, the ship arrives on the outskirts of Goguryeo the very next day. In order to travel upriver to Pyongyang, you move to a smaller ship, dropping anchor before hastily boarding.

As you travel upstream, the sounds of fighting and the smell of smoke pervades through the air.

“We’re sailing right into the thick of it…” Donghyuck murmurs as your heart drops, realizing that the Hwarang are likely fighting for their lives right now. In your anxious haste, you seem ready to sprint from the small ship as it docks at a port outside of Pyongyang before Donghyuck calls out to you.

“Donghyuck…?” He wraps his arms around your shoulders from behind, your body going warm in his tender embrace. The suddenness of his gesture throws you off, entirely. “Is something wrong?”

He offers no immediate answer, the boat gently rocking underfoot. In fact, you’re totally in the dark as to why he’s acting the was that he is, given you cannot see his expression. Instead, you can only rely on the tight warmth of his embrace.

“Nothing can stop you from going, can it?” He murmurs, but it almost sounds like a request. “There is still a chance of saving yourself from the pain of watching their demise unfold.”

Contrary to your initial discussion, Donghyuck seems less concerned with the fact that you want to go, the focus now being on your well-being. It begs an answer, one that still needs forming.

A lump forms in your throat as you question yourself, moments from now, whether or not you had adequately prepared yourself for it… You may encounter the corpses of friends you care for deeply. Will you be able to cope with it? Can you, like the rest of the Hwarang, grapple with loss, conquer it, and come out all the stronger?

“Yes,” you grit your teeth, you can’t have any doubts, “I’ll go. To where everyone’s fighting… But I do have one request.”

“What is it?” His breath tickles your ear.

You rest your hands softly on his that still lay coiled around your body, “Will you stay with me… until the bitter end? If I were to stand witness to the Hwarang’s demise, and it becomes difficult for me to keep my composure, let alone stand… Would you be there to lift me back up?”

Under his embrace, you can feel his muscles tense, and a small exhalation of air from him is enough to tell you that he’s smiling. It takes him a beat to conjure a reply, “How stupid of you to ask… Do you take me for a man who does back on his word? I will follow you, no matter the distance.”

A part of you had expected him to respond as such, but hearing those words fall so comfortably from his mouth evokes a warm feeling in your stomach. Although his response is rather arrogant, its delivery is muted by the way his arms pin you next to his beating heart, and through this intimate expression, he lays bare his truthful self.  

“Thank you…” You’re beginning to lose count of how many times you had thanked him during your time together. Because of him, you’re alive today, ready to brace whatever comes next.

After disembarking the small boat, Donghyuck and you make your cautious approach towards the city, unsure of who or what could be lurking in the surrounding forest.

“Wait.” Donghyuck’s voice stops you in your tracks, “Do you hear that? The fight’s stopped.”

“Now that you mention it…” The silence is far more eerie than the score of shouts that were roaring moments earlier.

“Do you think the city’s been captured?” You ask tentatively.

“Maybe… Perhaps fate is telling us something, something we won’t know until we reach their headquarters. Let’s move.”

His body language is suggestive enough for you to assume what may have occurred, but there’s no way in knowing for sure. Each step closer to the city unsettles your nerves. There’s nothing to do but push forward, readying yourself for whatever may await you.

March 1st, 667 – Pyongyang, Kingdom of Silla The Kingdom of Goguryeo is no longer. After weeks of resistance, their terms of surrender lay crumpled in the wind as the Tang and Silla forces finished their chokehold on the city. Over two years removed from the Battle of Seorabeol, the war had drawn to a close. Your arrival within the city is met with a group of familiar faces, in bittersweet celebration of the victory.

“Jeno! Shotaro!” You cry out as you see the two Hwarang standing in front of a dilapidated building you assume used to be their headquarters, “I can’t believe you’re safe!”

“Ah—” Shotaro looks as if he’s seeing a ghost, “Since when have you been in Pyongyang?”

“Our ship docked just the other day. It’s been so long… There’s so much I have to tell you all.” You say quickly, unable to get the words out quickly enough.

“Wait a minute,” Jeno shakes his head, “Just because you had something to tell us… You came all the way out here?! You’re crazy! What if a stray arrow were to hit you, and you got seriously hurt?! The hell were you thinking?!”

“Enough of your whining,” Donghyuck stops him, “As long as she’s under my protection, there will be no such threats to her safety, especially ones as harmless s you describe.”

“Hey! You’re—!” Jeno exclaims.

“Aren’t you the Lord of a Demon Clan?” Shotaro asks gruffly, “What is your business with her?”

“Actually,” you interrupt, “Donghyuck was my escort here.”

“Are you sure about that?” Jeno asks worriedly, “You don’t have to lie for his sake. He’s not keeping you hostage, is he?”

It’s natural for them to have aroused suspicions regarding Donghyuck, considering he had plagued the Hwarang for years in Seorabeol. The two Hwarang look at one another with puzzled expressions.

“So… Are the men here what remains of the Hwarang?” You ask gently, “What happened to the Commander and Sungchan…?”

Jeno’s shoulders slump, his teeth biting into his lip. Your stomach sinks in anticipation, noting his souring body language.

“Sungchan didn’t make it… We lost him at Namhansanseong…” You grimace at his words, nothing softening the blow of someone notifying you that a friend has passed away. No matter how many times you’re given news of someone’s death, it absolutely shatters you.

“And the Commander…?”

“In a last-ditch effort, the remaining Goguryeo forces attacked our supplies outside of the city, the Commander left to lead the reinforcements… We received word that he, too, was killed in action during the skirmish.”

Even Kun… The fearless leader of the Hwarang, who picked up the pieces after the execution of his beloved predecessor, hadn’t been spared from this war.

“We have yet, mind you, to discover his remains.” Shotaro says, “All we have not is some information we coaxed from a Goguryeo soldier who encountered the Commander.”

By virtue of his unstoppable rage, Kun had lifted the Hwarang by the scruff of its neck and led the frontline proudly. The remnants of the group are preserved in honor of the memory of his last stand.

“Jeno, was it?” Donghyuck says, “Word is that you’re responsible for tendering the Hwarang now that you’ve been promoted to Chief. What compelled you to accept something like that? You’ve barely any men to lead. Surely it must scare you to take up such a threshold.”

“The burden of responsibility was there for the taking, and someone needed to step up. Someone needs to rebuild, laying the foundation of a new Hwarang with the same resolve that the Commander and Chief stove for,” Jeno says resolutely.

Donghyuck smirks at this, “Just what they need—another fool who can’t think two steps ahead, huh? Look alive, kid. The war’s over. The way you’re doing things, you might as well etch a line on your neck so the next enemy of Silla knows where to swing.”

“What’s that supposed to mean?!”

“Jeno!” You try and calm him, “He doesn’t mean any harm by that!”

“Your allies will be sweeping the city soon… It’s best we leave,” Donghyuck says, turning on his heels and swiftly walking away.

“You should go with him,” Shotaro says quietly, “I’m not sure if anyone recognized him as an ally of Goguryeo… If they were to rope you into that… I’m not sure what may happen.”

“Well then, Jeno, Shotaro,” you smile at them softly, “Please take care of yourselves.”

“You too,” Shotaro returns your smile.

“For all we know, this may be the last we see of each other,” Jeno says quietly, “but, be safe. We’ll see each other in the next life.”

They send you off warmly, waving as you trek after Donghyuck. You know the path ahead of them won’t be an easy one. The Hwarang had been all but decimated, regaining their numbers or even getting approval from the Crown to regroup would be a difficult task. They’re holding onto an inspiring devotion in the name of the Hwarang, and what they stand for.

April 25th, 667 – Pyongyang, Kingdom of Silla Nearly two months have passed since your arrival to the city. In the throes of spring, you find your nerves calmed by the gentle winds blowing in from the coast. After separating from Jeno and Shotaro, you track Kun’s journey to the storehouses where he’d last been seen, hoping to uncover the whereabouts of his remains.

“Donghyuck,” you turn to look at your companion, “You mentioned something to me about how humans only wage wars for wealth and power, but… Do you… honestly still believe that?”

Prior to your time here, you’re sure he would’ve nodded without giving it a second though. But recently there’s been a noticeable shift in his attitude. After killing both Jinsang and Ahro, and witnessing the end of the Hwarang, seeing all they had died for… Perhaps he’s had an epiphany of sorts, or at least, is more receptive to notions that he once viewed as foreign, if not beneath him.

“This experience has been enlightening,” he admits, “The men who gave their lives in Pyongyang are certainly exceptions to that belief. My views were upheld by the atrocities we saw back in Seorabeol, but Kun was no fool, not did he suffer any delusions of grandeur. He fought, like any man should, to his death.”

“That’s a good point…” You aren’t sure what sore of magic the Hwarang had conjured to keep hold of their strength in the face of certain death. As Donghyuck had described, they knew their odds, of their position, yet somehow were steadfast in their convictions against Goguryeo.

“Take a long look at everything around you…” He says, motioning to the carnage of war, “This place is no more than a graveyard, but to you and the people who mattered, it is a memorial to the will and testament of the Hwarang’s character.”

“Even then…” you murmur, noting silently that they had been rudely disbanded in the face of victory.

“They failed. Some of them held a notion that their idealistic worldview would stand up to scrutiny, and that notion was proven false,” Donghyuck sighs loftily, “They are fools for believing otherwise, and so the world went, spinning without them.”

As painful as it is to listen, you understand why Donghyuck may feel this way. Yet, you totally disagree with him,

“They were warriors…” You push, “It’s not like they couldn’t keep up with what was going on. It’s that they refused diverging their path out of principle. I’m certain they had a good reason for staying true to their convictions.”

“It never ceases to amaze me how hastily you jump to conclusions,” he smiles, “Listen back to what I said. I hadn’t labeled them fools out of spite… But, chasing such an elusive dream of honor… is impossible. Demons don’t often value upholding personal convictions, however temporal they may be.” He speaks vaguely, but it’s likely the greatest compliment that he can ever give to anyone, much more in reference to the Hwarang.

In a way, you detect a hint of envy in his statement, as if he wishes there were opportunities to out his needs before the collective needs of his kin.

A long silence stretches between you, broken only by your timid musing, “Where do you plan on going from here?”

“Before engaging in the bane that is human affairs, we Demons lived a peaceful, secluded life. I pine, quite dearly, to return to it,” He says simply, wistfully, “I tire of participating in the frivolous squabbles.”

“I see…” You had never thought to consider him a transplant in this world. How does he cope with strife? With the pettiness of human conflict?” The risk, of course, is losing touch with his concept of ‘home’ in these destitute conditions.

“I have a lingering suspicion that it’s only a matter of time before the remnants of Goguryeo call on me just as Baekje did Sicheng…” He hums, “Heading back to my clan is my utmost concern, so that I may prepare my people to head into hiding where they will be out of the humans’ grasp.”

“Back to your clan…” This means that your journey with him has ended, and that it’s time for you to part ways. Your time together these past two years…There’s a part of yourself that had slid into some fantasy that the two of you would travel together indefinitely.

“What about you…?” He asks, causing you to think.

Each of your affairs had been concluded. In a way, you’re without direction or purpose, “I haven’t decided yet. I do think, however, that I’ll stick around here for the time being… I don’t want this memory to fade. I’m not ready to relinquish the resting place of the Hwarang.”

While you speak, Donghyuck brings his fingernails close to his eye level, gazing at them with disinterest, “You know, in the beginning, I only expressed interest in you because you were a Demon, and a female at that… But fate brought me closer to you, and by extension, the Hwarang as well… You overcame the tragic loss of your father and brother with unexpected maturity, proving that there is more than meets the eye with you.”

This is the first time he’s complimented you outright. In all honesty, it leaves you a bit perplexed on how to respond, “I didn’t really have a choice… Father, Ahro, and the Hwarang… I just dealt with losses as they came, as there wasn’t any use dwelling on the past.”

“No need to be modest,” he smiles and lowers his hand, “If I had never embarked on this quest to locate the members of the Hwarang with you, then I would have likely never become aware of their real selves. Heh, who would’ve guessed you were capable of teaching me something?”

His words confuse you, having become so familiar with his sardonic remarks you’re unsure if these are genuine. All of a sudden, he outstretches his arms toward you.

By the time you realize what’s occurring, his face, stunningly handsome in spite of his intimidating expression, is merely inches from yours. Taken aback, your heart flutters as his hand moves to cup the back of your head, pulling you in ever so slightly until your lips are pressed together. Numbness trickles from the top of your head, your lips remaining shut and vexed.

Although… You don’t mind this. Donghyuck flicks his tongue gently over your lips, and before you know it, you’re locked within an intimate throe. There’s an inexorable draw to him, an energy that tingles your face just from the touch of his lips. All of your deep longings awoken by the heat of this sensuous kiss, it makes you unable to focus on anything else.

And just when you think your heart’s ready to burst—he relinquishes you, just as quickly as he’d pulled you into his embrace.

For a moment, you’re entirely speechless, perhaps wide-eyed enough to elicit a smile from Donghyuck, “Let this kiss stand proof that I do not consider you a stranger”

“Where did that come from…?” You somehow manage to escape your stupor long enough to ask him a singular question.

“As soon as you are ready, come find me.”

“Wait, so you mean…” Why is he behaving so cryptically? All of this feels so unclear, and you’re still reeling from the kiss…

Donghyuck, however, is unconcerned with your incoherent ramblings, continuing on without bringing to attention your flustered demeanor, “And if you don’t, well,” he grins, “then I’ll come for you.”

Although you had accomplished everything you set out to do in Pyongyang… It seems as if Donghyuck has his own unfinished business to attend to. Granted, you aren’t totally unopposed to the idea… As you bookend one chapter of your lives, it’s time to start anew. And for the first time in years, you’re ready for whatever life has to throw at you. You can shed your skin and blossom with nothing to tether you down. November 16, 667 – Toehwa-hyeon, Kingdom of Silla You stand alone outside of your childhood home, cold vapors escape your mouth with each breath as you bundle yourself in a blanket. Your restlessness is further spurred by the incessant urge to clean the aging home. So, you enter the chilly yard, gathering the dead leaves scattered along the walkway into a neat pile with a broom.

The season brings in winter festivals, keeping the small-town buzzing, you can see people hustling up and down the street at nearly all times of the day. After returning to Toehwa-hyeon your first order of business had been to write Doctor Namekawa a heartfelt letter. He replied almost immediately, expressing sincere relief after having been notified of your safety. He made a point of iterating that if I never needed aid, you can reach out to him, which had warmed your heart.

Your second order of business was writing to Sooyoung. She insisted that you stay with her in her village. And although you appreciated her generous offer, you refused. It’s because—

Doctor Heo,” an older woman smiles gratefully, “You have no idea how thankful I am for your help. Do you remember me? You inspected my child’s cold.”

All of a sudden, you’re approached by your next-door neighbor, who sings you words of praise.

“It was really no issue,” you shake your head, “How is he doing?”

“Wonderfully!” She beams, “Back when Jinsang closed his clinic, and I was told that you left for Seorabeol, I was so worried about you… But seeing you here safe brings a tear to my eye.” Noticing your silence, she continues, “Enough about that… You aren’t spending the winter here alone, are you?”

“Ah, yes… Sadly, my father passed away, so I’ll have to make do…”

“But, living alone as a woman is so dangerous,” she says with ample worry, “The war may be over, but evil always lurks when you least expect it to… So, what’s next for you, then? Do you still plan on running the clinic from this house?”

“That’s something I have yet to figure out myself,” you chuckle.

“Whatever you do, it can’t be easy to do it alone, can it?” She hums, “Say, I have an idea! Why don’t I find a nice man to introduce you to? Couldn’t hurt!”

“Huh? Um, well…”

“You see,” she speaks quickly, “Right around the corner from Seongji bridge, there’s a quaint, little medicine shop there. One of the clerks is…”

“Oh sure!” You say to interrupt her, “I’ll be sure to check it out when I have the chance…”

“Are you sure?” She asks, “The two of you would be perfect! Same age, I think, too… Ah, well, a pretty girl like you should have no problem finding suitors, so please let me know whenever you’re ready, and I’d be happy to help!” Your neighbor flashes a bright grin, nodding her head politely before waving you goodbye.

You can’t help but sigh after she’s gone. It’s kind of her to express an interest in your well-being but…

“Finding a suitor…” You hum, “Maybe it is time for me to start thinking about settling down…” Although, you still have some wounds to lick, finding yourself too preoccupied to think about it just yet. If you had to marry someone, though…

It’s almost as if you can feel the ghost of Donghyuck’s lips atop yours, you have to shake your head to rid yourself of the thought.

Donghyuck had been so patient with you during your separation from the Hwarang. And when you lost Ahro and your father, he had been a shoulder to cry on, offering you words of comfort. He’d even gone to witness the end of the Hwarang with you.

Even if you were to meet another man, you’re unsure if the memories made with Donghyuck could ever be bested by another, but that’s assuming anyone else could understand what you’d gone through. Although Donghyuck said he’d come for you when your heart is ready, so much time has passed that you’re beginning to wonder if he really meant it.

Just as you’re thinking of him, continuing to sweep the stones in front of your home, you nearly brush over the feet of a passerby.

“Oh, I’m—” You look up to apologize and nearly choke on your works. The yellow embroidery should’ve given it away… Are you hallucinating right now? You rub your eyes incredulously, finding that Lee Donghyuck remains in front of you. Like a specter from an ethereal mist, he’s here.

“I’ve come back for you,” he says simply.

As soon as you hear his familiar, arrogant tone, the hairs along your neck stand up and you find that the broom that had once been in your hand is now falling onto the ground.

“What’s with that look?” Donghyuck questions with a slight frown, “This is the warmest welcome you can muster after being deprived of my presence for months?”

There’s no mistaking that this is him. Almost eight months have passed since you last spoke, yet he is still his usual, callous self. Honestly, you can’t expect any less from him.

“So, you really did come back…” Tears prick at the corners of your eyes.

“Hadn’t I mentioned that Demons always keep their word? Or, do you still doubt me?”

“Whether or not I believe you is one thing, but you can’t blame me for starting to worry,” you begin, “I mean, I’ve received no correspondence from you in the time we’ve been apart… Nothing… Not a letter or messenger…” Your eyes shift away from him, and you rush to wipe the tears from your puffy, swollen eyes. You had been your only friend throughout this period, save for the encroaching winter.

“You can just say how much you missed me,” he teases with a smile.

“I- I never said that!” You know there’s no hiding that, though. You had missed him. But, he’s so frustratingly smug about it, as if had been his intention all along to keep you waiting.

Just as you’re about to offer your own snarky response, he stops you with an outstretched arm. He draws you in close, pressing his lips against yours. Instinctively, your head jerks backwards.

“What do you think you’re doing?!”

“I told you I’d be back for you,” he murmurs as a well of emotions stirs tirelessly in your stomach, glancing back and forth between euphoric joy and trepidation. Your heart is being pulled in a thousand directions. “Just so you know, I’ve begun to make arrangements to migrate the Lee clan to a new home. A place which, if everything goes as planned, would be out of reach from any of the Kingdom’s squabbles. A safe place.”

He hums softly and you can feel the vibrations in his chest, “You are the last piece of the puzzle. You will come with me, won’t you?”

“Hold on a minute! I can’t just up and leave everything so suddenly,”

“Sudden?” He asks, “What’s sudden about it? I’m not here to play games. You kept me waiting for eight months. Actually, not just eight... If you add up all the time I wasted while you were in the Hwarang’s custody, it’s even longer.”

You thought that your last interaction would have changed things, but he’s as pompous as ever. You’re so aghast with embarrassment that you have nothing to say, not that he would listen to it.

Yet, as the world seemed to spiral out of control, Donghyuck had remained constant, unbending and unbroken, and always by your side.

“Well?” He asks once more, “Are you coming with me, or not?”

As you search for the right words to say, it leaves an awkward space to which Donghyuck thins his scarlet eyes gleefully, “There was no need to bother with asking, was there?”

You shake your head and he slowly closes the distance between the two of you once more. From the moment you parted in Pyongyang, your heart yearned for his embrace once more. It’s a feeling you’re sure to cherish for the rest of your life.

Donghyuck may be a pain, but he’s your pain, and you’re all the better for it.

#haechan x reader #haechan angst #haechan fluff #nct imagines #nct angst #nct fluff #nct 127 angst #nct 127 fluff #nct dream angst #nct dream imagines

[jungwooisms]

hwarang | l.donghyuck

ACT I (teaser)

fic out now!!!

pairing: lee donghyuck x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, suh youngho (johnny), lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, qian kun, kim doyoung, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, dong sicheng (winwin), kim jungwoo, wong yukhei (lucas), lee minhyung (mark), xiao dejun (xiaojun), na jaemin, lee jeno, liu yangyang, osaki shotaro, zhong chenle, jeong sungchan, park jisung warnings: none for the teaser word count: 1.4k (50k+ for part i) it is important to read the prologue first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

April 1st, 663 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla The sound of the broom sweeping against the stone entrance of the temple sounds rhythmic to your ears. As you reflect on being here for a little over a year now, you realize what a settled routine everyone’s come to, you’ve even been allowed more freedom to move around the compounds. Perhaps this freedom is what allows your guard to be down as a figure approaches you.

You see him in your periphery as you go to glance at the new buds on some nearby flowering trees, you face him, needing to squint as he nears. It’s obvious that he isn’t a part of the temple’s staff…

And there stands Lee Donghyuck. The man who had affiliated himself with Baekje, who’d outed himself as an enemy to the Hwarang. Your grip around the broom handle tightens as a nervous energy courses through you.

Almost as if he can sense your anxiousness, he looks to you and speaks with a warm tone, “I’m not here to harm you.” His eyes travel to the trees you’d been doting on before returning his gaze to you, “It’s been a while since I last stepped foot in Seorabeol… and I just happened to visit Bulguksa.”

“Did you think I’d believe that?” You ask, conviction raiding your tone.

“Well,” he sighs out, “If I’m being honest, I’ve come to check up on you, but my moods can be fickle. So, I decided to admire this temple instead.”

Your natural reaction should be to run and alert everyone that he’s here, but you doubt he’d let you get that far.

“Just to let you know,” Donghyuck’s voice lowers for a moment, “If I’d come to take you away, then I would’ve already done so.”

Once again, he looks to the surroundings, not having a care in the world that he lay in a viper’s nest. A small smile graces his lips as he looks to the temple itself.

“Shrines, temples, palaces, the city… If humans can do one thing right, it’s building beautiful monuments.”

“Huh?” Dumbfounded by his demeanor, you can only just stand there as he looks to the architecture.

“If you’re done trying to interrogate me, look up and try to admire what’s around you.”

Your brow furrows at his words, but, you’re inexplicably drawn to do what he says. Normally, you’re so occupied with helping out around the temple, you never take the time to sit and marvel at the scenery. Yet now you look and you can sense life teeming from the trees that surround every corner of the compound. The soft, setting sun of spring accentuates the lighter details of the temple. It’s refreshing to sit back and watch spring dance around you, almost as if you’re seeing it for the first time.

“It’s beautiful…” You say as your eyes catch sight of a bird flying up to its roost in one of the temple’s support beams.

“Don’t you find it strange? Humans are capable of producing such beautiful things.” Donghyuck sighs, “Yet, they think nothing of it when their wars reduce such beauty into ash, dust and fire. They’re all fools. And despite being of the same species, clan or family, they’ll find any reason to kill one another. They don’t even blink when it comes to deceiving their fellow man, lying their way to the top, and if they want something, they’ll steal it.”

He then looks to you, “What do you say? Wouldn’t you say humans are foolish?”

“There might be some people like that…” You shake your head, “That doesn’t apply to everyone.”

“Are you talking about those men?”

“Yes. Even though the Hwarang pride themselves for being warriors, they do it to protect the people of Seorabeol and the Crown.” You stand firmly on your hill, “It’s never for personal gain.”

What Donghyuck had described is true, that there are many people in the world capable of evil, but you know that isn’t true of the Hwarang. You’ve spent enough time with them to realize that.

“Not too far from this temple lies another. A temple beside a temple. Have you ever thought about how odd that is?” Donghyuck asks, “Long ago, before Silla was a mere conception, these two temples were part of a much more powerful temple. During a period of war, the forces of the western temple were successful in holding back the powers of the Jinhan for ten years. Do you think Hyeokgeose would allow this errant faction to be left as they were?”

“Well, I suppose not,” you answer and Donghyuck nods at your answer.

“So, the King operated behind-the-scenes, establishing this temple as its own being, isolating the original one.” Donghyuck’s hand runs along one of the agate stones on the wall, “They manipulated the two entities, fanning the flames until the two sides eventually broke out into a fight. Essentially, they split the temple’s forces and funding in half, which exhausted all of their men and made long term war unfeasible.”

“Neither side knew that they were being manipulated, battling their former friends, allies and comrades, for hundreds of years. So, don’t you think this sounds familiar?”

“Are you talking about the Hwarang?”

He doesn’t answer you, only looking coldly out to the courtyard. “These men, in whom you’ve foolishly placed your faith, are only pawns of the King. They won’t realize they’re pawns until it’s too late, and they will forever be Silla’s bitches, swinging their swords to put food on the table.” The man shifts, his arms crossing, “They have no sense of the bigger picture, nor do they show any regard for others. All they care about is advancing their self-interests.” Eyes shifting to you, “You’re telling me that your faith in humans is because of men like them?”

“Even then, I’d have faith in them.” You say, unwavering, “I’ve lived with them for the past few years and seen them closely. I know. Everyone struggles, and they’ve put forth so much effort to achieving what they believe is right. So… I don’t think they are like the people you think they are.”

“So, you think the Hwarang are just, and you don’t care if they kill one another, or participate in their needless wars?”

“That—No, that wouldn’t be alright,” his question stops you for a moment.

Donghyuck smiles and lets out a soft laugh, “Aren’t you a selfish one? But I do commend your desire to keep loyalty for those you have faith in, even if it’s futile.”

“What do you mean?” You question, furrowing your brow.

“Well,” he sighs out, not answering you yet again, “it seems like I’ve overstayed my welcome.” He straightens himself nonchalantly, brushing his shoulder.

You look at him, wondering if he really had just come to sightsee.

“Do you want me to abduct you or something?” He smirks, noticing your expression. His expression then wavers, becoming serious as he’s thought of something, “Let me tell you something… These men that you’re so fond of, they’re just a bunch of dumb nobles who’ve convinced themselves that they’re warriors just because they own a sword. They draw their swords when they’re told and they kill their own men without batting an eyelash. I wouldn’t trust such people.”

“But everyone—”

“When the time comes, I will come for you.” Donghyuck says, “Think hard on what I said until then.”

“Come for me—” You begin, reaching out for him, but a gust of wind blows between your fingertips and just like that, he’s gone.

#haechan x reader #nct imagines #nct angst #nct fluff #haechan angst #haechan fluff

[jungwooisms]

hwarang | prologue

pairing: no pairing in prologue. route list tba genre: historical au, fluff, angst, smut (later routes), supernatural members: moon taeil, lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, qian kun, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, wong kunhang (hendery), lee minhyung (mark), na jaemin, park jisung warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, mentions of suicide, alcohol, minor character death word count: 11.2k

in 661 silla, you leave your hometown in search for your father, a physician whose work takes him far from home and oft to the battlefields of the kingdom. but with no word from him in months, you disguise yourself as a man and head to seorabeol, the kingdom’s capital, in search of him. it’s not until you become involved with a group that calls themselves the hwarang that things begin to unravel at the seams.

January 22nd, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla  It had been two months since your father had left. And those two months that felt like a lifetime. It wasn’t that you were so solely dependent on your caretaker that you’d let your home and his practice fall into ruin. It’s just that he said he’d be gone for at most two weeks while he attended to a patient in Seorabeol. He’d neglected to write, forgotten, maybe. But he wasn’t a careless man, you knew that as much as he. Perhaps that’s why you find yourself so stricken with apprehension as you near the gates of Silla’s capital, the dirt underfoot hard in the dead of winter.

The gates of the city stand menacingly in front of you, the grip you have on the knapsack slung over your shoulder tightens as you begin to notice the mass of people making their way in and out of the city. You have to dodge every nudging elbow prodding into your back to move you forward, duck or sway when a merchant’s wares almost topple from their carts and try not to make eye contact with the soldiers who line the entrance. 

Eventually, you make it into the city with little to no fuss raised about you, everyone seemed so deeply enthralled with their own business you were easily out of their minds. Yet now that you stand in the streets of Seorabeol, you don’t know which way to go. It wasn’t as if your father had left a directory for you to follow him up on, nor had any of his letters detailed his whereabouts in the capital in full. So, you sigh and continue forward, beginning to scan the crowds in search of a face you hadn’t seen in months.

Despite the golden sun shining down onto the Kingdom’s capital, Seorabeol lies under a blanket of cold air. And despite the layers of cloth and fur adorning your shoulders the wintery chill sets into your bones as you continue along the streets.

 Through the passing greetings of friends, the shouts of merchants and the bickering of their patrons, the voices collide together in a symphony of noise, you can’t seem to pull one apart from the other. No faces looked at you with recognition, but why would they? This wasn’t your home, and you were surely just another visitor that they’d forget as soon as you left their line of sight. 

You’d come to the capital when you were a child, your father had been called upon by some aristocratic family, but you could scarcely remember who it had been. After the patient had been treated the pair of you had retreated to your village some distance away from Seorabeol, the memory of this place and its people quickly leaving your subconscious.  

 Even now, after the partial loss of that memory, you can recall how cold the city had been compared to how cold it was now. It might be due to the winter chill that resides like a phantom over the streets, but this felt different, more ominous now that you’re old enough to realize it. 

 Had you been right to leave your home? 

The question plagues you as you wander the winding streets, your legs tired from your trek and eyes even heavier from the lost sleep over the course of your father’s absence. You’d questioned, asked if anyone had heard your father’s name or had seen him before, but concluded that those who had seen or met him had done so weeks prior.

And then you asked of Namekawa Yasuo, an acquaintance of your father’s. He was another physician that might know where he resided. But that inquiry typically left you with a snicker and a turn of the other’s heels. It was most likely that your father and his friend had ventured on to another town from here. You were alone once again.

Before you’d realized it, dusk had fallen over the city, the gray clouds beginning to unleash a torrent of snowy flurries that made the streets become almost unnavigable. Your hands pull your overcoat together, trying to find warmth where you already knew there wouldn’t be. If you didn’t want to freeze to death, you’d have to find somewhere to stay the night or die by freezing or by some wandering bandit.

“Excuse me,” you call out as you stop traversing the road, turning to the side and over to a small stall aligning the street. Eyes locking with those of a miserly sort of merchant, you poise the question, “Do you know where the nearest inn is?”

 For a moment you’d forgotten that you were wearing your father’s clothes, so when the grizzled voice of the merchant asks if you’re looking for a pleasure house to get lost, you were somewhat puzzled. It isn’t without a moment of insistence that you’re just looking for a normal inn, do they comply. 

“Past the butcher’s, it’s cheap enough.” He turns away from you with that final statement, continuing to close up his stall and lock his goods away until the next morning. 

A quick nod and you’re off, the lanterns aligning the street only helping when the flurries die down a bit and you’re able to see several meters in front of you. You quicken your pace whenever you hear someone behind you, all too skittish to get out of this outbreak of snow. It wasn’t as if you feared the city’s inhabitants, but you’d heard warnings throughout your life that traveling alone at nighttime wasn’t ever a great idea. Maybe being dressed as a man should put you more at ease, but the message ingrained into your brain was even more overpowering. 

The city grows even darker as you fail to find the inn that the merchant had mentioned, had you already passed it? Ahead of you looks to be one of the agate walls aligning the city, stopping you dead in your tracks as you think of where to go next.

“Hey, kid.” A voice calls out behind you, it sounds disjointed, slurred. Were they drunk?

You spin on your heels, your hand reaching for your bag, for the small blade you’d tucked away in case of an instance like this. But it wasn’t just one man, it was three men swaying on their feet. Even at some distance away you could smell the sickeningly sweet scent of their perfumes and notice the bright colors their robes were made of. They were of some standing in society, but with the way they were presenting themselves, you suspect they were of the aristocracy’s lower ranks.

“Can I help you?” Using a lower register of your voice as you speak, as if it’ll somehow cast some sort of intimidation onto the men, you nod at them. Your fingers gently undo the string on your bag, reaching around for your blade. When you were younger your father had encouraged lessons, somewhat breaking the mold as for what was appropriate for a girl to learn, but your father had always been the unconventional sort.

“That’s a pretty blade,” one notes as you slip the weapon from the bag, the sheen from the hilt catching in the light of the streetlamp above. It was then you realized that they were probably more interested in the family heirloom than they were in you. “Seems a little extravagant for a commoner like you to have.”

“Why don’t you hand it over, we’d put it to much better use,” another snickers, stumbling forward and reaching his hand out towards you. Their heavily jeweled wrist chimes as their hand outstretches towards you, the gold glimmering in the now open moonlight.  

“But this is…” you hesitate, understanding that they wouldn’t comprehend its sentimentality. The handle of the blade is cool under your grip as your knees tense. It didn’t look as if any of the men were going to stop harassing you until they got what they were after, your only choice now was to get away from them at all cost.

So, you run. Feet slapping atop the ground, the tops of your shoes becoming wettened by the puddles of melted snow you step into as you bolt down a side street.

“Son of a— get back here!” You hear one of them call out after you, the collective sounds of their footfalls chasing after you only seconds later. 

It seems like you were running for hours, your heartbeat loud in your ears and the cold air tearing at your lungs with every breath you inhale. They were still chasing after you, they sound more distant now, but their curses and footfalls still echo the street behind you. You spot an alley and decide to duck into it for an attempt at eluding them.

There were several long sheets of wood leaning against the side of one of the houses, finding it an apt hiding place you crawl under them, trying to calm your breathing as you hear the footsteps of the nobles approach. 

“Are you sure it was this one?” You hear a voice after a few seconds at the opening of the alley, the labored breathing tells you it was one of your pursuers. 

“It had to have been,” the voices and footfalls edging closer, the clinking of their belts signaling their proximity. 

You hold your breath, expecting to be found out any second. But you’re not, instead the air goes quiet, the sound of the wind whistling through the alleyway all you can hear. It isn’t until a few seconds later that one of the men cries out in pain.

Before you could peek out from behind the board you stop yourself, not wanting to be caught by those men or whoever had caught them. 

“What do you think you’re doing!” One of the men cries out, you hear a blade being unsheathed as they speak. 

Another blade unsheathed, the sounds of iron on iron clanging through the air for a few seconds before one of the men speaks out again, “Why aren’t you dying?” A few bated breaths, “Jinyoung, we should get out of here—”

Something akin to primal fear takes over you at that moment, locking you in place, unable to move for a moment. What was out there? What were they fighting? With your mind flying with all sorts of gruesome imagery, you barely had time to comprehend what you were doing. Your head peeks out from your hiding spot and into the alleyway. 

There’s another clangor of steel as you look, the light from the street reflecting off one of the blades as two people are interlocked in a fight. The only figure you could see fighting was donned in a light blue robe, had they saved you?

Something of a menacing laugh emits from them, their blade once again falling onto the other’s as one of your pursuers cries out for help. Your savior says nothing as he stops his attacks, only now moving to raise his blade over his head and bringing it down to fatally slash against the chest of his foe. The struck noble lets out an anguished yell as he falls to his knees, the sword in hand clattering to the ground as he reaches to try and staunch the blood flow from the gash in his chest. 

A high-pitched laugh overtakes the man’s anguish, the man donned in blue still standing over his opponent and nearly snickering at his demise. You have to hold your hands to your mouth to stop you from gasping when the blue-clad man raises his sword once more. He begins hacking away at the now vanquished noble, his blows tearing into flesh more so like a butcher’s knife than a sword. There wasn’t skill, just a raw brutality behind every blow. 

 The screams grew quiet, just wet bellows that stilled after a moment more. Your breath heavy and your chest heaving after watching that, you’d just witnessed that man’s murder. Wanting to get away from this situation, you fall back under the cover of the wood, your back hitting the house’s exterior as you try and keep yourself together. The man keeps hacking away, the splatter of blood on the ground and onto the nearby walls almost causing you to be sick to your stomach.

This wasn’t human, it couldn’t have been. Sure, it was a man committing the act but the brutality of it all was more akin to a beast. It was as if they’d forgone any sense and given way into a psychotic madness. 

A coppery tinge to the air almost makes you gag; the scent of the deceased man’s blood had risen to greet you. How were you going to get out of this?

You pull your hands away from your face, the cold air meeting your skin all too unpleasantly. If you stayed in place the killer would easily find you if he wanted to, perhaps your best bet was to outrun him like you had the now deceased nobles. So, you brace yourself, pushing yourself up to your knees and prepare to make a dash down the alleyway and towards the opening on the other end. But as you do, you find that your joints have locked, sending you stumbling forward as you stand and knocking the sheets of wood over. With a dreadful fear encasing you, you turn to see that it hadn’t been just one man to kill the three that were after you, but two others had joined him as well, all wearing the light blue robes. All of them drenched in the blood of the fallen nobles. 

Their eyes bore into yours, smiles etching their way onto their faces as if you’ve become the lamb brought to the slaughter. You had to run, had to get away. But you can’t, your legs are locked in place out of the sheer madness of this situation. They laugh as they turn towards you, wordless in any other manner as they begin to saunter over to you, their silvery hair and reddened eyes looking almost ghostly in the moonlight.

You were going to die. You can’t even muster a scream to call out to any city patrol, nor move your limbs with how wrought with fear you are. 

Eyes closing as you begin to accept your fate, the sounds of their footsteps nearing, you can almost sense them lifting their blades to cut you down before— A whirring through the air and a grunt from one of the men in front of you has your eyes flying open. Someone had shot an arrow and hit one of the silver-haired men, causing them to stumble back a step or two. In theory, a blow like that should have downed a man, an arrow to the chest isn’t a superficial wound by any means, but it looks like the man was angrier now than injured.

The trio now raise their swords, their target now someone behind you, and before you're able to turn and see who or what it is, a glint of a silver blade flashes across your vision and cuts in front of you. You’re able to feel the warm blood splatter across your cheek before you register what just happened in front of you. Now the trio of men lay on the ground, dead by the looks of it, as a long gash seems to have torn across their bodies. The same queasiness from before begins to invade you as you wipe the gore from your cheek onto your sleeve, but before you’re able to do anything else about it, you hear a voice behind you.

“Is this really what we’re dealing with tonight?” It was a sigh of disappointment, but somewhere in the tone there was almost a sound of amusement. “I wanted to take them out myself, couldn’t you have picked a different patrol group, Nakamoto?” You turn to see two men behind you, clad in the same blue as the murderers, but they looked calmer, despite the one talking having a grin plastered onto his face. 

“I did my job,” the one that must be Nakamoto sighs, watching the other slinging the bow he’d used to shoot one of the men around his shoulder before moving to withdraw the sword he’d used to slay the men that had been after you. “Unlike you, I’m not getting any gratification out of this.” 

“That’s a little rude,” his partner laughs.

“You’re not even trying to hide it,” Nakamoto frowns, he carries the air as if he’s dealt with the other’s antics for quite some time. His gaze then flickers from the trio of fallen men to you.

“You know me well enough to know that I’m joking,” the other shakes his head and turns to look at you. “If you had just let them kill the kid you could’ve saved us some trouble, though.” Despite the lightness in his tone, the content of his speech made the same chill of fear creep down your spine. You’d escaped the nobles and the murderers, but now a different foe stands before you.

“Maybe,” Nakamoto notes, “but this isn’t our decision to make.”

Your brow furrows as they speak, by what they were saying it would leave you to believe that these men were a part of some sort of organization. Thinking more on it, you only knew of one group prominent enough to walk the streets of Seorabeol at night in place of any military patrol. Were these truly members of the Hwarang? 

Before you’re able to part your lips to ask, a figure rounds the corner behind the two men and makes his way over to you. He wears the same blue as them, his hair styled the same way with a headband across his forehead and the long locks held in a topknot atop his head. The other two grow silent as he approaches, denoting some sort of superiority as he stands shoulder to shoulder with them. 

His gaze travels behind you, looking at the splayed out remains, and then returns to you, a frown adorning his lips. “It doesn’t seem like luck was on your side tonight.” He speaks sharply, as if his words were whettened by the same stone that had sharpened his blade. The cold blue of the moonlight reflects off the blade in his grasp as he raises it towards your chest, sending another bolt of dread to your stomach. Although it wasn’t necessarily the steel pointed at your heart that made you feel that way, it was the way his gaze bore into you. It was cold and fierce, but there was another emotion stowed away that you weren’t fully comprehending. Mercy, maybe? The man fully seems capable of killing you instantly, but he looks somewhat troubled. “If you run, I will kill you. Do you understand?” 

You nod immediately, knowing full well that he wouldn’t back down on that statement. He stares at you for a moment longer before sighing and sheathing his sword. 

“W- What?” Too surprised to stop yourself, you blurt out the question as the man crosses his arms.

“Are you sure about this Qian?” The snarkier of the two others asks, his eyes narrowing at the one he’d called out to, “The kid saw everything.”

Qian frowns, “Quiet. If you keep saying that then you know what we’ll have to do.”

With their apprehension to mention what had just occurred, it was clear that you’d seen something you weren’t supposed to. The more they said the easier it was to figure out what they were trying to hide and no one wanted that. 

“Don’t you think it’ll come back to bite us in the ass if we let him go?” With the way the Hwarang spoke it sounded as if he could read your mind.

“And so the right thing to do would be killing him? No,” Qian shakes his head, “We’ll see what to do with the kid once we get back.”

“I agree with the commander, the longer we stay here the more likely we’re to be seen… Again.” Nakamoto adds, moving to sheath his own sword and look at the creatures they’d slain as though he hadn’t seen them before. “If this is their reaction to blood, I don’t think they’ll have a practical use.”

“Damn…” Qian looks down to the corpses, an emotionless expression on his face before he looks back to his companions. “As for you two, stop with the ‘Qian’ and ‘commander’, we’re trying to keep a low profile.” 

“You can’t be serious, our robes are a big giveaway,” the nameless Hwarang snorts. 

“What should we do with the bodies? There doesn’t seem to be any physical signs…” Nakamoto notes, looking at Qian.

The commander thinks for a moment, “Just take their robes, Minhyung can deal with the rest.” 

 “Understood.”

“Another man killed in the streets of Seorabeol,” the other Hwarang sighs out before bellowing out a bark of laughter, “We’re doing a great job, aren’t we?”

“As long as we don’t talk about it, I don’t think anyone will know we were here,” Qian looks to you and you get the feeling that his words weren’t directed towards his companions. It wasn’t uncommon for people to be murdered in the capital, with rising tensions across the kingdoms as different factions had been popping up everywhere and leading anywhere from small to large fights. Seeing it happen was a different story. 

“Hmm, we did save you, didn’t we?” The nameless Hwarang muses as he looks at you.

Eyes widening at his statement. Despite his earlier attempts of pursuing after your death, he and Nakamoto had saved you from the murderers. “Thank you,” you bow, hesitantly as you didn’t trust them entirely. “I’m sorry for not thanking you earlier, there was just so much going on…” 

Looking back up at the three, they looked almost as confused as you felt. You quickly break eye contact and look down to the ground, “It’s a little strange to say that… but he told me I should say thanks so—”

Gaze returning to the men, Qian and Nakamoto were looking at anywhere but you while the third man was shaking with laughter.

“I guess I did tell you to, didn’t I?” He laughs again, doubling over to the point he has to wipe a few tears away from his eyes before straightening up. “You’re welcome, I’m Li Yongqin. Nice to meet someone who actually knows how to be polite.”

 “Thanks for helping me…”

 “The one you should be thanking is Nakamoto Yuta over here, and this bossy guy—” He begins again but is abruptly stopped by Qian.

 “The hell do you think you’re doing, Li?” He frowns as he turns towards Yongqin. 

“I understand your concerns, commander, but we have to move.” Whatever pervasive happiness that had penetrated the bloodied air dissipated with Nakamoto’s words. 

Li reaches out and grabs your wrist, gives you a small smirk and begins to lead you out of the alleyway and down the street. His grip too rough and tight to be friendly, his fingers feel like stone wrapped around you. There wasn’t any question about the situation you now found yourself in; if you were to run you were to be killed. Your life was now in their hands and up to their discretion.

“It would be best if you prepared for the worst,” Nakamoto says as you traverse the streets of Seorabeol, wondering how the sight of their bloodstained robes weren’t catching anyone’s attention. “I doubt this will end well for you.” His words were sharper than the blades of cold that soar through the streets, tearing into your chest.

January 23rd, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla The harshness of the sunlight beaming in through a nearby window pulls you from a dreamless slumber, the ground underneath you far too hard to allow you a peaceful enough rest for such frivolities. Head reeling at the events of the night prior, it isn’t until you try and rub the sleep from your eyes that you realize where you were exactly. The knot roping your hands together brushes against your wrists, the fibers of the cordage causing the skin to burn. 

Looking around the room, you realize that there isn’t anyone else present. In a way that made you feel a little more comfortable, but again, waking up in an unfamiliar place was sure to keep you on edge. You writhe on the floor for a moment, realizing that your feet had been bound too, the blankets that had been strewn atop you falling away and pooling on the floor beside you. A dull ache in your back tells you that you’d be feeling the consequence of sleeping on such a surface for the next day or so, the twisting already signaling a crick in your neck as well. For as dull as your own home had seemed to you as a child, you miss it now more than ever. 

“This is a nightmare,” a sigh under your breath as you think to the men who you’d come across the night prior, and whatever situation they’d found you in. 

Finding the scrambling on the ground unhelpful, you lay back down, your bound hands falling atop your stomach as you stare up at the dark ceiling. 

It’s only a few moments later that you hear the gentle slide of the wooden door across from you, noting that someone was making an appearance. You try your best to sit up, looking at the face of the newcomer and realizing quickly that it wasn’t one of the men with whom you’d been acquainted with last night. 

 “Are you awake?” a small and awkward smile as they peek their head into the room, they pause for a moment as they notice the ropes binding you. Their brow furrows as they step fully into the room, “This isn’t normally how we treat guests… If you’ll give me a moment, I’ll untie you.”

A silent nod as they approach, loosening the ropes around your ankles as you can now sit up freely, unencumbered by the restrictive ties. You note that he’d left your hands bound, you can understand why but the chafing still hurts.

“Who are you?” You question as they step back, a small smile quirking on their face as they move to kneel by your side. 

“Ah, my name’s Park Jisung,” he says, a look overcoming him as if he’d forgotten himself for a moment. 

“Thank you… Jisung.” Muttering out as he stands, offering out his arm to you to help you rise from the floor. 

“A few of the captains want to talk to you,” there’s something likened to a worry in his eyes, you hardly know the kid, but he reads like an open book. “If you’d just follow me…” 

And you do, walking in silence through the compound for a moment or two before the younger speaks up again. “They’ve been discussing what to do with you since they woke up. I think they’re going to try and hear what you’ve got to say and see if they’ve got to report you or not…”

“Report me?” 

“Mhm,” he nods as his feet slide over the smooth floorboards. “We’re not like the city guard or anything, so we don’t have that much jurisdiction over—” Jisung pauses, a hand raising to his mouth as if he’s said too much. He lets out a nervous chuckle, “Well, you’ll see.”

Jisung’s courtesy was nice, better than that of those men you’d seen last night. But it had an air to it that told you to be cautious, you were the one impeding on their space and it was their judgement to dole out.

 As if he could tell you were on edge, the younger speaks out, “They might seem scary at first but they’re really not that bad.” 

The Hwarang themselves don’t have a tainted name, but you knew that the ones located in the different towns and localities of Silla had varying degrees of severity. And with this being the unit of the capital, you wouldn’t expect them to be anything less than vicious towards any perceived troublemaking. 

 “You’re actually probably around the same age as our commander, well, we’re all really around the same age,” his laugh resounds around the space for a moment, his hand trailing up to his ear to toy with a small, dangling earring attached to it. “Captain Jeong and Captain Wong tend to sate any tension too so I wouldn’t worry all too much.”

 Jisung’s reassurances go partially on deaf ears as you approach what seems to be the main building. Through the paper walls you can hear muffled chatter as the people inside are undeniably trying to decide your fate. With a steady hand, Jisung slides open the door and motions you inside. 

 You didn’t need to announce yourself, as the sound of you entering caused several heads to turn in your direction. A quick glance around the room tells you that these were probably the heads of the Hwarang. Their own gazes felt like daggers, picking you apart silently and without a care other than what the hell your presence meant to them. 

 “I take it you slept well, then?” A voice to your right calling out to you. You turn your head to see Yongqin, or at least that’s what he’d been referred to last night, glaring at you with a smirk on his lips. His attire was different than last night, as were the robes of the several others you recognized standing around, more lavish than what their Hwarang uniforms had been yesterday. The red of his robes feels even more threatening to you in lieu of this situation. 

 “It wasn’t… great.” A small frown as you respond, noticing his brow contort into an irritated expression. You grit your teeth, maybe it would be better to kiss up to them?

 “Is that right?” His shoulders shrug, “When I went to check on you earlier you didn’t move at all, no matter how many times I tried to wake you up.” Yongqin sighs out, “You looked like you were dead to the world.”

 You don’t say anything, feeling a rise of embarrassment in your stomach at his words.

“Don’t take what he says too seriously,” another face emerging from the mass, belonging to another man you’d met last night. You think it’s the one they’d called Nakamoto Yuta. “Yongqin didn’t go anywhere near your room.”

 A devilish grin spreading over Yongqin’s face as he sees how flustered his statement had gotten you, “You didn’t need to ruin the fun that quickly, Yuta.”  

 “Nakamoto didn’t do anything wrong though, you though—” a glare at Yongqin, your fingers rubbing together as you try to find the will to butt heads with him. 

 “That’s enough.” A voice cuts through your conversation swiftly, drawing your attention to the figure standing at the head of the room. Their head hangs low, as if they were just listening to the chatter before calling out. “You sound like a bunch of kids.” It was the third man from last night, Commander Qian.

 “This is your witness Commander?” A new voice, younger sounding, calls out from your left. You turn to see three men sitting together, presumably having been conversing with one another prior to your arrival. 

 The notoriety of the Hwarang stemmed from the fact that they only chose youthful men to be a part of their organization, you can see that while glancing around to the other faces in the room. Maybe you’d expected them all to be a little older, but it seems as if the eldest was just in his late twenties or so.

 “He’s just a stick,” the voice continues, you see that it looks like the younger of the trio’s talking. His hand rests lazily over his knee as he looks you over, a frown settled onto his lips. 

 “You’re calling him a kid, Na?” One of the other men sitting snickers, “That’s funny.”

 So, that’s at least one of their names. 

“Put them together and they’d look just like scared little kids,” the second speaker sighs out, head resting lazily in his hand. 

 “I can call them that because I’m a mature adult, obviously.” The two begin to have a bickering discourse, glaring at one another from their seated positions.

 “Mature adult?” The other barks, his hand moving from his cheek in disbelief, “Wong, I knew you weren’t smart but that’s a reach even for you.”

 Their tones weren’t angry, more so a taunting argument between two friends. It was lighthearted enough but if you’d just been passing by and not listened fully you might’ve just seen it as two people arguing. Were these the two people that Jisung had mentioned, Jeong and Wong?

 “You’re just a pair of grumpy old men,” Na rolls his eyes, “I think you’re both going senile.” 

“You think you can get away with talking to us like that?” the one you presumed to be Wong scoffs, “I’m hardly old enough to be called old… Jeong here though…”

 “I thought we were friends, you son of a bitch,” Jeong looks to the other, an expression of faux hurt caked onto his brow. 

“Real adults, my ass,” Na shakes his head at the two. The back and forth between the three was certainly interesting to watch, it was almost as if they’d been going at it like this for years with one another. 

Despite their light-hearted banter, it didn’t downplay the tension you felt encroaching on this space. This was the home of the Hwarang, and you were an outsider, foreign to them in almost every way possible. 

“I’ll apologize on their behalf,” a soft voice speaks, it comes from one of the men standing next to Qian. “Don’t let them unsettle you too much.” The warmth emanating from his tone was enough to make you relax even in the slightest bit, forgetting for a moment the peril you may be in. 

 “Don’t kid yourself,” the Commander speaks up, shooting a glance to the other, “You’re the scariest one out of all of us, Lee.” You’re almost too lost in looking at the one who’d spoken to notice the number of heads nodding in agreement with Qian.

 “Really? I get that from the other men but from our own demon commander?” Lee muses, his hand toying with the long strands of hair falling over his shoulder before looking to his compatriot, “I feel a little flattered. I only try to hold the Hwarang to the highest standard I can.” His hand falls away from his hair, falling to rest on the hilt of his sword fastened around his waist in such a relaxed manner you hadn’t realized he’d had it on him in the first place, “Although I suppose it’s easy to get confused when our standards… or maybe our taboos, are at your mercy.” 

 “Maybe you’re right, but this isn’t the time to get into that,” Qian sighs out, a small smirk mirroring Lee’s, his gaze once again pinpointing on you after a moment. 

 “You’re lucky to have a friend like that, Kun,” a new voice comments. The dialogue between Lee and the Hwarang’s Commander hadn’t been exactly what you would call ‘friendly’. It was cold and lacked the warmth that had flowed between the prior conversation between the other three captains. Although from the way the new face had spoken it sounded as if he had perceived the pair as such. 

 “I haven’t introduced myself,” he says, turning from the pair and facing you. “Sorry, my name is Moon Taeil, the leader of the Hwarang. Or at least, this division,” he chuckles at himself.

 “So, you’re the most important man in the Hwarang?” A tilt of your head as you look at him, his presence was far less intimidating than the handful of others that had come before him.

 “Well,” another short laugh, “I wouldn’t go that far. I merely represent everyone in the Hwarang. Kun’s the commander and Taeyong’s more or less the colonel.”

 “Don’t you think that’s important information to be divulging, Taeil?” Kun cuts the other off, arms crossing over his chest as he continues to glare at you. 

“Ah,” Taeil’s brow softens, a confusion taking over his demeanor, “Do you think it’s a bad idea?”

“Unless you want them to learn everything about us,” a grunt as Wong pushes himself up off of the floor and strides over, quickly followed by Na and Jeong, “I think you’d better keep your mouth shut.” 

“Exactly! We don’t owe him anything,” Na adds, glancing over to you.

“Those are good points…” Taeil cedes for a moment, “But it’s rude to ignore your guests, isn’t it?”

A laugh from Jeong as he shakes his head, “I guess you’re right.”

Taeil perks up ever so slightly, he’d looked dejected at Kun’s words and seemed as if the affirmation helped his mood. His demeanor was much more cheerful than the others, seeming to radiate a positivity that hadn’t been shed amongst the others.

Another smile flashes on his lips as he looks at you, it's brief but there’s a coolness in his gaze that tells you the newly found lightened mood was due for a change. 

“Now, let’s get back to why we’re here,” he glances at Nakamoto before speaking again, “Can you tell me what happened last night?”

“Last night we were on patrol when we encountered a band of thugs wandering the streets. They attacked first so we fought.” Nakamoto’s voice is calm as he recounts the events, calmer than you would ever be in his shoes. “A few of the men were able to subdue them,” His eyes move to you, prodding at your own take on the events that had transpired.

“I didn’t see what happened,” you insist, shaking your head as you lock eyes with the speaker.

Despite that, you could feel Kun’s glare boring into you. It was akin to a harshness of a parent severely scolding their child. Nakamoto’s expression doesn’t change, despite the pleading in your gaze, and in your peripheral, Yongqin continues to smirk at you. 

“Positive you didn’t see anything?” Na prompts, causation enough for you to turn your attention back to him and his other two compatriots. 

“I didn’t,” you press, trying to muster as much authority in your voice as you can. 

“Hmm,” his hand moves under his chin as your eyes dart from Wong to Jeong before settling back onto Na, “If that's the case then I really don’t see what the problem is.” 

“Didn’t Yongqin say you helped out some of the guys?” Jeong mumbles, his arms crossed as if he were deep in thought. 

Your brow furrows before you begin to shake your head once again, this time a little more vehemently, “That isn’t true.” The plastered grin on Yongqin’s face remains, despite the accusatory glance you throw to him. “I was trying to get away from those noble thugs, or whoever they were and then some men in Hwarang robes showed up, if anything, they helped me out.”

“So, then you saw them apprehend those men?” It was lightly put, the flashes of viscera still playing in your mind occasionally. Jeong was testing the waters and you were beginning to sink your own ship.

 “I…” You couldn’t deny it, something tells you that if they even get a whiff of inaccuracy, you’d be in much deeper shit than you were in now. 

 “If you’re not going to say anything, we can only assume you saw everything, right?” Jeong questions. The silence you emit must be answer enough for him as he sighs and continues, “I can tell you’ve got an honest heart, and that’s not a bad thing, really, but…” The eeriness of that sentence put you on edge, would the next thing that fell from his mouth be the words that would damn you? 

 “I promise I won’t tell anyone what I saw!” The words fall from your lips, blithely and almost incoherent as your hands clench together. 

 “Hmm,” Taeyong’s gentle hum resounding around the room after your outburst. “The attack doesn’t seem like it wasn’t deliberate. Yet, it also seems unlikely that you’re our enemy. Even if you have good intentions, we will still have to interrogate you... Can you handle torture?” 

 Images of bodies rolled in straw mats and being beaten with wooden sticks courses through you, of what they could possibly do to you. Taeyong’s words, despite the warmness of his voice, were cold, calculating. The hairs on the back of your neck stand on end, unable to respond to such a question without an air of incredulity. 

 “Staying quiet is easy, but if you were captured, you’d have no loyalty to us regarding what you saw.” Nakamoto points out nonchalantly.

 “Let’s just kill him,” Yongqin shrugs, almost as if the thought hadn’t carried the weight of your life, “That’s the only surefire way to not have him talk.”

 “Yongqin, that isn’t our way.” Taeil interjects, his brow furrowing at the other, before you could protest, “We don’t run around murdering civilians.”

 The other laughs, “Don’t look at me, I was only kidding.” It sure hadn’t felt like it. Nor had it sounded like it either.

 “You may need to work on your delivery, then.” Nakamoto shakes his head, as Yongqin chuckles with that cheshire-like grin. 

“If anything, he can’t be that much older than me,” Jisung, who had until up to this remained silent, speaks out from behind you. You hear his feet tread across the floorboards until he’s standing by your side, “That’d almost be killing a kid, wouldn’t it?”

“I don’t want to kill him but choosing to ignore the unlikelihood of his untrustworthiness is very irrational,” Taeyong frowns, his fingers toying with the butt-end of his sword. “What’s your take, Commander Qian?”

Everyone’s attention turns to Kun, the Commander’s lips curving down into an ever sourer grimace as the gazes’ rest upon him. He sighs before looking up and around at the different faces.  

“Last night we killed the wang-do that broke our code, this kid shouldn’t have been involved in the slightest.” It wasn’t an answer and it only heightened the anxiety coursing through you.

“Is that all you have to say on the matter?” Taeyong prods.

“He probably saw something that he doesn’t understand…” Qian mutters as Wong steps forward. 

“Even if that’s the case this is pretty serious,” Wong’s foot taps on the floor, the light from outside glinting off his deep green robes. “We have to sweep this under the rug. If the rumor spreads that the Hwarang have turned blood-thirsty it wouldn’t sit well with the people, or the crown for that matter.” It looks as if people were taking Wong’s words to heart, a grimace overcomes Kun’s face the more the taller continues to speak. 

“Watch it,” Kun fires back, “It’s our responsibility to regulate the wang-do that haven’t followed the code. We are going to do something about it.”

“That doesn’t change the fact that he saw something.” Yongqin looks at you again, but you refuse to acknowledge it.

“He does have a point,” Jeong muses, “I’ll do whatever Moon, Qian and Lee tell me to do.”

“I think we should let him go,” Na notes, his hand moving to brush a few strands of hair out of his face. “It’s not like he knows everything.”

“...Everything?” You question aloud and the room once again turns cold at your words. 

 “I think it’d be best if you stop talking, Na.” Kun says solemnly, as the younger mutters out a brief apology. 

 “Now it’s going to be a little harder to just simply let you go,” Yongqin says pointedly, crossing his arms as you look at him briefly. 

 “A man should always be ready to face death. You should make your peace with that,” Wong notes, nodding his head as if he were agreeing with his own statement. 

 A man…. The words resound around your head and it isn’t until you look down at your feet and the clothes you were wearing do you remember. Right, you’re not dressed in your typical attire, this was stolen from your father’s chest, his clothes that you had mended as you awaited his arrival. The clothes you had taken to undergo your journey to find him, the journey that had somehow led you here. It hits you that they think you’re a man. With the whirlwind of events that had led you here you’d completely forgotten about your attire and how they may have perceived you. 

 “That’s true, there’s nothing wrong with a brave death. When I was younger, I committed honorable suicide,” Jeong shrugs his shoulders, a humor riding his tone as he spoke of the grave topic.

“Didn’t really stick though, did it, Jae?” Wong snorts, giving the other captain a nudge with his shoulder before they broke out into a short burst of laughter. 

“Commander, since we can’t figure out what to do, should I just send him back to his room for the time being?” Nakamoto asks Kun once the laughter has died down. “The more we leave him out here, the more likely he’s going to hear something he’s not meant to, and we’d have to kill him regardless.”

Even if Nakamoto hadn’t said it for your well being, a flush of relief floods through your muscles. 

“Alright, let’s do that. Besides, there’s something I need to look into.” The commander acquiesces, before looking over to Taeyong.

 “I agree, there’s a few careless voices among us, you never know what could slip.”

“Why are you looking at me like that?” Na’s eyes widen as he realizes that the colonel was glaring in his direction. 

“You’ve gotta admit we’re all pretty reckless with our words, especially you, Jaem.” Jeong huffs, begrudgingly agreeing to Lee’s observation. 

“It was just a mistake! No need to blame me for all of it,” Na’s voice rises as he tries to defend himself. He sighs out and glances to you, mumbling a quiet, “I’m sorry” under his breath. 

Still apprehensive about their plans with you, you can’t find it within you to respond to him in any sort of affirmative way. It still seems like he understood the intention behind your curt nod.

“Alright then, Nakamoto, take care of the kid.” The commander says as he begins to turn on his heels, heading towards a side room branching off the main hall. 

“Will do…” Nakamoto nods and turns to you, “Shall we go?”

After Nakamoto had walked you to your room in relative silence, you find yourself sitting on the floor, your hands still bound, after what had seemed like hours since the meeting. 

The Hwarang were esteemed because of their loyalty to the crown and their way of life, you hadn’t realized how vicious it could be. But behind all of that there was a humanity behind the veneer of the aristocratic and diplomatic traits they were meant to have. Despite it not seeming like it as of your first meeting. 

Their presence wasn’t that of cold-blooded killers or snotty aristocrats, the message garnered through that meeting had been along the lines of ‘We are not killers, but to protect our way of life we must bring death’. It didn’t make you feel great, but it could help you understand them a little more. 

As you sit in the room, watching the sun flit in through nearly closed shades you ponder that the longer you stay here, the less chance you have of returning to your home in one piece. They had no real right to let you go, your loyalty to them was a contract by word, not by blood. And you were sure they would recognize that sooner or later. 

If they still thought you to be a man would they still make you face that fate? Would exposing your true identity be worth mercy on your life? Even then you don’t know if the repercussions of that would be any better, it may backfire and lead to an even worse end for you. 

If possible, you would like to forgo either of those scenarios. Perhaps escaping would be your best bet...

As your feet had been left unbound, it was easy to push yourself off the ground to unsteadily rise on your feet. With your feet free it wouldn’t be nearly as impossible a feat to escape if both your feet and hands were bound. You take a deep breath before walking towards the door, thinking of how they had brought you in last night and where Jisung had guided you to the meeting and Nakamoto had taken you from. It was a rudimentary enough map in your head, but you could make it work, you had to make it work.

You approach the sliding door quietly, inching your foot towards it as to open it. Before you’re able to though, it slides open and a figure almost runs face-first into you. 

“Ah-!” Taeil stops himself so he doesn’t run into you, you take a cautionary step backwards to distance yourself from him. 

A figure peers out from behind Taeil, Taeyong’s eyes wide as he realizes what is going on. “Oh, you weren’t trying to escape, were you?”

“I was just…” you search for a response, but your situation was already damning enough. 

“Trying to escape isn’t really going to make your situation any less difficult,” he frowns, stepping out from behind Taeil to stand in line with the leader. While his voice was soft, his eyes held that same calculating glare that had scrutinized you earlier in the day. 

You think for a moment before a realization dawns on you. They hadn’t tied you up because they’d been watching you the entire time. Maybe you should’ve figured that out sooner, but your brain was too muddled with flight or flight instinct. 

“I’ll only repeat this one more time,” a voice coming from the hall outside as two pairs of footsteps approach the room, “if you try to run, I’ll kill you.” Kun’s voice is stern as he rounds the corner with Yongqin. 

“Sorry, that means we’re forced to kill you,” Yongqin sighs, his hand hovering over the hilt of his sword, “We can’t let you go if you can’t keep a promise.” He didn’t look sorry with the way a fresh smile danced along his lips as he spoke. 

 Teeth gritting together you plant your feet firmly on the ground and look to the men in front of you. They weren’t presenting any favorable options to you, and if they were going to kill you anyway, the best thing you could do was try and run for it. 

By some miraculous means you’re able to push your feet from the floor, sliding around Taeil and beginning to race down the corridor of the building. It’s not long until you feel a hand grab the back of your robes, pulling you back towards the room you’d been kept in.

 “Did you really think you could escape?” Kun asks, sounding somewhat bewildered by the actions you’d taken. 

 “Let me go!” You writhe in his grasp, trying to free yourself from his grip, but it was holding firm to you with no sign of weakness. 

 “If I do that, you’ll just run off again,” he sounds annoyed now as he leads you back into the room with Yongqin, Taeyong, and Taeil. 

 “I don’t want to die, though!” You say, still struggling under his hold. “There’s something I have to do!”

 “And what’s that? What’s important enough for a girl to dress up as a boy and run around Seorabeol?”

 You freeze at his words, eyes widening as his grip on you goes slack. It’s given you the opportunity to run for it again, but you find yourself too stunned to move. Did he know this whole time? You turn to look at him, your mouth parting as if to say something but you can’t think of what to utter.  

 “Did you just call me a girl?” You can tell by the steely glare he gives you that your feeble attempt at a lie won’t work on him. 

 A small ‘huh’ and you look over your shoulder to see Taeyong looking at you, “So you really are a girl.”

 “Did you really think putting on a pair of pants and a man’s robes would fool us?” Yongqin questions as he crosses his arms, a teasing tinge to his voice.

 “You all knew from the start?” Eyes widening, you thought your disguise had been rather good. But perhaps not as much as you had thought. 

 “Moon Taeil you idiot,” the leader of the Hwarang mutters just loudly enough for you to hear, “How did you not realize this sooner?”

 Taeil’s reaction puts you more at ease, seeing that not everyone had seen right through your facade.

 “You almost got killed for whatever you’re here for, maybe it’s time you enlighten us,” Kun doesn’t ask, rather demands the information out of you. 

You nod at him and the trio silently takes you back to the hall where you’d been questioned only hours prior. The rest of the men filter in from whatever they’d been doing at the compound, none of them sparing you more than a second’s glance once they walk into the large room. 

“I thought your features were a little more effeminate than most men but to think you were a lady this whole time…” Taeil leads, his head nodding as if he’d come to the conclusion hours earlier and hadn’t only just learned your secret moments prior. 

“Once you realize she’s a girl she really doesn’t look like a guy at all, right?” Na muses as he looks into your eyes. 

Uncomfortable with this you break away, looking to Jisung who stands next to him. 

“So, we really left her tied up all night to sleep on the floor?” The younger mumbles, looking down to his feet before looking up to you and giving a very heartfelt “Sorry,” before returning his gaze to the floor. 

“Well she claims to be a girl, but it’s not like we have any real proof, right?” Wong muses as he looks to Jeong.

“You want proof?” You fire back, eyebrows raising at the implied suggestion. 

“Would you feel better if we stripped her down?” Jeong scoffs, eyes rolling at the other.

“You will absolutely not!” Taeil interrupts, seemingly not understanding the sarcasm of Jeong’s statement. “To suggest that goes against everything we stand for.”  

“It was a joke,” Jeong shoots back, “But if we needed absolute proof…”

“If you are a girl though,” Wong muses, “Then I think it would feel kind of wrong just to kill you.”

“Why are all of you acting so naive? If we have to kill her, we have to kill her.” Kun frowns while looking over his men. 

“Exactly,” Taeyong nods, a small frown overcoming him, “Although it’s not her gender that’s the issue. Killing in general is wrong.” Even with those words, the way his hand rests on the hilt of his sword makes an uneasy feeling lurch in your stomach, “We were organized by the crown to protect Silla and her people, killing those people in cold-blood wouldn’t put us in a favorable light.” 

“But if this girl, or boy, is a threat to the crown, that’s a whole other matter in itself.” Yongqin notes, the sly grin on his face present once more. At this point you’re concluding this is what he normally looks like.

“I apologize,” Kun looks at you, “I took it upon myself to look through your things. It seems like you’ve come all the way from Toehwa-hyeon by yourself. You didn’t have much; some change, clothing, a few scraps of letters and a blade.” He pauses for a moment to collect his thoughts, “One of the fragments of letters was signed by Namekawa Yasuo, I assume you saw him?” Another pause as he looks into your eyes as if he’s searching for something, “What exactly are you here for?”

When the doctor’s name is spoken a chatter begins among the men, did they know Namekawa? And it isn’t until Kun asks what your true purpose here, followed by your full name, does the entire room go silent.

“Commander… that name…” Wong’s eyes are wide as he addresses Kun. 

“It’s not just some bizarre coincidence, is it?” Jeong adds on, his face looking almost as equally as confused as Wong’s.

“Now, let’s hold on for a moment,” Taeil tries to calm the room’s mounting tension. He looks to you, a weary expression on his brow as he continues, “We need to determine if you are a threat. Why did you come to Seorabeol?” 

At Taeil’s behest you move forward to speak, with a quiet voice you announce your name, and the chatter begins quietly once more for a moment. Once it settles down you speak again, “My father is a doctor in Toehwa-hyeon. I travelled from my home there in search of him as I haven’t heard from him in several months. The last time we spoke he said he was travelling here, the capital, for work. 

“You’re from Toehwa-hyeon as well?” A small smile dances along Taeil’s lips, “And you came all of this way to find your father? Who is he?”

“I am the daughter of Physician Heo Jinsang.” You answer shortly, not fully expecting their reactions. 

They don’t seem angry, rather sate in their realization of something.

“So, it’s all piecing together,” Kun sighs out.

“The handwriting does match Jinsang’s but… To think you were his daughter,” Taeyong’s gaze furrows at you as he bites the inside of his cheek.

“Do you know my father?” You ask as you turn to look from Taeyong to Kun.

“You’ve been withholding information from us?” Kun’s voice, now angered, calls out to you. It’s accusatory in nature and you can’t begin to fathom as to why.

 “I… What?” A step backwards at the intensity of his words, your heart begins to pound in your chest as the next words flow from his lips like a torrent from an incensed river. 

 “There’s no point in lying now!” His gaze hardens, voice unrelenting in its authority, What the hell are you doing in Seorabeol?!” 

 “I just came to look for my father.” You protest, your muscles tense as the commander takes a step towards you.

“No, you came into this city fully aware of what your father is doing, didn’t you?” Kun’s presence itself is harsh, unsettling as his heightening anger bores directly from his voice and to your ears, trying to dig up secrets that were unknown even to you.

“I was told that he was travelling here for medical work, I haven’t seen him in months!” Voice almost cracking under the stressful strain of trying to prove your innocence to them, your heart grows heavy at the thought of committing a crime just from being someone’s daughter. 

“Kun, it may be better to leave her be. She may not know anything…” Taeyong interjects, stepping forward to place a hand on Kun’s forearm. 

A reprieve from the interrogation allows you to collect your breath and poise a question of your own, “So what do you know about my father? Do you know where he is?”

“The Hwarang are currently trying to find the location of Physician Heo Jinsang.” Nakamoto responds with a flat tone, as if he’s not trying to interject any emotion or his own opinion into the matter.

“You’re after my father?” A furrowed brow as you look to him. What exactly had your father done?

“It’s not like that… We’re not after him, per se.” Yongqin interjects by shaking his head.

“I see…” A small exhale of air that you hadn’t realized you were holding escapes you, a slight weight lifted from your shoulders. 

 “He’s a supporter of the crown but he disappeared a little while ago.” Yongqin explains. 

 “There’s a chance a few Baekjae loyalists have identified him as a threat,” Nakamoto adds after Yongqin had finished speaking. 

 “Really?” You frown, beginning to think the worst before Nakamoto begins to speak again.

 “Of course, there’s a chance that he’s still alive, there are a few Tang-trained physicians in Silla at the moment.” He notes, shifting his weight from foot to foot.

 “Taeil, what do you think we should do? Would it be in our interest to help her because we’re both looking for her father?” Taeyong questions as you feel your heart about to burst from the anxiety of this situation. 

 “What do you mean by ‘help her’?” Taeil asks, one of his hands resting on his hip as he looks to the colonel. 

 “I think it would be in our best interest to cooperate with her until we find Heo,” Taeyong’s lips purse, it looks like he’s already thinking of ways to find your father but you can’t be too sure. “With her help I’m sure our chances of finding him will increase drastically. It may prove fruitless to look for him if he’s in disguise. However, you are his daughter, you should be able to recognize him no matter how he’s disguised himself, right?” Taeyong looks to you inquisitively, his head tilted to the side and his eyes wide in question. 

 You nod, “Of course.”

“What do you say Kun?” Taeil turns to look at the commander, “Taeyong is making some sense of this mess.”

“If she really doesn’t know anything…” Kun hums, looking at you warily. 

“I really don’t, all I know is that he was headed here for work but I really don’t know anything else—” You huff, “And about last night, I didn’t see anything, I promise!” 

Kun huffs out a sigh as his eyes narrow, “Well, if she really is his daughter, we can’t really kill her, can we?” He watches your reaction for a moment more before continuing, “If you promise to not talk about the events of last night, we’ll let you stay here until we find your father. Fair?”

“I can promise that the Hwarang will do whatever we can to find your father,” Taeil adds with something of a reassuring smile. 

“Thank you,” you say and bow as deeply as you can, thankful for their gratitude and, most of all, them deciding that your life hadn’t needed to be halted. You’d found your first lead in finding your father, and it seems they were actively looking for him as well. 

“You must be glad we’re not killing you,” Yongqin quips, “not yet anyway.” That same snide grin encapsulating his lips, as you frown at him. In no way was your position desirable, but you were alive and, on your way, to finding your father.

“More than glad,” you snip back at him. 

“I’m happy we didn’t have to kill you,” Jisung sighs out, “or turn you into the Crown. My brother’s a guard there and he says it’s awful.”

“Oh, really?” You ponder on that for a moment, thinking of what may have happened if the official patrol had found you instead of the Hwarang. 

“Hm, Jisung? With her being a lady, I’m not sure the compound is equipped for all her needs. It’s not as if we have the Wonhwa anymore…” Taeil frowns as if he’s just realized an all male domicile may not be the best suited for you.

“That’s a good point…” Jisung mutters.

“If you need anything you only have to ask,” Yuta nods, “We will do what we can to accommodate you.”

“Thank you, Nakamoto.” You nod and turn to look at who’s just begun to speak.

“I guess if you are a girl, we’ll have to be nicer to you, huh?” Wong says, a nervous laugh escaping him.

“Hah,” Na snorts at him, “didn’t take long for you to change your attitude, huh, ?” 

“It’ll be a nice change of pace though, brighten things up a bit from all of your guys’ shit,” Jeong scoffs at the two of them.

Your brow furrows, not fully believing that sentiment as the trio begin bickering with another once more. 

“Everything may not be up to standards here for a lady,” Taeyong sighs, almost sounding embarrassed at the state of the place, “You’re not a soldier so we can’t fully expect to treat you as such.”

“Then make her an assistant or something.” Kun suggests, “Do you need a page, Taeil? Or you, Taeyong?”

“It’s your idea, Qian,” Yongqin pipes up once more, a teasing tinge to his voice, “you can’t just drop her onto someone else.” 

“That’s perfect, we can entrust Kun with her,” Taeil smiles, playing along with Yongqin’s antics.

“That settles it, I think,” Taeyong nods, trying to suppress a laugh as he looks at the increasingly flustered commander. 

“You— You can’t just decide like that!” Kun barks angrily as those around him laugh. Their back and forth, while humorous to them, caused the relief you felt prior to chip away little by little with each of their jabs. 

It was eventually decided that you were to be Qian Kun’s page, if only for the time being, until your father was found. Rather than immediately give you a task to accomplish, the commander sends you back to your room, assuming that you probably hadn’t had a restful night and that your pagely duties would start the next morning. 

“I brought some clothes for you to change into,” a voice calls out from behind your closed door, it sounded like Jisung. “The ones you’re wearing were a little bloodstained and I figured you might want to change,” he says as you allow him entry. 

“Thank you, Jisung,” you nod as he sets down the pile of cloth on a nearby tabletop. “Do you think I’ll be here for very long?” 

“Hmm,” he thinks for a moment, “I’m not sure. I know we’ve been looking for your father for a while now, but with you joining us I’m sure it’ll help us out immensely.”

“I see…” you sigh as Jisung begins to make his leave. “Thanks again, Jisung.” 

“It’s no problem,” he smiles, “I’ll see if I can get some food brought to your room if you don’t want to join us for dinner yet.”

“Alright,” you nod and Jisung exits your room, closing the door behind him as you’re left alone once more. As you rise to your feet and move your now unbound hands to reach out for the clothes the kid had brought, you can’t help but notice the dirt and dried gore adorning your hands. Had all this happened within a day of arriving in the capital? It felt surreal, almost like a dream that you hadn’t woken up from yet.

But as the hours passed, it was more and more obvious that this was now your home for the time being. And all the men, and their strange characters, were your company. 

You sigh as you begin to undress yourself, wondering when and how the mystery of your father’s disappearance would be solved.

#cznnet #neowritingsnet #unfortunatus: inferno #nct smut #nct angst #nct fluff #nct 127 angst #nct 127 fluff #nct 127 smut #wayv fluff #wayv angst #wayv smut

[jungwooisms]

hwarang | kun

ACT II - THE PUSH FORWARD

pairing: qian kun x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, supernatural members: moon taeil, suh younhgo (johnny) lee taeyong, nakamoto yuta, kim doyoung, li yongqin (ten), jeong jaehyun, dong sicheng (winwin), wong yukhei (lucas), lee minhyung (mark), xiao dejun (xiaojun), wong kunhang (hendery), huang renjun, na jaemin, lee donghyuck (haechan), osaki shotaro, park jisung warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, injuries, alcohol, major character death, major character death, minor character death, war, some historical inaccuracies for the sake of plot progression word count: 25.5k it is important to read the prologue & act i first to understand the context of this! i can’t link it here but it’s on my masterlist!

July 11th, 664 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla Three months have passed since the departure of Kim Gongmyung and his men to form the Guardians of the Royal Tomb. More so, it has been three months since Yuta and Jaemin left. Their presence, or absence of, remains blazingly obvious at times during the days that have since passed. These thoughts of them, and their reasoning for abandoning the Hwarang plague you still, as they do tonight as you toss and turn in your bed as you search for slumber.

It isn’t coming any time soon, your muscles ache from your work earlier in the day, and you’d woken up early this morning to aid with an upcoming captain’s meeting… why aren’t you tired? You should be, right?

Eyes shutting for the umpteenth time, trying to force yourself to sleep, you hear a voice call out to you from behind your door, a gentle knock accompanying it. “Are you awake?” The voice of the Hwarang’s commander causes you to scramble to your feet, inching closer to the door.

“Is something wrong?” You ask as you approach the door.

“You have a visitor,” voice muffled behind the wood, you can hear him shift on his feet, “Once you’re dressed, come to the main hall.”

“A visitor?” You muse as Kun’s footsteps lead away from your room to give you some privacy. The visitor in question confuses you, who could possibly be calling for you at this late at night? Regardless of their identity, you quickly dress yourself and head to the main hall.

The figure standing there as you enters surprises you, before you’re able to question their appearance, Taeil speaks.

“I’m sorry for disturbing your sleep,” A small smile of apology as he glances towards the newcomer.

“You look like you just rolled out of bed,” Yongqin says snidely, a grin on his lips, “Didn’t even brush your hair?”

You begin to move your hand towards your scalp as you frown at him, but before you can touch your hair, Kun cuts him off. Glancing to the commander, you can see Taeyong, Yukhei, and Jaehyun in the room as well.

“This isn’t the time, Li,” Kun huffs and looks to you, “You look fine.”

You nod quickly at the commander before turning back to look at you guest in full, once she lays her eyes on you, she breaks out into a small smile.

“It’s good to see you again.” With all of the elegance that you had upon your first meeting, Sooyoung commandeers the room with her charisma, “I hope you’ve been well? I’m sorry for visiting so late.”

“Sooyoung?” The name falls from your lips as you stare at her, confused. It’s then you realize that another woman stands beside her, her face seeming familiar as well.

Sooyoung seems to catch this, turning to her and telling you, “She’s my bodyguard, of sorts.”

“Your bodyguard?” The woman in question is almost as striking as an actress, not what you’d expect a guard to look like.

Even more confused, you look to Kun, who sighs out, “…She said that it was imperative to talk to you.”

It’s obvious that he isn’t stepping into your own matters unless you allow him to, so you hum to yourself and look back to your visitor. “Why are you here, Sooyoung?” A tilt of your head as you ask, “Is something wrong?”

“I’ll get straight to the point then,” her smile fades away and her expression becomes stern, turning to face you fully, “I’m here to take you away.”

“Take me away…?” Brow furrowing, your foot moves instinctively to take a step back, “Why?”  

A hum as she thinks, “It’s a long story that I’m not sure how to begin.”

“There isn’t any time to discuss this,” the woman who’s beside her, says hurriedly, “We need to leave immediately if we’re to get here out of here safely.”

“Hold on,” you interrupt the pair, “Why should I go with you two?”

“That’s a good question!” You hear Yukhei speak up from behind you, “You barge in here, ask to talk to her, and demand that she leaves with you?”

“You’re not related to her, are you?” Jaehyun adds questioningly, “She looks about as confused as we do.”

“Sooyoung could you explain what’s happening a little more?” You pose, not trying to get the captains upset if there’s an actual reason for you to be worried.

“Our intrusion would perplex anyone, I suppose,” she nods in understanding and then motions to one of the tables in the room, “This might take a while, so it’s best to be comfortable in the meantime.”

“Would you like us to stay outside?” Taeil asks, glancing towards the open doorway into one of the temple’s courtyards.

“No,” Sooyoung says as you move to take a seat at the table she’d motioned to. “I’d like you to stay, this involves the Hwarang as well.” She takes her own seat, followed by the captains, Taeil and Kun, who she observes quietly before beginning to speak.

“I’m aware that you all have met Lee Donghyuck before, right?” As she states the question a few of the Hwarang look taken aback. “You’ve fought him once or twice.”

“How do you know that?” Kun’s gaze hardens on the woman.

“I know most things that go on in Seorabeol,” her gaze returns the hardness of his, “Eventually.”

“You’re like him and his cronies, aren’t you?” Arms crossing over his chest as he comes to the realization.

“I’d prefer not to be associated with him, Sicheng or Dejun, but yes, in a sense I am.” A nod of affirmation as Kun’s expression softens slightly.

“… You were talking about Donghyuck, then.”

“We fought him at Wonweol, Ongsan and Banweolseong,” Jaehyun interjects, brow furrowed, “What are his ties with the loyalists?”

“It seemed like he was there for his own reasons, though,” Yongqin points out, countering the other. “Not any sort of politics.”

“Regardless, he’s an enemy of us,” Kun frowns, adjusting the way he’s seated.

“Then you’re also aware that he’s pursuing her?” Sooyoung’s eyes flicker to you, the captain’s stares following suit.

The unraveling of this truth is a story you don’t want to hear the end of. Your stomach churns uneasily as each captain looks at you, some confused, some unsure of what to do or say. Taeil eventually breaks the silence,

“We’re well aware of that.” He coughs to clear his throat before continuing, “We also know he has comrades he calls Demons; not that we believe that, of course.”

“I’m not sure that that claim is unfounded, Chief,” Taeyong speaks up from the swarm of captains looking at you, “They all possessed strength incomparable to any of our men. Any of our... living men, at least. Despite that, it seems as if no one really knows they exist.”

The captains shift, murmuring things too quietly for you to hear before you look back to Sooyoung, anxious for her to continue.

“So, then you do know that they’re Demons,” a nod as she hums somewhat contently, “That will make things a little easier to explain.” Her hands fold atop one another as she places them on the table, “I’m not human either, I’m a Demon too.”

Your eyes widen, lips parting in surprise, “You are?”

“I’m actually rather high ranking,” eyes locked with yours, “something akin to a princess.”

“My family has been guarding hers for generations,” the other woman adds, moving a bit to stand closer to Sooyoung’s chair, not having sat when everyone else did.

“I suppose that makes more sense,” Kun muses, despite you still looking confusedly between the three. “I was wondering why you were so friendly that night, you were getting intel on the Hwarang, weren’t you?”

A sly smile as the guard brushes a few strands of hair from her face, tucking them behind her ear, “I’m not quite sure what you mean.”

“You know her?” Yukhei sounds shocked as he looks to Kun.

“Move your eyes up six inches, Yukhei,” Jaehyun snorts, “That’s Seulgi.” Then, it clicks, she isn’t as dressed up as she was that night, but it looks to be the kisaeng from the night the Hwarang had been in Noseo-dong. “Dressed a little differently, but that’s definitely her.”

“Holy shi-” Yukhei nearly chokes, baffled at his inability to have recognized her from before.

“Us Demons have lived on this land since before the kingdoms were even mere conceptions,” Sooyoung captures the conversation once more, “The top officials in Silla, Goguryeo, and what was once Baekje, already know of our existence. Most Demons have no interest in human affairs, preferring to be left alone. However, humans in positions of power sought to use us to benefit their own means.”

“Did the Demons comply, then?” You question softly, seeing the look of disgruntlement on Sooyoung’s face.

“Most didn’t. Human ambition has never been strong enough to pull a Demon to get involved,” an almost angered sigh leaves her, “Yet, when the Demons refused to help, the humans were furious and sent out armies to destroy our homes and our villages. We scattered, across the land and are now divided by the different kingdoms. We seldom leave our domains and remain in hiding.”

“That’s awful,” a somberness coating your words as she speaks, the lorness in her expression unsettling.

“Many Demons went on to have children with humans, there are few of us now who can claim a pure bloodline.”

“I assume Donghyuck is one of them?” Taeil questions softly, trying to not upset Sooyoung further.

“The largest pureblood family are the Lees, you’ve already met the head, Donghyuck.” A small nod as she looks to you, “In the north, the largest clan is the Heo family. That would be yours. I heard the Demons of your family were destroyed by humans, but it seems like you’re the lone survivor.”  

“Me?” You resist the urge to point at yourself, utterly taken aback by what Sooyoung had just divulged. “That’s impossible… I-”

“I had Seulgi look into your family history to the best of her ability,” she insists with a firm shake of her head.

“It seems hard to believe,” Seulgi offers you a sympathetic smile, “but you are very much a Demon.”

At a loss for words, you stare at the two women. It’s borderline insane that this is what they’re telling you, but at the same time it would explain a few things. Why Donghyuck is after you, why you heal so quickly…

“If you really are the descendent of a pureblood Demon, it’s quite clear why Donghyuck is after you,” Sooyoung doesn’t finish the rest of her statement, the answer being quite clear.

“He intends to marry her,” Taeil huffs, glancing to you and your wide-eyed expression.

“It seems so,” the woman agrees, biting her cheek, “So far it seems as if he’s only been testing the water, I’m unsure of when he’ll become more confident in his approach. If he were to use his full strength, I don’t know how you would fare in protecting her. Even the Hwarang can’t stand against the true power of a Demon.”

“Wait a minute- aren’t you going a bit too far?” Yukhei asks, sounding hurt by the latter statement.

“I don’t think you’re giving us enough credit,” Jaehyun frowns, “We’re not just some foot soldiers.”

“The only reason you’re alive is because Donghyuck wants you to be,” Sooyoung points out, “If he and his accomplices were to use their full strength I’m not sure what would happen.”

“Then let them,” Taeyong’s voice rises through the unsettled quiet, “I would like to see the power of a real Demon.”

Donghyuck, Dejun and Sicheng had all shown incredible strength in the prior meetings you had with them; even the Hwarang captains had trouble keeping up. If that hadn’t been the full extent of their power, you’re unsure that you want to see it.

“Yukhei and Jaehyun are right,” Kun says, “Even if they’re stronger than the average warrior, you’re still discrediting us. The power difference wasn’t so great that they bested us easily.”

“That’s right,” Yongqin nods and smirks at the Kun, “Besides, we’ve got the Demon commander himself in charge.”

“This isn’t the time for jokes, Li,” Kun sighs and shakes his head.

“You must realize that these men are unlike any you’ve faced before,” there’s an almost pleading edge to Sooyoung’s voice. “Your job is to protect Seorabeol, not her. That’s why I’m asking you to leave her in our care, with us her chances of surviving one of Donghyuck’s attacks will be much higher.”

“Give us a break,” Yukhei says, rising to his feet and planting his palms on the table, “You’re making it sound like we can’t protect her.”

“I’m not trying to sound rude but,” Yongqin’s head tilts at the two women, “you think that the two of you could protect her better than us? Neither of you are a part of the Hwarang, I’m not sure why you’re going around and sticking your nose in our business.”

Sooyoung and Seulgi seem to be taken aback by the captain’s reaction.

“What do you think, Commander Qian?” Seulgi looks towards Kun, her gaze narrowing, “You’ve acknowledged Donghyuck’s strength, are you not at least considering Sooyoung’s offer? I think it’s in your best interest to leave her in our care.”

“That’s different,” Kun looks to Seulgi, leaning back in his chair slightly, “We made a promise to her, to protect her, we’re not going to back out just because they’re Demons. And I understand that you call yourselves Demons too—but that gives us no ground to trust you.”

“Do you realize who you’re speaking to? Sooyoung is a descendant of—”

“Seulgi,” Sooyoung stops the other with a raise of her hand, her tone calm but stern, leaving no room for more argument, “That’s not necessary.”

“I agree with Qian,” Taeyong affirms, yet doesn’t look your way, “if she possesses blood of a different species… I’m sure her aid will come to use with our internal purposes in the very near future.”

Seulgi glares at the colonel, not speaking as to not anger Sooyoung.

“This is a problem, then,” Sooyoung notes solemnly, “Is there no way to convince you to allow her to go with us?”

“Hold on,” Taeil interjects, “We didn’t even confirm what she has to say about all of this.” His gaze travels to you, sympathetic in nature and looking in your eyes as if you already have an answer.

But you don’t know what to say. It’s not that you doubt the concerns of Sooyoung and Seulgi, yet there’s just more and more to take in.

Taeil sees your furrowed brow, eyes teeming with indecisiveness, and nods with a small smile, “It must be difficult to discuss in front of so many people. You should speak to Sooyoung privately.”

“What the hell—!” Kun begins to protest, but Taeil is unwavering in his stance.

“We’ve been ignoring her feelings for this entire conversation,” Taeil states, “if she wishes to leave of her own accord, for her own safety, we ought to let her, no?”

“You’re too soft on people,” Kun scoffs, but makes no move to stop him.

“You won’t steal her away the moment we leave you alone, will you?” Taeyong asks as the captains rise to their feet.  

“Of course not,” Sooyoung says as she remains seated, “Once Demons make a promise, we’re bound to keep it.”

A few moments later, once the captains, commander, chief and colonel had filed out of the main hall, you lead Sooyoung to your room nestled in the compound. Seulgi had opted to stay outside, just far enough away so she wouldn’t encroach on your private conversation.

“I apologize for giving you a terribly large number of things to think about,” Sooyoung starts off, “Normally, I would never do something like this.”

“It’s alright,” you try to reassure her with a small smile, “I’m sorry for them as well, I know they can be a little… brusque at times.”

“That’s to be expected,” she waves it off, “I know I was asking a lot of them. Not many humans would accept the existence of us so easily. But enough of that, what do you say to my offer? Do you have any thought on it?”

Of course, you do. If it had been Sooyoung to come across you on your first night in Seorabeol, you very may well have taken her up on her hospitality. Yet now…

As if she can see the wavering of your options, Sooyoung speaks, “The Hwarang seem to believe they can protect you from everything out to get you. I don’t doubt their dedication, I do, however, doubt their ability.”

You stay silent, aware that what she just said may be true. The Hwarang are powerful, skilled in both the sword and bow. You’d seen them overcome overwhelming odds, but those odds had always been nothing but human-made. From what Sooyoung had said, the strength of a single Demon would be enough to wipe them out should they so choose. A few of you have been able to see that firsthand, and the losses associated with it. To think that that same fate could arise to a captain of the Hwarang fills you with undeniable dread.

“With Buyeo Pung seeking aid in Goguryeo, things will only get more hectic here in the capital,” Sooyoung says to fill the silence, “If Donghyuck were to strike in the hysteria, what do you think would happen? You should leave the Hwarang, let them fight without worry.”

“Sooyoung…” The concern for you seems real, frantic, almost.

“Is there,” her expression softening as she searches yours, coming to a subtle conclusion, “a reason you want to stay?”

“…There is.” You answer without thinking it through, the words falling from you so quickly you can barely catch them.

“One of those men, perhaps?” Innocent in nature, her question still catches you off-guard.

“Yes,” you nod, lower lip catching between your teeth as you can’t find it within yourself to lie to her.

For a moment she looks tense, before her posture softens and a relieved expression overcomes her, “I see… I won’t ask who, but I can understand your hesitance now. I can’t force you to leave, but should you need us, you need only ask.”

Sooyoung and you make your way back to the main hall, the captains loiter around the space, some look anxious upon your arrival.

“Have you come to a decision?” Taeil asks once you’ve fully stepped into the room, giving you little time to compose yourself.

“For the time being we’ve decided to leave things as they are,” Sooyoung states, Seulgi looking at her worriedly.

“Are you sure?”

“Quite.” Sooyoung nods to her, “I believe prioritizing what she wishes is what’s most important for now.”

“Very well,” Taeil finds it hard to mask the smile growing on his lips, “The Hwarang accept responsibility for her well-being.”

“Just relax and leave it all to me!” Yukhei bursts out, eager to show his worth.

“I’m sure Wong’ll give you much more to worry about,” Jaehyun laughs and looks to you, “It’ll be nice to still have you around.”

“What kind of girl wants to stay here?” Yongqin chuckles, “I can’t tell if you’re brave or if you’ve had a strong lapse in judgement.”

“This doesn’t change anything,” Kun points out, “You’ll still be treated like you always were.”

“Of course,” you nod, “Thank you all for letting me stay.”

Sooyoung then moves to you, her hand finding yours as she looks into your eyes, “Please be careful, and remember, I’m on your side.”

“Thank you, Sooyoung,” you smile at her gratefully as she relinquishes the hold on your hand. She gives you one last beaming smile before her and Seulgi are off into the dark of night.

July 19th, 664 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla In the days since Sooyoung’s visit, you find it much more difficult to drift off into a dreamless slumber. When you do dream, you find that your mind often travels to your heritage and what it means for you now and in the future, something of which you don’t want to think about.

You had decided to stay with the Hwarang, but was that really the best choice for you, for them? Of course, you wanted to stay but would you being here cause them unneeded harm?

A sudden clang from outside causes you to jump, to leave your thoughts for a moment as your heart begins to pound. Eyes cautiously looking towards your bedroom door, your hands clench your blankets in taught anticipation.

Several short bangs from your door cause you to rise to your feet, the voice of Osaki Shotaro calling out to you, “I’m sorry for bothering you, but there’s an emergency!”

“What’s wrong?” You ask, voice wrought with anxiousness as you walk towards the door, opening it to allow him inside.

His body tense as he enters, continuously looking over his shoulder to make sure the hallway is clear, “The Demons have attacked us.”

“What?!” Icy dread seeps through your veins at his words.

“They’re after you, which means you need to stay here.”

“But—” You begin to protest his assertion, wanting to help in some way as the only reason the Demons are here is because of you. “Shotaro, I have to find the others.”

“I can’t let you,” he shakes his head, a worried look in his eye as if he knows he can’t reason with you, “The Commander asked that I make sure you don’t leave.”

“They’re here for me, though. If anyone gets hurt…” You wave away the thought, “Maybe I can try and reason with them? What if I can get them to leave peacefully?”

Shotaro’s lips purse, and after a moment, he shakes his head in defeat, “If you’re going to be that insistent, I don’t think I can stop you. I was told to protect you though, so if you’re going, I’m going.”

The two of you leave your room, barreling down the hallway until you’ve reached one of the inner courtyards. You stand there momentarily, unsure of where to go, until Shotaro speaks up.

“It’s this way,” he says before something darts in front of you, pushing the officer to the ground. His body seems to fly for a few yards, hitting the ground with a thud as Shotaro groans out in pain. As you try to run up to him, the same blur passes in front of you and you feel an arm wrap around yours.

“Where do you think you’re going?” The voice of Lee Donghyuck asks you simply as you struggle to get out of his grip. His grip is like steel, unmoving and snakelike, “I heard the Park Clan visited a few days ago, I’m sure you know why I’m here, then.”

He sighs, looking at the surrounding buildings, “You’re a Demon, a noble Demon… There isn’t any reason for you to hole yourself up with fakes.” Donghyuck’s grip tightens on your arm slightly, “Come with me.”

It’s obvious who he’s talking about when he mentioned the fakes. With the way your body tenses, Donghyuck can sense your anger.

“Do you really think staying here and helping their own self-interest and agenda to create those… things is really what you should be doing?”

You find it hard to respond. For obvious reasons, you aren’t a fan of the existence of the Furies, but there were times when it was needed for a Hwarang to survive. Could you fault a man for wanting to live? Besides, your father was one of the people who created the serum, you can’t help but feel partially responsible.

“You don’t know anything about what’s going on here,” you thrash in his grip, trying to lessen his hold on you.

“So? Even if I did, are you asking me to play ignorant to what they’re actually doing?” He scoffs, looking up from you as the sound of racing footsteps approach.

You break your gaze away from him to see Jaehyun and Kun running towards you, sour expressions on both of their faces.

“Breaking in again?” Kun frowns as he locks eyes with Donghyuck, “I don’t know if you’re brave or stupid. This isn’t a gathering place for Demons, you know.”

“Barging in here to find yourself a wife,” Jaehyun snickers at the Demon, “You’d think you’d have gotten the message by now.”

The sight of the two Hwarang puts you at ease a bit, even more so when you can see Minhyung and a handful of other wang-do behind them. There are a few missing faces among them, you wonder if they’d gotten injured in the earlier skirmishes.

“You have no idea how important she is,” Donghyuck frowns, his grip on you unrelenting still.

“So, taking her against her will just because you’re too scared of rejection is the way you’re going around this?” Jaehyun nearly shouts at him, “That’s just pathetic.”

“Even if you take her as a hostage, we’ll kill you without hesitation,” Kun affirms, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword.

“I wouldn’t need to use her as leverage with the likes of you,” there’s an arrogance in his words as the Hwarang begin to encircle him. The tension pulls like a taught rope, beginning to fray as it reaches its breaking point.

Eyes glancing down to your arm, you realize that Donghyuck had left your other one free, you reach for your blade at your hip. It’s an awkward angle, but you jerk the blade from its scabbard and swing it up towards Donghyuck.

He dodges it easily, his hand reaching out to grab your wrist, his grip tightens and causes you to cry out. With the force he is exerting, you feel as if your bones will break, the blade in your hand clattering to the ground.

“You really don’t understand how powerful I am, do you?” His gaze sharpens at you, lips parting to say something else before a voice calls out.

“I’m your opponent,” Kun shouts, “I said before that I wouldn’t hesitate to strike you from behind!”

Your failed attack had abated Donghyuck’s attention towards the commander long enough to allow him a chance to strike. Kun’s sword drawn from his scabbard, he arcs his blade towards Donghyuck’s head. The Demon moves quickly, but with a nonchalant nature in his movements as the blade passes centimeters from his throat.

The attack was enough time for you to rid yourself from Donghyuck’s grasp and run towards the commander. Kun’s free hand outstretches to grab your arm and pull you into him, his arm then moving to wrap around you, both catching and sheltering you.

“I thought I told Osaki to keep you in your room,” He mutters under his breath, “You never listen, do you?”

“I’m sorry,” you murmur, the pulsating feeling from where Donghyuck had grabbed your wrist beginning to fade.

“You did good though,” Kun praises you, “Without your distraction I wouldn’t have gotten an opening.” His approval is somewhat shocking, not something you’re accustomed to so it takes you by surprise.

“Qian Kun,” Donghyuck’s voice pulls you and Kun’s attention away from one another and towards the adversary, “Get your hands off her. She’s mine.” There’s a possessiveness in his tone that chills you to your core, a fury in his eyes that seems to have ignited after he made his recovery from Kun’s attack.

“The Hwarang are responsible for her,” The commander shifts, bringing you just a little closer to him, “We gave our word.”

“Come with me,” Donghyuck’s attention turns to you, “You’re a member of an honorable Demon family. You shouldn’t be associated with the likes of these humans.”  

“I’m staying here,” it only takes you recalling the blatant disregard Donghyuck has had for human lives on your handful of encounters with him to confirm your distaste for him.

“You choose the humans, then?” His voice low, threatening like a cornered animal.

“That’s too bad, Donghyuck,” a laugh from outside of the circle of Hwarang, you look to see Dong Sicheng pushing his way through the members. “Never thought I’d see you get rejected by a girl.”

Your eyes widen, Kun had had issues with dealing with Donghyuck alone, now that another Demon is here, you’re not sure what he’d do.

“Commander,” another voice from outside the circle as the Hwarang break their lines to allow Taeyong to walk through, “I apologize for being late.” He looks to Donghyuck and Sicheng with a small smile, “I’m afraid the Fury Corps will be your opponent this evening.”

A wash of relief overcomes you at the sight of several members walking behind Taeyong, although the Furies have caused issue in the past, it seems these men were on a set goal.

“You were saying some interesting things earlier,” Taeyong muses, still looking at the two Demons. “Something along the lines of calling us fake? This would be a great opportunity to prove you otherwise.” The colonel’s eyes then turn red, his hair turning stark white as he reaches for the blade at his hip.

“These men are ready to fight,” Dejun, who you hadn’t seen snake his way through the men, tells Donghyuck.

“So?” Sicheng scoffs, the quiver of arrows on his back rattling as he moves, “They could have a whole army of these new bloods and they still wouldn’t be a match for us.”

“There’s no need to dirty my blade with fake Demon blood,” His eyes flicker from Taeyong to Kun, “I’ll do you a favor and not kill you all today, but that doesn’t mean I’m done here. I will be back for her.” With that, the trio break past the lines of Hwarang faster than any of the men, human or Fury, could keep up with, disappearing into the darkness outside of the compound.

“You bastards—!” Kun calls out after them after they’ve already disappeared.

“Should we go after them?” Taeyong asks the commander, glancing back to his group of men.

“No,” Kun shakes his head, “We can’t risk the citizens of Seorabeol seeing your unit.”

“Understood,” Taeyong nods, “We’ll call it a night, then.”

“Thank you, Commander,” once you were sure that the threat was gone, your body sags in relief.  

Kun’s grip on you relaxes and allows you to step away from him, “There’s no need to thank me. We had our reasons for wanting to protect you. Just try and get some sleep now.” He then turns to his men and orders them to find any dead or injured men around the compound. His demeanor takes on that of astute seriousness, wanting to end this as quickly as he can.

July 20th, 664 – Bulguksa Temple, Kingdom of Silla Mid-morning, after a tumultuous night and subsequent sleep, you trudge your way to the main hall to find the captains in some kind of meeting. Upon your entry, Jisung turns to you and offers a small wave.

“Good morning,” he smiles and beckons you over to sit down next to him, you take him up on his offer and he speaks again, “Did you sleep well?”

“As best I could,” you respond sheepishly.

“You don’t need to lie,” Jisung notes, “We can tell you barely slept at all.”

“Do I really look that bad?” You mutter, your fingers moving to trace the circles under your eye. A shake of your head as you turn to Minhyung, who sits on your other side, “How’s Shotaro doing?”

“The fall knocked him out cold, but aside from some minor bruises he looks like he’ll be fine,” the officer reassures you. “He wants to apologize for not doing a better job of protecting you.”

“I should be the one apologizing to him!” You claim almost exasperatedly as the door to the main hall opens and a figure strides in.

“Is something wrong, Chief?” Jisung questions Taeil, who looks far from the chipper mood he typically has. “I think you’re scaring her.”

“I’m sorry if I am,” he apologizes to you, “Forgive me.” The smile he gives you is fleeting, returning to the grimace that seems deep rooted into him now.

“What happened?” You question, and he lets out a sigh.

“The monks here don’t want us staying at Bulguksa any longer.” He says as calmly as he can, a look of defeat in his eyes.

“You mean to say they’re telling us to leave?” Minhyung asks, a troubled expression overcoming him.

“More or less, yes,” The leader frowns.

“I had a feeling this would happen…” Jisung sighs out and looks to Taeil, “What should we do?”

The monks at Bulguksa seemed to have shifted to a pro-Guard stance since the outburst of attacks in the recent months against the Hwarang. It’s no surprise they want the Hwarang gone, but this place was just beginning to feel like home.

“Do you think last night’s incident was the last straw?” Minhyung poses to Taeil, who nods in agreement.

“I don’t think, I know.” He huffs out a large amount of air, “They don’t want actual fighting on their grounds, I’m sure some councilman also had his hand in this as well.”

“This is all my fault,” you realize as he says that, the Demon’s wouldn’t have shown up if you weren’t here.

“That isn’t true,” Taeil tries to reassure you, “We forced ourselves in here with unreasonable demands.”

“If we need to move, we should start looking at new locations,” Minhyung says quickly to change the topic.

“The monks here have already provided another temple for us to stay in,” Taeil says, his brow furrowing.

“That’s very… nice of them,” Jisung states, trepidation in his voice. “They must really want us gone.”

“Yes to both,” Taeil nods, “which is why I accepted their offer. We’re going to get busy around here soon.”

The donors to Bulguksa Temple bought a piece of land some ways away from the original site to build a new compound for the Hwarang. It lay outside of the city, further than Bulguksa or Shoshin had been, called Shoji. The new grounds has ample enough space for a bathhouse, new training buildings, and even more rooms for the Hwarang members. The members are clearly excited about it. By the time the end of the summer came around, the Hwarang had fully moved from their residence at Bulguksa to their new home in Shoji.

September 27th, 664 – Shoji Temple, Kingdom of Silla Autumn breaks quickly after the long summer months. In August, the Crown had ordered its army to lay siege to Tolsa Fortress in the southern part of the Goguryeo Kingdom, asking for the aid of several Hwarang captains to join their ranks. The siege lasted for weeks with no eventual winner, save for Goguryeo as its stronghold hadn’t been weakened. No major events had occurred during the siege, the captains that had left, Yukhei and Jaehyun, returning with little to tell of their ventures to the northern kingdom.

It’s a quiet morning today, you’re cleaning up dishes from breakfast when you realize that the commander is nowhere to be found. Come to think of it, he hadn’t been present for breakfast this morning, either. Maybe he’s too busy to come out, but that doesn’t mean he shouldn’t eat something.

A few moments later you find yourself with a tray in hand, walking carefully to his room. You’ve adorned the tray with an assortment of food and a small pot of tea as well, not knowing if he was hungry or not.

“Commander,” you say as you stand in front of his door, “I’ve brought you some tea.”

“Come in,” Kun says after a moment, and you move to open his door.

“Oh,” your eyes widen as you step inside, a bit taken aback by what you see.

“You can put it down anywhere,” he says, and you move to set it down, trying not to stare at him too much. He sits at the head of the room, writing something down on a piece of parchment, but that’s not what is grabbing your attention. His hair, which he usually ties up in a not atop his head, cascades down his shoulders loosely as he writes.

“Do you need something else?” He asks, probably noticing your elongated stare.

“No,” you shake your head quickly, averting your gaze from him.

“Then why are you here?” Kun questions, setting down his brush, careful not to draw his sleeve through the inkwell. “I’m a little busy.”

“Well…” You mumble, “Isn’t your hair in the way?”

“I don’t have time to tie it up, there’s too much I need to do,” he says nonchalantly, “I’ve got mountains of this shit to go through.” It’s then you notice the stacks of papers around him, all baring what looks like important seals.

Even then, every time he moves to brush a strand of hair from his vision, he becomes even more frustrated.

“Would you like me to tie it up for you?”

Kun stays silent for a moment before turning back to his work, picking up his brush and beginning to hurriedly write, “I don’t like it when people touch my hair.”

“I see…” you say, watching him write for a moment, not knowing what to say next.

“I appreciate the gesture,” he sighs, once again setting the brush down and moving to tie his hair up. “Now I can focus a bit more.”

“Commander? Have you eaten anything today?” You ask, looking towards the tray you’d brought in, “I brought you some snacks but if you needed a full meal, I could make you something.”

He pauses from his work, and for a moment you think he’s forgotten about your presence entirely. “No,” Kun says and shakes his head, “I should be done by lunchtime. I’ll eat a lot then.”

“Is there anything in particular you’d like?”

“I told you that I don’t have time to eat right now,” he frowns, a small hunger pang reverberating through him.

“I meant that I’m the one cooking lunch today…” You scramble to fix your words, “So if there’s anything you want, let me know and I’ll see what I can do.”

Kun now turns to fully look at you, chuckling to himself as he does so, “If you make what I want, the captains are going to be pissed.”

“Let them be,” you shoot him a smile, “They can be as mad as they want. You’re working hard, and since I can’t help you out here, I can at least do something else for you.”

“Food on the mind, huh?” A smile curling onto the edge of his lips, “I guess it can’t be helped then… If you back out on what I say, I’ll have it out for you, okay?” There’s a playful edge to his voice, joking, obviously, but it still catches you a bit off guard.

“I’m ready to do what I can,” You nod eagerly.

“How about namul then?” He states simply. “Any kind will do.”

“Of course,” the words fall as you begin to think of what you’d need to make the dish. It’s not that it’s difficult to make, just time consuming as you would have to cook the variety of sides that you could find.

“I’m looking forward to it, your cooking’s gotten a lot better recently.”

“Really?” You ask, somewhat surprised. No one’s really mentioned your cooking prowess before, you think it okay at best.

“The food we normally have is quick and easy to make, we don’t get much that takes time and effort. I’m sure you’ll be able to handle it though.”

A smile creeps onto your face and you try your best to hide it, still taken aback by the continuous praise, “I’ll try my best. We get a lot of fresh vegetables this time of year.”

“Ingredients aren’t important,” he shakes his head, “If you could try and get the northern flavor, that’d be great.” A peaceful demeanor, almost as if he’s reminiscing, overcomes him. It ignites something of a fire in you, making you want to make this the best namul he’d ever had.

“I’ll be going then,” you say and turn on your heels, only for the commander to call out your name a second later.

“Do I really look that tired?” Kun asks as your eyes meet his.

“I never meant anything like that… It’s just that I don’t get to do much for you and I’d like to do anything I can.”

The commander frowns, staying silent for a moment. “I’m not sure what it looks like, but I only allow myself to take on jobs that I can do. If I can’t do it, then I give it to someone who can. That’s also a part of my job.” He watches your eyes for your reaction, “Being determined is always good, but if there’s something you can’t do, you can’t do it, right?”

“…Right?” Kun is being serious, but for the life of you, you can’t understand what he is trying to say.

“How do I…” He hums, tapping his foot impatiently, “What I’m saying is that you don’t need to give yourself more work. Just do what jobs you can.”

If you did that, then you’d barely be doing anything.

“With you here, it gives the Hwarang something to stake its pride on. Do you understand?” He breaks his gaze with you to shrug slightly, “We’ll keep you safe, you don’t need to worry.” Your silence seems to miff him, “Don’t trust me?”

“No, of course not!” You exclaim shortly, trying to keep your outburst to a minimum.

“Then put on a brave face and don’t worry over what you can’t control,” he sighs, “that’s what everyone else here does.”

“Commander…” you feel warm at his words of assurance.

“I’ll stop lecturing you now,” Kun looks back to you, “I’m sorry for holding you.” He reaches for the cup of tea you’d brought him before looking back to his paperwork.

“Thank you…” You know he’s driven by a ravenous determination to never look to Lee Donghyuck or any other Demon out there, and that asking for help form others isn’t who he is, yet… To hear him say that in front of you, in and of itself, is some part of that resolve. Even though he can’t see you now, you give him a bow before you leave the room.

November 11th, 664 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla It’s windy today, you noticed it first when you awoke, the hiss of air swarming in through unsealed cracks and pockets of air where the doors don’t meet their frames. You notice it still when the last of the leaves are stripped from their branches as you and Jaehyun walk to the city center. And you’re noticing it now, the slice of the cold cutting through your clothes and chilling you to the bone.

“It is almost winter, isn’t it?” Jaehyun muses as he catches you shivering involuntarily, “The wind coming in from the coast isn’t helping. If this is what it’s like during the day, I kind of feel bad for the guys who patrol at night.”

Your hands clench as he huffs out a laugh that turns into clouded vapors, “Are your hands cold? Want me to hold them for you?”

You know he’s joking by the way you get flustered and tell him no, him laughing again as you continue to walk down the street. Looking up from your embarrassed haze, you spot someone walking towards you.

“Isn’t today great?” Yukhei asks as he approaches, his arms outstretching as if to embrace the chilled air.

“Unfortunately, not all of us can act like human torches,” Jaehyun shakes his head, “I still don’t know how you’re not affected by the cold.”

“Look at who’s talking Mr. I’ll-Break-Code-and-Wear-My-Summer-Clothes,” Yukhei scoffs. Now that he mentions it, Jaehyun is wearing his Hwarang blues, but the white cloth of his sleeves doesn’t look to be the thick linen typically worn during the colder months.

Even if Yukhei was meaning to scold him, you know he means it in the friendliest way possible. Their friendship is wrought with things like this: what seems to be an argument but is really them caring for one another. You can’t help but chuckle at the two.

“Why’re you smiling like that?” Yukhei asks when he catches your expression.

“She probably thinks your face is funny, you should really do something about that…” Jaehyun pokes, a teasing cadence to his voice.

“It’s not that,” you shake your head, “I was just remembering the last time we met each other on your rounds, I was with Yongqin and Jaemin then.” The latter name brings a bitterness to your tongue, still unsure of how to feel about Jaemin and Yuta leaving the Hwarang on such short notice. The two men’s faces turn sour at the mention of their friend.

“I just meant that with everything going on… it makes me a little nostalgic,” you say, trying to shake off the thought.

“The Hwarang’s changed,” Jaehyun nods with a sigh, “Hell, so has everything else. Taeil’s been promoted and all.”

Taeil’s promotion didn’t mean he left the Hwarang entirely, but it meant he traveled often to speak with other generals to speak of the threat of another Baekje plot. Rumors of Buyeo Pung raising an army in Goguryeo had been circulating recently, putting everyone on edge once again. You thought Taeil’s promotion to be a good thing for the Hwarang, yet with Yukhei and Jaehyun’s reaction, they seem less than thrilled.

“We didn’t join to be the Crown’s guard dogs,” Yukhei shakes his head. While the Hwarang had been surface level related to the Crown, only receiving orders when necessary, they now take orders directly.

“How is this going to change for everyone going forward?” You ask the pair, trying to focus on them and not the whirlwinds of conversations happening along the busy street.

“Well, if we really do need to fight against another one of Buyeo Pung’s rebellions, we won’t just be killing off the tail end of his followers. We’ll probably be put on the front lines.” Jaehyun frowns, not too certain what to think of that idea.

“Supposedly, it was Suh Youngho. He’s been making ties to get Baekje back on its feet,” Yukhei’s shoulders shrug, “Because of that I heard some factions of the revivalists are pissed at him because they were trying to win Pung’s favor.”

“He already had a target on his back within the Silla government for being a Baekje revivalist, he’s hated by most of the kingdoms now.” Jaehyun muses, looking up to the sky for a moment. “Until something happens though, I suppose things are going to stay as they are.”

“And they will, it’s not like they can do anything about what the kings want to do,” Yukhei nods. “They’ll only get involved once the king starts asking them to ration their food again to send it off to war.”

As you look around the street, you want to think that he’s right. The city kept thriving even under the threat of another invasion or war… Life continues regardless of what the higher powers of the kingdoms are plotting. You look up to Yukhei, words falling out of you before you can catch them,

“I never realized you were so interested in politics.”

“Didn’t realize?” He looks slightly taken aback, his arms cross over his chest, “What exactly did you think of me?”

“Uhm…” You cough into your hand, looking away from him, “Let’s continue our rounds. It’s nearly winter which means the sun’s going to start setting earlier...”

November 7th, 664 – Shoji Temple, Kingdom of Silla The name Suh Youngho had only been said once before, that you can recall. He seemed to be an instigator for a few of the Baekje-Silla skirmishes as of late and the kingdoms were desperate to find him. Yet, after a few negotiations with Tang and Silla leadership, it seems as if he had betrayed his loyalty to the Silla powers and had begun to help the two allies. You don’t know much about the logistics of it, but when Jisung brings him up, you’re a bit startled by what he says.

“Suh Youngho has been assassinated.” Jisung states the news in the main hall, among the collection of captains who linger there after their morning practice.

“Are you serious?” Jaehyun questions, “Do they know who did it?”

“Could have been someone from Silla or it could’ve been someone from the loyalists,” Yukhei shrugs, “Hell, it could’ve been personal. If it was, I bet it was that Huang guy.”

“If he was going to get killed, I wish I could’ve done it myself,” Yongqin sighs, crossing his arms.

“That’s not very funny, coming from you,” Yukhei frowns as he looks at the other captain. “Weren’t we told to leave him alone?”

You’d never met Youngho, in fact, you barely know who he was or what he did. Yet somehow you feel that his death means something important to the kingdom, as if the already rising unease has skyrocketed.

“You all know the orders to leave him alone came from the Crown,” Jisung nods gravely, “The rest of the kingdom isn’t going to see it that way. A scabbard belonging to a member of the Hwarang was left at the scene of his death. An official investigation by the Guard has been launched.”

“Is a scabbard really enough evidence?” You ask, feeling worry begin to claw its way down your spine.

“If it’s not I’m sure they’ll ‘find’ some more when it comes time,” Jaehyun huffs as he looks back to Jisung, “Who are they saying it belongs to?”

“They actually say it’s yours, Jaehyun.” Jisung frowns as the elder’s eyes widen.

“Really Jeong?” Yongqin sounds somewhat amused, “I wish you’d taken me along.”

“Cut it, Li.” Jaehyun’s voice is sharp as he motions to his waist, “My scabbard’s right here. If they’re going to make shit up they should at least do it better.”

“I don’t suspect you,” Jisung points out and gestures to the others in the room, “I’m sure no one else here does either. Unfortunately, I’m not sure that the rest of the kingdom won’t try to pin the blame on you… I’m sure they’re having trouble finding the real culprit. Those who don’t think it’s you are looking at Huang Renjun, they say that he hired us to kill Suh.” Was that the Huang that Yukhei had mentioned earlier?  

“I’m sure most of the king’s chamber are eager to pin this on us though,” Yukhei shakes his head, “Ever since the rumors of Baekje started again, the king only appointed staunchly pro-Royal Guardian and Guard nobles. Unless someone lied though, there’s no way this murder was done by one of us.”

“Unless Taeyong decided to go and do it off the record,” Yongqin notes, a slight smirk on his lips.

“How… is he these days?” Jaehyun asks, a worried expression on his face. The last few times you’d come across him, he seemed to be acting stranger and stranger. Even if you didn’t want to believe it, something like this wasn’t far out of his realm of possibility. Whenever you pass him in the halls, it looks as if he’s hungry, thirsty for blood.

“We’ll have to be careful,” Yukhei says, a hand running through his hair, “If we let people know about the Furies…”

“About that,” Kun interjects as he walks into the room, followed by Taeil. It looks as if he’s going to say something else but the third figure that walks in takes everyone by surprise that whatever the commander is trying to say gets drowned out.

“Yuta?” Yukhei nearly gasps out, “What the hell are you doing here?!”

For a moment, you question whether you’re asleep or not. The man who had just entered the hall was the same man who’d left months ago with Gongmyung and his men, Nakamoto Yuta.

“Yuta,” Jisung says, a smile overcoming him, “What happened with Gongmyung’s organization?”

“Why are you so nonchalant about this?” You ask him as you look to Yuta. “There’s no way the commander would allow someone from Gongmyung’s group here, we’re not even supposed to be talking to them—”

“Just,” Kun sighs out, trying to get the energy in the room to settle, “Let me talk. Starting today, Nakamoto’s returned to the Hwarang.”

“What?” Jaehyun sounds surprised, his once crossed arms falling to his sides. “Hold on, Qian, we’re glad he’s back but… What happened with Gongmyung?”

“You’re mistaken, but understandably so,” Yuta speaks, and you feel a sense of calm wash over you. It’s been too long since you’d heard him last. “I was never one of his supporters.”

“In fact, he joined Gongmyung under Kun’s direct orders,” Taeil says with a coy smile, “As a spy, of sorts.” With the leader’s words, everything begins to make sense.

“I can’t believe you went off and had fun without me,” Yongqin faux pouts at Yuta.

“I’m sorry we had to keep this from you,” Taeil’s head bows down in apology. It’s a surprise for sure, but nonetheless a welcome one.

You give Yuta a small smile but he only sighs and shakes his head, “I’m afraid it’s a bit early to feel relieved.” His gaze turns to Kun, “The last six months have made Gongmyung’s intentions clear. Gongmyung plans to uproot the Hwarang institution in favor of his ideal one.”

“What do you mean by uproot?” Jisung asks with a frown.

“Gongmyung is going to expose the Furies to force the king’s favor,” Kun bites the inside of his cheek as he holds in a scathing retort.

“There’s more,” Yuta adds and glances to Taeil, “They plan to assassinate the Leader of the Hwarang.”

Taeil’s face is tense, gaze hardening as he looks to Kun and waits for him to speak. You feel your stomach drop, not realizing the extent to which Gongmyung hated the Hwarang.

“The Guardians are moving to destroy us,” The commander says and looks to Jaehyun, “You heard about Suh?”

“That they’re trying to pin it on me?” A nod, “Yeah.”

“They’re using it to pin blame on us and to discredit your father,” Kun crosses his arms, “They’ve been spreading the rumor across Seorabeol, even if Huang says that he wasn’t the one who ‘hired’ us, there’s still going to be people who believe it was our doing.” His gaze travels to Yuta, “So, Nakamoto’s going to be guarding Huang for the time being. If it looks like he left and then came back, it won’t be hard for Gongmyung to figure us out.”

A subtle nod from the captain, “Of course.”

The room stays quiet, so quiet that one can hear the wind whistling in from outside. A tension remains taught in the room, anticipatory for what’s to come and the outcome of what it brings.

“Kim Gongmyung…” The name leaves Kun in a hushed murmur, “It’s not enough for him to expose the Fury Corps, but to try and kill Taeil too?” It’s almost as if he’s having a quiet conversation with his former comrade. He shakes his head, drawing his gaze from the floor and looks to the captains, “It’s too bad that it has to end this way, but we have no other choice. Gongmyung dies.”

“It can’t really be helped, can it?” Taeil exhales, nodding solemnly as if to seal the former Deputy Commander’s fate.

“We’ll invite Gongmyung to Taeil’s residence in Seorabeol, I’ll be there too,” Kun begins, his voice low, commanding, “Once he’s dead we’ll use his corpse to lure the rest of his Guardians there and kill them.” He looks to Jaehyun and Yukhei, “I’m assigning both of you and your divisions to this, take care of it.

“Who do you want me to kill?” Yongqin asks, his hand resting atop the hilt of his sword.

“No one, you’re staying here.” When he sees the other beginning to protest, the commander speaks again, “You’ve still got that cough, right? You’re sick. Yuta can keep you company for a few days.”

“So, you’re telling me I can’t participate in the assassination of a person who’s trying to kill our leader?” Yongqin sounds agitated, a bitterness coating his words as he glares at Kun, “You’re a real asshole.”

You don’t realize that you’ve been watching the scene unfold in silent shock until you feel a gentle tap on your shoulder. Turning, you see Yuta standing there, he seems to take in a breath before speaking.

“The Guardians of the Royal Tomb are going to be destroyed after this… If we want Jaemin to return, this is our only chance of getting him back.”

Eyes widening at what he says, he’s right. If the Hwarang mean to kill the Guardians, that includes Na Jaemin.

Sucking in a breath, you look to Kun, “Commander? What are we going to do about Jaemin? He’s a part of the Guardians…”

“Don’t be silly,” Yukhei says easily, “Of course we’ll save hi—”

“If he fights us, he dies.” Kun interrupts, cutting off the captain.

“You can’t mean that—” Heart beginning to pound in your chest, your mind going blank. Is Kun serious? “You’ve known Jaemin for so long, surely you don’t mean that?”

Kun looks as if he wants to push you away, turning on his heels and exiting the main hall swiftly.

“You’re actually going to order them to kill Jaemin?!” You cry out after him, finding yourself following his footsteps, “Just because he left the Hwarang means you don’t care if he lives or dies?!” Before you’re actually able to leave the main hall, a hand grabs the back of your robes and pulls you into the room.

“I know that he wants to save him too,” Taeil’s voice says softly as you turn to face him, his hand letting go of your clothes. “There’s no way he could possibly live with giving the command to kill a friend who was part of our family for years.” His hands clench at his side, so much so his knuckles turn white and you fear his nails have pierced his skin.

In this moment you realize how much each of the Hwarang are suffering with this.

“I’m sorry for saying that,” you bow your head to him after your realization.

“There’s no need,” Taeil sighs, “You’re angry. We all are. It makes me happy though, I’m glad people care about Jaemin.” He lets out a heaving sigh before turning toward Jaehyun and Yukhei, “I’m not asking this as your Leader, but as Moon Taeil… Let Jaemin live, if you can. Try and convince him to rejoin the Hwarang.”

“… Got it,” Yukhei says quickly as Jaehyun takes a moment more to think.

“His life in our hands?” He shakes his head, “That’s a big responsibility.”

“I trust everything’s clear, then?” Taeil asks, scanning the faces of the captains, “If you have questions, now is the best time to ask.”

“…Wait,” you speak up, unable to stop yourself. The leader looks to you as you brace yourself, “I haven’t been given any orders. I want to help.”

“This is an… unseemly job.” Taeil looks at you, brow contorted, “Nothing like Wonweol or Ongsan. You shouldn’t be involved.”

He’s right. This isn’t a mandated order from a higher official, this was the Hwarang’s business alone, a covert and self-righteous one at that. They aren’t meant to guard or patrol, they’re set on murder. Still, you want to do what you can.

“Please, let me be a part of it,” You implore, “I promise I won’t get in the way.”

“This isn’t like anything else you’ve been a part of,” Yukhei says gently, “You understand that, right?”

“We’re killing someone who used to be a Hwarang.” Jaehyun adds soberly, unable to look you in the eye. “And even if we don’t want to, we may end up killing Jaemin.”

“I know it’s serious.” The Hwarang, as prim and proper as they like to see themselves a majority of the time, have carried out these sorts of missions before. There wasn’t any way you could stay with them if you hadn’t known, but this burden was too much to bear alone. “If it’s too presumptuous, please tell me, but I consider myself a member of the Hwarang at this point. And because we’re going through this, I want to help however possible.”

“Tell me then, how do you intend to help?” Taeil’s face has lost its usual warmth. Anger not cruelness takes shape on his expression, but the gravity of the situation at hand seems to age him a handful of years. He seems like a weathered general addressing his troops.

“I want to help with Gongmyung.”

Taeil seems to stare at you, analyzing your thought process with fierce determination.

“Very well then,” he nods once, “You may accompany us.”

November 9th, 664 – Moon Taeil’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla Whether out of courtesy or want to humiliate his former leader, Kim Gongmyung accepts Taeil’s invitation to his home several days after the plan to assassinate him came to be. Moon Taeil and Qian Kun stand at the head of the room, speaking quietly to one another before the sound of approaching footsteps enters the room. You stand in the corner of the dimly lit as Gongmyung walks in, an air of proudness about him.

“Why am I honored with the privilege of being summoned here this evening?” Gongmyung asks, looking around the room. “I can surmise you wish to ask me something?”

“I called on you because I was hoping to have a discussion,” Taeil says with a confident grin, “It’s about the current political climate. You, as well as me, must have seen that we need to come to a consensus on how to move on from here.”

“Let’s save the business talk for later,” Kun says, “Let’s try to get warmed up first.”

You move to sit at the small table set up in the center of the room, several bottles of gokaju littering the tabletop. Kun reaches out to pour Gongmyung a cup, the latter noting this,

“I never thought I’d see the say where Qian Kun pours me a cup of alcohol.”

“Don’t say it like that,” the commander chuckles, “I wasn’t faced with as formal as an education as you, it just took me a bit to learn the proper etiquette. We’ve come to realize that you were right this whole time."

“With your politeness, I can’t help but feel a little… off.” Gongmyung notes as he lifts the glass of gokaju, “You’re not trying to poison me, are you?”

“Don’t trust me?” Kun shakes his head, moving to pour himself a cup before downing it quickly. “Not poisoned, am I?” An eyebrow quirked to the Guardian as he sets down his glass.

“I never meant to offend—” Gongmyung states and sips from his cup.

The three continue to drink, you pouring most of the glasses, with Gongmyung becoming more and more reddened with the amount of alcohol the two Hwarang and you ply him with.

“Are you familiar with Wong Kunhang’s ‘On the State of Being’?” Gongmyung slurs his words together as he speaks to the two, “On what it means to find peace in the life you were given? That was written twenty years ago! Do you know how much has changed since the fall of Baekje?”

“You’re right,” Taeil nods in agreement, “The Crown has implemented so many new things that I can’t quite keep up with it myself.”

“So, you agree!” Gongmyung nods vehemently, “And to add to that, they’re looking for help from the Tang to help educate the troops! And dress like them as well!”

“Is that true?” Taeil asks, looking a bit taken aback.

“Of course, it is, all of my sources are very reliable,” Gongmyung says after downing another cup of gokaju. “If you ask me, this spells out a rocky relationship once this Baekje mess is over. If we leave ourselves with Tang customs, there’ll only be little left of Silla’s own design it its own kingdom!”

“I see…” Kun nods. His lips smile as if he agrees but a different, burning fire behind his eyes tells a different tale. “This means we’ll have to rethink a lot of things, right, Chief?”

“You’re right,” the shock that had once lain on Taeil’s face is gone, replaced with a cheery smile. “Gongmyung, it would be such an honor if you would continue to guide us on such matters in the future.”

“Confucius once said: ‘Gentlemen are undignified if they are frivolous, and they aren’t stubborn after learning.’ So, yes,” Gongmyung nods, “Of course I’ll help you. If you all don’t open your minds to proper knowledge, you’ll just become hard-headed.”

“We may be on different paths, but we are headed for the same destination,” Kun nods, “Your glass seems empty, would you like another drink?”

“Yes, please.” Gongmyung motions towards his empty cup, “This gokaju is very easy to drink.”

“Here you are,” you say, pouring some of the contents of the bottle in your grasp into his drink. There isn’t poison within the alcohol, yet you were making Gongmyung drunk now to murder him later. Although this felt no more different than pouring poison into his glass.

“Your hands are shaking,” Gongmyung notes as you manage to drop a few beads of gokaju onto the table as you pull the bottle away from his glass, “You’re not feeling ill, are you?”

“Ah, don’t worry about him, he’s probably just nervous about speaking to you,” Taeil waves it off with a small laugh.

“Am I that intriguing?” The Guardian chuckles as he looks to you.

“He does have his moments,” Kun says, his eyes flickering to you. “You need a little self-control sometimes.” His subtle message clear: hide your emotions. It had been your choice to be here, the least you can do now is to not screw it up.

“I’m sorry,” you say to Gongmyung and move to wipe up the droplets with your sleeve.

“Oh, don’t be so boring,” Gongmyung laughs, “We’re having fun!”

“Truly a man worthy of distinction,” Taeil nods as he looks to the man.

“You flatter me,” the man sighs out with a smile, “Is there anything else you want to ask me? I can answer anything.”

The minutes turn into hours, Gongmyung is drunk, stumbling to the street as you, Taeil and Kun follow him.

“Thank you for the meaningful conversation,” he says as he spins on his heels, looking towards Taeil. “I’ll take my leave, now.”

“It’s dark out,” Taeil notes the dimness of the street, “Please be careful on your way back home.”

“There’s no one who would dare kill me in Seorabeol,” Gongmyung almost snickers at the thought, drunkenly sauntering away into the darkness of the city’s streets. You watch his silhouette fade into the blackness, noting that it would be the last time you’d see him alive. A hand on your shoulder has you looking away, turning, you see Taeil looking at you.

“…It’s a bitter taste, isn’t it?” The frown on his lips is telling as you sigh.

“It’s the path we chose,” Kun shakes his head, “Our duty. In order for us to do what’s right, sometimes we need to get our hands dirty.” You feel conflicted, unable to say anything as you stand on the quiet street. “This isn’t on you or Moon, though,” the commander says, sensing your unease. “I was the one who orchestrated it, I gave the orders.”

What happened later that night is something you’d rather forget. Gongmyung, too inebriated to walk in a straight line, was quickly killed by the Hwarang waiting for him. But that didn’t end the night. Yukhei was met with a bloody fight outside of the Guardians building, Yongqin was faced with fate at Shoji. For many of the Hwarang, it is a night after which nothing would be the same.

The assassination of Kim Gongmyung and the dissolvement of the Guardians of the Royal Tomb comes to be known as the Samsil Incident. Both the Guardians and the Hwarang were surprised by the sudden appearance of the Royal Guard and the Demons who accompanied them. Both parties had fallen for the trap and the fight was thrown into a mass disarray.

As the battle of Samsil was taking place, the headquarters of the Hwarang came under attack from Lee Donghyuck. Causing the already ill Yongqin to further injure himself fending off the attacker.

The serum that your father brought to the Hwarang seems to only be a cause for worry. Slowly devouring the organization piece by piece. How long until the serum swallows them whole?

December 2nd, 664 – Shoji Temple, Kingdom of Silla Barely a month since Gongmyung’s murder, since the Samsil Incident and the return of Jaemin and Yuta, but the Hwarang feels nothing like it once was. A looming, dark atmosphere hangs over the headquarters. Many men had lost their lives or had been injured due to Donghyuck’s attack, even more had been wounded in the fight of Samsil, Jaemin being one of them. Several of the wang-do had seen him almost succumb to the injuries he’d sustained during the battle, due to this, he was pronounced dead but joined the Fury Corps shortly after. Yuta hadn’t been wounded, but many of the Hwarang began to call him a coward.

To them, his betrayal of leaving the Hwarang still runs deep, worsened as they saw him leaving the Guardians to change his fate. You see no reason why he shouldn’t correct them: he’d left to help the Hwarang, not deceive them. He claims that he’ll keep quiet on the matter, as to not tarnish both Taeil and Kun’s names, who had ordered him to join Gongmyung. Due to this, it has been decided that Yuta will leave Shoji for the time being, until the hot-headed tempers of some of the Hwarang recede. He’s been sent to protect Huang Renjun, a Tang noble residing in the northern part of the kingdom.

The Samsil Incident was in no small terms a turning point for the Hwarang. For the men who knew only the surface level details, it seems as if it were just a battle between the Hwarang and their former comrades. Those better informed know that it is the causation due to a culminating fear of another Baekje rebellion. Suh Youngho’s death solidified that as truth. And further still: the Hwarang are the only ones who know of the Demons, and Jaemin’s transformation into a Fury. They’re the only ones who know Yongqin’s illness has gotten worse.

Such an event riled the compound, a moment of silence scarce in the days following the battle. Feeling as you would only be in the way during this time, you keep to your room.

You’re sitting cross-legged at your desk, wondering if writing your thoughts down may help you try and conceptualize this all, when your door opens without a knock.

“Thank goodness you’re here,” Taeyong says as he steps into your room. “If you’d left, I wouldn’t have been able to search for you.”

“Taeyong?” You look up to him, confused at his appearance. “It’s daytime, are you okay?”

“Yes, yes,” Taeyong nods his head, his voice sounding a little frantic. “I just had a revelation and had to share it with you immediately.” His eyes glitter with… a dangerous curiosity and you feel spindly cold fingers of dread scratch down your back.

“Why me?” Questioning carefully, “Wouldn’t you want to tell the Chief or Commander first?”

“…Well, it has to be you.” A small frown pulling at his lips, “Won’t you listen to me?” Although in the form of a question, the way he asserts himself lets you know you have no choice. “Sooyoung claimed you are from a Demon family, right?” He doesn’t allow you to respond before he begins to speak. “And as a Demon, you’re stronger, faster and more resilient than a human. Their superiority over humans was clearly displayed during their most recent attack.”

“I understand that,” you nod slowly, “But what are you trying to say?”

“A Demon possesses more power than the average human, it follows that the blood of a Demon possesses that power as well,” His deductions begin to unsettle you, despite that, he continues, “Perhaps even potent enough to counteract the madness of the Furies.”

You’re unsure how the pimul works, but Taeyong’s explanation seems logical, even if he’s somewhat frenetic about it.

“Since before I became a Fury, I’ve been researching on how the serum works, I know more about it than anyone here.” Taeyong pauses and shakes his head, “Yet, I still have yet to discover the exact composition of it. I hypothesize, however, that a core ingredient is fresh blood… And I’m assuming not from a human. Perhaps there are Demons or Demon-like beings roaming throughout the other kingdoms.”

“So…” You trail off, still not able to follow him completely.

Taeyong takes a step closer to you, falling to his knees as you continue to sit at your desk, “Your very existence could save the Fury Corps… No,” He shakes his head, “The entirety of the Hwarang.” His eyes turn sharp, piercing, even, as he looks at you. The barest trace of mania in his voice as he confesses his thoughts. His hand reaches for the sword at his hip, calmly and carefully drawing it from the scabbard.

There seems to be no madness or bloodlust in his movements, but that only serves to terrify you even more.

“I’m not going to kill you,” He tries to reassure you, but your heart’s beating too quickly and your limbs feel too heavy to move away from him, “I just want a sample of your blood…” Taeyong begins to rise to his feet, that’s when you find yourself mirroring him, taking a step or two backwards to distance yourself from him.

The blade glimmers in the sunlight as he raises it, raising it towards you before you hear a shout from the hallway.

“Taeyong what the hell are you doing?!” Kun bursts into the room, quickly looking from the colonel to you as if to gauge the situation. “What’s going on here? Of all people, you should know not to draw your sword on someone in the compound, have you lost it?”

“Kun,” Taeyong smiles when he sees him, “Please, give me a hand here. Convince her to cooperate with us.”

With an assertive quiet, Kun steps between you and Taeyong. “Personal conflicts are forbidden, the O Gye apply to even us captains.”

The colonel stares at Kun for a moment, and then another before begrudgingly sheathing his sword.

“Did she do something to upset you?” Kun asks one it seems as if Taeyong’s cooled down.

“I’m searching for a way to treat the madness caused by becoming a Fury, for the good of us all,” Taeyong says simply, his hand still resting on the hilt of his sword.

“And that means you have to cut her?”

“It’s not like I’m going to kill her,” Taeyong frowns and shakes his head, “I only need a little of her blood. We lost so many Furies during the attacks, many of our human wang-do as well. If we are to effectively use the men we have left— We need to find a way to temper their madness. Surely you understand this, Kun.”

“The code says we’re to trust one another,” His gaze hardens at the colonel, “It doesn’t look like she’s very trusting of you right now. No matter your reasoning, I cannot condone this if either party is unwilling, or coerced into submitting.”

“It’s not as if she’s one of the Hwarang,” Taeyong points out.

“Maybe not, but she’s been here long enough to might as well be one.” The two continue to stare at each other for a while, their stubbornness present at the matter.

Taeyong eventually sighs, “It isn’t like you to be this soft. I’ll leave for now. But if we don’t find a way to suppress the side effects of the pimul… Even Jaemin will suffer like the rest.” He leaves on that note, you don’t exhale until you hear his footsteps wane away into nothing.

Kun hums, looking at the door and then turning to you, “Are you okay?”

“Oh, yes,” You nod, “Thank you…”

“Nothing to thank me for,” He bows his head, “I was making sure he was adhering to our code.” His gaze returns to the door, “In the past, he wouldn’t have challenged me like that.”

A slow nod as your eyes find the door, lingering there for a moment. It’s turn, Taeyong had been acting more and more strange lately. He would never have drawn his sword aggressively, or demanded things from you without consulting the other Hwarang first. “… I’m sorry.”

“Is something wrong with you?” Kun questions, his attention turning rapt to you, “There isn’t anything to be apologetic for.”

“The reason he was acting like that…” You frown, “Because Donghyuck destroyed the Fury Corps.”

Kun seems to reflect on this for a moment before responding, “I think you’re confused.”

“Lee Donghyuck has allied himself with our enemies, be it in the court or Baekje. If an enemy attacks us, it’s known that we’re going to put our lives on the line to stop them.” There’s conviction in his voice yet you cannot help the guilt that invades you.

“It isn’t your sole duty to protect me, though.”

“What are you trying to say?” His arms cross as he tilts his head, “Want us to hand you over to the Demons in the hopes they’ll spare our lives? Just because they’re more powerful than us? That isn’t how we work.” Kun’s confident in his claim, and you feel no way to object to it. Even if he won’t say it, having you leave the compound would make their live exponentially less dangerous, it would be a violation of the values they pride themselves in upholding.

“I’m sorry if what I said was out of line,” apologizing once more, you bow your head.

“I already told you to stop apologizing, don’t make me repeat myself,” He murmurs under his breath, timidly looking in your direction. “The next time something like this happens, tell me. Don’t keep it to yourself.”  

“I understand,” you look to him ands nod. Kun then turns to leave, but there’s one thing left you have to say.  “Commander…”

He stops and looks back to you, “Is there something else?”

“Is there anything I can help you all with?” With Taeil busy with the Crown, Yuta protecting Huang Renjun and Kun himself tirelessly working, you feel wrong not aiding in some way.

“Help?” He sounds almost incredulous. Had he become upset at your question?

“It could be anything…”

The silence stretches throughout the room, saturating the space for a moment.

“You may be more discreet that some of our men…” He seems to muse for a second, “Brush and paper.”

“Huh?” You ask, looking at him with confusion.

“Do you have a brush and paper?” Kun asks as he glances around your room.

“Of course,” you reply and quickly rummage around your room for the materials. After a few moments you gather the items and he sits at the desk in your room, staying silent as he quickly begins to draw. It looks to be a rudimentary map of sorts, having you question, “What is… that?” He ignores you and continues to draw.  

“Yuta is in Noseo-dong guarding Renjun, right?”

“Right,” you nod, looking down to the paper.

“I want you to visit him,” Kun says before gently blowing air onto the ink, hoping to dry it faster. “Do you think you can? You won’t stand out as much as one of our men.”

“Yes, of course,” You say enthusiastically, excited to do something, and even more overjoyed that it’s especially catered to you.

“I drew you a map,” He says, lifting the edges of the paper and handing it to you, “So you don’t get lost.” Without it, you may have, only really knowing the select routes several of the captains’ patrol when it’s your turn.

“I’ll get going, then.” Taking the parchment into your grasp, you begin to turn on your heels towards the door before the commander stops you.

“It’ll be hard to deliver a message you haven’t heard…” His voice stops you in your tracks and you whip around to face him, “I know it’s been a while since you’ve been out,  but you’re getting a little too excited.”

“I’m sorry!” Exclaiming with widened eyes as you look at him.

As you speak, he quickly writes something down on another piece of parchment, he lets it dry for a moment, carefully folding the paper before handing it to you. “This is a letter for Nakamoto, make sure you don’t drop it… or lose it.”

“I’ll be very careful,” you say as the parchment folds in your grasp, “Is there anything you want me to say to him?”

“Everything I need to say is in that letter,” he nods, glancing to the paper.

“I’ll be off then,” you state and hurriedly leave the room, anxious to begin your mission.

The streets of Seorabeol are busy once again, the crowds closely knit together, not allowing you any space to slide past the throng of bodies. Kun’s map, unfolded haphazardly in your hands, guides you to Noseo-dong and leads you through several side streets, winding your way around the district until you come upon one of the most unassuming inns you have ever seen. On the map, Kun had written that Yuta’s name should be under ‘Yukkuri’.

Making your way inside, you walk to who you presume to be the innkeeper, you ask to speak with your friend and they’re off, Yuta walking out shortly after.

“A Ca—I mean Yukkuri,” you say with a nod, “I’m sorry for bothering you.”

“Oh,” he says, almost genuinely surprised, “I didn’t realize they’d send you.”

“I’m sure you weren’t expecting someone as inexperienced,” You give out a short laugh.

“No,” he shakes his head to dismiss your thought, “I was only surprised. I expected to receive new orders soon, but I didn’t expect that you’d be the one to deliver them.”

“Ah, well, I asked if there was anything to do to help and…” You mutter, reaching for the letter you’d tucked away on your belt.

“I can see the commander’s thinking,” Yuta muses and reaches out to take the parchment, “It’s a good plan. Any other Hwarang would’ve drawn unnecessary attention to this place. The new members can’t be trusted yet, too. You, on the other hand, can move unnoticed, and your loyalty is beyond question. He really did make the best choice.”

The captain’s explanation makes you realize how much Kun had thought the plan through, not merely giving you the task on a whim.

Yuta then unfolds the letter, scanning its contents before lighting it on a nearby lantern and watching the paper disintegrate into ash on the ground.

“Uh, Captain Li?” You begin but he cuts you off.

“Yukkuri.”

“Ah, right. Yukkuri,” you retract your words and begin anew, “Is it okay to burn that?”

“I’ve read it and know what it says,” his shoulders shrug, “There’s no reason to leave evidence lying around. Thank you for delivering it.”

By the time you return to Shoji, the sun has already dipped below the horizon, dusk coolly falling onto the compound as the bite of winter sinks its teeth into you. Breath coming out in short puffs only to quell as you enter the main hall, you find the space empty. You’re surprise, hoping to see at least one of the captains loitering around, but none are present. So, you make your way to Kun’s quarters to report that you’d succeeded in handing the letter off to Yuta.

“Commander?” You ask, knocking on his door.

“Come in,” you hear after a moment and open the door, stepping into his room. His room still lay adorned with documents as he sits at his desk, the glow of the lantern in the corner of his room providing a shimmering light onto him. “Thank you for taking care of that,” Kun says as he looks up to you from his work, “How was Yuta?”

“He’s his usual self,” simply said as he nods his head.

“That’s good,” a sigh and you wonder what’s come over him. His mood seems more sour than when you left him earlier in the day.

“I’m sorry,” you say, unsure of how to go on with your conversation.

“What do you mean?” His brow furrows, “Did you lose the letter? Or did you not even make it to the inn?”

“Nothing like that—”

“Then why did you apologize?”

“I thought you’d be angry since I’d taken so long to get back…” You lead off, eyes breaking from his gaze and settling on the floor.

He sighs, as if relieved what you said wasn’t dire, “I’m not mad at you. It may surprise you that I have other things to worry about than just you.”

“Oh of course,” You say quickly, “I never meant to imply that— ”

Kun’s expression softens and he gives a short chuckle, shaking his head as he tries to contain himself. It does warm you a bit, knowing that he isn’t as worked up as you thought him to be.

“If you don’t mind me asking, why were you so upset earlier?”

“As you know,” he sighs, “the have been some issues in the Hwarang. Things are becoming more strained with the higher-ups as well.

“The higher-ups?”

“Ah, you’re practically one of us so I should tell you,” the happiness from seconds ago fades as his brow furrows, “Word is, Buyeo Pung is on the move again, this time backed by Goguryeo.” Does this mean that there would be a bigger battle than that of Baekgang or Ongsan? Kun’s lips purse and he shakes his head, “We’re not sure of their movements until they strike first. Then again, it’s not like worrying about it will do any of us good.” With each sentence, there’s another sigh, knowing the decisions made now will impact the whole of the Hwarang in the future.

“Is there anything else I can do to help?”

“Was running off to Noseo-dong not enough for you?” He questions with a piqued eyebrow.

“No… But if the Hwarang need help, I feel more than obliged to lend a hand.”

“You know what?” His eyes lingering on his paperwork, “No matter how much you work, you’re different than Yuta, Minhyung, or Shotaro. And you wouldn’t be able to do the dirty work that I give Yukhei or Jaehyun, either. Assigning duties to my men isn’t as easy as I’d like it to be.” Every one of his words feels like a knife to your gut, even if he has a point.

“I understand that I’m not a warrior like the rest of you,” you begin with a deep breath, “But I see how hard everyone is working and it makes me feel bad if I just sit around and don’t do anything.” Head bowing and your eyes looking to the floor, “Just let me help out in any way I can…”

Kun sits quietly for a moment before sighing out a “Damn…”, you hear him move to stand, his footsteps nearing you and his hand gently placed under your chin. His hand raises your face until your eyes are locked with his, the proximity of him so close to you sets your skin on fire. The commander’s eyes seem to pierce through you, the intensity churning your stomach.

“You say that you want to help,” he says as you nod your head, his hand still planted under your chin, “Why?” You can’t find the words immediately, and as you think, he speaks again, “Is it because you want to make a name for yourself? Or do you want us to recognize your efforts and reward you accordingly?”

“That’s not it,” confidence riddled in those three words as you speak.

“Then why put yourself through all of this?”

“For everything you all have done for me…” You frown, the pads of his fingertip’s abrasive on the underside of your chin. “There were times you all put your life on the line, people got hurt… The Hwarang have protected me time and time again. I just want to give back. I don’t want to regret anything anymore.”

  Kun’s hand falls away from you and he sighs, speaking with a low voice, “Then stop bowing so easily. You think you’re right. Why apologize if you believe yourself to be true?” Your eyes widen at his words, slowly realizing what he’s trying to convey. “If you believe in something then never yield to someone else. Hold your head up high and walk tall, you won’t win if you can’t even see the prize because you’re looking down at your feet.”

His words spark something in you, an understanding of his mindset and aptitude towards life. So, you look at him, trying to match your gaze’s intensity with the blooming fires behind his eyes.

“I want to help. If there’s anything I can do, let me know.”

A small smile flickers onto Kun’s lips as he takes a step back from you, “If you want to help so much, how about you make some tea?”

“Alright,” you nod assertively, and the smile lingers on the commander’s face.

“The fate of the Hwarang rests on this tea, you know.”

“Leave it to me!” You say loudly, brushing past him and out of the room, racing as fast as you can towards the kitchen. Yet, before you leave, you can hear Kun mumble to himself,

“What’ll happen to us now…”

December 11th, 664 – Jeong Seokmin’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla Baekje is trying to restore itself once more. News from Goguryeo solidifies King Munmu’s fears a few days into December, after a skirmish breaks out on the Silla-Goguryeo front. At first it was thought to be Goguryeo troops, but with Buyeo Pung leading the charge himself, it’s quickly realized that the kingdom is once again trying to establish itself.

More and more soldiers begin to flock to Seorabeol in anticipation of the oncoming onslaught, purges of Baekje loyalists once again resume and a tension lies in the air as if a cord is about to snap and set everything loose. With each passing day, news comes from the north of the collecting armies, as well as from the east, where former Baekje citizens have begun to rebel against the Silla leadership. As the Crown draws in its allies, seeking out aid from Tang once more, they call upon the Hwarang to aid in the upcoming battle.

The Hwarang reside at Jeong Seokmin’s residence, Jaehyun’s father’s home a little way outside of the city. While his father remains locked in the capital as plans are drawn, the residence is being used as a base of operations for the Hwarang, and not just those from Seorabeol.

“Everyone!” A voice shouts from the outer courtyard of the home, a wang-do bursting into the main room, sweat dotting their brow and his eyes looking frantic. “The Chief’s been shot!”

There were no witnessed, and the culprit escaped unnoticed. The motives unsure.

“What the hell?” Yukhei frowns, “What asshole uses a bow in the city?” The captain leaves the residence shortly after collecting a group of men to survey the scene of where Taeil had been attacked.

The arrow pierced the leader’s right shoulder, the head lodging into bone and shattering it. It requires more treatment than you can provide.

The sun had gone down when the door to the main room opens again, Taeyong striding in the room, looking surprised to see you. “You’re still awake?”

“Colonel Lee…” You note, “If you need to use this room I’ll leave.”

“I don’t mind,” he shakes his head, “Rather, I think it’s best that you stay here.” His words confusing, anxiousness rising in your stomach as you recall the last time you’d been alone with him.

Just as he finishes speaking, the captains of the Hwarang file into the room, somber expressions dotting their faces. Your anxiousness only continues to heighten.

“… Looks like everyone’s here,” Kun muses as the door is closed to allow you all a bit of privacy.

“Where’s Yongqin?” Taeyong asks, scanning the faces for the missing captain.

“He shouldn’t hear this,” Kun shakes his head, “If he learns about Moon, he wouldn’t think twice about his safety and run off to find vengeance.”

“But if that’s what he wants, why wouldn’t you let him?” Taeyong points out, “Again, being too kind, Kun.”

“What did you want from us?” Jaehyun’s voice rises, directed towards the colonel. “We don’t know when the fighting’s going to start, for all of us to be here right now… Don’t tell me—”

“It’s exactly that.” Taeyong nods. “I asked you to come with the intention of giving you something.” In his hands, you now see, is a bundle of cloth that he slowly unwraps before you all. What you see makes you take in a sharp breath of air.

“Pimul?” Yuta frowns, eyeing the vials of red liquid in the colonel’s hands.

“As captains of the Hwarang, we took on the risks of researching this,” a slow nod, “In doing so, it’s necessary for us to take responsibility for this experiment. Especially if any of you become injured and unable to fight. Or in the worst case, there’s a possibility that you may lose your own life.” Moving the vials to one hand, he picks up one in his other and examines it in the lanternlight of the room, “I know for certain that this serum will be of use to you.”

“Colonel…” Yukhei says slowly, “Are you trying to experiment on us too?”

“I know your hesitation,” Taeyong snips, dropping the vial back into the pile with an audible clink, “But under our current circumstances, we cannot afford to lose any more of our captains.”

“Fuck that,” Yukhei frowns, “I don’t want to depend on that shit to survive.” With that, he storms past the group of captains with heavy footfalls, swinging open the door before leaving.

“Maybe this would be something of a good luck charm…” Jisung suggests, his eyes warily looking over the vials. “I hope it never comes to the point where we use the serum.” Taeyong extends the pile to the captains.

“I don’t think I’ll use it,” Jaehyun murmurs as both he and Yuta pick up a vial, “but I’ll keep it just in case…”

Until this moment, Kun had remained silent, listening to Taeyong’s speech.

“Take responsibility, huh?” Eyes looking troubled, the commander reaches for a vial and pockets it, almost as if he doesn’t want to acknowledge its presence, “Maybe you’re onto something.”

“I believe that’s all I have to say for tonight.” Taeyong nods as he folds the now empty cloth, “I hope this courtesy doesn’t go to waste.” After he finishes, the captains slowly file out, leaving you alone with Taeyong once more.

“I’m sure you’re aware of this,” He sighs and looks to you, “But don’t let any word of this reach the other Hwarang, do I make myself clear?”

Nodding your head timidly, the colonel stays for another moment before leaving.

The serum that your father created now lies in the hands of the Hwarang captains. The serum that had entrenched them into the world of Demons and a life they should never have had to think about.

December 16th, 664 – Jeong Seokmin’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla “We still haven’t figured out who shot the Chief?”

“I bet you anything it was some of those Guardian bastards!”

“No way, it was probably the Baekje loyalists—”

Ever since the attack on Moon Taeil, the atmosphere at Jeong Seokmin’s residence had been wrought with speculation and tension. This tension ever more present as you step into the main room with a tray of tea for the captains.

“Thanks,” Jaehyun says as you enter, “Can you just leave it here?”

A nod as you set down the tray, it seems as if you’d walked in on an important discussion.

“What’s the plan, then?” Yukhei questions whomever he’d been speaking to. “Gaozong wants power in exchange for helping us, but they’re also hoping not to get as involved as they were at Baekgang. They know a war’s coming and they’re trying to extort Munmu for all he’s worth.”

“I’m not saying that you’re wrong,” Kun sighs out from the head of the table. “There’s nothing you or I could do about that though. We follow the Crown and not Gaozong.”

“In regard to sending our men to the front line…” Shotaro speaks up, “Colonel Lee’s been pushing to implement the Furies.”

“I disagree with that,” Jaehyun frowns, “This is war, not a massacre. There’s going to be both enemies and allies on the field, we won’t be able to control them. It’s not that they’re not powerful, it’s just too risky.”

“Agreed,” Yukhei nods, crossing his arms as he leans back in his seat, “And inhumane too.”

“Then what do you suggest?” Yuta questions, looking to the captain. “If you’re so vehemently against it, you should offer an alternative.”

“We’re working on that.” Yukhei grumbles, his voice raising, “If it were so easy do you think we’d be in this mess?”

“Commander,” Shotaro looks to Kun, “What do you think?”

“… Let me think.” A deep exhale from Kun as he straightens himself in his seat, “We need to know the movements of Baekje before anything else, as well as prioritize what the Crown wants and, inadvertently, what Tang wants as well.” With the war inching closer and Taeil’s injury, everyone in the Hwarang had been and is still on edge.

You leave the meeting sometime after then, never finding out what solution the men had come to. Later in the day, as the sunk sinks over the horizon, you find yourself at Yongqin’s door, anxious to check on his condition.

“Captain Li?” You ask, gently opening the door and stepping inside, “How are you—huh?” Upon entering, you find that Jaemin had come along to keep the captain company as well.

“What are you doing up so late?” Jaemin asks as he looks to you.

“What do you mean?”

“Well um… people may get the wrong idea if a girl visits a man’s room at night…” The young captain trails off, obviously flustered.

“You know that Yongqin and I aren’t…”

Jaemin laughs, “Yeah, yeah… That’s not really your kind of thing, is it?”

“What do you mean?”

“What do you mean ‘what do you mean?’?” Jaemin snickers, “Come on…”

“Why are you here?” Yongqin, not seeming to be in a playful mood, cuts into the conversation, “I assume you have a reason for visiting me?”

“Oh, yes, well… I came to check up on you.” Returning to the reason you’d come in the first place, you look to the captain, “Are you feeling okay? Is there anything I can get you?”

“Of course not,” his expression bitter, “Look at what’s going on.” After a moment of silence, he speaks to you, “Is that all? You can go now.” His aggression taking you by surprise, you falter for another moment before coming to your senses to bring up what had been bothering you.

“Do you all know?” Another pause, “That Colonel Lee wants to… use the Furies.”

“Of course…” The grin that was adorning Jaemin’s face drops.

“If you were him,” Yongqin sighs, “Wouldn’t you want to do the same? They need numbers or they’ll never make a name for themselves. I mean, it’s a given once they can’t function anymore, they’ll need to be cut off.”

“Cut off…”

“We’re not all good-doers,” the captain shakes his head, “we can’t go around giving food to everyone we see who needs it. I mean, yeah, you mooched off of us for years, but that was entirely your good luck. Don’t forget that.”

“I guess you have a point…”

“Yongqin you’re being a bit of a jackass,” Jaemin frowns at the other captain. “It was our fault she was brought to the Hwarang.”

Yongqin sneers at the statement, clearly unmoved, he continues his grievances. “And what the hell is Kun doing? He should be kicking himself in the ass for not apprehending the men that hurt Moon.” A frustrated sigh, “If I weren’t—If I weren’t like this, I’d go out and do it myself.”

His bedrest is clearly getting to him. He’d known Taeil, long before either of them had joined the Hwarang.

“What do you think, Jaemin?” A glance towards the other as you ask.

“Me? I, uhm, well…” He hums, “I did drink the serum but… I was worried about what would happen to me. Taeyong wants more men in the Fury Corps, says we’ll never win otherwise. But I don’t like the idea of forcing the Hwarang to join us, even if they’ve broken our code.” The demeanor he has is unlike the one you remember from when you’d first met him, it’s cold and stern. Recalling how he used to be, a sadness overcomes you.

“No matter what Taeyong says, it’s Kun that makes the call.” Yongqin says, crossing his arms.

“You’re right.” Jaemin says, a frown pulling at him, “But the Corps already exists, it’s not like we can pretend it doesn’t.”

“Then maybe we should use them, then.” Yongqin mumbles, “They can hold a sword, at least.”

The power of the Furies is something that would ultimately be beneficial to the Hwarang, should they need to utilize their power for the war effort. Yet, once the war was over… You struggle to think of what would be done with them after. Fearing the answer, you don’t press the matter further.

December 17th, 664 – Jeong Seokmin’s Residence, Kingdom of Silla It should be no surprise to you by now that an unexpected visitor, be it friend or foe, should stop in on you at any time now. Such an occasion occurs, with a friend, this very morning.

“It’s been too long,” Sooyoung’s voice calls out to you as you walk outside the front gate of the Jeong residence, one of the captains had alerted you to her and Seulgi’s presences and you came as quickly as you could.

“What brings you here?” You ask, an inquisitive tilt of your head.

“We have business with your leader, could you go and get him for us?” Seulgi responds, glancing towards the interior doors of the home.

“Oh… the Chief isn’t really in good condition to meet with people, I could go and get the Commander—”

“That’ll do fine as well,” Sooyoung nods with a smile before you’re off to summon Kun.

After you’d let the two women inside, as well as summoned the commander, the four of you stand in the main hall. Kun looks over the two warily before crossing his arms, “This is unexpected, to say the least. What do you want?”

“I apologize for intruding again, but it’s important that I speak to you.” Sooyoung begins, her expression turning stony as she speaks to the commander, “I’ve come to discuss your… Furies.”

You’d been about to excuse yourself to make tea for the group, but upon hearing Sooyoung’s statement, you freeze in place. Kun seems to tense as well, a downward curvature of his lips etching into his face. “I won’t waste your time or mine—how long do you intend to keep them in your service?”

“What do you mean?” Crossed arms, stern gaze, the signs that Kun is on the defensive yet again.

“You’ve kept them imprisoned here long enough; I think you know what I’m saying.” Her words turn bitter midway through her statement, “Even the Crown has admitted to this failed experiment. They are too much for the Hwarang to handle. With Donghyuck on your trail, it would be best for you to wash your hands of them.”

“Is it up to you to decide if they’re a failure or not?” Kun questions, letting out a sigh, “We’ve done our research, I’m not sure you have the authority to judge us.”

“Then are you aware that the Hwarang’s Furies have been murdering people on the streets to test their strength?” Seulgi asks, her gaze narrowing at Kun.

His eyes go wide, muttering a “What?” before looking to her. For a split second, his veneer of put togetherness fades and confusion and worry situates itself on his brow. And then it’s gone, his composure returning and frown reappearing.

“Where did you hear that?”

“There’s no reason for me to tell you…” Seulgi states, “My sources are reliable, and that’s all you need to know. Your job is to protect Seorabeol, is it not? And yet you let your men who’ve succumbed to madness wander its streets and kill its civilians. It disgusts me, Commander.” Her eyes bore into Kun’s, “Before all of Silla knows of your failure, I strongly suggest you disband your Fury Corps.”

Her logic is sound, no matter how scathing she is towards the Furies. The room falls silent, you can almost hear Kun’s thoughts racing in his head.

Sooyoung stops him, however, speaking up, “We can quiet this conversation for a moment, there’s something else I would like to address.” With that, she looks to you, “Will you still not leave with us?” The question simple, her eyes wide, “I know we spoke of this before, but with the current climate… I fear your safety here is jeopardized more and more with each passing day.”

You know that war is coming, everyone in the room does. Yet to hear Sooyoung insinuate it adds even more weight to it all.

“Are you suggesting that we can’t handle it?” Kun says, anger tinged to his words.

“The truth is hard to accept sometimes,” Sooyoung turns to him, “If Lee Donghyuck shows up, can you protect her? If he comes while you’re amid battle to take her away, can you protect her then?” She’s angry, her tone rising as the commander stays quiet, “She’s a Demon, not a human. She should be with her kind; we can protect her.” Looking back to you, she pleads, “If you’re with us then their entire effort can go towards the war and battles to come.”

Each word is a blow to your chest, guilt wrought upon you for even thinking that your presence among the Hwarang wasn’t detrimental to them. Meeting with Kun’s gaze says nothing, he averts his eyes as you’re left to make a decision.

You’re sure Sooyoung is right, yet you can’t find the words to say that.

“What do you say?” Sooyoung asks, her voice returning to a normal, soft level. You know she wants what’s best for you, even if her means aren’t the kindest towards those you’ve begun to hold dear to you.

Kun, however, sees right through you.

“You don’t want to leave, do you?” The question is simple as it leaves him, and he knows your answer before you even say it. “Then don’t, stay. There isn’t much else to think about if your mind’s already set.”

“Is that really okay?” The implication behind you staying is far more dangerous than that of you leaving. Is Kun saying that he wants you to stay?

“I’m not going to repeat myself.” He shakes his head, “What proof do we have that they can keep your secret any better than we can? If that bastard’s after you too—Well, if we’ve got the same enemy, wouldn’t it make sense to stick together?”

“So… I can stay?”

“What kind of question is that?” Voice gruff as he huffs out, “If you were as much of a pain in the ass as you think yourself to be, I would’ve kicked you out years ago.”

A smile, small and timid, curling your lips, “Thank you, Commander.”

The four of you disperse moments later, you leading Sooyoung and Seulgi to the front gate of the home before the first woman stops you just as you reach the gate.

“So,” she says with an apologetic tone, “You’ve turned me down again, haven’t you?”

“I appreciate your offer,” a nod of your head, “but my place is here.”

“It’s alright,” another apologetic smile, “If you’re so determined to stay then there’s no way I would’ve gotten you to leave with me… And… When you told me that you were staying because you were, ah, interested in someone, did you mean the Commander?”

You’re not sure how to answer that question.

“To be honest,” you begin, the toe of your shoe scraping atop the dirt of the ground, breath coming out in puffs of white air, “I don’t know him all too well, but…” The words stutter out of you, not sure how to explain yourself or because you, too, cannot comprehend your feelings towards the Hwarang. “The men here call him the Demon Commander because of his harshness and strict nature, a lot of people think he’s cold because of that… But I think it’s his way of showing kindness, there’s warmth there that isn’t seen too often yet…” You don’t realize that you’re rambling as you continue, “He’s responsible for most of the Hwarang, it’s not like he has a choice whether he can act like that or not, either. I’m not sure what I can do for him, but I’d like to stay and do whatever I can.”

“He really has you wrapped around his finger,” Sooyoung hums to herself, “Not that I think he sees that, though…” After giving her a confused look, she continues, “They say my ancestor fell in love with a human and followed him to the capital, I’m their granddaughter so I suppose I can understand where you’re coming from… Rank and circumstance, whether human or Demon, mean little before the eyes of love.”

Wait. Wait… “What?” You squeak out, “Love?! I never—Sooyoung I never said I love him.”

Her hand only finds your shoulder as she sighs and continues, “A human and a Demon, there’s something romantic about that, I think… Don’t think it’s destined to fail, either.”

“Sooyoung…” Seulgi calls out, probably to save you from dying of embarrassment, “We should get going.”

“Ah,” her hand lifted from your shoulder, “You’re right.” The Demon looks to you, “Take care of yourself, please. Don’t underestimate Lee Donghyuck, he’s more powerful than I’d like to imagine.” A slow nod as she sighs, “If you need to contact me, please send a letter to Seulgi.”

“Thank you, Sooyoung.” And with that, the pair are gone through the front gate. Your mind, however, lingers on Sooyoung’s words. Rank and circumstance mean little before the eyes of love… But was your desire to be close to Kun that? You want to be around him, to help him… The most important thing for him is the Hwarang, he’d invested his life into this organization, put everything he is into it. With war on the horizon, he doesn’t have the time to think of anything else.

As dusk descends on the compound, you find that the men of the Hwarang are ravenous. You would expect nothing less from men who spend their days training and patrolling and spend their nights doing the same as well. Any food given is gone as soon as it reaches their plate and you offer any that you have, finding yourself forgoing dinner tonight in favor of a younger member of the Hwarang getting a meal.

With pangs of hunger rattling through you, you decide to stave it off by going to the kitchens to either drink some water or make yourself some tea. Your hands gently clenching at your stomach as you walk, you almost don’t hear the voice behind you.

“Was that your stomach?” Turning, you see the Hwarang’s Commander stopped to look at you, “I know the wang-do ate all of the food, did they not leave you any?”

“I’ll eat later,” you nod, fingers still at your sides as you try to stop another growl from escaping your gut. “I’m alright.”

“I didn’t ask if you were alright,” arms folding across his chest, “I asked if you’ve eaten.”

“Well, um,” a shake of your head, “no, not yet.”

“Really,” he huffs, almost incredulously, as he reaches for the bag slung around his shoulder. He rummages around inside of it for a moment before grabbing something and tossing it to you. Unwrapping it from the cloth, you find that it’s one of the balls of rice that you’d made for the captains.

“Commander, this is yours—”

“Just eat it,” he grits his teeth and the two of your gazes settle on the disputed food. After a moment of silence, he sighs and moves to break it in half, “Don’t tell me you’re rejecting my kindness… If we halve it will it make you feel better?” Taking his half in his free hand, he offers the other chunk out to you.

You grab your half, “… Thank you.”

The two of you eat in silence, before Kun speaks again, “Stop worrying so much about the other men and eat what you deserve. Okay?”

“I’ll be sure to do that next time…” you nod as your hand drops to your side after finishing the food.

“I wasn’t trying to lecture you,” Kun’s voice goes soft before muttering, “… thanks.”

“Don’t worry about it, I’ll let the men eat what they want and get my own food another time,” you shake your head, “They need it more than me—”

“I wasn’t talking about that,” he coughs to clear his throat, “I meant to say thanks for staying. You decided to stay with us.”

Was the commander happy that you decided not to go with Sooyoung?

“What’s with the funny face?” The commander asks and you feel a swell of emotion come over you. “Was that not enough food?”

“No, no,” you shake your head, “It was fine.”

Kun nods as he tucks the cloth back into his bag and looks towards the entrance of the home, “I’m going to leave you in charge for now before I go out on my rounds. Take care of this place, okay?” There’s a small smile on his lips as he asks you.

“Of course,” you say, returning the smile. And with that, the commander turns on his heels and strides out of the front entrance to the home, heading off to his duties in Seorabeol.

January 3rd, 665 – Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Just before the year ends, it’s decided that Yongqin’s condition had worsened and he’d contracted both what your father had once called phthisis. The disease isn’t uncommon, but it is uncurable. You’d had suspicions that he had contracted phthisis when he’d first begun to lose strength, but never wanted to admit to such a devastating thing. The entirety of the Hwarang are shaken by the news.

It’s decided that he and Taeil are to be sent to Daegaya, where Namekawa Yasuo can look over them as they receive treatment.

Despite them leaving, Seorabeol is still on high alert. The Hwarang remain on standby at Jeong Seokmin’s residence as the year begins to shift to the next. Your hope that the thoughts of war would wane fades lasts only three days into the new year.

A coalition of soldiers claiming to be from Baekje invaded a town on the western border of where the Baekje-Silla border once was. Violence broke out and suddenly, the war had begun. Groups of these revivalists began to spring up in the kingdom as well, the closest having come to burn down Jeong Seokmin’s residence late at night. For now, the only option for you is to retreat from the heart of the capital.

Your feet slap the road as you race through the emptied streets, only pausing to catch your breath as your partner stops beside you.

“Are you alright?” Jisung asks, sounding almost as out of breath as you, “We can stop if we need to.”

“We can’t afford to do that,” you shake your head at him, “I’ll be alright.” Wiping the sweat from your brow, you take a deep breath and urge your aching feet to move once more. Under Kun’s orders, the two of you are to make your way to Hwaseong, a temple that lies some ways away from the outskirts of the city’s domain. The Hwarang had been dispatched to roam the outside of the city, looking for traitors as the Silla army begins to make their way to protect the king.

“I know this isn’t going as planned,” Jisung says as the two of you begin to pick up pace, “Commander Qian admitted as such…” To have Kun admit to anything near defeat is startling to hear, but the raid on Jeong Seokmin’s residence had shaken the Hwarang more than any Demon attack had. “I’ve never been as good with as sword as the rest of the men,” the captain offers a small smile, “But I can aid the Hwarang in other ways.”

It took several hours to reach Hwaseong, Kun’s hope is to use this place as the Hwarang’s new station, where he could station his men and launch attacks.

“Why are the gates closed…?” An uncomfortable silence encapsulates the area, there weren’t any other people here.

Suddenly a whir of wind passes by the two of you, an arrow sinking into the ground behind you. Jisung immediately grabs your wrist and drags you into the tree line beyond the temple’s entrance.

“They’re shooting at us? I thought they were supposed to be friendly—” You say as Jisung lets go of you, looking to the walls of Hwaseong.

“Either the loyalists have already taken over or they’ve been against us all along…” He murmurs as to not draw any attention, “We need to get back to the other captains.”

“But the Commander said to—”

Jisung merely shakes his head, “It’s clear by now that this place is hostile towards us. It won’t do us any good to stay around it any longer.”

“But if we leave what’ll happen to everyone else?” Your gaze looks back to the temple, “If we say that it’s orders from Commander Qian…”

You’d never seen Jisung look this serious before. “I want to help him as much as you do, but my job isn’t merely to ask for aid. It’s to protect you as well. If something happens to you now then I will have failed him twice, come on.”

His hand finds your shoulder after a moment of silence, his expression softens, and he gently urges you, “I’m sure the Commander will come through with one of his brilliant plans. But if we’re to see it, we’ll need to be alive. The men will be worried if we don’t head back soon.”

By the time the two of you near the Hwarang’s encampment on the outskirts of the city, you notice that something feels… wrong.

“Aren’t we supposed to meet the others here?” You ask, looking around the empty clearing, void of any sign that the Hwarang had been here. “Did we get lost?”

“No,” Jisung shakes his head, but his voice sounds uneasy, “It should just be up ahead.”

As you round the clearing, you spot something on the ground. “Jisung! There’s someone over there!”

“That’s impossible—there’s no way the rebels would’ve gotten this far already…” He says as the two of you near the body. He wears the blues of the Hwarang, and looking up from him at the path ahead, you see even more scattered along the road.

Standing in the middle of the carnage is a face you dread to see.

“I was wondering why these men looked so familiar…” Specks of blood litter the light-yellow robes of the perpetrator as his eyes fall onto you. “You’re here after all.” Donghyuck’s smile is cruel and mocking.

You—!” Too furious to speak, you glare at the Demon.

“To see that Hwaseong turned on you… Maybe following your tedious politics paid off.” He muses, shaking his head, “But I never thought I’d find you among the wreckage.” Once again glancing to the bodies, “I thought they’d provide some entertainment until you came back, but they weren’t skilled enough.”

Out of the corner of your eye, you see Jisung’s balled fists shaking with rage. Most of the men on the ground were members of his own Division.

“I was… distracted the last I saw you,” Donghyuck frowns in your direction, “But this time you’ll leave with me.” You know that neither you or Jisung could face him and win, but maybe if you go with him he’ll spare Jisung’s life…

A hand placed in front of you as Jisung steps forward, his other hand reaching for the hilt of his sword. “Stay back,” his voice calm as he looks to Donghyuck.

Anxiousness rising, “What are you doing, Jisung?”

“You’ll have to run for it,” he says apologetically, unsheathing his sword, “Get back to Shoji and tell the Commander… Tell him that I’m sorry and that I hope he forgives me for not being able to walk along side him to the end.”

“No.” You say as you realize that Jisung doesn’t intend to return to the headquarters with you, “I can’t leave you here to die!” Hand finding the sleeve on his robes, you clench to it tightly, “If I go with him then you can live!”

The smile on his lips is bitter, “Are you suggesting that I use a girl as a shield so I can escape? I’d never be able to call myself a Hwarang again.” He then shrugs off your grip, turning to face Donghyuck, his hands tightening around the grip of his blade.

“Jisung you don’t have to do this,” you plead, but he doesn’t move an inch, “Run!”

“Are you done saying goodbye yet?” Donghyuck sighs out from the other end of the clearing, “I’ll give you a chance to listen to her, go on, run.” His hand flicking towards the direction of the city as he stands there.

Jisung says nothing but charges at the Demon, his sword arcing towards the unarmed man. Donghyuck’s sword unsheathes from its scabbard, too fast for you to witness him doing it, and the tip of the blade emerges from Jisung’s back. A grunt and blood begins to bubble from the captain’s lips.

“Jisung!” The cry rips from your throat as he falls to his knees, a deep red stain blooming from his wound.

Donghyuck looks down to the Hwarang, leaning down to whisper something, “The men that I killed are yours, aren’t they? Don’t you want revenge? I understand that warriors put great stock in avenging their falling comrades.”

The Hwarang looks up to him angrily, a white-hot rage running through him. His shaking hand reaches into the depths of his robes, bringing out a small vial.

“Pimul,” Donghyuck scoffs as Jisung attempts to bring the unopened vial to his lips, “Pathetic.” Before the captain can drink the serum, Donghyuck’s blade rises once more, slashing against Jisung’s chest as sunlight glimmers off of the blade. The vial drops to the ground, cracking and leaking the red contents into the soil.

Jisung falls forward, his hands finding the ground as he turns to look at you, red streaking from his lips as he pushes himself back to his knees weakly, “Run!”

Your feet scramble atop the loose dirt as you begin to turn as Donghyuck speaks again, “You’re by far the weakest human I’ve fought. The Hwarang would allow someone like you among their ranks?” Something within you snaps, and you look back to Donghyuck just as he cuts across Jisung’s abdomen once more. Jisung falls without a sound to the grass.

“Jisung… Jisung!” Even as a part of you screams at you to run, you find yourself scrambling to the fallen captain, grabbing for his hand. A friend that had become something like a brother to you, he can’t hear you cry out for him, or feel your hand encasing his. He had joined his men among the corpses littering the ground.

“Now that that’s dealt with,” Donghyuck says as he stands above you, you still on your knees next to Jisung’s body, “Come with me.”

Seeing Jisung’s lifeless body and hearing Donghyuck’s cold and callous words makes a fire bubble inside of you, shattering your heart as you look up angrily to the Demon. Hand grabbing desperately for the blade at your side, you rise to your feet and ready yourself to lunge at the man.

“I thought you were smarter…” He huffs, “Your time with humans has made you weak.”

“Shut up!” Burning tears trail down the sides of your face, vision blurring as you blink to look at him clearly.

“Does it bother you that I killed him? A human foolish enough to challenge a Demon, what else would have happened?”

“Shut up, shut UP!” You’d never yelled at someone as angrily as you are now, but you’d also never been angry enough to try and kill someone until now. “I’ll never be able to forgive you for what you’ve done!” Grip tightened on your blade, you rush forward towards Donghyuck, only seeing white.

The man easily parries your attack, your sword flying from your grasp. You hunch down to reach for it, but before you can, Donghyuck’s foot comes down on your arm, pining it to the ground. Pain shoots up your limb and you cry out, his gaze meeting yours, his aura radiating an abrasive arrogance.

“Even now you refuse to listen,” you feel the coolness of his blade against your throat.

“If you’re just going to treat me like an animal I should just bite off my own tongue and drown in my own blood,” you spit up angrily at him, knowing full well that there isn’t any other chance for you to escape any more.

“I don’t remember giving you permission do to that. And I also don’t care for people who can’t follow orders.” The moment you hear the voice coming from the opposite end of the clearing, your head clears.

“Kun!” His name rolls from your lips in a moment of relief, forgetting for a moment the blade pressed to your neck.

“I had a feeling you were in trouble but…” His eyes scan the scene, looking at the fallen men. His face falls at the sight of Jisung’s body beside you, expression twisting with grief and regret. Kun’s hand reaches for his sword, pulling it from his scabbard as he looks to Donghyuck with a renewed rage. The wind whispers around the blade as he marches towards the two of you.

“Another human with a death wish,” Donghyuck sighs, the blade at your throat lowering as he watches the commander stride over. “It’s strange to me that you’d want to throw your life away like him… Anyway, let’s get this over with.”

“Throw his life away?” Kun nearly shouts, “How dare you say that he threw his life away!” In a wordless fury, he throws himself at the Demon, with all of his weight he strikes at Donghyuck’s neck.

Donghyuck flicks his sword up to deflect Kun’s with a small grunt, and for a moment the two look evenly matched. The Demon is thrown back, his feet sliding on the ground as he stops himself and glares at Kun.

“What?” The words fall from him without though, as if this were the first time a human opponent had overpowered him. Kun sees this and doesn’t let the opening go to waste, he pushes himself towards the other again, sword hissing through the air with fervent fury.

The two are thrown back once more, Kun catches his breath as a small transformation overcomes Donghyuck. His hair turns stark white, not unlike that of the Hwarang’s Furies, and his eyes turn golden.

“The moment your eyes behold a true Demon is the moment of your death,” Donghyuck’s voice is low as he speaks to Kun. And with those words, the battle changes. The Demon’s sword slices and cuts through the air with ease not found in the moments prior, the only thing Kun can do is anticipate and block the attacks, unable to land any offensive blow of his own.

“What happened to your fire?” Donghyuck quips, landing another series of blows to Kun’s blade.

“Damn it—” Kun grunts out, losing his breath with each block of his blade. All Donghyuck has to do it tire out the commander and their fight would end. One particular blow sends Kun’s sword flying from his grasp, and you instinctively grab your own blade and run towards Donghyuck, not wanting him to strike Kun.

“…Stay out of my way,” Donghyuck pushes you aside and you fear to look in Kun’s direction just as you’d done with Jisung, not wanting to see his body crumple too. He raises his sword and looks to Kun, “This is the end for you. Humans always seem to fight the battles they cannot win. That’s recklessness, not courage.”

As Donghyuck monologues, Kun drags himself to his blade.

“Trying to run?” The Demon asks as the commander clutches his blade’s handle. With the last bit of strength left within him, he rises to his feet to face his foe. “I’ve made a fool of you and yet you refuse to acknowledge the difference between us.”

Kun stays silent at the verbal attack, quietly reaching into his robes for something. A small vial filled with red liquid.

“How long to you mean to take this idiocy?” Donghyuck spits as he spots the pimul.

“Like I give a shit what you say, we were always a pack of idiots.” His voice weakened from the fight, “We shared an idiot’s dream that we were all too stubborn to give up on. We’re halfway up the hill now, stumble now and we’ll have lost all we worked for.”

“Even if you become a Fury, you’ll be nothing more than a faded reflection of a true Demon,” Donghyuck says, hand still holding his blade.

“You never know until you try—” The commander lifts the bottle to his lips and drinks. It only takes a few moments for the serum to take effect, Kun’s hair turning stark white and his eyes turning a deep crimson.

“I’ve had enough of these fucking loyalists and I’m sick of you goddamn Demons,” Kun’s voice is low as he looks towards Donghyuck, a bitter edge to his voice, “So I’m not a real Demon? Why should I care? I was never treated like a real warrior until the Hwarang, never loved like a real son.” Eyes burning with anger as he sighs out, “Hell… Where are you supposed to find good men these days? Everyone’s too invested in their own business to care about anyone else. Try to make a difference and they’ll cut you down, I say bullshit to that!” Kun’s words aren’t only for Donghyuck, but for Jisung, for the counselors who opt against the Hwarang and the loyalists who infringe upon the borders of Silla.

“I believe what I believe, and I will never back down from that.” His head shakes, “Call us fake if it makes you feel better, but if we push hard enough, we’ll become what we say we are.” The predatory grin on Kun’s face is inhuman, “If we beat you, we become real Demons, right?”

The commander strikes forward, lunging at Donghyuck with a speed akin to his. Kun had been beyond skilled as a human, as a Fury, though… The two clash swords once again, neither relenting in their strikes, taking no chance for the other to gain the upper hand.

“Where’s your gloating now?” Kun asks through clenched teeth, clearly realizing that he’s gained the advantage of superior strength. Donghyuck’s sword rebounds from one of Kun’s strikes and he’s forced back, Kun leaps for the opening, aiming for the Demon.

It’s too fast for you to witness, but Kun’s blade grazes Donghyuck’s cheek, a thing trail of blood seeping from the opening before it begins to heal immediately. The Demon jumps back, surprised at the injury as his hand raises to touch the wound.

“You look like a warrior now,” Kun scoffs, “How’s it feel to get cut by a fake?”

Donghyuck doesn’t seem to hear Kun, entranced by the crimson ichor that stains his fingers. “Damn you…” Although the wound had healed, the ramifications of it had not. “Fake, how dare you draw my blood?” It must’ve been the first time he was injured by a human. His preternatural face distorts into rage and disgust. “I will never forgive you for this. I will strip you for everything that you are so that you understand true pain!”

“And the real Donghyuck’s revealed,” Kun shakes his head, almost mocking the other, “I dare you to kill me.”

Their swords once again clash, ringing out into the woods. Donghyuck fights with a newfound angst, veins on Kun’s neck and forehead begin to strain as he defends himself from the Demon’s blows.

“Damn you, damn you, damn you!” With each phrase, another blow from Donghyuck onto Kun’s blade. “How dare you draw my blood?!” He’s gone mad with rage, eyes widened and bloodshot as he stares down Kun.

“I’ll never forgive you,” Kun’s blade chips with each of his own strikes, you fear that it will break under the strength of the two men, “you arrogant son of a bitch! You’re going to hell even if I have to drag you there myself!”

They leap at each other like enraged animals, blows flying so quickly you’re not sure how to tell the ones meant to block or attack apart. It’s clear that the battle would end only when one of them was dead, but it’s rapidly becoming apparent that Kun is fighting in a way that puts him at a disadvantage.

Prior to this, Kun had fought with a calmness, even in the heat of battle. But that had fled with his humanity. You need to stop them before Kun loses himself entirely.

“What’s going on here?” A voice shouts from behind you, followed by the sound of footsteps rapidly approaching. “The commander left to see how things had gone at Hwaseong and we haven’t seen him since. Have you seen him?”

“Minhyung…” His names leaves you tiredly, “He’s fighting Donghyuck.”

The officer stares at you for a moment before looking past you to the fight raging on. His eyes widening in shock, “That white haired Demon is… Is that a Fury? Oh my god,” he says at the realization of who it is.

“He drank the pimul,” you say and watch at Kun is disarmed by Donghyuck, his blade clattering to the ground as the captain lands with a thud on his side.

“I am impressed that you lasted so long,” Donghyuck says as he inches closer to the commander, who moves away from the Demon. “I hope you haven’t forgotten that I don’t intend to simply kill you. You’ll die, eventually, but not before I’ve inflicted all the pain I can imagine onto you.” As the advantage returns to his favor, his calm returns. “I’ll send your head back to your beloved Hwarang when I’m done, they deserve to see you at your best, after all.”

Donghyuck lifts his blade, the steel clean and undamaged. Your eyes close as a horrible, wet sound rings around the clearing. Opening your eyes, blood had splattered across Donghyuck’s yellow robes, but Kun remains unharmed. Minhyung kneels at the feet of the two combatants, a large gash running along his robes, blood beginning to stain the cloth.

“What are you doing, Commander?!” His voice weakened and strained, “Running off to face the enemy alone…?”

“Minhyung what are you…?” The commander’s speech falters as Minhyung gives him a small smile, his eyes shining as you’d seen them do when he and Kun had discussed important secrets.

“You can lose an arm or a leg, but if you lose your head you lose everything.” With that he goes limp, his body falling to the ground as blood begins to pool at his side.

You find yourself rushing to the scene, calling out to the fallen officer. The death of yet another comrade seems to pull Kun from his hysteria, brow contorting in bereavement.

“Minhyung… why…?” His hair slowly begins to shift back to its original color, the white darkening as he blinks back tears.

“Qian?! Minhyung?! Jisung?!” Another voice from the depths of the woods calls out sounding like Yukhei, “Where are you guys?!”

“Damn it,” Donghyuck says, his blade lowering, “There are more of you still…”

A figure in the trees emerging, but not a Hwarang. Xiao Dejun steps forward as if to warn Donghyuck to not strike again. “This will only lead to more unneeded casualties if we stay.”

“Am I supposed to let this fake go free?” Donghyuck nearly spits as he looks to Kun.

“It would be enough to soothe your anger, sure.” A glance towards the commander, “But he’s wanted alive. For now, at least.”

Donghyuck lets out a groan of frustration as he angrily sheathes his sword, understanding that it’s pointless to argue with him. “Qian Kun… I won’t forget your name.” He and Kun glare at each other with such hatred you feel as if they’d strike out yet again. Then Donghyuck spins on his heels and follows after Dejun into the forest.

“There you are—” Yukhei, Yuta and Jaehyun break through the tree line and rush over to you. “What the hell happened here?”

“There’s dead men everywhere,” Jaehyun notes, looking to the bodies, “Did you all run into loyalists? No… those blade marks…”

“Can someone attend to Minhyung?” Kun says, shakily rising to his feet, “He may still be alive.”

“What?!” Yukhei says, spotting the officer’s body on the ground. “Hold on Minhyung,” the captain says as he begins to move to the younger “hang in there for me!”

“What’ll happen to him? Don’t tell me—” Jaehyun begins as he looks over the wounds and then to you. The blade had sunk deep and you hazard a guess as to what’ll become of him.

“Don’t tell me he’s…” Yukhei frowns, glancing to the body he’s trying to prop up.

“Does anyone have any cloth?” You ask, moving to kneel by Minhyung. “We need water and alcohol as well…”

“Here,” Jaehyun shrugs off the white jacket he’d been wearing over his robes and hands it to you.

“There’s a stream nearby, I’ll go and retrieve some water.” Yuta nods.

“I’ll leave Minhyung to you!” Yukhei says and begins to run towards the city, hopefully in search of some gokaju.

“Commander… what happened here?” Yuta questions Kun quietly.

Although the commander doesn’t seem to hear him, muttering to himself, “I never thought that I would sacrifice my own men so that I could survive…”

“Sacrifice?”

Kun looks to one of the bodies on the field, “Jisung’s body is over there… Can you help me bury him?” And frown and the bitten back sting of tears, “His men too… It gets cold this time of year; we can’t leave them out to freeze.” You know that he wants to break down and cry more than anyone else here, easily seen in the way he struggles to grin and joke.

Unable to hold it in any longer, you bury your face into your hands and begin to sob. Jisung had given his life to save yours, Kun had become a Fury to fight the Demon chasing you across Seorabeol, and Minhyung had been mortally wounded trying to protect Kun. How are you to atone for all of this?

The night of the initial attacks, Taeyong leads his Fury Corps in a retaliatory raid. During the night, it would be harder to fight an opponent who could see clearly, and the Furies would capitalize on this. And it did, at first, being more successful in deterring the loyalists than they had planned. But then arrows and blades began to pierce and cut differently, the metal different than that of normal weaponry. With the situation becoming more and more dire, it seemed as if most of the Hwarang allies would succumb to the loyalist and Goguryeo effort.

When dawn breaks, you awake to different news. King Munmu had sent a request to Tang in the weeks prior to the Baekje attacks, asking for aid. And during the night it seems as if the call had been answered, swaths of Tang soldiers encircling the city and pushing back the enemy forces.

Buyeo Pung is captured in this effort, but not killed. Like his father and his elder brother, he is meant to be exiled to Tang, with no chance of ever returning the kingdoms again. This diplomatic decision agreed upon by Gaozong and Munmu sates the Baekje rebellion for now, but their attentions now turn towards a new common threat, the ones that had housed Pung: King Bojang and the rest of Goguryeo.

January 4th, 665 – Shoji Temple, Kingdom of Silla “… What’s the sense in building a place this big?” Jaehyun frowns as the Hwarang enter the temple, lamenting the building’s structure as it isn’t aiding their effort to find help. Him and Yukhei hold up a pallid Minhyung, who’s shallow breathing hadn’t gotten any better during the travel here. “Namekawa said he’d be returning to Seorabeol today,” he mentions, “I plan on finding him and bringing him here.”

“Go ahead,” Kun nods as the pair take Minhyung inside.

Minhyung had been bleeding and groaning in pain as you’d brought him here, with the severity of his wounds you don’t see him lasting much longer. You’re also worried about Kun, now that he’s a Fury, being in the sunlight doesn’t bode well for him.

“Are you feeling alright Commander?” You ask and look to him.

“Surprised to see a Fury in the sunlight?”

“That’s not what I—” you mumble, “I was wondering if anything has changed.”

“Not yet,” he crosses his arms and shakes his head, “Although pretty soon it’ll probably be painful for me to even look at the sun. Might as well enjoy it while I can.”

Even if he’s joking, it makes you feel bad. As if he can tell, he speaks up again, “I’m not sure what self-deprecating tirade you’re conjuring, but the only person who made the decision to drink that stuff was me. I’ve ordered enough men to take that shit so I couldn’t chicken out when it was my turn, could I?” He offers you a smile, “I figured it would happen sooner or later.”

Even if he’s trying to assuage all of your guilt, you can’t take him at his word. He looks somewhat relieved when you look to him.

“Did something good just happen?”

The commander glances back to Shoji and laughs, “Isn’t it obvious? We have big things ahead of us. As long as we remain here, we won’t be able to lose. Maybe I’ll even get revenge on the bastards who tried to burn us alive.” The man you’d watch fight Donghyuck seems to be gone, Kun’s face now looks determined, not driven by a maddening fury.

“Commander! There you are,” Osaki Shotaro barrels in through the front gates of the compound, out of breath and panting.

“What’s wrong?” Kun asks, his brow furrowing.

“We’ve been… We’ve been ordered to Ungjin.” Osaki looks as if he’s about to keel over as he reaches into his robes to procure a document bearing the royal seal.

“Ungjin? The Baekje capital?” Kun asks as he reaches for the parchment, “Are we not meant to stay here and keep the peace while Munmu sends his soldiers off to Goguryeo?”

Shotaro hesitates and you surmise that it’s from reluctance, not confusion. “Munmu’s going as well… to meet with Tang advisors…”

For a moment, Kun stands there stunned. When he speaks, his voice is low, “What do you mean by that? Is he so eager to sell our support?”

“To be honest… I’m not sure. There have been people saying he’s meant to meet with Tang advisors over the next course of action with Goguryeo but—” Shotaro doesn’t look pleased either.

“Damn it,” Kun’s fists clench angrily at his sides, “It was stupid of me to think that the fighting was over. There’s always another bastard out there for us to fight.”

January 31st, 665 – Somewhere near Sangju, Kingdom of Silla With the aid of Tang, Silla becomes somewhat indebted to Gaozong after the threat of Buyeo Pung is quelled. The Tang emperor quickly sets his sights on his long-term enemy, Goguryeo and demands that Silla involve themselves to dimmish their debt. As Silla and its leaders leave for Ungjin to speak with Tang ambassadors, the Hwarang find themselves swept away by the current of a larger, more looming conflict.

During the travel across Silla, you and Namekawa take turns caring for Minhyung as you walk with the caravan of Hwarang.

From the makeshift cot at the campsite for the night, Minhyung calls out to you, his voice hoarse and tired.

“Is something wrong?” You ask, saddling over to his bedside, “Does something hurt?”

“No…” a shake of his head, “I… T-There’s something that I’d like… to tell the commander…” Each breath seeming like a struggle for him, “Can you… call him for me?”

For him to ask for Kun must mean that he knows he’s not got long left, it makes your stomach sink, but you nod your head quickly. “Just wait a moment…” You hurry from the tent and race to Kun’s quickly asking for him to accompany you and returning to the medical tent as soon as possible.

“Minhyung,” your voice soft, “I brought him.”

“Thank you,” the officer’s smile week as Kun walks to the bedside. His face pale, the color drained long ago, it’s heart wrenchingly clear his end draws near. Cold sweat beads at his forehead as he begins to speak quietly, “I-I’m sorry that I won’t be there for you.”

“What are you saying? If you have the energy to apologize, just focus on getting better.” Despite the harsh tone, Kun sounds as if he knows that Minhyung is dying. Yet maybe that’s why he’s still speaking normally to the officer.

“You let me… join you all even though…” Every breath ragged, every syllable sounding as if it’s a needle stabbing him, “I was never a noble, my father’s an acupuncturist… You’re letting me die a warrior all because of the Hwarang…”

“If you force yourself it’ll only hurt more,” Kun’s voice is low as he sits by Minhyung.

The officer looks to you, “Please take care of the Commander from now on… Stay by his side and help the Hwarang rise to their full potential…” Watching this is almost too much for you to bear, you can’t find the words to respond immediately.

“Say something,” Kun urges after a moment of silence.

Tears well in your eyes as you respond, “Just rest, Minhyung…”

After a while, the officer closes his eyes, breaths becoming shallow as they slowly stop, his body becoming limp. Calling his name elicits no response and you realize that he’s gone.

“At least it was peaceful…” Kun says as he looks down to Minhyung, “Almost as if he’s sleeping.”

Your knees hit the ground as the tears stream down your face.

His burial is held the next morning, the captains mourning the loss of their fallen comrade. There isn’t any way to mark his grave, just a shallow pit in the ground that he’d remain in for the rest of time.

“You alright, Taeil?” Kun asks as the chief staggers over, worry tinging in his voice.

“I’m okay…” Taeil frowns as he looks to Minhyung’s body, encased in a shroud, is lowered into the grave. “Lee Minhyung was an integral part of the Hwarang, as well as a member of the Watch. For him to leave us like this… It fills me with unimaginable sorrow. He was selfless beyond belief and I think all of us can learn from that.” The chief speaks out to the captains, you can see tears pricking at his eyes as he speaks but holds them back momentarily. “I’d like to celebrate his life, his work and his ambition… Goodbye, Minhyung. I pray that you watch over us proudly from wherever you are.”

“Damn you Minhyung,” Yukhei sniffles out as several men begin to cover the grave, “How dare you die on me.”

“I’m sure he wanted this less than anyone else…” Jaehyun frowns.

“I know that!” Yukhei bites. Most of the men aren’t displaying their grief for the others to see, but many had tears welling in their eyes. You can assume they allow themselves their own private grief when they’re alone.

That night you cannot find it within yourself to sleep soundly as you mind is focused on Minhyung. You slip from your tent, intent on walking to clear your mind, when you see Kun standing at the edge of the encampment.

“Oh,” he says as you approach, twigs snapping under your footsteps as you near, “It’s you. Is something wrong? You’re up early.”

“I couldn’t sleep…” You sigh, “What about you?”

“…Same.” He offers a small smile as you recall his disposition.

“Ah, right…” With all that’s happened in the past few days, you’re sure that he needs time to process it on his own. His eyes travel up, to watch the stars breaking through the trees, like the ghost of the daylight haunting him from above. From the east, the pale fingers of sunlight begin to break over the horizon.

“I know you’re handling a lot right now…” Kun starts, looking back to you, “But they say it isn’t good for women to be out in the cold for too long, right?”

“I’ll head back inside soon.” You nod, and the conversation ends there. For a moment, you listen to the sounds of nature, of the wind whistling through the trees and the birds beginning to wake from slumber. Even with the minor distractions, you can’t help but think to those that were lost in the skirmishes.

“Until now,” Kun breaks the silence, “I always felt like I was trying to fight an uphill battle by trying to assert myself as a true noble, a true warrior… Never once did I ever think that the path I chose was a wrong one. Jisung, Minhyung… I’m sure everyone else who died felt the same way.” His voice sounds strained as he tries to reason with his thoughts, “That’s just a reason more for us to go on, to live in their honor and fulfill what they would expect from us.”

The commander looks to the eastern sky, to the beams of light trickling to dissolve the black of night. As you watch his determination return, you feel compelled to speak,

“I need to tell you something.” You take a deep breath in, “Jisung wanted me to tell you something before he died. He said he wanted to apologize for not being able to walk alongside you to the end. He didn’t have the words to thank you properly enough for it…” As you speak, you find your voice getting caught in your throat, choking back a cry from escaping your chest.

Kun stays silent and then lets out a short chuckle, “… Dammit Jisung… What’s with the vagary? ‘Thank you’ for giving him a chance?” His voice lowers to an almost whisper, “We should be the ones thanking him.”

Without a word, the two of you watch the sun slowly rise over the horizon, its orange glow bursting into bloom once the tip of the sun breeches the skyline.

“Maybe it’s because I’m a Fury now,” Kun sighs out, “but that damn sun is really stinging my eyes… As soon as we get to Ungjin, we’re going to regroup and avenge Minhyung and Jisung. Everyone that’s wronged us will know us, I swear it.” His face almost gallant in the light of the new dawn, you can’t look away. His resolution to the fallen and resolution to the future is nothing short of inspiring, it gives you something to pull yourself out of the grief of battle.

#neowritingsnet #cznnet #nct angst #nct fluff #kun fluff #kun angst #wayv fluff #wayv angst #kun x reader #i got tired of editing midway through so! i'll go back tomorrow and see what's up

[jungwooisms]

hwarang | q.kun | teaser

pairing: qian kun x reader members: qian kun, li yongqin, lee taeyong, lee minhyung, wong yukhei, na jaemin, jeong jaehyun genre: historical fantasty au, angst warnings: cursing, implied torture, mentions of death/injury word count: ~5k 

thought i’d drop something because i am about 30k into this and this is only a small portion of that lol. this scene/day takes place some time after the events of the prologue so you’ll probably be confused, but! this is to gauge how well it reads. if you have any comments/concerns/thoughts about it, please let me know!

July 7th, 661 - Seorabeol, Kingdom of Silla Na Jaemin and Li Yongqin stand in the great hall as you enter. They don’t say anything as you look from them to Qian Kun standing at the head of the room, an unsettling aura exuding from him as you delve further into the space.

The past few weeks had given you no information on the whereabouts of your father, despite you going on patrol rounds with the different Hwarang captains. You assume the information, or lack of, was the reason for your summoning today by the commander. Although the presence of the other two Hwarang captains makes you feel somewhat more relieved that you wouldn’t have to face the demon commander alone. 

“You asked to see me?” There’s a sour look on Kun’s face as you ask, something clearly eating away at him. 

“It’s about your father,” he begins, and you perk up for a moment. Kun’s frown stays on his face as he looks at you, a sinking feeling in your stomach as you can already tell you won’t like what he says. “I think it’s best we stop searching for him for the time being.”

“Why?” You can hardly stop yourself from blurting out the question. You’d only been able to search for him for what felt like a handful of weeks, if you were to stop now there was a major possibility you could lose any leads you have. 

Kun remains collected, his arms crossing as he speaks again, “We have reports of activity from Baekje loyalists. It would be more than foolish to let you wander the streets in search of your father at a time like this.” 

You recall your encounter a month ago with Kangjoon at the tea shop. He’d been in search of Baekje spies… was the issue really becoming that bad? It was surely one thing to lose one’s homeland, but Silla had been nothing but civil to the former kingdom’s people, or so you’d heard. 

“Then, are you asking me to stay here until things are resolved with the loyalists?” You question with a tilt of your head, unable to hide the disappointment in your voice. 

The commander nods before turning to Jaemin and Yongqin, “That being said, as for now she isn’t to accompany any captain on their rounds.” 

“So that’s why you pulled us in here?” The question more like a musing as it falls from Jaemin. It seems like he too hadn’t known why he was called in and it was now beginning to click. “You know, she’s never caused any issues when we’ve taken her on our rounds… It feels kind of bad now that she can’t tag along.”

“Mhm,” Yongqin nods, “even if something were to happen, as long as she’s not hopping into the fray it should be alright. Besides,” he smirks at you, “it’s not like she could outrun us if she tries to escape.”

“I won’t run,” you protest firmly, knowing that he’s joking. Eyes lingering on Yongqin for a moment before you look back to Kun, “I made a promise when I agreed to stay here. I promised I’d look for my father, I can’t hold myself to that if you won’t let me.”

“Staying with us is putting yourself at risk,” Yongqin shrugs in your periphery, “if you don’t mind that, I don’t mind you joining us.” His gaze travels to Kun, his lips parting, “We’ve had witness reports, I don’t see why we should stop looking when we still have information coming in.”

“You might have a point, Li. But are witness reports a justifiable reason to put her in harm’s way?” The commander rebukes, his hands falling to his sides. “By taking her out with us, we’re placing an unnecessary burden on our shoulders.”

“If I lose the opportunity to search for my father,” fists clenching at your sides, your nails digging into the skin of your palms, “then any future chances of finding him will be nearly impossible.”

Kun looks at you, eyes searching yours, his gaze hardening. You think he’s about to refute you, before he starts speaking again. “You need to follow the orders of every captain you’re on patrol with. No sidetracking them. Am I clear?”

“Yes,” you nod, “of course.” Unsure of how to show your gratitude, you bow towards him. 

“I’m not going to be the one ordering you to join them,” the commander huffs as you rise, “that’s up to your discretion.”

By the way that the commander speaks, it seems as if he doesn’t want you to leave the compound for whatever reason. You’re unsure what’s caused the full shift in his attitude towards you accompanying the men out on patrol, but for now it’s probably your best bet to stay within the compound for the time being, or at least until his mindset changes.

After a few quiet goodbyes, you return to your room. Kun’s words of caution reside in your eardrums, you know they’d plague you should you have chosen to go out with either Jaemin or Yongqin. So, until that beast of guilt renders itself immobile, you’ll hole yourself up in the headquarters. Staying inside doesn’t make you happy, it reminds you of the first few weeks you’d spent here. Alone and outcast in a world of unfamiliar faces. 

Yet, unlike a few months ago, you now had free roam of the buildings and grounds. Now you find yourself exiting your room, heading towards one of the courtyards littered around the headquarters’ interior.  A soft, summer breeze drifts through the almost-gardens as you enter. The sickly sweet smell of the decaying flowers from the spring hitting your nose as the expanse of the space opens up before you. 

You sit in the courtyard for a while, the soft gusts of wind eventually dying down and forcing you to take the heat of the sun in all its glory. A sheen of sweat coats your brow as you look towards the white clouds in the sky that refuse to block out the sun. 

With little to think about in your ponderance, your thoughts shift from the now blistering heat to your father. You hadn’t thought about it much since your arrival, but the Hwarang had heard of him. Had they been patients of his? Or perhaps he was talking of diseases and how to prevent them the best they could…

The more you think on the subject, the more a pinpoint of a headache begins to grow. You know that the Hwarang have enough secrets without the aid of your father, but you’re not doubtful that your father may be the cause of some of them.

“Did they really leave you alone out here?” You jump at the voice behind you, too lost in thought to hear light footsteps approach. Pushing yourself off of the ground, your hands brushing against your knees to rid them of the grit from the dirt below.

“Ah,” spinning on your heels you’re met face-to-face with the Hwarang’s colonel. “Taeyong… is it okay for you to be out here?” Your gaze drops to his bandaged arm, still not yet healed from his wound earlier in the year.

“It’s not like I need to be bedridden,” he chuckles, gently raising his arm as if to show you it had some movement left within it. “There’s nothing wrong with me.” There was a slight bitterness to his words, almost as if he’d taken a bite of an unripe pear and the taste still lingered on his tongue. “Although I suppose my hand is…” 

A sad and twisted smile curls onto his lips as he looks down to his still injured hand. It hadn’t healed, and by now he was probably realizing that it probably never would. You recall the other captain’s concern when the news had arrived of Taeyong’s injury, noting that he’d probably never be able to wield a weapon again. 

“And what are you doing out here?” He questions, the bitterness from his voice gone, “I hadn’t realized you were allowed out of your room.”

Typically, no one batted an eye if you were walking around the compound nowadays. Yet, with the heightened tensions in Seorabeol, you suppose being in your room would put more of the Hwarang at ease. The freedom they’d given you was just as easily revoked.

“I just wanted some space to think, is all.” You explain, your hand playing with the fabric of your robes, “I’m sorry.”

“It’s just that when you sneak around with none of us knowing, it makes it seem like you have something to hide,” Taeyong’s lips curve downwards as he listens to your explanation. 

“Then I’ll go back to my room,” you sigh and begin to walk past him. 

Taeyong’s coldness had begun ever since he’d come back injured. Albeit, you hadn’t known him long enough to gauge his character before that, but there had been a lightness to it that certainly wasn’t here now. The loss of mobility in his arm pained him in more ways than physical, more ways than you could possibly begin to comprehend.

“It’s-” You stop and look back to him, “hot outside today. You shouldn’t stay in the sun too long. Please take care of yourself.” A nervous laugh as you finish, finding him returning something of a lighthearted chuckle. For the first time in weeks, his smile didn’t look forced. 

“Thank you,” he nods, the smile still lingering in his voice, “take care of yourself too.”

You don’t find yourself coming across any of the other captains until later that evening, when the sun’s already sunk halfway down the horizon and a golden glow begins to encapsulate the headquarters. As you’re heading towards the main hall you hear a smattering of footsteps behind you, you turn and see Yukhei heading towards you. 

“What… what’s that for?” You question, looking down at his hands where he’s holding what looks to be an embroidery needed and a thin candle. 

“One of those Baekje guys we picked up isn’t really a talker,” Yukhei explains, gesticulating wildly with his hands as he speaks. “Kun’s with him but doesn’t have the… uh, means to speak with him.” As he sees your eyes widening in realization, he drops his hands behind his back, shielding the objects from vision. “I’ll stop talking and spare you from thinking any more about it.” He lets out a laugh before skirting around you and heading off towards another hallway.

There was even more commotion by the time dinner rolls around. The halls now darkened save for the braziers and candles that lit the entrances and walls. You’re sitting in your room when stomping once again disrupts your thoughts. 

“Jaemin!” You call out, having seen his green robes race by your doorway. Almost as quickly as he had shot past, he returns. “Why’s everyone running around tonight?” You ask as he stands in your doorway, trying to hold himself together with deep breaths. “Did that prisoner say something?”

His eyes light up, his chest puffing out almost proudly, “Yeah, Kun finally got the guy to break! It looks like they’re having a meeting right now, we’re actually getting ready for a raid.”

“Wouldn’t that be something the army typically does?”

“It really depends on the severity…” Jaemin notes, “But since most of the troops are still up in Hanseong, the Crown let us do this.” He goes on to explain that the Hwarang would be dividing themselves into two groups. Taeil would lead a group of a dozen men to Wonweol Inn and Kun would lead twenty-three to Jeolin Inn on opposite ends of the city. “Rumor has it that they’ll be at Jeolin, I’m kind of upset they’re sending me to Wonweol.”

It seems as if Kun’s forces were rearing to see action, Taeil’s more so just to make sure all of their leads were covered. 

“There aren’t enough men to spread out equally?” You ask, wondering why there was such disparity between the numbers.

Jaemin nods, “A lot of men get sick right when we need them the most.” The closeness of bunks typically made for unsanitary conditions, making the spread of disease fairly easy. “We sent out word to the Guard but it doesn’t seem like they care all too much,” he sighs, leaning back on his heels.

Someone shouts out to him before you’re able to wish him luck, he gives you a curt wave before racing back down the hallway. Some time after the able-bodied men had left, Taeyong calls for you to meet him in the main hall.

“As a courtesy, I assume, Kun has asked me to protect the headquarters in his absence,” he relays to you once you’ve settled yourself into the hall. “It’s empty for the most part but that’s a reason they may attack us.”

“Does that mean you’ll protect me?” You question and he laughs almost immediately, his gold plated earrings clatter together as his head shakes slightly. 

“I’m sure I can be of more use than the men who’ve been confined to their beds.” It wasn’t as reassuring as you thought it’d be, but it was at least something. His smile was sad at his words, probably feeling more and more unhelpful as the days progressed.

The silence between the two of you says stagnant until a door to one of the halls opens quietly. 

“Colonel Lee,” a man says as he enters, you recognize him as the face who’d pulled Kun away from you when you were out on patrol several weeks ago, “We’ve confirmed that the loyalists are meeting at Wonweol.”

Taeyong sighs, his voice light but his face holding a certain sternness, “I suppose we’ve bet wrong again.” The Hwarang had been certain that Jeolin would be the place of the meeting, and finding out that Wonweol was actually the location was certainly a blow to their plans.

“Minhyung,” Taeyong looks at the newcomer, “can you do me a favor?”

Minhyung nods curtly, awaiting his instruction. You’d come to learn of him through the others, while not a resident of Shinson Temple, he is both a member of the city watch and an officer of the Hwarang. He’d been made aware of your situation at some point, so you didn’t need to feel as guarded around him as other members of the Hwarang. 

“First, tell Kun that the meeting is at Wonweol, he should still be on his way to Jeolin.” Taeyong begins and then looks to you, “And I’m sorry to put this on you, but I need you to take her with you.”

Minhyung’s eyes widen almost as big as yours as you ask, “Why me? Wouldn’t I only slow him down?”

“Save for Minhyung here, you’re the most able bodied person residing in the headquarters,” Taeyong says, grimacing at his words as the fingers on his injured  hand twitch, “even if you’re a burden you may just as well save someone’s life.”

You bite your lip, seeing that Minhyung was probably thinking the same thoughts that you were. Yet neither of you were in a position to oppose the colonel. 

“There’s a chance that the loyalists have called for backup,” Taeyong looks to Minhyung, “If your message were to be intercepted then you’d never reach Kun in time. Do you see what I’m trying to say?”

Minhyung nods slowly, piecing together the elder’s thoughts, “If we run into enemy forces I could hold them off while she delivers the message…”  

“You want me to what?!” You can’t help but exclaim. It sounded as if the two of you were caught out, Minhyung would sacrifice himself so that you could escape. 

“Don’t worry too much,” Taeyong tries to reassure you, “I doubt it will come to that. We’re short of men right now which means I have to ask you to step in. You’ll need to notify the Guard and the Watch as well.”

“There’s really no one else who can do this?” You ask hesitantly, daunted by what Taeyong was asking you to do. “What about Osaki?”

Osaki Shotaro was another spy in allegiance with the Hwarang, yet he mostly dealt with Yamoto forces.

Taeyong shakes his head, revealing that Osaki was already with Kun’s team heading towards Jeolin.

As if seeing the hesitation on your face, Minhyung steps forward and offers you something of a nervous, sheepish smile. “I heard you know a little bit about protecting yourself,” his eyes glance towards the blade tucked away at your waist, “I unfortunately can’t guarantee your safety, but, if you can manage, you’re welcome to join me.”

Despite the gentle tone he was using, you know he’d kill you the instant you tried to run. This mission took priority over anything and anyone else in his way.

“I’ll go,” you nod, taking in a deep breath. “I can take care of myself, there’s no need to worry about me.”

You can see Taeyong giving you a small smile as Minhyung steps back. More than anything, you know that Taeyong wants to join and fight alongside his men, but it’s impossible. The least you can do is carry out the mission in his stead. 

“Then we accept your request, Colonel.” Minhyung nods and begins to head towards the exit with you following closely behind him. He turns to you as you close the door and the coolness of the night air abruptly meets you, “Run with all you can.”

You take off after him, the slow and itching burn rising from your legs the longer you pursue him. It’s as if the streets were plunged into darkness with how little you could see as you race by, the sound of dirt under foot sliding with every footfall. You’re beginning to see that half a year indoors with little to no vigorous exercise had done something of a toll to your physique, you weren’t as in shape as you’d once been.

If you weren’t paying attention, you may have slammed into Minhyung, who had stopped abruptly after reaching the edge of the street once you’d arrived at one of the city’s main roads.

“No matter what you see or hear, follow this street and don’t look back,” he whispers and the hairs on the back of your neck stand on end.

“Has someone been following us?”

His head shakes, “You don’t need to know that.”

Your breaths heavy, knowing full well that he’d make it faster to Kun than you, “Minhyung you should go, I’ll stay behind.”

He frowns at you, “What could you do by staying behind?”

“If I distract them then you can slip away,” you push, resisting the urge to take a peek at whatever was coming after the two of you.

“If we need bait, then it’s going to be me,” his hand reaches for his sword at his side as he looks past you, “Now, run!”

It takes no time for him to rush behind you and for your legs to kick off from the ground and begin to barrel down the street in front of you. You hear a clatter of blades as you further yourself from the scene, thinking that Minhyung’s already locked in combat before he calls out, “Keep running until you see white!”

Knees weakened with the adrenaline of it all, you run down the street. You’re sure that the only way you’d be able to stop preemptively was to tear tendon from bone. Even in your haste you feel sluggish, as if everything around you were frozen in time. You run for another two minutes before spotting two silhouettes wearing white robes in the distance, as you near you can see the commander with Jeong Jaehyun.

“What are you doing here?!” Kun says angrily as you stop before them, a tinge of surprise coating his words. You could almost cry in relief at seeing the two of them.

It’s then you notice that they’re not wearing the typical blue robes of the Hwarang, they’ve instead traded the vibrant hue for a pale white. Maybe it’s for better visibility, but you’re not too certain. 

With shaking limbs you try and step forward, your knees giving way and you begin to fall towards the ground. Jaehyun reaches out to hold you up before you collapse entirely.  

“Are you alright?” He asks as he helps you back to your feet. “You know if Kun finds out you left the compound without permission he’ll kill you, right?”

Rather than explain yourself, you focus on regulating your breath. At this moment you were far too winded to express why you’d left. After one, two breaths you take a third long inhale and turn to the commander. 

“They’re meeting at Wonweol,” huffing out in short puffs of air, you try to straighten yourself to the best of your ability. Kun’s eyes widen at your words and he turns to Jaehyun.

“I knew they’d be there!” An almost hiss escapes through his clenched teeth as Jaehyun stares back at him.

Yuta, who you hadn’t seen standing off to the side with another group of men, steps forward. “Are you sure?” He questions you, a grave seriousness intertwined with his words. 

“Taeyong lost his arm, not his brain,” Kun says, looking over to Yuta, “if she’s out here looking for us and not hightailing it back to her hometown, then it’s safe to surmise he sent her.”

“It’s impressive that you found us,” Jaehyun mutters, “Seorabeol is a big city, after all.”

“It was Minhyung,” you answer, the burning in your lungs slowly residing. “He told me to find you so he could fight against some of the loyalists.”

“What about the Guard or the Watch, are they on their way?” Kun asks, his hand resting atop the hilt of his sword. When you shake your head, you can almost see him trying to piece together their next move. 

“Nakamoto, Jeong, take the men to Wonweol,” He instructs, a commandeering veneer to his words. “There’s something I need to do.”

The two captains nod and turn back to their men to relay the news and inform them of what their new plans were. Before they begin to move, Yuta looks back to you, “The city’s more dangerous tonight than it’s been on any of our rounds. Either stick with Jeong and I or go with Qian.”

It was a relatively easy choice to make, right? You’d stick with Kun as the other two seemed to be off to battle. The prospect of being alone with the stoic commander was somewhat intimidating, but it would put you away from the bloodshed.

The two of you watch the rest of the group form together and head off into the dimly lit streets towards Wonweol Inn. Kun doesn’t say anything until the ringing out of the warrior’s footsteps dissipates into the humid nighttime. 

“Good work in delivering that message,” there’s appreciation in his voice as he looks to you, something resembling a small smile pulling at his lips, “That information may have just given us the advantage we need.” An approving comment from the Hwarang’s demon commander was something that you’d never thought you’d hear, it makes your heart pound gleefully for a moment out of sheer shock of the scenario. 

Kun and you step from the narrow street and move to one of Seorabeol’s main roads, a nearly deserted place at this time of night.

“Kun?” You ask, feet treading on the grit of the dirt walkways, “Why are we out here?”

“The Hwarang don’t hide in the shadows like these Baekje loyalists,” He says matter-of-factly and looks down the street as if he’s searching for something, or someone. 

It doesn’t take long for a figure to appear running towards the two of you. For a moment you think it’s an enemy and begin to reach for the blade at your hip before recognizing a familiar silhouette. 

“You’re alive!” You gasp out, dropping your hand away from your side as the other approaches. 

Minhyung doesn’t respond to you verbally, only nods his head with a small smile before straightening up and looking at Kun. “I assume you’ve been told of what’s happening at Wonweol? The colonel told me to notify the Guard and the Watch but...”

“I’ll have more orders for you in a bit,” Kun nods in understanding, “Just stay nearby for now.” He then turns to you as Minhyung slips wordlessly into a nearby alley. “I’ve got to have a word with a few useless assholes.” There was a spark of anger in his voice, a fire dimly beginning to glow brighter in his eyes. The commander then looks past you, you turn and see an oncoming group of Silla soldiers making their way down the street. Kun mutters something you can’t make out under his breath as they near.

You now realize why he’d brought you out into the main road, neither of you would have seen the oncoming troops had you been tucked away in a side street. 

The pace of the oncoming soldiers was lazy, almost unconcerned in a way that miffed you. Shouldn’t they be worried about sating a near rebellion from a fallen kingdom? 

“The Hwarang are still fighting at Wonweol… aren’t they?” You ask into the nighttime, a strange fear gripping you as the dwindled numbers of the Hwarang were putting their lives at stake in order to quell this disturbance. Didn’t these men before you have, if not more, responsibility to quash it?  

Perhaps the anger and disbelief in your voice was more present than you though, as Kun lets out a small chortle of laughter, “Don’t worry about it, I’ll make sure they stay in line.” He steps out further into the street, directly in front of the group that was now only several meters in front of him.

All he did was move away from you and face them, but he now holds an aura of authority that hadn’t been there moments prior. 

“The Hwarang are currently conducting an official investigation of Wonweol Inn,” he calls out as they stop before him, his voice echoing around the surrounding buildings. “You will not interfere or enter the Inn.” 

Even you could see the grumblings of protest beginning to stir in the movements of the soldiers when Minhyung appears from the shadows once more and begins to speak quietly to you, “If Kun lets those men walk into Wonweol, they’ll get the credit for subduing the revivalists.” 

“How could they…?” You ask, looking towards Minhyung. “It’s the Hwarang who are risking their lives for this mess.”

“It’s more political than just the Hwarang or the soldiers taking credit,” Minhyung sighs as Kun continues to shout to the men before him. “Kun’s adoptive father’s high ranking in the court’s aristocracy, so are a few of the other captain’s fathers. The Hwarang, in a way, represent them and the soldiers here represent the more military-inclined families. In the end it’s not the question of whether it was the Hwarang or the guard who subdued the loyalists, but which families were behind the winning team, in the Crown’s eyes.”

“That’s…” Convoluted. Confusing. Complex. Insane. Elaborate. “A lot.”

Minhyung must’ve been able to see the perplexion in your gaze as he laughs to himself, “That’s only scratching the surface. But it shows the utter disrespect each side has for one another and I expect it won’t be resolved any time soon.” Both of your gazes travel back to the commander at the front of the guard, “Kun’s single handedly protecting the Hwarang right now. If we allow them to get to the Inn, they’ll lionize themselves.”

You can see that Minhyung thinks highly of Commander Qian in the way he admirably talks of his staunch resolution in doing what’s best for the Hwarang.  

It seems as if Kun’s startling tactic was beginning to wane as a few soldiers began to protest against his declaration.

“If you really think you can fit nearly, what- one hundred men into that building?” Kun’s eyes scan the lines of soldiers for a moment, “If you think you can fit all of them into Wonweol, you’re insane. The best you can do with these numbers is surround it and make sure no one escapes.” He’s trying to dissuade them, you wonder if they can see it as clearly as you. “Unless you really want to lead your men to the slaughter. There’s already a fight happening, and if you value your lives I’d suggest you stay put.”

The head official leading the troops relents, stepping away from Kun as he finds no room for argument against the commander of the Hwarang. Kun stays in front of the troops until a member of the Hwarang finds you all standing there some time later, claiming that the battle has ended.

 Kun, Minhyung and you had returned to the compound as the first wave of Hwarang were returning from the skirmish. The fight had only lasted a matter of two hours, but to you it had felt like much longer. There had been nearly two dozen revivalists congregating at the inn, the Hwarang had ended up killing seven of their members and injuring four more of them.

Minhyung tells you later on in the night that, with the aid of the Guard and Watch, sixteen more people in the city were arrested in relation to the Wonweol incident. The owner of the inn had also been arrested as he was aiding in the escape of several of the loyalists. 

The Hwarang had prevailed, despite having the weaker numbers, in an incredible victory. Yet, with that victory also came some losses. Yongqin had taken a blow to the chest and fell unconscious shortly after, Jaemin had been cut across his forehead and the bleeding hadn’t relented, Yukhei had injured his hand in a brawl, one Hwarang had lost his life and two others were severely injured. It didn’t seem as if the last two would make it the week due to the severity of their injuries. 

With the quelling of the revivalist by Hwarang hands, it seems as if the group were now in a more favorable light with the Crown. As well as with the court members who vied for the organization’s success.

#little editing so sorry if it’s 🤡 bad 🤡 #not tagging this in anything either LOL